Diploma in Mechanical Engineering C18 Curriculum: Sankethika Vidya Bhavan, Masab Tank, Telangana, Hyderabad

DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
C18 CURRICULUM
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

SANKETHIKA VIDYA BHAVAN, MASAB TANK, TELANGANA,
HYDERABAD
1
C-18 - CURRICULUM
FOR DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES IN TELANGANA
I. PREAMBLE
The State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana under the aegis of the
Department of Technical Education, Telangana regularly reviews the Curricula in tune with the
developments both in academic and industry side. However, recognizing the changing needs as stated
by the catchment industries, the Board has decided to bring about the revision of curriculum. Thus,
the Board, with the assistance of senior faculty of the branches concerned, has reviewed C-16/C-16S
Curriculum in force. On finding the merits and shortcomings of C-16/C-16S Curriculum, the faculty
has made a thorough assessment of the curricular changes that have to be brought in. It was felt that
there is an urgent need to improve hands-on experience among the students pursuing diploma
courses. Further, the urgency of enhancing communication skills in English has also been
highlighted in the feedback and suggestions made by the user industries. Keeping these in view, a
number of meetings and deliberations were held at State level, with experts from industry, academia
and senior faculty of the department. The new Curricula for the different diploma courses have been
designed with the active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of
Telangana, besides reviewed by Expert Committee constituted with eminent academicians.
The new C-18 curriculum is designed, duly taking into consideration the Outcome Based
Education model as per NBA norms and Credit system has also been introduced.
This new Curriculum has taken the Telangana State Industrial Policy in the course of
Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship. Skill Upgradation is given importance by allotting
2.5 grade points per semester.
The primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce best technicians in the country
by correlating growing needs of the industries with the academic inputs.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum – 2018 or C-18 is planned and designed by
making 6 months industrial training is mandatory.
Salient Features:
1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.
2
 The Curriculum is Outcome based, Semester Pattern, more practical oriented,
Flexible, Relevant to the industry needs and oriented to develop entrepreneurship
skills in Diploma students.
 A maximum of 20% credits be permitted in specialized electives offered in VI
semester that can be pursued through MOOC like SWAYAM / NPTEL
 To start with a robust curriculum structure is designed
 Course structure contains 5 theory courses and 5 Laboratory courses per semester
 All theory courses will be of Lecture -Tutorial-Practicals (L:T:P) pattern
 In order to ensure continuous evaluation, total course content is divided into 3
parts i.e., Mid Semester- I should be conducted for 20 marks from part I and Mid
Semester- II should be conducted for 20 marks from part II, End Examination
shall be conducted for 40 marks of which 20 marks should be covered from part
III, 20 marks covered from overall course content.
 The sessional marks of 20 are assigned to slip tests, assignments, seminars, quiz
etc.
 The question paper pattern is comprising of short answer questions, Essay
questions, Application based Questions covering the attributes of understanding,
remembering and Application.
 Scoring of the candidate in the examination is reflected in terms of grade points
blending with relative grade point award system.
2. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills that is playing a vital role in the
success of Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and
acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Communication Skills
lab and Life Skills lab are therefore introduced in III Semester and Advanced
Communication Skills lab and Life Skills lab as lab electives from IV Semester for all the
branches.
3. Latest topics relevant to the needs of the industry and global scenario suitable to be taught at
Diploma level are also incorporated in the curriculum.
4. CAD specific to the branch has been given more emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing
drawings using CAD software has been given more importance.
5. Every student is exposed to the computer lab at the 1 styear itself in order to familiarize
3
himself/herself with skills required for keyboard/mouse operation, internet usage and e-
mailing.
6. The number of teaching hours allotted to a particular topic/chapter has been rationalized
keeping in view the past experience.
7. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, more emphasis is given to the practical
content of Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical skills in C-18
Curriculum.
8. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all
the courses is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional
procedure based. While the course content in certain courses felt overloaded is reduced, in
rest of the courses the content has been enhanced as per the need.
9. Curriculum of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the
suggestions received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment
available at the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical
sessions are identified to conform to the field requirements of industry.
10. The course of skill up-gradation in each semester is incorporated in the time table for one
complete day consisting of 7 periods..
11. The student shall be awarded satisfactory through RUBRICS only if he/she puts in at-least
75% attendance in the skill up-gradation course apart from the satisfactory performance in
the activities allotted.
12. The activities suggested for skill up-gradation in the curriculum at the end of each course
will be assessed by the respective course teacher through RUBRICS and duly certified by the
HOS/Principal.
13. The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri Navin Mittal I.A.S., Commissioner
of Technical Education & Chairman, S.B.T.E.T.(TS) for his constant guidance and
valuable inputs in revising, modifying and updating the curriculum.
14. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Sri. U.V.S.N.
Murthy, Secretary and his team of SBTET, Telangana, Dr C. Srinath, Additional Secretary,
SBTET and Sri A. Pullaiah, RJD and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education
and the State Board of Technical Education, Telangana.
15. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Dr.Uma
4
Shanker Sahu of NITTTR, Hyderabad and experts from industry, academia from the
universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the
Polytechnics who are directly and indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.
II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1. ADMISSION PROCEDURES:
1.1 DUR ATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years
duration of Academic Instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on semester-wise pattern.
1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:

Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and regulations laid down in this regard
from time to time.
i) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to appear
for Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by
the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana, Hyderabad.
The candidates satisfying the following requirements only are eligible to appear for the
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for the X class examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Telangana or equivalent examination at
the time of making application to the Common Entrance Test for Polytechnics for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates who apply with pending
results of their qualifying examinations, their selection shall be subject to production of
proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or compartmentally at the
time of counselling for admission.
b) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test
(POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Telangana from time
to time.
c) For admission into the Diploma in Pharmacy Course for which entry qualification is
10+2, candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for
admission into these courses.
5
d) Admission into DHMCT Course shall be based on the Merit in Intermediate for which
admissions are made by DOST conducted by TSCHE.
1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., a
Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each candidate, which is computer
generated so as to facilitate this work and avoid errors in tabulation of results.
1.5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER:
a). The Academic Year for all the Courses usually shall be from June 1 st week of the year of
admission to the 31st March of the succeeding year.

b). The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c). There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration on all working days.
d). The minimum number of Instructional working days for each semester shall be 90 days
excluding examination days/ Public holidays/ orientation programme/ Sports and games
Period. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any reason, special arrangements
shall be made to conduct classes to cover the syllabus.
1.6 ELIGIBILITY OF ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END
EXAMINATION
Note: Student attendance is recorded, twice a day using Aadhar Based Attendance System
with Bio metric Device.
a). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all courses, if he or she
has attended a minimum of 75% of Instructional working days during the Semester.
b). Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10% (65% and above and below
75%) in each semester may be granted on medical grounds.
c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
d). Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to
take their end examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They
6
may seek re-admission for that semester when offered next.
e). A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
1.7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal of the
institutions concerned. 10% of approved intake are eligible for Readmission and preference
will be given to first-cum-first-serve basis, while according permission for re-admission of
the Diploma candidates:-
1. The percentage of attendance to a readmitted candidate is to be calculated from the
first day of beginning of the class work of that year / semester, but not from the
date, a readmitted candidate reports for class work, after given readmission.
No. of working
No. of working
S No. of days required
Year/Semester days required for
No Working days for 65%
75% attendance
attendance
Any Semester
1 (Except for 90 67.5 58.5
Industrial Training
2. The Principals of all Polytechnics shall ensure that the readmission cases should
considered and granted:-
a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

Otherwise such cases should not be considered for readmission for that
Semester/year, and the candidates concerned may be advised to seek readmission in the next
subsequent semester/year.
Before issuing readmission orders, an undertaking letter from the student is to be
obtained, stating that he/she will agree to the rule that the percentage of attendance to him/her
shall be calculated from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year /
semester, as officially announced by DTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has
actually reported to the class work, after readmission is granted, and that he/she will complete
the Diploma in twice the duration of the course from the date of the first admission, otherwise
he/she will forfeit the claim for qualifying for the award of Diploma.
7
2. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:
THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in

respect of specified courses of 2 hours duration, along with 60 marks for continuous
evaluation.
 The Semester End Examination paper shall be set for 40 marks
 PRACTICAL EXAMINATION: Each laboratory course carries 40 marks of 2/3
hours duration and 60 sessional marks for continuous internal evaluation.
2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

I. Assessment: In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is
formulated as
End 40 marks
Examination
Mid Sem 1 20 marks
Mid Sem 2 20 marks
Tutorials 20 marks
/Sessionals
Total marks 100 Marks
 Total course content shall be divided into three parts as Part 1, Part 2, Part 3
 Mid sem 1 Exam should be conducted from Part 1
 Mid sem II Exam should be conducted from Part 2
 End Examination to be conducted for 40 marks of which
 20 Marks should be covered from Part 3
 Remaining 20 marks covered from over all course contents
 The tutorial/sessionals shall consist of following marks division
1. Slip test 1 -- 5 marks
2. Slip test 2 -- 5 Marks
3. Assignments -- 5 Marks
8
4. Seminar/paper presentation/group discussion -- 5 Marks
II. Mid semester Question paper pattern
 Part A shall consist of ‘Remember’ based questions
 Part B shall consist of ‘Understanding’ questions
 Part C shall be of ‘Application’ based Questions
III. Semester End Examination:
 The Regular Examinations and Backlog Examinations shall be conducted separately.

 Backlog examinations should be held before the commencement of Academic Year to
give sufficient time for the student to prepare for Backlog examinations.
IV. Examination Pattern (End Semester Examination):
‘Remember’ based
Part 3 Unit 5&6
questions
Part A
‘Remember’ based
Entire syllabus
questions
Part 3 ‘Understanding’ based
Part B Unit 5&6 questions
‘Understanding’ based
Entire syllabus
questions
Part 3 ‘Application’ based
Unit 5&6 questions
Part C
‘Application’ based
Entire syllabus
questions V.
Award of Grades and Grade points criteria for C-18 Curriculum
1. Marks : In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is

formulated as:
Theory Practical
End Examination 40 marks End Examination 40 marks
Mid Sem-I 20 marks Mid Sem-I 20 marks
Mid Sem-II 20 marks Mid Sem-II 20 marks
Internal 20 marks Internal 20 marks
Total marks 100 Marks Total marks 100 Marks
9
2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:
Absolute Grade Cut off Hybrid Grade Cut off
Grade Relative Grade
Grade Practical &
Point Theory Subjects Cut off
Drawing
Min of
A+ 10 > 90% > 90% Min of Top 1/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
A 9 > 80 to < 90% > 82.5 to < 90% Min of Top 2/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B+ 8 > 70 to < 80% > 75 to < 82.5% Min of Top 3/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B 7 > 60 to < 70% > 67.5 to < 75% Min of Top 4/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C+ 6 > 50 to < 60% > 60 to < 67.5% Min of Top 5/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C 5 > 40 to < 50% > 55 to < 60% Min of Top 6/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
D 4 > 35 to < 40% > 50 to < 55% Min of Top 7/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
E 0 Rest of the Candidates
Based on the minimum of Absolute Grade cut off and Relative Grade cut off, a Hybrid
grade cut off shall be arrived and the appropriate grade shall allotted to the student and based on the
Grade, a Grade point shall be allotted in each subject provided the Candidate passes in the subject.
Pass Criteria for Regular Candidate: The Candidate is declared pass only if he/she
secures above the Hybrid Grade cut off of ‘D’ grade and 35% or above in Theory Examination and
50% or above in Practical and Drawing Examinations, as per the formula below in Sem End
Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks
Grades for backlog subjects : The Candidate shall be awarded ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade based on
‘Pass’ or ‘Fail’ respectively in the Backlog Subjects. The ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade has no Grade point but P
grade will count towards credits earned for awarding Diploma. The Candidate shall get P Grade if
he/she secures 35% or above in Theory Examination and 50% or above in Practical and Drawing
Examinations, as per the formula below in End Sem Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks of Regular exam of that batch
VI. Credits:
10
For theory courses-- 3 Credits
For Laboratory courses- 1.5 Credits
Skill up-gradation 2.5 Credits
Total credits per semester 25 Credits
 CGPA will be calculated for Regular Examinations only and not for backlog
exams.
 Backlog exams will count for credits.
 Skill up gradation course will not count for CGPA but for Credits.
 Minimum credits for obtaining Diploma are 130 out of 150
VII. Electives:
a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Or
Specialized electives related to V semester course contents offered in MOOCs, like
SWAYAM/NPTEL
b) The student has to complete one Project in V Semester
Industrial Training (VI Semester)
Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

(50% of each Polytechnic students undergo Industrial Training in V Semester and
remaining in VI Semester).
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be
awarded in the following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up
minimum 90% attendance of Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
Assessment parameters at Industry

11
Assessment
Assessment
I
Sl No II (Second
Learning Parameter (First
Quarter)
Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20
2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
3 Engineering skills 50 50
Application of knowledge & Problem solving 50

4 skills 50
5 Comprehension and observation 10 10
6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
8 Communication skills 20 20
9 Supervisory skills 50 50
10 General conduct during the period 40 40
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme
Sl Criteria Marks Time
No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300
Total
Semester End Examination
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
12
 The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e.
Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be
averaged
a) Theory Courses: Theory Courses carry 20 marks for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem
II and 20 marks for Tutorials which consists of Slip Test-I 5 Marks, Slip Test-II 5 Marks,
Assignment-5 Marks and Seminar -5Marks. Mid Sem examinations will be conducted on the
dates specified by SBTET. The remaining 40 marks of theory will be conducted as End
Semester Exam.
b) Practicals: Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during each
semester of study for 40 marks in end practical course and internal assessment carries 20
marks for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20 marks for Tutorials. Each student
has to write a record / log book for assessment purpose. In the course of Drawing, which is
also considered as a practical paper, the same rules hold good. Drawing exercises are to be
filed in seriatim.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field etc., during the course of study shall
be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned Lecturer / Senior Lecturer /
Workshop superintendent with the concurrence of concerned HOS as the case maybe.
d) For practical examinations, there shall be two examiners. External examiner shall be
appointed by the Principal in consultation with respective head of the department preferably
choosing a person from an Industry/Academician. At least one External Examiner from
Industry should be appointed for core labs.The Internal examiner shall be the person
concerned with internal assessment as in (c) above. The end examination shall be held
along with all theory papers in respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover all the experiments / exercise
prescribed.
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical courses are to
be maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of D.C.C.P., though the pass mark for typewriting and short hand is 50% in the end
examination, equivalency will be given for the students who got 45% with the
examinations held by SBTET, TS.
13
14
3 RULES OF PROMOTION FOR NEXT LEVEL:
3.1 For Diploma Courses for 1st ,2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5thand 6thSemesters:
1. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first Semester examination provided he / she
puts the required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75%) and pays the examination fee.
However, attendance can be condoned by the Principal on Medical grounds upto 10% (i.e.
attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%) and he/she
has to pay the condonation fee along with examination fee as prescribed by SBTET from
time to time.
2. A candidate shall be promoted to 2ndsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the first semester and pays
the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the first semester examination fee has to
pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 2nd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 2nd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 2nd
semester.
3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of

attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 2nd semester and pays
the examination fee and earned more than 25 credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of
2nd semester). A candidate who could not pay the 2nd semester examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time
to time before commencement of 3rd semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3 rd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) and pays
the examination fee in the 3rd semester and earned 25 credits up the end of 2nd Semester.
4. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required percentage
of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 3rdsemester and
pays the examination fee and earned 25 credits up the end of 2nd Semester. A candidate, who
could not pay the 3rdsemester exam fee but fulfilling all other conditions has to pay the
15
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 4th semester. IVC pass out students admitted into
3rd semester through lateral entry shall be promoted to 4th Semester, if he/she Puts the
required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) and
pays examination in the 3rd semester.
5. A candidate shall be promoted to 5 thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage
of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 4thsemester and pays
the examination fee and earns 75 Credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 4 th semester).
A candidate, who could not pay the 4thsemester examination fee but earned 75 credits has to
pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 5thsemester as the case may be.
6. A candidate shall be promoted to 6 thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage
of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 5thsemester and pays
the examination fee and earned 75 credits upto the end of 4 th Semester. A candidate, who
could not pay the 5thsemester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by
State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement
of 6thsemester as the case may be.
(a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 6th semester (Theory) exam if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 6th semester
ii) Should have appeared for 5th semester examination.
(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6 th (Industrial Training) semester

examination if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

Training)
ii) Should have completed the Industrial Training
iii) Should have submitted Industrial Training assessment report.
(c) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she
will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
16
Promotion rules for C-18
S From To Cumulative
Attendance Remarks
No. Sem Sem Credits
75%
1 I II -
(65% on medical grounds)
Cumulative credits are
2 II III -do- 25
applicable from the
3 III IV -do- 25
A.Y. 2021-22 onwards
4 IV V -do- 75
5 V VI -do- 75
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.
Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)
From To Cumulative
S No. Attendance Remarks
Sem Sem Credits
75% (65% IVC candidates should be
1 III IV on medical - allotted 50 credits during
grounds) admission into 3rd semester
2 IV V -do- 75 From A.Y. 2021-22
3 V VI -do- 75 -do-
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.
4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be paid as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time.
4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued Grade Card without any
payment of fee. However, candidates who lose the original Grade Card have to pay the
prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
for each duplicate Grade Card.
4.3 MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA COURSES:
Maximum period for completion of the course is twice the prescribed duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of
studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the
17
award of Diploma. (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date).
This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years of engineering and non-engineering
courses including candidates seek admission under lateral entry. In respect of Pharmacy
courses the completion period s 4 years as the prescribed duration of the course is 2
years.
4.4 ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfill the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 academic years & not more than 6
academic years.
ii. He / she should have earned 130 credits out of 150 credits.
Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 6 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course &
their seat shall stand cancelled.
4.5 RE-VALUATION / ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY:
4.5.1 a) As per the SBTET notification.
A candidate desirous of applying for Revaluation / issue of Photocopy of valued
answer scripts should submit the application online to the Secretary, State Board of
Technical Education and Training, Telangana., Hyderabad – 500 063 as per the notification
issued for Revaluation /issue of Photo copy of answer Script.
4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:
If any candidate resorts to any Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked
and the Punishment shall be awarded as per rules and regulations framed by SBTET,TS from
time to time.
4.5.3 DISCREPANCIES/PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy regarding results etc., shall be represented to the Board within one month
from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any
manner.
4.6 EQUIVALENCE:
In general there is no equivalency of CGPA and marks percentage:
18
However : 60% is insisted a CGPA of 6.50
55% is insisted a CGPA of 6.00
50% is insisted a CGPA of 5.50
With respect to the intermediate vocational candidates, who are admitted directly into
diploma course at the 3rdsemester (i.e., second year) level, the CGPA over 4 semesters shall
alone be taken into consideration for award of Diploma.
5 ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES :
5.1 ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA:
If the candidate desires for a duplicate certificate of Diploma, he/she may obtain on payment
of prescribed fee, duly following the procedure.
5.2 ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who
intend to pursue Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
5.3 GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any
time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students,
for whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent
authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training
are within the jurisdiction of Hyderabad.
In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the Secretary,
SBTET (TS) is final
19
Diploma in Mechanical
Engineering
I Semester
20
Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Instruction Total
Continuous internal Semester end examination
periods per Periods
Course per Evaluation(CIE) (SEE)
week
semeste Credits
Code
r
Internal Max Min Min marks
Mid Mid Total for passing
L T P Evaluatio
Sem1 Sem 2 Marks including
n CIE
1 18M-101F Basic English 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
2 18M-102F Basic Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

Mathematics
3 18M-103F Basic Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
General
4 18M-104F Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Chemistry
5 18M-105C Basic Workshop 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Technology
6 18M-106P Basic Engineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Drawing
7 18M-107P Basic Computer 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Aided Drafting
8 18M-108P Basic Workshop 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Practice
9 18M-109P Basic Science Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Practice
Computer
10 18M-110P Fundamentals Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Practice
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
Activities: Student Performance is to be assessed through Rubrics

Diploma in Mechanical Engineering
21
Basic English
Course Title : Basic English Course Code : 18M-101F
Semester : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3

45:15:00
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Periods : 60 periods
: Lecture + Tutorial
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will have the ability to:
101.1 communicate effectively, express their likes, dislikes and feelings and make
requests
101.2 listen and reciprocate appropriately
101.3 use a dictionary and acquire vocabulary for social interaction
101.4 speak and write grammaticallycorrect sentences
101.5 analyse and evaluate the written material
101.6 convey ideas in the form of paragraphs and letters
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Need For English
2. Classroom English
3. Expressing Feelings
4. Expressing Likes & Dislikes
5. Making Requests
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods
6. Describing Words
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods
7. How to use a Dictionary

8. Words Often Confused
22
UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods
9. Tenses
10. Basic Sentence Structures
11. Voice
12. Asking Questions
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods
9. The Mighty Mountain and Little Lads of Telangana

10. The Adventures of Toto
11. Tiller turns Engineer - An Innovation
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 12 Periods
16. Paragraph Writing - I

17. Paragraph Writing - II
18. Letter Writing – I
19. Letter Writing – II
Suggested Learning Outcomes:
On completion of the course the students will be able to

 express feelings, likes and dislikes and make requests.
 communicate fluently.
 use dictionary
 use describing words and distinguish between confusing words.
 read, comprehend and answer the questions.
 use appropriate tenses, voices, structures and ask questions.
 write paragraphs and letters.
23
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern

Mid Sem 1 Speaking Part A 4 short answer questions
Listening 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
Suggested Student Activities
 Setting short term goals for learning English

 Identifying the suitable solutions for the skill gap
 Listen to a passage / conversations / dialogues / speeches and answer the questions
 Self introduction
 Talking about routines
 Talking about one’s emotions
 Debates
 Elocution
 Role Plays
 Quiz
 Reading a selected text / news paper for specific purpose
 Reading aloud with proper pronunciation and intonation
 Describing people
 Describing places
24
 Describing events
 Creating Advertisements
 Selling a product with appropriate vocabulary
 Interpreting advertisements
 Writing short messages
 Writing a bio note / paragraph / letter
 How to use translate using Google application
 Using a dictionary
 Vocabulary games
Textbook: English for Polytechnics

(English Textbook for First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Games for Language Learning by Andrew Wright, David Betteridge and Michael Buckby
5. Five Minute Activities by Penny Ur
6. English Dialogues by M. Martin
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English (app)

9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
25
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping POs
1
101.1 2 1 1 - - 2 - 3 3 3 1,2,3,6,8,9,10
101.2 2 2 -- 2 -- 2 -- 3 3 3 1,2,4,6,8,9,10
101.3 2 2 -- -- 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.4 2 2 2 -- 2 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.5 2 2 -- -- 2 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
26
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Remembering (R) 1 Mark
27
Understanding (U) 3 Marks
Legend:
Application (A) 5 Marks
C18M-101F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20
Marks
PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.
1. Rewrite the following as requests.
a. Pass the milk.
b. Give me your cell.
2. Write your feelings in the given situations.
a. Your mother scolded you.
b. Your friends gave you a surprise party.
3. Describe your classroom in a couple of sentences.
4. Fill in the blanks with the suitable describing words.
My friend is ________. She bought a _______ house.
(dirty, clever, rich, fat, intelligent, big)
PART - B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks
5. a.) What are the advantages of learning English?
(Or)
b). Write three situations in which you feel the following emotions.
i. Anger ii. Jealousy iii. Worry
6. a) Identify the describing words in the following sentences.
28
Harry Potter series is very interesting and popular. He is very sensitive and brave. The author
was once poor. But now she has become rich.
(Or)
b) Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words of description given below in brackets.
The Sun was shining brightly. It was a ___ day. The sky was ___. There were no clouds in the sky.
A __ girl came out of her house. She was very ___. Suddenly a ___ cloud loomed over. There was
___ rain.
( large, dark, pretty, young, sunny, clear, heavy. silly)
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
7 a) Mention any five problems you faced in learning English?
(Or)
b) Write any five expressions used by the teacher in the classroom.

8 a). Describe your friend using appropriate describing words.
(Or)
b) Use the following words and write a paragraph on your town.
(spacious, big, beautiful, narrow, clean, dirty, wide, small, tall, polluted)
29
30
C18M-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -II
Marks
PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.

1. Use the following pair of homonyms in your own sentences to bring out the difference in meaning.
a. Watch
b. Watch
2. Write any three basic uses of a dictionary?
a. He always ____ (visit) his parents on Sunday.

b. She ___ (be) late yesterday.
3. Change the voice.

a. Cats chase mice.
b. The wires were cut by him.
4. Change the following into yes / no questions.
a. Satish likes sweets.

b. Desserts are hot.
PART - B 2X3=6
5 a). Write about different kinds of dictionaries.
(Or)
b). Fill in the blanks with the appropriate homophones given below in brackets.
I tell _______ (stories, storeys) to my friends. My hobby is to tell _______ ( tales, tails) with animal
characters in them. _______ (Two, Too) of my friends like to listen to my stories always. I told them
a story about a ______(bear, bare). I bought it for them at a _______ (fair, fare). I became very
_______ (week, weak) as I suffered from fever.
6 a). Frame three ‘wh-’ questions for the following passage.
31
One of the most famous monuments in the world, the Statue of Liberty was presented to the
U.S.A.by the people of France. It took ten years to complete it. It was made of copper with a metal
frame to support it. The sculptor Auguste Bartholdi made it.
(Or)
b). Change the voice.
a. He plays hockey.
b. The novel had been written by him.
c. We will be helped by them.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
7 a). How will you locate a word in a dictionary?
(Or)
b). Write the following pairs of words in your own sentences.
i. Son, Sun
ii. Live, Live
iii. Hair, Hare
iv. Meet, Meat
v. Air, Heir
8 a). Write five sentences about your childhood using past tense.
(Or)
b). Write one sentence each for the given structures.
i. S.V.
ii. S.V.O.
iii. S.V.SC.
iv. S.V.O.OC.
v. S.V.IO.DO.
C18M-101F
32
BASIC ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Total Marks: 40
PART – A 8 X 1 = 08
Instructions: 1. Answer all the questions.
2. Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill the blanks with suitable expressions of feelings:
a) I feel _________ when I get a first class in diploma first semester.
b) The teacher was ________ with me when I was late to class.
2. Use raise and rise in your own sentences.
3. Write at least four supporting sentences for the following topic sentence:
I want to become an engineer.
4. Write one sentence each for the following structures:
a. S V IO DO
b. S V SC
5. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Communication is the process of transmitting ideas from a human communicator to a human
communicates, directly or through a medium. Technical communication, which is concerned
with the transmission of technical information, uses a variety of graphics, such as charts,
diagrams, pictures and tables to illustrate the information presented in a language. Every
illustration communicates facts clearly, concisely, attractively and accurately. A technician
should shape his ideas into language as well as graphics. It must also be possible for a
technician to convert the ideas available in the form of language into graphics and vice versa.
a) What is technical communication concerned with?
b) Why does technical communication use graphics?
6. Read the above paragraph and answer the following questions:
a) How should the technician develop his ability of communication?
b) Suggest a suitable title for the passage.
7. Write any three complimentary closures used in official letters.
8. Write a short paragraph on your long term goal.
PART- B 4 X 3 = 12
33
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Each question carries three marks.
9 a. Write any five expressions used by your teacher in classroom.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
Jalagam Vengal Rao open caste mine is located in Sathupally in Khammam district. When
coal deposits were discovered in Sathupally, it was tested by its owners – Singareni Collieries
Company Limited, to determine the quality. Surveys showed that coal available underneath
Sathupally area would last for about 50 years.
The farmers who had to leave their lands were compensated with lands elsewhere and
some of them were given jobs in mines. Open cast mining started at Sathupally in 2005.
Almost all the work at this mine are done using machines such as bulldozers, motor
graders, shovels, drills, water sprinklers, tipper trucks, dumpers and different trucks which can
carry heavy loads of coal. Shovel and bulldozers are first used to remove top soil or overburden
and rocks. Then a series of benches are made (benches are vertical sections of a mine from
where the coal or overburden is removed). Roads have been laid in the mining area all the way
down to the bottom of the mine, connecting all the benches. Over burden and waste rocks are
removed from sides of benches by blasting. Coal blasted in benches is then lifted using shovels
and dumpers and transported through tipper trucks. Coal is transported to the coal handling plant
and through railway wagons to power plants, cement factories and other industries. Every day,
about 10,000 tonnes of coal is mined and transported from JVR Open Cast Mine.
Questions:
a) Where is Jalagam Vengal Rao Open Cast Mine located?
b) Why were the farmers compensated with land or given jobs in mines?
c) What is a bench in a coal mine?
10 a). Rewrite the following sentences changing the voice.
a) I was helped by her.
b) She cleaned the house.
c) Windows have been painted by Ramesh.
(or)
b) Write a letter to your principal requesting him to issue a duplicate hall ticket.
11 a). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
34
Subhash Chandra Bose was born on 23 January 1897 in Cuttack, Orissa. He studied in
Cuttack and then moved to Presidency College in Calcutta for further studies. He did his B.A. in
Philosophy and went to England to appear for the Civil Services examination Although he did well in
the exam he soon resigned from the services because it meant working against the interests of his
country. .He returned to India and started a newspaper called Swaraj. His mentor Chittaranjan Das
was active and open in his criticism of British rule. Bose followed his footsteps and was arrested and
sent to prison in Mandalay. He joined the Indian National Congress. Later he parted ways with the
Congress. He revived the Indian National Army. He is believed to have coined the slogan Jai Hind.
Questions:
a) What was Chittaranjan Das's attitude towards the British?
b) How did Bose fight against the British?
c) Why did Bose resign from the Civil Services?
(or)
b) Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
What influenced Asuthosh most was the company of the brilliant friends of his father. They
were eminent men in their several walks of life, and they fired the boy’s ambition. He was especially
impressed by Mr. Justice Dwarka Nath Mitter who often visited their house. In his heart he wanted to
emulate him in all ways. Thus at a very early age Asutosh formed the ambition of being a judge of the
Calcutta High Court. He also wanted to be a scholar and win the Premchand Roychand Studentship
which is held to be the most coveted academic distinction in Bengal. It will be seen later how he was
able to realize both his ambitions.
But he had to cut his studies short because he fell seriously ill. The doctors said that he suffered
from palpitation of the heart and advised him to have a complete rest and change. His father sent him
to Muttra for a holiday. The change had a very beneficial effect on him, for Muttra had a fine climate
and beautiful scenery, and Autosh returned fully restored in health and sprits.
Mathematics attracted Asutosh most, and he came to be looked upon as a prodigy in this subject.
One day one of his teachers thought of testing his ability in mathematics and set the class very
difficult problem. All the other students looked blank on reading the problem, but not so Asutosh. He
solved it correctly in a few minutes and showed it to the teacher, who was amazed at the evidence of
his ability. As time went on he developed much originality in solving other mathematical problems.
Questions:
a) What was Asutosh’s ambition?

b) What did he want to win?
35
c) Why did doctors advise him to take rest?
12 a). Write a paragraph using the hints given below.

Library in our polytechnic – a big hall – several tables and chairs – newspapers – journals –
visiting hours – two computers with internet – three cards to each student – 20000 books –
many reference books
(or)
b). Write a letter to your friend describing your first day in your institute.
PART-C 4 X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Each question carries five marks
13 a). List any five problems you face in learning English and suggest solutions.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the question given below it.
In1920, the Congress meeting was held at Nagpur under the leadership of Gandhiji. It was
attended by 15000 delegates and the Congress Constitution was amended and resolutions were
taken to fight for Swaraj by nonviolent methods and undo the injustice done to Punjab and
Turkey.
This movement was called Non-Cooperation Movement. Renunciation of honorary

titles like ‘Sir’ given by British, boycott of legislatures, schools and colleges, courts, tendering
resignation to government jobs nonpayment of taxes to government were the important
programmes of this movement. Gandhi returned his Kaiser-i-Hind title in August, 1920. There
were strikes, hartals and burning of foreign goods all over the country. Many Indians were killed
in firings and many others were jailed.
In Kerala, a rebellion broke out by Mophlah peasants and it was suppressed brutally.
Though Gandhiji warned the people many times not to resort to violent methods, on 5 th February,
1922 in Chauri-Chaura in Uttar Pradesh people resorted to violence. When policemen opened
fire on peaceful demonstrations, the angry people set ablaze the police station and 22 policemen
were killed. Gandhiji stopped the movement because it lost its nonviolent nature. On 10 th
March, 1922 Gandhiji was arrested for six years.
Questions:
a) What resolutions were taken at the Congress meeting held at Nagpur?
b) Why the movement was called Non-Cooperation Movement?
36
c) Why did Gandhiji return his Kaiser-i-Hind title?
d) Why did people set ablaze the police station at Chauri-Chaura?
e) Why did Gandhiji stop the movement?
14 a). Write the basic uses of a dictionary.
(or)
b). Write a letter to the Principal of your institute requesting him to provide you admission into
hostel.
15 a). Read the passage given and answer the questions.
It was way back in 1972 that NASA began developing a space shuttle that could launch like a
rocket but fly and land like an airplane—a unique transportation system for deploying satellites and
payloads into outer space. It was indeed a technological wonder as it was reusable unlike the earlier ,
one shot disposable rockets, which were used to place astronauts and equipment into the Earth's orbit.
Basically , a space shuttle consists of an orbiter that carries astronauts and payload attached to solid
rocket boosters and an external fuel tank.To lift the space shuttle , weighing about 2 million kg, from
the launch pad to its orbit that is about 185 to 643 km above the Earth , the shuttle uses two poweful
solid rocket boosters, which provide a thrust of about 11.7 million N. In addition the SRB's support
the entire weight of the space shuttle orbiter and fuel tank on the launch pad.
Questions:
a) Why is the space shuttle unique?
b) What are the parts of the space shuttle?
c) What are the functions of the solid rocket boosters?
d) What is the space shuttle used for?
e) Find one word in the passage that means throw away after use.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below it.
Another important environmental movement is the Chipko Movement which started in the
early 1970s in the Garhwal Himalayas of Uttarakhand by Sunderlal Bahuguna. Like the tribal people
of Narmada valley, the forests are a critical resource for the subsistence of people in hilly and
mountainous areas. This is both because of their direct provision of food, fuel and fodder and
because of their role in the stabilizing soil and water resources. As these forests were being
increasingly felled for commerce and industry, villagers sought to protect their livelihoods through
37
non-violent resistance. The name of the movement comes from the word ‘chipko’ meaning
‘embrace’: the villagers hugged the trees, saving them by interposing their bodies between them and
the contractors’ axes. Village women were the main force of this movement. It inspired many people
to look closely at the issue of environment sustainability.
Questions:
1. Where was Chipko movement started?
2. Why did the villagers want to protect the trees?
3. How did the villagers protect the trees?
4. What is the synonym of the word, ‘important’?
5. What do you think of this movement?
16 a). Write a letter to your uncle about your plan to visit his place during summer.
(or)
b). Write a paragraph in 150 words about the importance of following traffic rules.
BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
38
Course Title : BASIC ENGINEERING Course Code : 18M-102F
MATHEMATICS
SEMESTER : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15: 00 Credits : 3 Credits
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods : 60
Programme : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites :
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary
school level
Course Outcomes: COs
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:
CO 1 Solve the problems on Logarithms
CO 2 Resolve a given fraction into Partial Fractions
CO 3 Find the Sum, Product of Matrices, Value of the determinant and Inverse of a Matrix .
CO 4 Solve simple problems using concepts of Trigonometric Functions
CO 5 Solve simultaneous Linear Equations using Matrices and Determinants
CO 6 Solve a Triangle and an Inverse Trigonometric Equation.
Course Content:
Algebra
Unit-I Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T: 1.5)

39
1. Logarithms:
Definition of logarithm and its properties, natural and common logarithms; the meaning of e and
exponential function, logarithm as a function and its graphical representation – Solve some simple
problems.
2. Partial Fractions:
Rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolving rational fractions in to their
partial fractions covering the types mentioned below:
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii ) 2
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) 2
iv)
( x  a)( x  b) ( x  a)( x 2  b) 2
Unit – II Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
3. Matrices and Determinants: Definition of matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of
matrices-equality of two matrices, sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
Transpose of a Matrix- Symmetric, Skew symmetric matrices- Minor, cofactor of an element-
Determinant of a square matrix up to 3rd order -Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants.
Singular and non-singular matrices- Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix –related
problems.
Trigonometry:
Unit-III Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
4. Compound angles: Formulae of Sin (A±B), Cos (A±B), Tan (A±B), Cot(A±B), and related
identities with problems - Derive the values of sin150, cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750
etc.-Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.,
5. Multiple and sub multiple angles: Trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A,3A and
submultiples angle A/2 with problems - Derive useful allied formulas like
sin 2 A= ( 1−cos2 2 A ) etc., - Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Unit – IV Duration: 08Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 2.0)
40
6. Properties of triangles: Statements of Sine rule, Cosine rule, Tangent rule and Projection rule
7. Hyperbolic functions: Definitions of hyperbolic functions – Sinh(x), cosh(x) ,tanh(x) etc., -

identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic functions and expression of inverse
hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
8. Complex Numbers: Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex

number, Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form of a complex number.
Algebra & Trigonometry
Unit – V Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T: 3.0)
9. Transformations: Transformation of products into sums or differences and vice versa -

Simple problems - Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of
three or more terms.
10 Inverse trigonometric functions: Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with
their domains and ranges - Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that
given A=sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with
examples - State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like

-1
sin x+cos -1
x = 2 etc - Derive formulae like
x+ y
tan−1 x + tan−1 y=tan−1 ( 1−xy ) w h ere x ≥ 0 , y ≥0 , xy <1 etc., and solve simple
problems.
41
Unit – VI Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
11.Solution of Simultaneous equations using Matrices & Determinants.: System of linear

equations in 3 Variables-Solutions by Cramer’s rule, Matrix inversion method – Examples-
Elementary row operations on Matrices -Gauss-Jordan method to solve a system of equations
in 3 unknowns.
12. Solutions of triangles: Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS) (ii) two sides and an
Included angle (SAS) (iii) one side and two angles are given (SAA) - Simple problems.
References
1. Text Book of Matrices – by Shanti Narayan
2. Plane Trigonometry - by S.L.Loney
3. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI, XII .
4. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (TeluguAcademy)
Suggested E-Learning references
1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html
2. E-books:www.mathebook.net
Suggested Learning Outcomes
Algebra
UNIT – I
1.0 Use Logarithms in engineering calculations

1.1 Define logarithm and list its properties.
1.2 Distinguish natural logarithms and common logarithms.
1.3 Explain the meaning of e and exponential function.
42
1.4 State logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
1.5 Use the logarithms in engineering calculations.
2.0 Resolve Rational Fraction into sum of Partial Fractions in engineering problems
2.1 Define the following fractions of polynomials:
1. Rational
2. Proper and
3. Improper
2.2 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned below into
partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii ) 2
( x  a)( x  b)( x  c) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c )
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) 2
iv )
( x  a)( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b) 2
UNIT – II
3.0 Use Matrices for solving engineering problems

3.1 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
3.2 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3 rd order square matrices).
3.3 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
3.4 Illustrate the properties of these operations such as associative, distributive, commutative
properties with examples and counter examples.
3.5 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties.
3.6 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices.
3.7 Resolve a square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices with
examples in all cases.
3.8 Define minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix with examples.
3.9 Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace expansion formula.
3.10 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices.
3.11 Apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
3.12 Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse.
3.13 Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
43
Trigonometry:
UNIT – III
4.0 Solve simple problems on Compound Angles

4.1 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B) and
cot(A±B)
4.2 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin15 0, cos150 , sin750 ,
cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
4.3 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2B etc.,
4.4 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
5.0 Solve problems using the formulae for Multiple and Sub- Multiple Angles
5.1 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles A/2 in terms of
angle A of trigonometric functions.
5.2 Derive useful allied formulas like sin A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.,
5.3 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
UNIT – IV
6.0 Appreciate Properties of triangles

6.1 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
7.0 Represent the Hyperbolic Functions in terms of logarithm functions
7.1 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
7.2 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
8.0 Represent Complex numbers in various forms
8.1 Define complex number, its modulus, and conjugate and list their properties.
8.2 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
8.3 Define amplitude of a complex number
8.4 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form – illustrate with examples.
UNIT – V
9.0 Apply Transformations for solving the problems in Trigonometry

9.1 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios in to a
product and vice versa- examples on these formulae.

44
9.2 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three or
more terms.
10.0 Use Inverse Trigonometric Functions for solving engineering problems
10.1 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an appropriate
domain and range.
10.2 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
10.3 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A= sin -1x, express
angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples.
10.4 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like sin -

1
x+cos-1 x = 2 etc.
10.5 Derive formulae like

tan
1
x  tan
1
y  tan
1
 
x y
1  xy
, where x  0, y  0, xy  1
etc.,
and solve simple problems.
UNIT – VI
11.0 Apply Matrices and Determinants in solving system of Linear Equations
11.1 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule.

11.2 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by matrix inversion method
11.3 State elementary row operations.
11.4 Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by Gauss- Jordan method
12.0 Apply Properties of Triangles to solve a triangle.

12.1 Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS), (ii) two sides and an included angle(SAS),
(iii) one side and two angles are given(SAA).
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
45
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO PO2 PO PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO PO9 PO10 Mappe

1 3 8 d POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,
7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,
7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,
7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,
7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,
7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,
7,10
MID SEM-I EXAM

S. Remark
Unit Name R U A
No s
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
S. Remark
Unit Name R U A
No s
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
46
Remark
Questions to be set for SEE
s
Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Remembering
1 Mark
(R)
Legend: Understanding
3 Marks
(U)
47
C18M-102F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max.

Marks: 20
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 =

04
2 Each question carries ONE mark
1. Find the value of

log8 2
2. Define Proper fraction and give an example.
[ 1 2¿]¿¿¿
3. If A= ¿ Compute 3A+ 5B.
4. Find the value of |13 24| .
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06
2. Each question carries THREE marks
x
5(a) Resolve: in to partial fractions
( x−1 ) ( x−2)
Or
+ 3log 8 32
5(b) Find the value of log 2 16
48
2 1 2
6 (a) If
( )
1 4 1 , then Compute A2 +2 A−3 I , where I is a unit matrix of order 3 .
1 3 2
Or
1 0 0
6 (b) Find x , if
| 2 3 4 =48
5 −6 x |
PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any two questions 02 X 05 = 10
2. Each question carries FIVE marks
9
Resolve into Partial fractions: ( x  1)( x  2)
2
7 a).
Or
75 5 32
7b) . Prove that log −2 log +log =log 2
60 9 243
1 1 2 2
8 a). If A=
3 [ ] −1
2 1 −2 , t h en s h ow t h at A = A
−2 2 −1
T
Or
b +c a a
8 b). Show that
| b
c
c +a
c a+ b |
b =4 abc .
@@@
49
50
C18M-102F

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER
Marks: 20
PART-A

04
1. Write the formulae for Sin (A - B) and Cos (A – B)
2. If Tan A = 2, Find the value of Cos2A.
3. Write the formula for Cosine rule.
2
4. Find the Modulus of 3  2i
PART-B
cos 12+sin 12
5 a) Show that = Tan570
cos 12−sin 12
Or
√3
5 b) Prove that Cos200 Cos300 Cos400 Cos800 = 16 .
6 a) Write any 3 formulae from Hyperbolic functions.
Or
1
6 b) Find the modulus of z=
2+4 i
51
PART C
1 1 π
7a). If TanA= ∧TanB= t h en s h ow t h at A+ B=
2 3 4
Or
7 b) If A+ B=1350 ,t h en prove t h at ( 1+ CotA ) ( 1+CotB )=2
8 a) Find the additive and multiplicative Inverse of 4 + 3i
Or
1+i
8 b) Express the complex number in Exponential form
1−i
@@@
52
53
C18M-102F
MODEL PAPER
I SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 hours [Total Marks:
40]
PART-A
08
1. Define proper fraction.

2. Write the formula for cos ( A+ B ) ∧cot ( A + B ) .
3. Define solution of a triangle.
4. Find the value of log 4 16.
5. Convert cos 4 A+cos 6 A into product.
−1 3
6. Ifsin =A then find cotA.
5
7. List the elements of a triangle ABC.
8. What is the formula for the solution of triangle ABC when three sides are given
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 =
12
1
9 (a) Resolve: into partial fractions.
( x+1 ) ( x+ 3 )
Or
sin 8 A+sin 6 A
9(b). Prove that =tan 7 A
cos 8 A+cos 6 A
9
10(a). Express in the form of a+ib .
4+ 3i
Or
10(b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=2, A=300 , C=300 .
54
11(a) Prove thatsin 500−sin70 0+ sin10 0=0 .
Or
−1 2 1 17
11(b) Prove that tan +tan −1 =tan−1 .
7 5 33
12(a) Solve [ 32 −32 ] [ xy ]=[ 47 ] .

Or
12 (b) Find the angle C in any triangle ABC if b=√ 2 ,c =√3 , B=450 .
PART C
20
1 2 2
13(a) Find the inverse of the matrix 2 1 2
2 2 1 [ ]
Or
13 (b) Prove that sinA +sin ( 1200 + A ) −sin ( 1200− A )=0
0 0 0 0 1
14 (a) Prove that cos 20 cos 40 cos 60 cos 80 = .
16
Or
14 (b) Solve x + y + z=6 , x+ 2 y +3 z=14 , x +4 y+ 9 z=3 by using Gauss Jordan methods.
15(a) In any triangle ABC prove that sin 2 A +sin 2 B+sin 2 C=4 sinAsinBsinC .
Or
15(b) if tan−1 x + tan−1 y+ tan −1 z=π then prove that x + y + z=xyz .
16(a) Solve x +2 y −z=−3 , 3 x+ y + z=4 , x− y +2 z=6 by Cramer’s Rule.
Or
55
16 (b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=1 b=2 c= √ 2.
@@@
56
Basic Physics
Course Title Basic Physics Course Code 18M-103F
Semester I Course Group Foundation
Teaching Scheme in 45:15:00 Credits 3

Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture +Tutorial Total Contact 60

Periods
CIE 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks
Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the role
of Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course Outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching

Periods
Write the correct units and dimensions of physical

CO 1 PO1,PO2 10
quantities and know the concept of friction
Apply knowledge of vectors as a tool to solve engineering

CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply knowledge of mechanics to solve engineering

CO 3 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply knowledge of properties of matter to understand

CO 4 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
Apply Heat and thermodynamic processes to solve

CO 5 PO1, PO2 10
Apply conservation laws to engineering problems and PO1, PO2,

CO 6 10
utilization of energy sources PO3,PO6
BASIC PHYSICS
Course Contents
57
1. UNIT – 1 UNITS, DIMENSIONS AND FRICTION
Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Physical quantity - Fundamental and derived quantities – Unit –definitions - S.I units -
Advantages of S.I. units - Dimensions and dimensional formula - definitions-units and
dimensional formula for physical quantities - Principle of homogeneity - Applications of
dimensional analysis–Friction – causes - types of friction - Normal reaction - Laws of static
friction - coefficients of friction - expression-rough horizontal surface - expressions for
Acceleration, Displacement, Time taken to come to rest and Work done - Advantages and
disadvantages of friction - Methods to reduce friction – Problems on friction only.
2. UNIT – 2 ELEMENTS OF VECTORS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T:

2.5)
Scalar and vector quantities – definitions and examples –Graphical representation of a vector -
Classification of vectors (Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector, Collinear
vector and Position vector) Resolution of a vector - Triangle law of vector addition –
Parallelogram law of vectors – statement- expression for magnitude and direction of resultant
vector –derivation- illustrations (working of sling and flying bird) - Representation of a
vector in unit vectors i, j and k– Scalar product of vectors-definition- application to work
done by force – properties of scalar product - Vector product of vectors –definition – Right
hand thumb rule and right hand screw rule - application to moment of force - properties of
vector product - area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of vector product - related
problems
3. UNIT – 3 MECHANICS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Projectile motion – definition - examples - Horizontal projection – Time of flight and

Horizontal range – derivations - Oblique projection – Expression for path of a projectile in
oblique projection - derivation– Maximum height, Time of ascent, Time of descent, Time of
flight, Horizontal range and maximum horizontal range - derivations – Circular motion,
angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions–Definitions– Relation between
linear velocity and angular velocity - derivation–centripetal force – centrifugal force –
definitions and expressions only- application (banking of curved path) - angle of banking-
expression only - related problems
58
4. UNIT – 4 PROPERTIES OF MATTER Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Elasticity and plasticity- definitions – examples - Stress and Strain – definitions and
expressions - elastic limit - Hooke’s law – statement - modulus of elasticity - Young’s
modulus – Derivation – Cohesive and adhesive forces - Surface tension - Illustrations -
Capillarity –angle of contact – definition- examples for capillarity- Formula for Surface
tension based on capillarity (no derivation) – Viscosity - Illustrations of viscosity - Newton’s
formula for viscous force – derivation - Coefficient of viscosity - Poiseuille’s equation -
Effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases– streamlines - laminar flow - turbulent
flow - Reynold’s number - equation of continuity – statement - related problems.
5. UNIT – 5 HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

Heat – expansion of gases - Boyle’s law –concept of absolute zero - Absolute scale of
temperature – Charles’ laws - Ideal gas equation – derivation - value of universal gas constant
‘R’ –Isothermal and Adiabatic processes - Differences between isothermal and adiabatic
processes - Internal energy and external work done – Expression for work done – derivation –
first law of thermodynamics –application of first law to isothermal and adiabatic processes -
second law of thermodynamics – specific heat of a gas – molar specific heat of a gas –
definitions – derive relation between CP and Cv - related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 CONSERVATION LAWS AND ENERGY SOURCES
Work and Energy - Potential Energy and kinetic energy–examples – expressions for PE and KE
- derivations - Work-Energy theorem – derivation – Law of conservation of energy –
examples - Law of conservation of energy in the case of freely falling body – proof –
Illustration of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum– Non renewable and
renewable energy sources – definition and applications (solar cooker, wind mill and biogas) –
Green house effect - related problems
References:
59
1. Engineering. Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
2. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
3. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
4. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
Suggested learning outcomes:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1. know the concepts of units, dimensions and friction
1.1 Define Physical quantity, fundamental quantity and derived physical quantities
1.2 Define Unit.
1.3 S.I. Units. List the advantages of S.I. units.
1.4 Define dimensions and dimensional formula.
1.5 Write dimensional formulae of physical quantities.
1.6 State principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
1.7 State applications of dimensional analysis.
1.8 Define friction and state its causes.
1.9 State types of friction.
1.10 Explain normal reaction.
1.11 State laws of static friction.
1.12 Define coefficients of friction.
1.13 Derive expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
1.14 Derive expressions for displacement and time taken to come to rest and work done in the
case of a body moving on a rough horizontal surface.
1.15 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
1.16 Solve related numerical problems on friction only.
1.17 Explain the Methods to reduce friction.
2. know the concepts of Elements of Vectors
2.1 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples.

2.2 Represent a vector graphically.
2.3 Classify types of vectors – Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector,
60
Collinear vectors and Position vector.
2.4 Resolve a vector – Vector and Scalar components and relation between them.
2.5 State and explain Triangle law of vector addition.
2.6 State Parallelogram law of vectors – derive expressions for magnitude and direction of
resultant vector.
2.7 Illustrations of parallelogram law – working of sling and flying bird.
2.8 Representation of a vector in terms of unit vectors (i, j ,k)
2.9 Define Scalar product of vectors.
2.10 Application of scalar product for work done by force.
2.11 List the properties of scalar product.
2.12 Define Vector product of vectors.
2.13 Explain Right hand screw rule and right hand thumb rule.
2.14 Apply vector product in the case of moment of force.
2.15 Expressions for area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of cross product.
2.16 List the properties of vector product.
2.17 Solve related problems.
3. know the concepts of Mechanics
3.1 Define Projectile motion with examples.

3.2 Define Horizontal projection – Derive expressions for (a) Time of flight and (b)
Horizontal range
3.3 Define Oblique projection- Derive expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
3.4 Derive expressions for (a) Maximum height (b) Time of ascent (c) Time of descent
(d) Time of flight (e) Horizontal range and (f) maximum horizontal range in oblique
projection.
3.5 Define circular motion.
3.6 Define angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions in circular motion.
3.7 Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
3.8 Define centripetal and centrifugal forces. Write their expressions.
3.9 Define angle of banking.
3.10 Explain banking of curved path and write the expression for angle of banking.
3.11 Solve related numerical problems.
4. know the concepts of Properties of matter
61
4.1 Define the terms Elasticity and Plasticity with examples.
4.2 Define Stress and Strain and write their expressions.
4.3 Define elastic limit and state Hooke’s law.
4.4 Define modulus of elasticity.
4.5 Define Young’s modulus.
4.6 Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
4.7 Define cohesive force and adhesive force.
4.8 Define Surface tension. Give illustrations of Surface tension.
4.9 Define capillarity and angle of contact.
4.10 List the examples for capillarity.
4.11 Write the formula for Surface tension based on capillarity (T = ½ hdgr). Explain the terms.
4.12 Define Viscosity. Give illustrations of viscosity.
4.13 Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
4.14 Define coefficient of viscosity.
4.15 Write Poiseuille’s equation for coefficient of viscosity.
4.16 Discuss effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
4.17 Define streamline flow and turbulent flow.
4.18 Define Reynold’s number.
4.19 State equation of continuity and explain the terms with diagram.
4.20 Solve related problems.
5. know the concepts of Heat and Thermodynamics
5.1 Explain expansion of gases.

5.2 State and explain Boyle’s law. Mention its limitations.
5.3 Explain concept of absolute zero using the relations P t=P0(1+t/273) and Vt= V0(1+ t/273)
5.4 Define Absolute scale of temperature.
5.5 State Charles’ laws in terms of absolute temperature.
5.6 Define Ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation.
5.7 Calculate the value of Universal gas constant (R).
5.8 State gas equation in terms of density.
5.9 Define Isothermal and Adiabatic processes.
5.10 Distinguish between isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.11 Explain the terms internal energy and external work done.
5.12 Derive the expression for work done by the gas [W=P(V 2-V1)].
62
5.13 State first law of thermodynamics.
5.14 Application of first law of thermodynamics to isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.15 State second law of thermodynamics.
5.16 Define specific heat of a gas.
5.17 Define molar specific heat of a gas.
5.18 Derive the relation between CP, Cv and R.
5.19 Solve related problems
6. know the concepts of conservation laws and energy sources
6.1 Define work and energy.

6.2 Define potential energy and kinetic energy with examples.
6.3 Derive the expressions for Potential energy and Kinetic energy.
6.4 State and prove Work-Energy theorem.
6.5 State law of conservation of energy with example.
6.6 Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
6.7 Illustrate law of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum.
6.8 Define non renewable and renewable energy sources. Give examples.
6.9 Explain solar cooker, wind mill and biogas.
6.10 Explain briefly Green house effect.
63
MID SEM –I EXAM
S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.N
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
64
Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks
C-18 M-103F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – I
FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)
Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page
1. Define unit.
2. State principle of homogeneity.
3. Define vector quantity.
4. Define position vector.
PART- B (2 x 3 =
6M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page
5 (a). State three laws of static friction.

(OR)
(b). State three applications of dimensional analysis.
6 (a). State and explain triangle law of vector addition.
(OR)
(b). State any three properties of scalar product of two vectors.
PART-C (2×5=10M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks

The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages
7 (a). Derive the expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
(OR)
65
(b). Explain any five methods of reducing friction.
8 (a). Derive the expression for magnitude of resultant of two vectors using parallelogram
law of vectors.
(OR)
(b). Find the area of parallelogram formed by two vectors
^ ^j+5 k^ ∧⃗
A=2 i+3
⃗ ^
B =2 i−3 ^j+ k^ has two adjacent sides.
C-18 M-103F

MIDSEM – II
BASIC PHYSICS
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Define projectile.
2. Define centripetal force.
3. Define stress.
4. Write the formula for surface tension based on capillarity.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). A body is projected into air with velocity of 20 ms-1 at an angle 300 with the earth
surface. Find the maximum height reached.
(OR)
(b). Explain banking of curved path.
6 (a). Distinguish between Cohesive force and Adhesive force.

(OR)
(b). Discuss the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

66
7 (a). Derive the expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
(OR)
(b). Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
8 (a). Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
(OR)
(b). Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
C18 – M 103F

MODEL PAPER
BASIC PHYSICS
Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=8

2. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Write dimensional formula of Pressure.

2. Define modulus of elasticity.
3. Define non renewable energy source.
4. Define absolute zero.
5. State Charles’ constant pressure law.
6. Define molar specific heat of a gas.
7. Define Energy.
8. What is basic principle of wind mill?
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). State any three laws of friction.

(or)
9(b). State first law of thermodynamics and write mathematical expression for it.
10(a). Distinguish between streamline and turbulent flow.

(or)
10(b). Derive an expression for Potential energy.
11(a). Derive formula for work done by the ideal gas.

(or)
11(b). Calculate the value of universal gas constant ( R ).
12(a). Prove work-energy theorem.

(or)
67
12(b). Explain briefly Green house effect.
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors.
(or)
13(b). Show that Cp - Cv = R.
14(a). Show that the path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique projection.
(or)
14(b). Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
15(a). Derive Ideal gas equation PV=RT

(or)
15(b). Distinguish between Isothermal and adiabatic processes.
16(a). Derive an expression for kinetic energy.

(or)
16(b). Explain solar cooker with neat diagram
** *** ***
68
General Engineering Chemistry
Course Title General Engineering Course Code 18M-104F

Chemistry
Semester I Course Group Foundation

Periods (L:T:P)

Periods
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.

Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome: On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

periods
CO1 Explain Bohr’s atomic model, the R/U/A 1,2,9 12

different types of chemical bonding in
certain molecules and concept of
oxidation, reduction and oxidation
number
CO2 Understand and explain mole, molarity R/U/A 1,2,9 8

and normality and solve the problems
and colloids and their applications.
CO3 Explain the different theories of acids R/U/A 1,2,3,9 12
69
and bases, concept of pH, buffer
solutions and buffer action.
CO4 Compare the renewable and non R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7,9,10 8

renewable energy sources, to take
measures to protect the biodiversity
and also the environment.
CO5 Distinguish the temporary and R/U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10

permanent hardness, apply the
different methods of softening of hard
water and desalination.
CO6 Explain electrolysis and applications of R/U/A 12,3, 4. 10

electrolysis, Solve the problems on
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
Total Periods 60
Cognitive levels: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I: Fundamentals of Chemistry 12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)
Atomic Structure: Introduction – Atomic number – Mass number- Bohr's Atomic theory - Aufbau
principle - Hund's rule - Pauli's exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic
configuration of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – Electronic theory of valency - Types of chemical bonds - Ionic,
covalent and co-ordinate covalent bond with examples - Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds
Oxidation-Reduction: Electronic Concepts of Oxidation-Reduction, Oxidation Number- calculations.
UNIT-II: Solutions and Colloids 8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)

Introduction-Classification of solutions based on physical state- Molecular weights ,Equivalent
weights- Expression of concentration – Mole concept, Molarity, Normality, Numerical problems on
Mole, molarity and normality - Colloids- Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic- Industrial
applications of colloids.
UNIT-III: Acids and Bases 12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)
70
Introduction - theories of acids and bases and limitations - Arrhenius theory-Bronsted -Lowry theory -
Lewis acid base theory - Ionic product of water - pH and related numerical problems - Buffer
solutions- buffer action - applications of buffer solution.
UNIT-IV: Environmental Studies-I 8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)

Introduction - environment -scope and importance of environmental studies- important terms -
renewable and non renewable energy sources - Concept of ecosystem, producers, consumers and
decomposers - Biodiversity, definition and threats to Biodiversity- Forest resources- Over
exploitation-Deforestation.
UNIT-V: Water Technology 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)

Introduction -soft and hard water - causes of hardness – types of hardness -disadvantages of hard
water - degree of hardness (ppm) - softening methods - permutit process - ion exchange
process - drinking water - municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose - Osmosis, Reverse
Osmosis - advantages of Reverse osmosis – Desalination by Electro -dialysis – Defluoridation –
Nalgonda technique.
UNIT-VI: Electrochemistry: 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)

Conductors, insulators, electrolytes –Types of electrolytes - Arrhenius theory of electrolytic
dissociation - electrolysis –electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl – applications of electrolysis
- Faraday's laws of electrolysis- numerical problems.
Reference Books:
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company.

2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
Specific Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to

UNIT- I: FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY
71
1.1 Explain the concept of atomic number and mass number
1.2 State the postulates of Bohr's atomic theory and its limitations
1.3 Explain 1.Aufbau's principle, 2.Hund's rule and 3.Pauli's exclusion principle with examples.
1.4 Define Orbital.
1.5 Draw the shapes of s, p and d Orbitals.
1.6 Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital
1.7 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.8 Define chemical bond.
1.9 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.10 Define and explain three types of Chemical bonding viz., Ionic, Covalent, Coordinate
Covalent bond with examples.
1.11 Explain bond formation in NaCl and MgO.
1.12 List the Properties of Ionic compounds.
1.13 Explain covalent bond formation in Hydrogen molecule, Oxygen molecule, and Nitrogen
Molecules using Lewis dot method.
1.14 List the Properties of Covalent compounds.
1.15 Distinguish between ionic compounds and covalent compounds.
1.16 Electronic concept of Oxidation and Reduction.
1.17 Define Oxidation Number
1.18 Calculate the Oxidation Number.
UNIT-II: SOLUTIONS AND COLLOIDS

2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state.
2.3 Calculate Molecular weight and equivalent weights of acids, bases and salts.
2.4 Define mole.
2.5 Explain Mole concept with examples.
2.6 Define Molarity and Normality.
2.7 Solve Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality.
2.8 Define Colloids.
2.9 Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic.
2.10 Industrial applications of colloids.
UNIT-III: ACIDS AND BASES

72
3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases.
3.2 State the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.3 Explain Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.4 State the limitations of Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.5 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.6 State the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.7 Explain the Ionic product of water.
3.8 Define pH and explain Sorenson scale.
3.9 Solve the Numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
3.10 Define buffer solutions and give examples of acidic and basic buffers.
3.11 State the applications of buffer solutions.
3.12 Explain the buffer action of acidic and basic buffers.
UNIT-IV: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I

4.1 Define the term environment
4.2 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
4.3 Define and understand the following terms
1) Lithosphere, 2) Hydrosphere, 3) Atmosphere, 4) Biosphere, 5) Pollutant, 6) Contaminant
7) Pollution, 8) receptor, 9) sink, 10) particulates, 11) Dissolved oxygen (DO),
12) Threshold limit value (TLV),13).BOD and 14).COD
4.4 Explain the growing energy needs.
4.5 Explain renewable (non-conventional) and non renewable (conventional) energy sources
with examples.
4.6 Define an Ecosystem. Understand biotic and abiotic components of ecosystem.
4.7 Define and explain the terms:
1) Producers, 2) Consumers and 3) Decomposers with examples.
4.8 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity.
4.9 Explain the uses of forests and over exploitation of forest resources and deforestation.
UNIT V: WATER TECHNOLOGY

5.1 State the various Sources of water.
5.2 Define the terms soft water and hard water with examples
5.3 Define hardness of water.
5.4 Explain temporary and permanent hardness of water.
73
5.5 List the usual chemical compounds causing hardness (with Formulae)
5.6 Disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.7 Define Degree of hardness, units of hardness in ppm (mg/L) and numerical problems related
to hardness.
5.8 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Permutit process b).Ion-Exchange
process.
5.9 Essential qualities of drinking water.
5.10 Explain municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose.
5.11 Define Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis (RO).
5.12 List the applications and advantages of RO.
5.13 Desalination of sea water by Electro dialysis.
5.14 Defluoridation - Nalgonda Technique.
UNIT VI: ELECTROCHEMISTRY

6.1 Define the terms1. Conductor, 2. Insulator, 3.Electrolyte and 4.Non - electrolyte
6.2 Types of electrolytes - strong and weak electrolytes with examples.
6.3 Distinguish between metallic conductors and Electrolytic conductors.
6.4 Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
6.5 Explain electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl
6.6 Applications of Electrolysis- Electroplating-Electrolytic refining of metal (Copper)
6.7 Explain Faraday's laws of electrolysis
6.8 Define chemical equivalent, electrochemical equivalent.
6.9 Relationship between chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent
6.10 Solve the Numerical problems based on Faraday's laws of electrolysis
Suggested Student Activities or Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be

conducted
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
74
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
E - learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
75
Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
76
77
18M-104F
Model Question Papers
I SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks:

20
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4X1=4
marks
1. State Hund’s rule.

2. Write the electronic configuration of Cr.
3. Define mole.
4. What are colloids?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
5. a. Draw the shapes of s and d orbitals.

or
b. Explain the covalent bond formation in Nitrogen molecule by Lewis dot method.
6. a. Classify solutions based on their physical state.
or
b. Compare any three properties of lyophilic and lyophobic colloids.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
7. a. Distinguish the ionic compounds from covalent compounds.

or
b. What is oxidation number? Find the oxidation number of ‘S’ in H2SO4 and ‘Mn’ in KMnO4.
8. a. Define Molarity. Find the weight of H2SO4 required to prepare 400 ml of 0.5M solution.
or
b. Define Normality. Calculate the normality of 500 ml solution containing 0.53 grams of
Na2CO3.
18M-104F
78
I SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A
Instructions: i. Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4X1=4
marks
1. What is conjugate acid base pair?

2. Define ionic product of water.
3. Define an ecosystem.
4. What is threshold limit value?
PART – B
5. a. What are the limitations of Arrhenius theory of acids and bases?

or
b. Explain the neutralization according to Lewis theory of acids and bases with an example.
6. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are renewable and non renewable energy sources? Give examples.
PART – C
7. a. Define pH. Find the pH of 0.5M NaOH solution.

or
b. What are buffer solutions? State the applications of buffer solutions.
8. a. What is Biodiversity? Explain any two threats to biodiversity.
or
b. What is deforestation? What are its consequences?
C-18M-104F
79
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks: 40
PART – A
marks
1. Define atomic mass number.

2. What is biodiversity?
3. Define degree of hardness of water.
4. What are buffer solutions?
5. Define soft water and hard water.
6. Name the salts responsible for temporary hardness of water.
7. Define the terms conductor and insulator.
8. What is an electrolyte?
PART – B
9. a. State and explain Hund’ rule.

or
b. Write any six essential qualities of drinking water.
10. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are strong and weak electrolytes? Give examples.
11. a. Define reverse osmosis and state its advantages.
or
b. Explain defluoridation of water by Nalgonda technique
12. a. Distinguish between metallic and electrolytic conductors.
Or
b. State Faraday’s Laws of electrolysis.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 4 x 5 =20
Marks
13. a. Find the molarity and normality of the solution containing 10.6 grams of Na 2CO3 in 2 litres
of solution. .
or
80
b. Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of water containing the following salts per
litre
i. Ca(HCO3)2 =32.4 mg, ii. Mg(HCO3)2 = 29.2 mg, iii. CaSO4 =13.6 mg, iv. MgCl2 = 19
mg
14. a. Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
or
b. Explain the process of electrolysis of fused NaCl.
15. a. Explain the permutit process of softening of hard water with a neat diagram.
or
b. What are the disadvantages of using hard water in industries?
16. a. Explain the process of electrolytic refining of copper.
Or
b. Calculate the weight of Al deposited on the cathode if 0.5 amperes of electric current is
passed through AlCl3 solution for 1 hour.
.
81
BASIC WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY
Basic Workshop
Course title: Course code: 18M-105C
Technology
Semester: I Course group: Core
Teaching scheme in
45:15:0 Credits: 3
periods: (L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology: Lecture+Tutorial 60
periods:
CIE: 60 Marks SEE: 40 Marks
Prerequisites
Enthusiasm to learn the course and requires the basic knowledge of Mathematics at Secondary school
level.
CORSE OUTCOMES
On successful completion of the course, The students will be able to:
COURSE OUTCOME LINKED PO
CO1 1,2,4,6,10
Identify different materials to manufacture a product
CO2 Identify the methods to manufacture a product 1,2,4,6,10
Identify and describe the tools and equipment for

CO3 1,2,4,9,10
workshop process
Explain wood working processes for making

CO4 1,2,3,4,9,10
carpentry joints
CO5 Explain the fitting operations 1,2,3,4,9,10
CO6 Explain the forging and sheet metal operations 1,2,3,4,9,10
82
CONTENTS
UNIT - IA Basic Workshop tools & operations PERIODS:03

Methods of manufacturing processes - casting, forming, metal removal processes, joining processes,
surface finishing processes, basic workshop processes - carpentry, fitting, hand forging, machine
forging, sheet metal work, cold and hot working of metals.
UNIT - IB Carpentry Tools PERIODS:07

Marking & measuring tools: scales, rules, flexible measuring rule (tape), straight edge, try square,
bevel square, combination square, marking knife, marking gauge, mortise gauge, cutting gauge, wing
compass, trammel, divider, spirit level, specifications- uses.
Cutting Tools
Saws: ripsaw, cross cut saw (hand saw), , tenon saw, specifications &uses .Chisels: Firmer chisel,
beveled edge firmer chisel, parting chisel, mortise chisel, inside and outside gauges, specifications and
uses.Planes: Jack plane (wooden jack plane, metal jack plane), and their specifications and uses.
Striking tools: Hammers - Warrington hammer, claw hammer, mallet, specifications &uses.
Holding devices: Bench vice, bench stop, bench hold fast, sash cramp (bar cramp) G- cramp, Hand
screw, specifications& uses.
UNIT - II Carpentry Processes and machines PERIODS:10

Carpentry Processes: Marking, measuring, sawing, chiseling, planning, boring, grooving, rebating &
moulding.Carpentry joints: Halving Joint, mortise and tenon joint, bridle joint, butt joint, dowel
joint, tongue & groove joint, screw & slot joint, dovetail joint, corner joint.Wood working machines:
Wood working lathe (wood turning lathe), circular saw, band saw, wood planer, sanding machine
specifications and uses.
UNIT - III Fitting PERIODS:12
Cutting tools
Chisels: Flat chisel, cross cut chisel, half round chisel, diamond point chisel, side chisel,
specifications and uses.Files: Different parts of a file – sizes and shapes - flat file, hand file, square
file ,pillar file ,round file, triangular file, half round files, knife edge file, needle file – specifications
and uses.
Scrapers: Flat, triangular, half round scrapers, specifications & uses.Saws: Hand hacksaw - solid
frame, adjustable frame, specifications & uses, hand hacksaw blades. Power hack saw –description
(horizontal reciprocating type), power hacksaw blade, specifications and uses, teeth set - saw material.
Drill bits: Flat drill, straight fluted drill, twist drill, parallel shank, tapered shank, specifications &
uses.
Reamer: Hand reamer, machine reamer, straight and spiral flutes reamers, specifications and uses.
Taps: Hand taps - taper tap, plug tap and bottoming tap, specifications and uses.Dies & Sockets:
Dies- solid, adjustable - specifications and uses.Striking Tools Hammers: Parts, ball peen, cross
peen, straight peen hammers, soft hammer, sizes, specifications and uses.Holding DevicesVices:
Bench vice, leg-vice, hand vice, pin vice, tool maker’s vice, pipe vice, care of vices, specifications and
uses.Miscellaneous ToolsScrew drivers, spanners, single ended & double ended, box type, adjustable
83
spanners, cutting pliers, nose pliers, allen keys, specifications and uses.Fitting Operations: Marking,
sawing, chipping, filing, scrapping, grinding, drilling, reaming, tapping and dieing.
UNIT - IV Marking and measuring tools PERIODS:10
Marking Tools: Surface plate, V-block, angle plate, try square, scriber, punch, prick punch, centre
punch, number punch, letter punch, specifications and uses.
Checking instruments. Callipers: Outside &Inside callipers, hermaphrodite (odd leg) calliper with
firm joint, spring callipers, transfer calliper sizes & uses, dividers - sizes & uses.
Measuring instruments:Combination square, bevel protractor, universal bevel protractor, sine bar,
universal surface gauge, engineer’s parallels, slip gauges, plane gauge, feeler gauge, angle gauge,
radius & template gauge, screw pitch gauge, telescopic gauges, plate & wire gauge, ring and plug
gauges, snap gauges specifications & uses, vernier callipers, vernier height gauge, vernier depth
gauge, micrometer - outside & inside, stick micrometer, depth micrometer, Vernier micrometer, screw
thread micrometer specifications and uses.
UNIT - V Forging PERIODS:10

Hand forging tools: Anvil, swage block, hand hammers - types; sledge hammer, specifications and
uses, tongs - types, specifications & uses, chisel - hot & cold chisels specifications & uses. swages -
types and sizes, fullers, flatters, set hammer, punch and drift - sizes and uses.
Equipment: Open and closed hearth heating furnaces, hand and power driven blowers, open and
stock fire, fuels-charcoal, coal, oil gaseous fuels.
Smith Operations: Upsetting, drawing down, setting down, punching, drifting, bending, welding,
cutting, swaging, fullering and flattering.
Forging defects: Types and remedies.
UNIT - VI Sheet metal PERIODS:10

Metals used for sheet metal work.
Sheet metal hand tools:
Measuring tools - steel rule, circumference rule, thickness gauge, sheet metal gauge, straight edge,
scriber, divider, trammel points, punches, chisels, hammers, snips or shears, straight snip, double
cutting shear, squaring shear, circular shear, bench & block shears.
Stakes: Double seaming stake, beak horn stake, bevel edged square stake, Hatches stake, needle
stake, blow Horn stake, hollow mandrel stake, pliers (flat nose and round nose), grocers and rivet sets,
soldering iron, specifications & uses.
Sheet Metal Operations
Shearing: Cutting off, parting, blanking, punching, piercing, notching, slitting, lancing, nibbling and
trimming.
Bending: Single bend, double bend, straight flange, edge hem, Embossing, beading, double hem or
lock seam.
Drawing: Deep drawing, shallow or box drawing.
Squeezing: Sizing, coining, hobbling, ironing, riveting.
Sheet Metal Joints
Hem Joint: single hem, double hem & wired edge, seam joint -lap seam, grooved seam, single seam,
double seam, dovetail seam, burred bottom seam or flanged seam.
SUGGESTED LEARNING OUTCOMES

84
 Comprehend the use of Basic workshop tools and its operation

 State the importance of workshop processes.
 List the various workshop processes and explain briefly about each.
o Carpentry
 Identify various carpentry tools.
 Distinguish between marking tools, measuring tools and cutting tools.
 List various work holding devices.
 Explain wood working processes viz., sawing, chiseling and planning.
 Explain the use of carpentry joints such as lap joint, dovetail joint, mortise and tenon joint
with legible sketch
 Explain the working of wood working machines.
Fitting
 List various fitting tools.
 Distinguish between marking and measuring tools.
 List types of cutting tools.
 List various work holding devices.
 Explain fitting operations such as marking, sawing, chipping, filing, grinding, drilling and
tapping with legible sketch
o Forging
 List various tools used in black-smithy.
 List equipment used in a forging shop.
 Explain the important smithy operations
 Explain machine forging operations such as upsetting, drawing down and punching with
legible sketch
 List the forging defects
o Sheet Metal
 List various marking tools in sheet metal work
 List various stakes
 List various measuring tools used in sheet metal work
 List various sheet metal joints.
 Describe sheet metal operations such as shearing, bending,drawing and squeezing.
Suggested Student Activities for Induction Program

Forenoon Afternoon
Day2 Rules and Regulations Drawing and Basic workshop practice
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty classes may be conducted
85
1.Student visits Library to refer to Manual of ASME, IEI,

2.Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify the components
3.Visitnear by Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques,Advanced manufacturing processes.
4.Quiz
5.Group discussion
6.Surprise test
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Production Technology by Jain & Gupta (KhannaPubliahers)
2. Elementary Workshop Technology by Hazra Chowdary& Bhattacharya
(Media Promotors)
3. Manufacturing Technology (VolI ) by P N Rao (McGraw Hill)
3. Workshop Technology Vol I & II by Raghuvamshi

1.http://www.asme.org
2. www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering
3. www.nptel.ac.in
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a)
1 Unit-I 1
5(b)
7(a)
6(a)
2 Unit-II 2,3, 4 7(b)
6(b)
8(a)
8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
7(a)
5(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2,3 7(b)
5(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 4
6(b) 8(b)
86

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

87
C18-M-105C
MODEL PAPER-I
I SEMESTER- EXAMINATION
MID 1
Time: 1Hour] [ Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X01=04
Instructions : 1. Answer ALL questions.

1. What is metal forming?

2. State the use of straight edge.
3. State the use of try square.
4. List two carpentry joints.
PART-B
02X03=06
Instructions : 1. Answer any TWO questions.

5. (a) List out four basic workshop processes.
(or)
5. (b) Give the applications of casting.
6. (a) Draw a neat sketch of wooden jack plane.

88
(or)
6. (b) State the uses of claw hammer.
PART-C
02X05=10

7. (a) Draw a neat sketch of rip saw and give its specifications and uses.
(or)
7. (b) Draw a neat sketch of bench vice and give its specifications and uses.
8. (a) Describe the marking gauge with a neat sketch.

(or)
8. (b) Draw a neat sketch of hand saw and write its specification.
*****
89
C18-M-105C

MID SEM-II
DME – I SEMESTER- EXAMINATION

Time: 1Hour] [ Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X01=04

1. Write the uses of hand vice.

2. State the purpose of filing.
3. State the purpose of reamer.
4. State the use of feeler gauge.
PART-B
02X03=06

5. (a) State the difference between drilling and reaming.
(or)
5. (b) List out three types of fitting operations.
90
6. (a) State the purposes of universal surface gauge.
(or)
6. (b) State the difference between plug and snap gauge.
PART-C
02X05=10

7. (a) Explain different methods of filing.

(or)
7. (b) Describe hand hack saw with a neat sketch.
8. (a) Draw a neat sketch of Vernier caliper and name the parts.
(or)
8. (b) Draw a neat sketch of sine bar. How it is used for measuring angles.
*****
91
105C
C18-M-

MODEL PAPER-2019
SEMESTER ENDEXAMINATION
Time : 2 Hours ] [ Total Marks: 40
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
08X01=08

1. What is meant by manufacturing process?

2. What is the purpose of the chisel?
3. What is meant by swaging?
4. State the use of hand vice.
5. Define forging.
6. What is the use of swage block?
7. What is seaming?
8. What is meant embossing?
PART-B
04X03=12
Instructions : 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

9. (a) List out the boring tools used in carpentry.
(or)
9. (b) what are the advantages of the forging?
92
10. (a) mention any three fitting operations.
(or)
10. (b) write the any three tools commonly used in sheet metal work.
11. (a) what are the important forging operations

(or)
11. (b) list out any three types of hammers used in forging.
12. (a) what are the commonly used metals in sheet metal work?
(or)
12. (b) write the three uses of galvanized iron.
PART-C
04X5=20

13. (a) what are the different types of joints used in carpentry.
(or)
13. (b) Name the various common forging defects and state the causes.
14. (a) write the specific use of any five types of files.
(or)
14. (b) explain the process of drawing in sheet metal work with suitable diagram.
15. (a) explain with sketches about upsetting operations.

(or)
15. (b) Distinguish between open fire and stock fire.
16. (a) what is stake? Explain any four types of stake.

(or)
16. (b) explain five types of snips used in sheet metal work?
93
*****
BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING
BASIC ENGINEERING
Course Title : Course Code 18M-106P
DRAWING
Semester I Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme
15:00:30 Credits 1.5
in periods (L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + practice 45 Periods
periods:
***This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering Offered by State Board of
Technical Education –Telangana State.
This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills to enable them to use these skills in
preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.
Prerequisites: Enthusiasm to learn this course and requires basic knowledge of Mathematics.
Course Content and Blue Print of Marks for SEE
Unit R U A
Name of the Unit
No Periods PART-A (2 PART-B (6
Marks Marks
Questions) Questions)
Importance of Engineering
1, 2 Drawing and Instruments, Free
12 Q1 Q9(a)
&3 hand lettering and Numbering and
Dimensioning Practice
Geometric constructions (i.e. up to

4 06 Q2 Q9(b)
construction of Polygon)
Geometric constructions (i.e. up to

4 06 Q3 Q10(a)
construction of general curves)
94
5 Projection of points, Lines, Planes 06 Q4 Q10(b)
Q11(a), Q11(b),
6 Orthographic projections 15 Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b)
Total Periods / Total Questions 45 8 4
[ R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Application – 6 Marks

Questions]
Note: Question Paper consists PART – A and PART-B
PART – A consists 8 (Eight questions) and student have to answer ALL questions, each
question carries 2 marks. (8*2 = 16)
PART – B consists 4 questions (either or / (a) or (b)), student have to attempt FOUR
questions, each question carries 6 marks (4*6=24)
Course Outcomes (CO)
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcome
CO1 Acquire the knowledge on Importance of Engineering drawing and instruments.
CO2 Practice free hand Lettering in different styles.
CO3 Acquire the knowledge on different styles of dimensioning systems.
Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for tracing the paths and surface profile of the
CO3
machine components such as gear profile from involute and cycloid.
Realize the concept of projection and attain visualization projection of points, Lines and
CO3 Planes. The student will also be able to draw the views related to projection of Points, Lines
and Planes.
Realize the concept of orthographic projections and student will be able to draw
CO4
orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
95
Course Contents
NOTE
1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing and Engineering Instruments (Periods: 3)
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its importance
as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – (SP-46 –1988) –
Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link between Engineering
drawing and other subjects of study.
Engineering drawing Instruments

Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines, tools for
measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of
names under each classification and their brief description -Scales: Recommended scales
reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils
-Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3
sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its contents, Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,
Drawing plate: La out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a suitable scale.
2.0 Free hand lettering & numbering (Periods: 3)
Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils
3.0 Dimensioning practice (Periods: 6)
Purpose of engineering drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape description of
an Engineering object - Definition of dimensioning size description -Location of features,
surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension
line, extension line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in
the use of above tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system (SP-46-
1988)-Arrangement of dimensions - Chain, parallel, combined progressive and dimensioning
96
by co-ordinate methods- Rules for dimensioning standard - features: Circles (holes) arcs,
angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.
4.0 Geometric Construction (Periods: 12)

Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts internally
examples in engineering application. Construction of tangent lines: to draw tangent lines
touching circles internally and externally.
Construction of tangent arcs
a) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute,
right and obtuse angles).
b) Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.
c) Tangent arcs of radius ‘R’, touching two given circles internally and externally.
Construction of polygon: construction of any regular polygon of given side length using
general method.
Conical Curves: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone

and a loci of a moving point, eccentricity of above curves – Their engineering application
viz. Projectiles, reflectors, P-V Diagram of a hyperbolic process.
Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by general method.
Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method.
Construction of parabola by rectangle method.
Construction of rectangular hyperbola.
General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point, their
engineering application, viz, Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. - their
construction
5.0 Projection of points, lines and planes (Periods: 6)
Projecting a point on two planes of projection -Projecting a point on three planes of
projection -Projection of straight line.
a) Parallel to both the planes.
b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes.
97
Projection of regular planes.
a) Plane perpendicular to HP and parallel to VP and vice versa.
b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
6.0 Orthographic Projections (Periods: 15)
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box - Legible sketches of 3 views for describing object
-Concept of front view, top view, and side view for sketching these views of engineering
objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First angle
projection - Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an
object – Use of miter line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -Method of
representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe full object.
Reference Books
Engineering Drawing by Kapildev – (Asian Publisher)

Engineering Drawing by BasantAgarwal&C.M Agarwal - (McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata Reddy
NPTEL Videos of Engineering Dwawing.
Suggested Specific Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the subject, the student shall be able to -

1.0 Understand the basic concepts of engineering drawing
1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of study in
diploma course.
Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
1. 4 select the correct instruments and draw lines of different orientation.
1.5 Select the correct instruments and draw small and large Circles.
1.6 Select the correct instruments for measuring distances on the drawing.
1.7 Use correct grade of pencil for different types of lines, thickness and given function.
1.8 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
1.9 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
98
1.10 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers
2.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
2.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
2.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications
2.4 Practice the use of lettering stencils.
3.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice
3.1 Define “Dimensioning.
3.2 State the need of dimensioning of drawing according to accepted standard.
3.3 Identify notations of Dimensioning used in dimensioned drawing.
3.4 Identify the system of placement of dimensions in the given dimensioned drawing.
3.5 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of
dimensioning.
3.6 Dimensioning standard features applying necessary rules.
3.7 Arrange dimensions in a desired method given in a drawing.
3.8 Identify the departures if any made in the given dimensioned drawing with reference
to SP-46-1988, and dimension the same correctly.
4.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions
4.1 Divide a given line into desired number of equal parts internally.
4.2 Draw tangent lines and arcs.
4.3 Use General method to construct any polygon.
4.4 Explain the importance of conics.
4.5 Construct conics (ellipse, parabola and hyperbola) by general method.
4.6 Construct ellipse by concentric circles method.
4.7 Construct parabola by rectangle method.
4.8 Construct rectangular hyperbola from the given data.
4.9 Construct involute from the given data.
4.10 Construct cycloid and helix from the given data.
4.11 State the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.
5.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines and planes (06 Hours)
5.1 Visualize the objects
5.2 Explain the I-angle and III-angle projections
5.3 Practice the I-angle projections
5.4 Draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP&VP)
99
5.5 Draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
5.6 Draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and inclined
to other plane)
6.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection
6.1 Explain the principles of orthographic projection with simple sketches.
6.2 Draw the orthographic view of an object from its pictorial drawing.
6.3 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent complete engineering
component.
CIE Question Paper Pattern and Syllabus
Unit R U A
Unit Name
No
6 Marks
2 Marks Questions
Questions
Mid Semester - I Examination
1, 2, Free hand lettering, Numbering

Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
3 & Dimensioning Practice
Geometric constructions (i.e. up

4 Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)
to construction of Polygon)
Total 4 2
Mid Semester - II Examination
Geometric constructions (i.e. up

4 to construction of general Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
curves)
Projection of points, Lines,

5 Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)
Planes
Total 4 2
[R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Applying – 6 Marks

Questions]
100
CIE Question Paper Pattern:
Maximum Marks: 20, Time: 1 Hour
Part A:
Consists 4 Short questions, students have to attempt 4 questions and each question carries 2 Marks.
(4 X 2 = 08 Marks)
Part B:
Consists 2 (Either or type) Essay type questions, students have to attempt 2 questions and each
question carries 06 Marks.(2 X 6 = 12 Marks)
Linked Program
Cognizant Objectives
Course Outcome
Level
(PO)
Acquire the knowledge on Importance of

CO1 R 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
Engineering drawing and instruments.
CO2 Practice free hand Lettering in different styles. R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
Acquire the knowledge on different styles of

CO3 R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
dimensioning systems.
Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for

tracing the paths and surface profile of the
CO3 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
machine components such as gear profile from
involute and cycloid.
Realize the concept of projection and attain

visualization projection of points, Lines and
CO3 Planes. The student will also be able to draw the R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
views related to projection of Points, Lines and
Planes.
Realize the concept of orthographic projections

CO4 and student will be able to draw orthographic R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
101
Course-PO Attainment Matrix
Program Outcomes (PO)
Course Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Basic
Engineering 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3
Drawing
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed
C18-M-106P
DME – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - I EXAMINATION
Time: 1 Hour] [Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08

2. Each question carries TWO marks.
1. Write freehand the following, using single stroke vertical CAPITAL letters:
BE A LEADER NOT A FOLLOWER (h = 10)
2. Represent the following Figure in Chain Dimensioning Method.
102
3. To divide a straight line of 90mm into 5 equal parts.
4. Bisect a given angle of 65 Degrees.
PART-B
02X06=12

2. Each question carries SIX marks.
5. (a) Redraw the following Figure with Correct Dimensioning Rules.
(or)
5. (b) Represent the following Figure in a) parallel and b) Uni-directional system.
6. (a) Draw an arc of given radius 30 mm touching two straight lines at right angles to each
other.
103
(or)
6. (b) Draw a tangent to a circle from a point P at 50 mm distance on the circle of Radius 30
mm.
C18-M-106P
DME – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - II EXAMINATION
Time: 1 Hour] [Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08

1. Draw an arc of given radius 30 mm touching two straight lines at right angles to each
other.
2. Draw a tangent to a circle from a point P at 50 mm distance on the circle of Radius 30
mm.
3. Draw the projections of a point A lying on VP and 70 mm above HP.
4. A line of 30 mm long is parallel to both the planes. The line is 40 mm above HP and 20
mm in front of VP. Draw its projection.
PART-B
02X06=12

5. (a) Draw a parabola with the distance of the focus from the directrix at 50 mm using
Eccentricity method also draw a normal and tangent through a point 40 mm from the
directrix.
or
5. (b) Draw a cycloid, given the radius 30 mm of the generating circle.
6. (a) Draw the projections ofstraight line AB 60 mm long parallel to HP and inclinedat an
angle of 400 to VP. The end A is 30 mm above HP. and 20 mm in front of VP.
or
104
6. (b) Rectangle 30mm and 50mm sides is resting on HP on one small side which is 300
inclined to VP, while the surface of the plane makes 450 inclination with HP. Draw it’s
projections.
C18-M-106P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–18) MARCH/APRIL—2019
DME – I SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2hours] [Total Marks:40

question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered.
PART-A 08X02=16
3. All the dimensions are in mm.
1. Write freehand the following, using single stroke vertical CAPITAL letters:
BE A LEADER NOT A FOLLOWER (h = 10)
2. Bisect a given angle of 450.
3. Inscribe a hexagon in a given circle of Radius 60 mm.
4. Draw the projections of a point A lying on VP and 70 mm above HP.
5. Draw the top view of the cone resting base on the ground with base diameter 50mm
height 60mm.
6. Draw the top view with the given front and right side views of the componenet shown in
Figure (1) assuming suitable dimentions.
Right Side View Front View
Figure (1)
7. Draw the front view of the block shown in Figure (2)

8. Draw the front view of the block shown in Figure (3)
105
Figure (2) Figure (3)
PART-B
04X06=24

9. (a) Draw the below Figure (4) with correct dimensioning principles.
Figure (4)
(or)
9. (b) Circumscribe a hexagon on a given circle of radius R is 30mm.
10. (a) Draw a parabola with the distance of the focus from the directrix at 50 mm using
eccentricity method and draw a normal and tangent through a point 40 mm from the directrix.
(or)
10. (b) A line AB 40 mm long is parallel to V.P. and inclined at 300 to H.P. The end A is 15
mmabove H.P and 20 mm in front of V.P. Draw the projections of the line and find its traces.
(or)
11. (a) Draw the front view of the component shown in Figure (5).
106
Figure (5). Figure (6).
(or)
11. (b) Draw the Top View from the component as shown in Figure (6).
12. (a) Draw the Top View of component shown in Figure (7)

or
12. (b) Develop the Top View from the Front and Right side views as shown in Figure (8)
assuming suitable dimensions.
107
Basic Computer Aided Drafting
Course
Basic Computer Aided Drafting Course Code 18M-107P
Title :
Semester I Course Group :practical
Teaching Scheme
15:00:30 Credits : 1.5
in periods (L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + Practice 45 Periods
periods
Pre requisites : basics of computer operation
This course requires the Basic Computer Skills and Practice concepts of engineering drawing
Course Outcomes
CO1 Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing area and draw geometric shapes and
modify as per requirement
CO2 Add text with required font and size and also dimension by various methods
CO3 Generate isometric model and draw circle on three iso planes
CO4 Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all above features
UNIT -1 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10)

108
Course Content
1.1 The Computer Aided Drafting and its software
Definition of Computer Aided Drafting, the Advantages and importance of CAD software
LIKE Auto CAD, Intelli Cad, ProG CAD etc., the features of Graphic Work station, CAD
Environment: Screen, Various tool bars and menus.
1.2 Selection of commands

Commands using toolbars, menus, command bar. Repeating a command, Nesting a command
and modifying a command.Use of prompt history window and scripts, mouse shortcuts.Creating
the drawing.Opening existing and, saving of drawing, setting up a drawing. Setting and
changing the grid and snapping alignment, and the Entity snaps.
1.3 Use of viewing tools of CAD & Use of coordinate systems of the drawing
Use of mouse, Scroll bar to move around within drawing, changing of magnification of
drawing. Displaying of multiple views, the use of controlling visual elements like Line weight.
Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute, Cartesian, Relative Cartesian and Polar
coordinates and direct method of drawing line.
1.4 Creating simple and complex entities

Drawing of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines, rectangles,
polygons,
1.5Use the Modifying tools to modify the properties of entities
Entity selection and de selection methods, the Deletion of entities.Copying of entities within a
drawing, between drawings, parallel copies, Mirroring entities and arraying entities.The
Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering.The Resizing of entities by
Stretching, Scaling, Extending, Trimming, and editing the length.The Braking and joining of
entities. Editing of polylines: The Exploding of entities, the Chamfering and Filleting of
entities
UNIT -2 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + 10P)
2.1 Creating complex entities

Drawing of shapes like polylines, Splines, donuts, and adding of hatch pattern
2.2 Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate and Display
Creating and editing of point entities. Dividing the entities in to segments. Calculation of areas
of defined by points, closed entities, and combined entities, calculate the distance and angle
between the entities. Displaying the information about the entities and drawing status.
2.3 Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text Fonts and its styles
The creating, naming and modifying the text fonts, the Creation of line text, paragraph text,
setting of line text style and its alignment.The Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment,
and modifying the text.
109
2.5 Use Dimensioning concepts to create, Edit ,Control dimension styles & variables and
Adding geometric tolerances
The creating of linear, Angular, Diametral, Radial, Ordinate dimensions. The creating leaders
and annotations, making dimensions oblique, Editing the dimension text, controlling of
dimension arrows and format. The Controlling of line settings and dimension text, the
Controlling of dimension units, and dimension tolerance.
2.6Isometric Views
Setting of isometric grid – change of iso planes, drawing straight line and circle
Create Isometric views of simple objects
.UNIT -3 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10)
Practise of 2D Drawings consisting of different line types, line weights, hatch, dimensioning
and Text
Using
Specific appropriate
Learning commands creation of 2D drawings of standard components
Outcomes
1 Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to Understand about the Computer
Aided Drafting and its software
1.1 Define Computer Aided Drafting
1.2 List the Advantages of CAD and also various CAD software’s
1.3 Explain the importance of CAD software
1.4 Explain the features of Graphic Work station
1.5 Explain CAD Screen, Various tool bars and menus
1.6 Explain the benefits of Templates
3 Use appropriate selection commands
2.1. Practice commands using toolbars, menus, command bar
2.2. Practice repeating a command, Nesting a command and modifying a command
2.3. Use prompt history window and scripts
2.4. Practice mouse shortcuts
2.5. Practice the Creating the drawing, saving the drawing with .drawing extension and
Opening Existing drawing
2.6. Practice the setting up a drawing with drawing limits and drawing units.
2.7. Practice the setting and changing the grid and snapping alignment
2.8. Practice the Entity snaps
3 Use viewing tools of CAD & Use coordinate systems of the drawing
3.1. Practice the use of Scroll bar, pan command and rotating view to move around within
drawing
3.2. Practice the changing of magnification of drawing
3.3. Practice how the coordinate system work and it is displayed
3.4 Practice the Find tool to determine the coordinates of a point
3.5. Practice the Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute Cartesian, Relative
Cartesian, Polar coordinates and direct method to draw a line.
110
3.6. Explain importance and use of Osnap/ Esnap points.
3.7. Practice to draw with other drawing commands like circle, polygon and other.
4 Create the simple and complex entities
4.1. Draw the lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines and shapes
like Rectangles, Polygons, Polylines, Splines, donuts
4.2. Practice the adding of hatch with required pattern and adjusting line angle and line
space.
5 Use the modifying tools to modify the properties of entities
5.1. Practice the various methods of entity selection like window, cross window, fence, last
and previous methods and deselection method
5.2. Practice the Deletion, breaking and trimming of entities
5.3. Practice the Copying of entities within a drawing, between drawings
5.4. Practice the Chamfering and Filleting of entities
5.5. Practice the making of parallel copies, Mirroring entities and Arraying entities
5.6. Practice the Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering
5.7. Practice the Resizing of entities by Stretching, Scaling, and Extending.
5.8. Practice the Editing of polylines: Opening, Closing, Curving, Decurving, Joining,
Changing width and editing vertices
5.9. Practice the Exploding of entities
6. Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate, Display, and
Track
6.1. Divide the entities in to required number of segments
6.2. Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed entities, and combined entities
6.3. Calculate the distance between the entities
6.4. Calculate the angle between the entities
6.5. Display the information about the entities and drawing status
6.6. Track time spent working on a drawing
7. Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text fonts and its styles
7.1. Practice the creating, naming and modifying the text fonts
7.2. Practice the Creation of line text, paragraph text
7.3. Practice the Setting of line text style and its alignment
7.4. Practice the Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment
7.5. Practice the Changing of line text and Paragraph text
7.6. Practice the use of alternate text editor
8 Use Dimensioning concepts to create dimensions, Edit dimensions, Control dimension
styles & variables and Adding geometric tolerances
8.1. Practice the creating of linear, Angular, Diametric, Radial, Ordinate dimensions
8.2. Practice the creating leaders and annotations
8.3. Practice the making dimensions oblique,
8.4. Edit the dimension text
8.5. Practice the Controlling of dimension properties like arrow types, size, dim line
adjustment, dim offset, text size: primary and secondary units and format
8.6. Practice the Controlling of dimension units, and dimension tolerance
9 Create 2D Drawings
Create 2D drawings of standard mechanical components
111
Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura
2. 4MCAD User Guide- Intelli CAD Technology Consortium
Key competence to be achieved by students / Suggested Learning Outcomes

S.No Experiment Title Key components
 Open / close AutoCAD program

1 Introduction to CAD  Understands AutoCAD Graphic User
 Interface(GUI) and various toolbars
2  Use prompt history window and scripts

Selecting commands &
 Practice the setting up a drawing
Working withdrawing
 Practice the Entity
 Use Scroll bar, pan command, and rotating view

to move around within drawing
a) Viewing drawing
 Control visual elements like Fill, Text, Blips and
 Line weight
3  Use Two dimensional coordinates and Three
 dimensional coordinates
b) Working with coordinates  Use right-hand rule
 Use filters in two and three dimensions
 Define user coordinate system
 Draw the simple shapes like lines, circles, arcs

Creating simple and complex
4 and complex shapes like polygons, planes etc.,
entities
 Practice adding of hatch pattern
 Measure the intervals and distance between

Entities.
5 Getting Drawing information  Divide the entities in to segments
 Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed
entities, and Combined entities
 Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed

entities, and Combined entities
Use the Text tool to create
 Use filters in two and three dimensions
6 various types of text fonts and
 Draw the simple shapes like lines, circles, arcs
its styles
and complex shapes like polygons, planes etc.,
 Practice the adding of hatch pattern
112
 Practice the Controlling of dimension properties like
arrow types, size, dim line adjustment, dim offset, text
7 Dimensioning drawing size , primary and secondary units and format
 Practice the Controlling of dimension units, and
dimension tolerance
8 Isometric Views Use Iso snap command to create Isometric views
9 2D Drawings Use proper 2D commands to create 2D drawings
Course Outcomes CL Linked PO Teaching

Hours
Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing
CO1 area and draw geometric shapes and modify as per U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
requirement
CO2 Add text with required font and size and also U/A 1,2,3,9,10
dimension by various methods 9
CO3 Generate isometric model and draw circle on three U/A 1,2,3,9,10
iso planes 6
CO4 Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all A 1,2,3,10
above features 15
113
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R A Remarks
1 Unit-I 1, 2,3,4 5,6
Total Questions 4 2
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R A Remarks

1 Unit-II 1, 2,3,4 5,6
Total Questions 4 2

SN Unit name
R,U (Q No’s) A (Q No’s)
1 Unit-1 1,2
Unit-2 3,4
Unit-3 5,6
114
18M-107P
CAD LAB PRACTISE
MODEL PAPER FOR MID -1 (CIE)
TIME: 1hr Marks:
20M
PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4X2=
8marks
1. Draw a rectangle of 80x30mm by using any CAD software.
2. Draw an equilateral triangle of 50mm side by using any CAD software.
3. Draw a pentagon by circumscribe method for a radius of 60mm by using any CAD software.
4. Draw an ellipse of major and minor axis of 60 & 25mm respectively by using any CAD software.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1X2=
12marks
5. Draw the following using any CAD software without dimensioning.
115
6. Draw the following using any CAD software without dimensioning.
116
18M107P
CAD LAB PRACTISE
TIME: 1 hr Marks:
20M
PART-A
8marks
1. Write text ”CAD Lab” with Calibri font style and font size 10 by using any CAD software.
2. Draw a line of 10mm and divide it into four equal parts by modifying the point style to x shape.
3. Add continuous dimensions to divided line drawn in Q no. 2 .
4. Draw a pentagon of side 60mm and calculate its area by using any CAD software.
PART-B
12marks
5. Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning.
117
118
18M107P
CAD LAB PRACTISE
MODEL PAPER FOR SEE
TIME: 2hr Marks:
40M
PART-A
16marks
1. Draw the following fig by using any CAD software, change the line type and add dimensions.
Also list the commands used in sequence.
2. Draw the following arrow mark by using any CAD software, and add complete dimensions.
Also list the commands used in sequence.
.
3. Redraw the following figure and add dimensions as shown in figure.
119
4. Draw isometric view of a cube of 100mm side by using any CAD software.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 24 =
24marks
5. (a) Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning. 15+5+4 marks
(b) List the commands in sequence and also write the procedure
(c) Add title box containing Student PIN, name and college name
120
6. (a) Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning. 15+5+4 marks
(c) Add title box containing Student PIN, name and college name
121
BASIC WORKSHOP PRACTICE
Basic Workshop
Course Title Course Code 18M-108P
Practice
Teaching Scheme in
15:00:30 Credits 1.5
Periods (L: T: P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + Practice 45 Periods
Periods :
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling Domestic tools, this course also requires the basic
knowledge of basic mathematics at secondary school level.
Questions for SEE Marks

Uni Period %
Unit name Handlin Manipulatio Precisio Weightag
t No s Weightage
g n n e
1 Fitting shop 11 10 15 15 40 100
2 Forging shop 11 10 15 15 40 100
3 Carpentry shop 12 10 15 15 40 100
4 Sheet metal
10 15 15 40 100
work 11
Total 45
Note:
1. Student can answer any one question out of 4 questions.
2. To pass in practical Exam student should acquire 50% marks in both CIE and SEE
separately and CIE & SEE put together.
3. If the students acquire less than 50% in CIE, accordingly the students have to acquire more
than 50% in SEE to get overall 50 % to pass
On completion of course the student should be able to
CO1 Identify and use the tools and equipment in Fitting Shop
CO2 Acquire skill in basic fitting operations
CO3 Identify and use the tools to perform forging operations
CO4 Identify and use the tools to perform Carpentry operations
CO5 Identify and use the tools to perform operations in sheet metal shop
COURSE CONTENTS
122
FITTING SHOP
1. Marking and chipping on Mild – steel flat 12 mm thick.
2. Cutting with hack saw, M.S. Flats of 6 mm thick.
3. Marking, cutting, drilling, Chamfering
FORGING SHOP
1. Conversion of round to square.
2. Conversion of round to Hexagon.
CARPENTRY SHOP
1. Cutting of wood with hand saw.
2. Planning of wood.
3. Chiselling of wood.
4. Lap joint
5. T- Joint
6. Preparation of Dovetail joint.
SHEET METAL WORK

1. Practice on cutting of sheet
2. Formation of joints like grooved joints, locked groove joint
3. Preparation of a rectangular open type tray
4. Preparation of hollow cylinder
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manufacturing Technology (VolI ) by P N Rao (McGraw Hill)

2. Principles of Foundry Technology by P L Jain (McGraw Hill)
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student.
Title of the Job Competencies Key Competencies

Fitting shop
 Identify appropriate
measuring tool
 Handle appropriate marking
1. Marking and Chipping tool  Mark the dimensions
on Mild steel flat of 12  Handle appropriate chipping  Remove the material by
mm thick tool chipping from MS flats
 Mark the dimensions
 Remove the material by
chipping from MS flats
2. Cutting with hack saw  Check the raw material for  Load and unload hack saw
of MS flats of 6mm size blade from its frame
thick  Fix the work piece in vice  cut the work as per marked
 Mark the work as per given dimensions using Hack saw
dimensions
 Perform dot punching
 Load and unload hack saw
123
Fitting shop
blade from its frame
 Use the hack saw to perform
cutting operation
 Check the raw material for
size
 Apply the chalk on the
surface and on all sides of the
flat
 Layout the dimensions and
mark the lines using dot  Load and unload drill bit
3. Drilling, chamfering
punch from the machine
and on a MS flat of 2
 Chamfer the edges through  Identify appropriate taps
mm thick
filing  Tap the hole
 Locate the hole centres using
odd leg callipers and centre
punching
 Identify appropriate drill bit
 Load and unload drill bit
from the machine

Forging shop
 Identify the holding and
striking tools
 Heat the specimen to the
1. Conversion of appropriate temperature  Heat the specimen to the
Round to Square  Remove the specimen and appropriate temperature
hold it on the anvil  Hammer the specimen to the
 Hammer the specimen to the required shape
required shape
 Identify the holding and
striking tools
 Heat the specimen to the
2. Conversion of appropriate temperature  Heat the specimen to the
Round to Hexagon  Remove the specimen and appropriate temperature
hold it on the anvil  Hammer the specimen to the
required shape
124
Carpentry Shop
 Identify the orientation of
grains
 Select appropriate saw for
cutting in each of the
directions viz. across and
along the grains
 Select appropriate work  Identify the orientation of
holding device grains
 Handle appropriate measuring  Mark dimensions on work
1. Cutting of wood and marking tools(Steel rule, using marking gauge
with hand saw Try square, Marking gauge)  Perform cutting along and
 Mark dimensions on work perpendicular the grains
using Marking gauge using appropriate saw
 Fix the work in the vice
 Perform cutting along the
grains using Rip saw
 Change the position of work in
the vice
 Perform cutting perpendicular
the grains using cross cut saw
 Identify the direction for
planning wood stock
 Identify the direction for
 Select appropriate jack plane
planning wood stock
 Prepare the jack plane for
 Prepare the jack plane for
planning
planning
 Load and unload the blade of a
 Plane the surfaces on all
jack plane
2. Planning of wood four sides using jack plane
 Select appropriate work
holding device
 Perform marking on work
using appropriate tool
 Fix the work in the vice
 Plane the surfaces on all four
sides using jack plane
 Select appropriate chisels and  Select appropriate chisels
3. Chiselling of wood saw and saw
 Select appropriate work  Mark the position of
holding device grooves on work using
 Select appropriate measuring marking gauge
and marking tools  Cut sides of grooves by
 Fix the work in the vice hand saw
 Mark the position of grooves  Chip the material using
on work using marking gauge firmer chisel by applying
 Cut sides of grooves by hand pressure with mallet
saw
 Chip the material using firmer
125
Carpentry Shop
chisel by applying pressure
with mallet
 Finish the grooves with rasp
file
 Select the appropriate cutting
tools and work holding devices
 Plane the wooden pieces on all
 Trim the dovetail by chisel
sides
to exact size
 Mark at an angle of 750 with
 Mark at an angle of 750
bevel square
4. Preparation of T- with bevel square
 Trim the dovetail by chisel to
Joint, Lap joint and  Cut the dovetail groove on
exact size
Dove tail joint second piece
 Cut the dovetail groove on
 Assemble the two pieces to
second piece
prepare dovetail halving
 Finish the groove
joint by using mallet
 Assemble the two pieces to
prepare dovetail halving joint
by using mallet
Title of the Job Competencies Key Competency

Sheet metal Work
 Cut the required sheet from the
stock using snip
 Mark the dimensions on the
sheet using scriber & steel rule  Identify the marking
 Draw the circular shapes using and cutting tools
1. Practice on cutting
divider  Cut the sheet of
of sheet
 Perform rough cutting of the different shapes using
curved shapes using chisel and appropriate tools
finish cutting using snips
 Cut the straight edges using
straight snips
 Cut the sheet in to two halves
 Form the flange on the sheet
by folding the sheet along
scribed lines using mallet &  Identify the marking
2. Formation of joints stakes and cutting tools
like grooved joint,  Perform bending edges of  Cut the sheet
locked groove joint sheets applying moderate  Perform bending along
pressure using mallet the marked lines.
 Inter lock the bent edges and
apply pressure with mallet to
make required joint
126
 Draw the development of the
object to be made
 Place the pattern on the sheet
 Mark the dimensions using
scriber
 Shear the required piece from  Drawing development of
the stock using straight snips objects
3. Preparation of a  Mark the lines on the sheet to  Cut the sheet
rectangular open form bends  Seam the corners by
type tray  Strengthen the sides of sheet inserting laps of the
by singe hem using hatchet adjacent sides with single
stake hem
 Form the sheet in to desired
shape using stakes
 Seam the corners by inserting
laps of the adjacent sides with
single hem
 Draw the development of the
object to be made
 Place the pattern on the sheet
 Mark the dimensions using
scriber
 Shear the required piece from
the stock using straight snips  Identify the marking
 Mark the lines on the sheet to and cutting tools
form bends  Drawing development
4. Preparation of  Strengthen the sides of sheet of objects
by singe hem on top & bottom  Cut the sheet
hollow cylinder
side using hatchet stake  Inter lock the sides and
 Form the flat sheet into apply pressure using
cylindrical shape by mallet to make a strong
cylindrical stake and apply joint
pressure using mallet
 Prepare single hem on to
longitudinal sides in opposite
directions
 Inter lock the sides and apply
pressure to make a strong joint
Course Outcome (CO) Cognizant Linked Program Teaching

Level Outcomes (PO) periods
Identify and use the tools and
CO1 R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,1 5
equipment in Fitting Shop
Acquire skill in basic fitting
CO2 R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 6
operations
Identify and use the tools to
CO3 R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 11
perform forging operations
127
CO4 R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 12
perform Carpentry operations
CO5 perform operations in sheet R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 11
metal shop
R: Remembering, U: Understanding, A: Applying
18M-108P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS(C18)
Model Paper
Mid Sem-I
Basic Workshop Practice
Time: 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 M
Note: Answer any one question.
1. Plain the given wood piece and cut as per the given fig
2. Prepare a lap joint.
3. Prepare the groove joint
4. Prepare a locked groove joint
5. File the given MS plate and cut as per the drawing
6. Convert the round bar into square shape
18M108P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS (C18)
Model Paper
Mid Sem-II
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks : 20 M
1. Prepare a T joint.
2. Prepare a open tray
3. Prepare a hallow cylinder
4. File the given MS plate and drill a 6mm hole as per the drawing
5. Convert the round bar into hexagon shape
128
18M108P

Model Paper
Time : 2 Hours Total Marks : 40 M
1. Plain the given wood piece and cut as per the given fig
2. Prepare a lap joint.
3. Prepare a dovetail joint
4. Prepare the groove joint
5. Prepare a locked groove joint
6. File the given MS plate and cut as per the drawing
7. Convert the round bar into square shape
8. Prepare a T joint.
9. Prepare a open tray
10. Prepare a hallow cylinder
11. File the given MS plate and drill a 6mm hole as per the drawing
12. Convert the round bar into hexagon shape
129
Basic Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab + Chemistry Lab)
Course Title Basic Science Lab Course Code 18M-109P

Practice (Physics Lab +
Chemistry Lab)
Teaching Scheme in 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods 45
Physics Lab – 109P(A)
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.
Lecture and Demonstration: 1 Period
1. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
2. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
3. Following Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
5. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1. Use Vernier caliper to determine the volumes of objects like cylinder and sphere.
2: use Screw gauge to determine thickness /diameter of small objects like glass plate and wire.
3: prove Boyle’s law employing Quill tube.
4: determine the viscosity of liquid using capillary method.
5: verify the parallelogram law and triangle law of forces.
References:
130
1. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur
2. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester I
1. Vernier calliper - determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere.

2. Screw gauge - determine thickness of a glass plate and cross section of a wire.
3. Boyle’s law - verification using Quill tube.
4. Coefficient of viscosity of liquid - using capillary method.
5. Parallelogram law and Triangle law of forces – verification.
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes CL Linked Teaching

POs Periods
CO 1 Hands on practice on Vernier Caliper U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 2 Hands on practice on Screw gauge U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 3 Boyle’s law verification U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 4 Coefficient of Viscosity by capillary method U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 5 Verification of Parallelogram law of forces U/A 1,2,3,8,9

and Triangle law of forces L:P::1:2
CO 6 Relate the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application
131
Specific learning outcomes:
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
1. Hands on practice on Vernier  Find the Least count  Read the scales
 Fix the specimen in position  Calculate the volume
Calipers – Cylinder and sphere  Read the scales of given object
 Calculate the volume of given
object
2. Hands on practice on Screw  Find the Least count  Read the scales
gauge – Wire and glass plate  Fix the specimen in position  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass plate  Calculate cross section
and cross section of wire
of wire
3. Boyle’s law verification – Quill  Find the length of air
tube  Note the atmospheric pressure column
 Fix the quill tube to retort stand  Find the pressure of
 Find the length of air column enclosed air
 Find the pressure of enclosed air  Find the value P x l
 Find and compare the calculated
value P x l
4. Coefficient of viscosity by  Find the least count of vernier  Find the pressure head
capillary  Fix the capillary tube to aspiratory  Calculate rate of
bottle volume of liquid
Method - water  Find the mass of collected water collected
 Find the pressure head
 Find the radius of
 Calculate rate of volume of liquid
collected capillary tube
 Find the radius of capillary tube  Calculate the
 Calculate the viscosity of water viscosity of water
using capillary method
5. Verification of Parallelogram  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

law of forces and Triangle law of  Note the positions of threads on equilibrium point
forces drawing sheet  Constructing
 Find the angle at equilibrium point parallelogram
 Construct parallelogram
 Compare the measured diagonal  Construct triangle
 Construct triangle  Compare the ratios of
 Find the length of sides force and length
 Compare the ratios
132
EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS
S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS
1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II EXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
SEMESTER END
3 EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
EXAMINATION
Scheme of Valuation of SEE
S.No Particulars Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
Chemistry Lab - 109P(B)
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of preparation of chemical solutions and volumetric
analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:
133
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching
Periods
CO1 Prepare the standard U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

solution.
CO2 Estimate the amount of the U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

chemical substance in the
given sample of
solutions(HCl, NaOH&
H2SO4).
CO3 Determination of hardness U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

of water in the given
sample.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A

oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods.
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.

1. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance
of cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
3. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in record book.
6. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

134
Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Preparation of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimation of hydrochloric acid present in 250 ml of solution by using
Standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimation of sodium hydroxide present in 250ml of solution by using standard hydrochloric
acid solution.
4. Estimation of sulphuric acid present in 250ml of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determination of total hardness of water sample by 0.02N EDTA solution.

1. Prepare standard sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimate hydrochloric acid present given volume of solution by using
standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimate sodium hydroxide present in the given volume of solution by using standard
hydrochloric acid solution.
4. Estimate sulphuric acid present in the given volume of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determine the total hardness of water sample by using 0.02N EDTA solution.
Reference Books:
1. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

2. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
3. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE
Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
135
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
C18 M-109P

MIDSEM – I
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.
136
PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)
Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)
5. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

6. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 500 ml of the given solution using 0.02M
sodium carbonate solution.
C18 M-109P

MIDSEM – II
137
1. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.

2. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
3. Estimate the amount of NaOH present in 500 ml solution using 0.02M HCl solution
4. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in 250 ml solution using
0.01M NaOH solution.
C18 – M 109P

MODEL PAPER
I SEMESTER EXAMINATION

138
(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
5. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.
6. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
7. Verify parallelogram law of forces.
8. Verify triangle law of forces.
9. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

12. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of NaOH present in 100 ml of the given solution
using 0.01M HCl solution.
13. Estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in a litre of solution using 0.01M NaOH
solution.
14. Determine the total hardness of the given water sample using 0.02N EDTA solution
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB Course Code : 18M-110P

PRACTICE
Course Group : Practical
Semester :I
Credits : 1.5
Teaching Scheme (L:T:P) :15:0:30
Total Contact Periods : 45 Periods
Type of course : Tutorial + Practicals
SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of English comprehension , Basic Computer operation and IO devices.
139
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):

Hours
CO1 Identify hardware and software components and R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5

work with DOS OS A
CO2 Operate the computer system with Windows OS R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

A
CO3 Access the internet R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5

A
CO4 Draft the documents using word processing R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 20

A
software
Total Sessions 45
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)
Course Contents
COMPUTER BASICS
1. Identify the various components of a Computer system

2. Differentiate between hardware and software
3. State the configuration of a computer system
4. Practice on DOS Internal and External commands.
5. Create and use Batch Files.
6. Know the usage of Editors.
WINDOWS Operating System
7. Exercise on creation of text Files using Notepad, WordPad

8. Exercise on creation of .jpeg, .bmp files using MS Paint
9. Exercise how to use calculator
10. Exercise on creation of folders and organizing files in different folders
11. Exercise on use of Recycle Bin, My Computer and My Documents
12. Exercise on creation of shortcut to files and folders (in other folders) on Desktop
13. Exercise on arranging of icons – name wise, size, type, Modified
14. Exercise on searching, accessing and organizing files / folders
15. Change resolution, colour, appearance, screen server options of Display, date and time
140
INTERNET
16. Importance of web browser software
17. Structure of URL
18. Create an E-mail account
19. Send & Receive an E-mail
20. Browse the Internet using various search engines
WORD Processing Software
21. Open MS-word and Identify the components on the screen

22. Create a document using MS-word and save it.
23. Create a table using MS-Word and save it.
24. Apply formulas in table & sort the table
25. Convert text into table & table into text.
26. Insertion of new rows and columns in the existing table and changing background colour in
Table
27. Merge and split cells in a Table
28. Change the font of a text
29. Exercise with Headers and Footers, paragraph tool bar
30. Insert objects into the document like pictures, shapes, charts, and word-art.
31. Printing a document , page setting, different views of a document
32. Import & export files to & from Word.
33. Create a letter and send to multiple users using mail merge tool of MS-word
34. Create a Simple Newsletter with minimum three columns. Insert a Clip Art in the
Newsletter.
35. Create a Resume for a Job Application.
36. Create the Cover Page of a Project Report (use Word Art, insert Picture Image).
37. Prepare the class time table of your class.
Student Activity
1. Observe newspaper pattern of printing.
2. Submit a report of one page
3. Collection of data
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Software Tool
Any open source tool or equivalent proprietary tool
141
Composition of Educational Components:
Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:
Sl. Bloom’s Category %

No.
1 Remembrance 20
2 Understanding 20
3 Application 60
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked PO CL Lab

Linked Sessions
CO Identify hardware and software 1,2,3,4,5,6 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R, U, A 5

1 components and work with
DOS OS
CO Operate the computer system 7,8,9,10,11,12,13, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R, U, A 15
2 with Windows OS
14,15
CO Access the internet 16,17,18,19,20 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R,U, A 5

3
CO Draft the documents using 21,22,23,24,25,26, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 U, A 20

4 word processing
27,28,29,30,31,32,
software
33,34,35,36,37
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application
Internal Assesment
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
142
Rubrics for Task Assessments
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation
Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material All All Data/Material

was collected one was collected more Data/Material was collected
Data/Material
time independently. than one time was collected several times
Collection
independently. several times with assistance.
independently.
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that

outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- outlined in a were outlined
by-step fashion that step fashion that step-by-step were incomplete
could be followed could be followed by fashion, but had or not sequential,
Methodology/
by anyone without anyone without 1 or 2 gaps that even after Expert
Procedure
additional additional require feedback had
explanations. explanations. Expert explanation been given.
help was needed to even after expert
accomplish this. feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs

Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion

Interpretation/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion with
some reference.
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
143
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)
AVE
S. Course Outcomes (Skill Activities) RA
N PIN GE
O CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
144
Engineering
II Semester
145
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Instruction Total Semester end
Continuous internal
periods per Periods examination
Evaluation(CIE)
Course week per (SEE)
Course Name
Code semeste Credits Min marks
Internal Max
r Mid Mid Min Total for passing
L T P Evaluat marks
Sem1 Sem 2 marks Marks including
ion
CIE
1 18M-201F Advanced English 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Engineering
2 18M-202F 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Mathematics
3 18M-203F Applied Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Engineering
Chemistry&
4 18M-204F 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Environmental
studies
Advanced
5 18M-205C Workshop 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Technology
Advanced
6 18M-206P Engineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Drawing
Advanced
7 18M-207P Computer Aided 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Drafting
Advanced
8 18M-208P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Workshop Practice
Applied Science
9 18M-209P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Lab Practice
10 18M-210P IT Lab Practice 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
0
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics
146
Advanced English
Course Title :Advanced English Course Code : 18 M-201F
Semester : II Course Group : Foundation

45:15:00
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Hours : 60 periods
Lecture + Tutorial
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
201.1 communicate effectively in English
201.2 listen for specific details and use prepositions appropriately.
201.3 learn vocabulary and use them in professional interaction
201.4 analyse errors and make communication flawless
201.5 comprehend central idea and minute details
201.6 make notes, write resumes, prepare cover letters and draft reports
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping POs
201.1 2 2 2 -- 1 -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,8,9,10
201.2 2 2 1 2 -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
201.3 2 2 -- 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
201.4 2 2 2 2 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9,10
201.5 2 2 2 -- 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,57,8,9,10
201.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
147
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1 SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Expressing Obligation
2. Fixing and Cancelling Appointments
3. Extending and Accepting Invitations
4. Giving Instructions
5. Asking for and Giving Directions
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods

6. The Here and Now!
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

7. How to Learn a New Word
8. Synonyms, Antonyms and One word Substitutes
UNIT -4: GRAMMAR Duration: 12 Periods

9. Reported Speech
10. Error Analysis - I
11. Error Analysis - II
12. Error Analysis - III
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods
13. An Environmental challenge

14. The Will to Succeed
15. Waiting for Mr. Clean
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 16 Periods

16. Data Interpretation- I
17. Data Interpretation- II
18. Data Interpretation- III
19. Writing a Resume
20. Writing a Cover Letter
21. Note Making
148
22. Writing a Report
Suggested Learning Outcomes:
On completion of the course the students will be able to:
 express obligation, fix and cancel appointments

 extend, accept and decline invitations.
 give instructions and directions
 identify and use prepositions
 enhance their vocabulary
 learn synonyms, antonyms and use one word substitutes
 read and understand main ideas and answer the questions
 write in reported speech
 identify and correct common errors
 interpret data and write a paragraph
 learn to prepare cover letter and resume
 make notes and write reports
149
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern
Mid Sem 1 Speaking 20 Part A 4 short answer questions

Listening Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary 20 Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
 Listen to a passage /conversation / dialogue / speech and answer the questions

 Group Discussions
 Seminars
 Review a movie
 Review a book
 Narrating a story
 Chain stories
 JAM
 Speak about incidents /events /memories /dreams /role model
 Interview with famous personalities
 Reading for main ideas and specific details
 Summarizing
 Picture description
 Writing a recipe
 Describing a process
 Giving directions using maps
 Surveys
150
 Filling forms
 e-mail etiquette
 Preparing reports on field visits, experiments, projects
Textbook: English for Polytechnics

(English Textbook for the First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Keep Talking by Friederike Klippel
5. More Grammar Games by Mario Rinvolucri and Paul Davis
6. Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy
7. Spoken English-A Self Learning Guide to Conversation Practice by V Sasi Kumar
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English(app)
9. mooc.org
151
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
152
Legend:
153
18M-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - I
Marks
PART-A 4X1=4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each question carries one mark.
1. I strongly recommend you to read this novel. (Rewrite the sentence using suitable words of
obligation).
2. Invite your friend to attend a seminar on Yoga.
3. Fill in the blanks using suitable prepositions.
a. I usually go to polytechnic _______ foot.
b. Suman has been suffering ___________ malaria.
4. Fill in the blanks using suitable preposition.

a. She is jealous ______________ her best friend.
b. Madhu jumped __________ the well.
PART-B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the followingquestions. Each question carries three marks.
5. a) Extend an invitation to your friend to attend your brother’s marriage and write
expressions showing his / her acceptance or inability.
Or
b) Give directions to your sister on how to reach the nearest branch office of State Bank of
India from your house.
6. a) Give directions to your house from polytechnic using at least three prepositions.
Or
b) Complete the paragraph using suitable prepositions.
We went _____the zoo ____ Sunday. We saw a python ____ a branch of a tree. There
were several parrots _______ the cages. In the zoo, we boarded a train that passed -
__________ a tunnel. There we saw a lion going ______ its cave.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
154
7. a) Write on how to send an image from your mobile to another mobile number using
WhatsApp.
Or
b) Write a dialogue to fix an appointment with an orthopedic surgeon on 5 th January at
10.00 a.m.
8. a) Use the following words or phrases in your own sentences.
i) across ii) against iii) in front of iv) since v) along
Or
b) Correct the words in italics.
i. I’ve got the key on my pocket.
ii. She was sitting among her two friends.
iii. There is a tree besides the house.
iv. I was born in Monday.
v. He came in the room.
155
18M-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - II
Marks
PART - A 4X1=4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each question carries one mark.
5. Write the synonym and antonym of lazy.

6. Write any two different forms of the word, ‘beauty’.
7. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.
a) She travelled to her village every week.
b) Raghu returned the money back.
8. Change as directed.
a) Sita said, “She is a teacher.” (Change it into indirect speech)
b) He told me that she was going to market. (Change it into direct speech.)
PART - B2 X 3 = 6
9. a. Write down the one word substitutes of the following.

a) A person who does not believe in God.
b) The study of planets.
c) A person who loves reading books.
(Or)
b. Write antonyms for the words in italics.

My friend Rani is young and attractive. She is very sharp and loves to eat fresh food.
10. a. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.

I go to college everyday by walk. I am getting up late every morning. I work very hardly.
(Or)
b. Change the following as directed.
i. He said to her, “I will teach you Chemistry today.” (Change it into Reported
speech)
ii. She said to him, “Take me to Central Library now.” (Change it into reported
speech)
iii. Gopal said to Mamatha, “ Please lend me your calculator.”
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
11. a) What are the five aspects you learn when you learn a new word?
156
(Or)
b) Suggest any five ways to improve your vocabulary.

12. a) Rewrite the following making necessary changes.
a. My luggage were in the store room.
b. The teacher stressed on the importance of team work.
c. My friend and I gone for a movie.
d. The team is loving the food.
e. I have three son –in –laws.
(Or)
b) Rewrite the following sentences as directed.
i. He said that he was not feeling well. (Change to direct speech).
ii. Amala said that she would visit us the next day. (Change to direct speech).
iii. She said that their team had won the match. (Change to direct speech).
iv. The teacher said, “Australia is an island.” (Change to reported speech).
v. She says, “They will help us.” (Change to reported speech).
157
18 M-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAM
Time : 2 Hours Total Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A 8X1=8
Instructions: Answer all questions.
Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill in the blanks with appropriate prepositions.
a) They went___ a walk.
b) He went to college____bus.
2. Write one word substitutes for the given meanings.
a) Study of planets.
b) Something that cannot be heard.
3. What will you write under achievements secton in your resume?
2. Fill in the blanks with words of obligation.
a) I ____wear a helmet when I drive a two wheeler.
b) We ____- respect our elders.
5. Answer the questions given in 5 and 6 after reading the passage,
Mammals are among the most successful animals to have lived. Because they are warm blooded,
they can survive in almost any environment. To take advantage of different environments
mammals have evolved different body shapes.
a) Why do mammals have different body shapes?
6. How can mammals survive in any environment?
3. Make notes for the given passage.
About 40 million years ago new kinds of primates — monkeys and apes—- began to take over
lemurs. Today, there are two groups of monkeys: the old world monkeys which live in Africa and
Asia and the New world monkeys which live only in Central America.
158
1. Write a short paragraph based
on the flowchart given.
Finding a lost
Item
Part -B 3 X4 = 12
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.
9.(a) Invite a celebrity to your college sports day. The celebrity accepts your invitation. Write a
conversation.
(Or)
(b) Answer the questions after reading the passage
There are almost 2,400 species of snake. From the 20 cm long thread snake to the gaint anaconda,
which can reach 36 feet. Snakes have many colours, patterns and ways of killing their prey. They eat
everything from ants, eggs , snails to animals as big as goats.
1. What is the largest snake?
2. What do snakes eat?
3. Are all snakes similar?
159
10 (a). Write three things you learn when you learn a new word?
OR
10 (b) Write a paragraph based on the tree diagram
11. (a). Read the following passage and answer the questions given in 11 a or 11 b
Humans communicate with each other everyday using sounds and body movements .Most
commonly , we share information about the world around us through spoken languages. These are in
special sounds we make to represent objects, actions, numbers, colours and other features. We use our
brains to remember words, put them in the correct order and make the larynx, or voice ,box,produce
the correct sounds. If a person is unable to speak they can communicate by using sign language. We
also have written and pictorial languages.
1. How do human beings communicate?
2. What is the larynx?
3. When do we use sign language?
(Or)
(b) 1. What do we use to remember words?
2. How do we share information?
3. What are some forms of communication mentioned in the passage ?
160
12 (a). Make notes for the given passage
Sleep is as important to healthy life style as eating and exercising. On an average healthy adult
requires just over eight hours of sleep at night. Yet polls show that the increasing numbers of people
are suffering from sleep disorder or significant sleep loss. A study shows that 29% of Indians sleep
only after midnight and 61% slept for seven hours or less. Sleep is crucial to maintain one’s health.
Without it, you increase your susceptibility to a wide range of health problems .including heart
disease, stroke, diabetes, obesity and depression. Not sleeping enough can affect the immune system.
The immune system works when you are asleep. That is when natural killer cells are generated in the
bone marrow. These killer cells help in protecting the body against the viruses, bacteria and even
cancer.
(Or)
12 (b) Write a paragraph based on the table given
Apes Country Habitat

Orangutan Sumatra live in trees
Gorilla Africa live on ground
Chimpanzee Africa live on ground
Part-C 5X4=20M
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks.
13(a) Take an appointment with a doctor for your grandmother.
(Or)
(b) Read the passage and answer the questions.
Reading skills are considered the most important tools for academic success. Printed materials
serve as a source of information and entertainment. Reading is an important activity in life with which
one can update one’s knowledge . Speech precedes reading and reading is the input for writing.
Reading is an active process which involves recognition and comprehension. A reader can understand
a text only when he or she uses his or her mental faculties. A reader should have the knowledge of the
writing system, the knowledge of the language , the ability to interpret , the knowledge of the world, a
reason for reading and a reading style.
1. What are the advantages of reading?
161
2. What comes before reading?
3. What does the process of reading involve?
4. What are the inputs required by a reader to read something?
5. What is the purpose of printed information?
14 (a). Correct the following sentences.
1. My friend like me very much.
2. This is the best if the two.
3. He sat among the two girls.
4. He is running daily.
5. This is the boy which won the race.
OR
(b) Write a cover letter applying for the post of a software engineer at an MNC.
15 ( a). Read the given passage and answer questions given in 15 a or 15 b
The first elephants were pig-sized creatures without tusks or trunks that lived in Northern Africa
about 150 million years ago. Today there are only two species of elephant: the Indian Elephant and the
African elephant - the largest mammal living on land. Both species live in family groups, which
sometimes join to from herds of hundreds of animals. Elephants spend upto twenty on hours a day
eating as much as 320kgs of leaves ,bark , fruit and grass. An adult elephant needs to drink 90 litres of
water a day. Elephants travel through forests on traditional paths called elephants’ roads .These
intelligent animals have good memories and can live for more than 60 years. Both Indian and African
elephants are endangered because humans take over their habitats for farming and poachers kill them
for their tusks.
1. What is the largest mammal on land?
2. What is an elephant road?
3. Which word in the passage means home?
4. Do elephants live alone?
5. Why are elephants killed?
(Or)
(b)
1. What do elephants eat?
162
2. How long does an elephant live?
3. Who is putting elephants in danger?
4. What was the size of the first elephants?
5. Elephants have tusks and_______.
16 (a). Write your resume for the post of an Assistant Engineer at TESCO Company.
(Or)
(b) Write a report about an industry you visited.
163
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18M-202F

SEMESTER : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15 : 0 ( in Periods ) Credits : 3 Credits
Programme : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary
school level and Basic Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 1st Semester level
CO 1 Formulate the equations of Straight Line, Circle and Conic Sections

CO 2 Evaluate the Limits of different Functions
CO 3 Determine the Derivatives of Various Functions
CO 4 Find the Successive Derivatives and Partial Derivatives of Functions
CO 5 Use Differentiation in Geometrical and Physical Applications
CO 6 Use Differentiation for finding Maxima and Minima.
Course Contents:
Co-ordinate geometry
Unit – I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
1. Straight lines: Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point
form, intercept form, normal form and general form - Find distance of a point from a line, acute
angle between two lines, intersection of two non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel
lines - perpendicular distance from a point to a line - Solve simple problems on the above forms
2. Circle: Define locus of a point, circle and its equation. Find equation of the Circle given (i) Centre
and radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter (iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non
collinear points and (v) Centre and tangent equation - general equation of a circle - finding
Centre, radius - tangent, normal to circle at a point on it - simple problems.
164
Unit – II Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
3. Conic Sections: Define a conic section, focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum – Find
equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity are given. Properties of parabola, ellipse
and hyperbola - standard forms with Vertex (Centre) at the Origin and Axis (Axes) along Co –
Ordinate Axes only – Simple Problems.
Differential Calculus
Unit-III Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
4. Functions & Limits : Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits
1
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1 ex 1
lim , lim , lim , lim , lim , lim (1  x) x ,
xa x  a x0 x x 0 x x 0 x x0 x x 0
( without proof ) -
x
 1 a x2  b x  c
lim 1   lim 2
x   x  - Simple Problems . Evaluate the limits of the type x  l  x   x   and
f ( x)
lim
x  g ( x)
5. Differentiation – I : Concept of derivative - definition from first principle as

f ( x  h)  f ( x )
lim
h0 h - different notations - derivatives of elementary functions like x n , ax, ex, log
x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cotx. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar
multiplication of functions - problems. Derivative of function of a function (Chain rule) with
illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) x2  1 (iv) .
165
Unit – IV
Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
6. Differentiation – II: Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions, derivative of a function with

respect to another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic, implicit
functions, logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives -
examples – functions of several variables – partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple
problems.
Applications of Derivatives:
Unit – V Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
7. Geometrical Applications: Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and

normal to a curve at any point on the curve. Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and
subnormal to the curve at any point on it. Angle between two intersecting curves - problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
8. Physical Applications: Physical applications of the derivative – Explain the derivative as a rate
of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and acceleration of a moving particle
with examples. Explain the derivative as a rate measure in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples– Simple Problems.
9. Maxima & Minima: Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and
decreasing functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to
applications of maxima and minima.
References
1. Co - Ordinate Geometry – by S.L. Loney
2. Thomas Calculus, Pearson Addison – Wesley Publications
3. Calculus – I by Shanti Narayan and Manicavachagam Pillai, S.V Publications.
4. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI,XII.
5. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (Telugu Academy)

166
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net
Coordinate Geometry
Unit – I
1.0 Solve the problems on Straight lines
1.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point form, intercept
form, normal form and general form
1.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms
1.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two
non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
2.0 Solve the problems on Circles

2.1 Define locus of a point, circle and its equation.
2.2 Find the equation of a circle given
(i) Centre and radius
(ii) Two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference
(iv) Three non collinear points
(v) Centre and tangent
2.3 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
2.4 Write the equation of tangent and normal at a point on the circle.
2.5 Solve the problems to find the equations of tangent and normal.
Unit – II
3.0 Appreciate the properties of Conics in engineering applications
3.1 Define a conic section.
3.2 Understand the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic with
illustrations.
3.3 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given
3.4 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola
3.5 Solve problems in simple cases of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola.
167
Differential Calculus
UNIT - III
4.0 Use the concept of Limit for solving the problems

lim f ( x)  l
xa
4.1 Understand the concept of limit and meaning of and state the properties of
limits.
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1
lim , lim , lim , lim ,
xa x  a x0 x x 0 x x 0 x
4.2 Mention the Standard limits
1 x
ex 1  1
lim , lim (1  x) x , lim 1  
x0 x x 0 x   x  (All without proof).
4.3 Solve the problems using the above standard limits
a x2  b x  c f ( x)
lim 2 lim
x l  x   x   x  g ( x )
4.4 Evaluate the limits of the type and
5.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations

5.1 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle as
f ( x  h)  f ( x )
lim
h0 h and also provide standard notations to denote the derivative of a function.
5.2 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
5.3 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like x n , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx,
Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
5.4 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.
5.5 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication, product and
quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
5.6 Understand the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule) with
illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2 2 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) x 1 (iv) .
Unit – IV
6.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations
6.1 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples.
168
6.2 Understand the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another function and
also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
6.3 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.

6.4 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with examples.
6.5 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with examples
like [f(x)]g(x).
6.6 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third order with
examples.
6.7 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and difference
between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
6.8 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n
6.9 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple problems.
Applications of Differentiation
UNIT - V
7.0 Understand the Geometrical Applications of Derivatives

7.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the curve
y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
7.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the equation of
tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
7.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on the curve
y=f(x) .
7.4 Explain the concept of angle between two curves and procedure for finding the angle
between two given curves with illustrative examples.
Unit – VI
8.0 Understand the Physical Applications of Derivatives

8.1 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and
acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
8.2 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
9.0 Use Derivatives to find extreme values of functions
9.1 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
9.2 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or decreasing
with illustrative examples.
169
9.3 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of
single variable - simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
9.4 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes, etc.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
@@@
170
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
171
: C18-M-202F
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER

Marks: 20
PART-A

04
1. Find the slope of the straight line 3x + 4y + 9 = 0

2. Write the equation of circle whose centre (h,k) and radius r given.
3. Define conic section.
x2 y2
4. Find the Length of major and minor axes of the Ellipse + =1
16 9
PART-B
. 5 a) Find the distance between parallel lines 2x + 3y + 5 =0 and 2x + 3y + 9 = 0

Or
5 b) Find the centre and radius of the circle x 2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0.
6 a) Find the vertex , focus ,equation of directrix and length of latus-rectum of the parabola
y2 = 20x
Or
172
x2 y2
6 b) Find the centre, vertices and foci of Ellipse + =1
25 16
PART C
7 a) Find the angle between the lines 2x – y + 3 = 0 and x + y – 2 = 0
Or
7b) Find the equation of the Circle passing through the points (0, 0), (1,0) and (0,2)
8 a) Find the equation of the Parabola with focus at (2 , -3 ) and whose directrix is
3x – 4y + 16 = 0
Or
8 b) Find the Centre,Vertices, Eccentricity, Foci, Lengths of axes, Length of Latus Rectum,
x2 y2
and equations of directrices of the Hyperbola − =1
16 9
@@@
173
C18-M-202F
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER

Marks: 20
PART-A

04

3 2
Lt 29xx −3
2
x +1
+ 8 x +7
1. Evaluate x →0
3
2. Differentiate x + Tanx w.r.t. x
3. Differentiate log(sinx) w.r.t x
∂u
4. Find ifU =x 3+ y 3
∂x
PART-B
1+2+3+… .+ n
5 a). Evaluate ; lim
n→∞ ( n2 )
Or
174
dy
5 b). If y = ex.cotx, find dx
dy
6 a). Find ifx=at 2 , y =2 at .
dx
Or
dy
6 b) If x2 + y2 + 3xy = 7, then find dx
PART C
dy 1+ x 2
log
7 a). Find dx , If y = 1−x 2
Or
7 b) Differentiate log[log(logx)] w. r. t. x
8 a). If y=sin ( logx ) , provet h at x 2 y 2 + x y1 + y =0.
Or
x 2+ y2 ∂u ∂u
8 b) If U =sin−1 ( x+ y )t h enprovet h atx
∂x
+y
∂y
=tanu
@@@
175
C18-M202F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
II SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 hours [Total Marks:
40]
PART-A

08
9. Write the intercept form of a straight line ax +by +c=0

x 3−8
10. Evaluate lim
x →2 x−2
11. Write the conditions for an increasing function and a decreasing function of f (x) in the
interval [ a , b ]
12. Write the equation of a circle whose centre is ( h , k ) and radius is r .
13. Write the slope of a curve y=f ( x ) at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) .
14. Define Orthogonal curves.
15. Write the conditions for a point to be a maximum point on the curve y=f ( x ) .
16. Write the quantities to denote the rate of change of volume and area with respect to t.
PART-B
176
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 = 12
9(a). Find the perpendicular distance of the point (2, 4) from the line 4 x−3 y−6=0.
OR
9(b). Find the length of the tangent to the curve y=x 2 +2 x+1 at (1,4).
10(a). Differentiate log ⁡(tanx) with respect to x.
OR
1 3 2
10 (b). A particle is moving along a line such that s= t −3t +8 t+5. Find its velocity and
3
acceleration at t=2 sec .
11 (a). Find the equation of the normal to the curve y 2=16 x at (2,4).
OR
11 (b). Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y=x 3−2 x +5 at (1,4).
12 (a). Find the rate of change of Area of the circle with respect to the radius when r =6 cm.
OR
12 (b). Find the maximum value of 2 x3 −9 x 2+12 x+ 5.
PART C

20
13(a). Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (3, -4) and directrix is the
line x− y +5=0.
OR
13 (b). Find the angle between the curves y 2=2 x , x + y = 8 at their point of intersection
(2, 2)
dy
14 (a). Find , ifx=a ( θ−sinθ ) , y=a ( 1−cosθ ) .
dx
177
OR
14 (b). The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them if their product is maximum
15(a). Find the lengths of the normal, subtangent and subnormal to the curve
y=x 3−3 x +2 at ( 0,2 ) .
OR
2 k
15 (b). show that the curves y =xandy = cut at right angles if 8 k 2−1=0.
x
16 (a). A circular metal plate expands by heat so that its radius is increasing at the rate of 0.02
cm/sec. At what rate its area is increasing when the radius is 10 cms.
OR
16 (b). A wire of length 40 cm is bent so that to has to form a rectangle. Find the maximum area
that can be enclosed by the wire
Applied Physics
Course Title Applied Physics Course Code 18M-203F

Semester II Course Group Foundation
Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture+Tutorial Total Contact 60
Periods
Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the role
of Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching

Periods
Apply knowledge of waves and sound in engineering

CO 1 problems. PO1,PO2 10
CO 2 Apply knowledge of Simple Harmonic Motion to solve PO1, PO2 10
178
PO1,
CO 3 Use modern instruments in engineering PO2,PO3, 10
PO4
PO1,
CO 4 Use various magnetic materials in engineering equipments 10
PO2,PO3
PO1,
Use various electrical measuring instruments as tools in
CO 5 PO2,PO3,P 10
engineering
O4
PO1,
CO 6 Apply Electronics principles in engineering problems PO2,PO3,P 10
O4
APPLIED PHYSICS
Course Contents
1. UNIT – 1 WAVES AND SOUND Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T:

2.5)
Wave motion – definition and characteristics – audible range – infrasonic and ultrasonic –
longitudinal and transverse waves – examples – Relation between wavelength, frequency and
velocity of a wave – derivation –stationary waves- beats - applications of beats - Doppler
effect – list the applications – ultrasound and radar in medicine and engineering as special
emphasis- echo –definition - applications - relation between time of echo and distance of
obstacle –derivation- Reverberation and time of reverberation - Sabine’s formula - Free and
forced vibrations - Resonance - Conditions of good auditorium - noise pollution – definition
– causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution - problems
2. UNIT – 2 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T:

2.5)
Periodic motion - Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)– definition - examples - Conditions for
SHM –Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM - Expressions for
Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing SHM – derivations - Time
period, frequency, amplitude and phase of a particle in SHM - Ideal simple pendulum – time
period of simple pendulum –derivation - laws of simple pendulum-Seconds pendulum-
problems.
3. UNIT – 3 MODERN PHYSICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T:

2.5)
179
Photo electric effect - Einstein’s photo electric equation – Work function and threshold
frequency - laws of photo electric effect - applications of photo electric effect – photo cell -
concept of Refraction of light - critical angle and total internal reflection - principle of
Optical fiber - Applications of optical fiber – LASER – definition and characteristics –
principle of LASER - spontaneous emission and stimulated emission - population inversion -
examples of LASER – Uses.
4. UNIT-4 MAGNETISM Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T:

2.5)
Magnetic field - magnetic lines of force -properties - Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field
– Magnetic length, pole strength – magnetic induction field strength- definition - Coulomb’s
inverse square law of magnetism - expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in
a uniform magnetic field – derivation - expression for magnetic induction field strength at a
point on the axial line of a bar magnet –derivation - Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials –
examples - related problems.
5. UNIT-5 ELECTRICITY AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T:
2.5)
Ohm’s law – Ohmic and non ohmic conductors – examples - Temperature dependence of
resistance – coefficients of resistance with examples - Specific resistance – units –
conductance- series and parallel combination of resistors - moving coil galvanometer -
conversion of galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter with diagram (qualitatively) –
Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity – Expression for balancing condition of
Wheatstone’s bridge – derivation – Meter bridge –working with neat diagram –
Superconductivity-definition-superconductors - definition and examples – applications -
related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 ELECTRONICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T:

2.5)
Solids – definition – energy bands in solids- valence band, conduction band and forbidden
band – Energy band diagram of conductors, insulators and semiconductors – concept of Fermi
level - Intrinsic semiconductors - examples - Concept of holes in semiconductors - Doping -
Extrinsic semiconductor - P-type and N-type semiconductors - PN Junction diode – Forward
Bias and Reverse Bias - Applications of PN diode - Diode as rectifier – principle – principle
of Light Emitting Diode and solar cell.
References:
5. Engineering Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
6. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
7. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
8. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
180
Suggested learning outcomes:
1. know the concept of Waves and Sound
1.1 Define wave. Explain the characteristics of a wave (frequency, wavelength, amplitude, time
period).
1.2 Explain audibility range of sound.
1.3 Define infrasonic and ultrasonic sounds.
1.4 Define longitudinal and transverse wave motion. Write examples for each. Distinguish
between them.
1.5 Derive the relation between wavelength, frequency and velocity of a wave (v ꞊ nλ)
1.6 Define stationary waves.
1.7 Explain the phenomenon of beats. List the applications of beats.
1.8 Explain Doppler Effect. List the applications of Doppler Effect.
1.9 Application of Doppler Effect in medicine and engineering - ultrasound and radar.
1.10 Define echo. List the applications of echo.
1.11 Derive the relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.
1.12 Explain Reverberation and time of reverberation.
1.13 Write Sabine’s formula and explain the terms.
1.14 Define free and forced vibrations.
1.15 Define resonance with examples.
1.16 State the conditions of a good auditorium.
1.17 Define noise pollution.
1.18 List the causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution.
2. know the concept of Simple Harmonic Motion
2.1 Define periodic motion.

2.2 Define Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM).
2.3 List the examples of SHM.
2.4 State the conditions of simple harmonic motion.
2.5 Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM.
2.6 Define the terms time period, frequency, amplitude and phase of particle in SHM.
2.7 Derive the expressions for Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing in
SHM.
2.8 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive the expression for time period of simple pendulum.
2.9 State the laws of simple pendulum.
2.10 Define seconds pendulum.
3. know the concept of Modern Physics
3.1 Explain Photo electric effect.
181
3.2 Define the terms work function and threshold frequency.
3.3 State Einstein’s photo electric equation and explain the terms.
3.4 State laws of photo electric effect.
3.5 List the applications of photo electric effect.
3.6 Explain working of photocell.
3.7 Explain the concept of refraction of light.
3.8 Define critical angle.
3.9 Define Total internal reflection.
3.10 State conditions for Total internal reflection.
3.11 Explain principle and working of optical fiber.
3.12 List the applications of optical fiber.
3.13 Define LASER. State the characteristics of LASER.
3.14 Explain the principle of LASER.
3.15 Define spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3.16 Define population inversion.
3.17 List the examples of LASER.
3.18 List the uses of LASER.
4 know the concept of Magnetism
4.1 Define magnetic field.

4.2 Define magnetic lines of force.
4.3 State the properties of magnetic lines of force.
4.4 Define Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field.
4.5 Define the terms magnetic length and pole strength of a bar magnet.
4.6 Define magnetic induction field strength.
4.7 State and explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
4.8 Derive the expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field.
4.9 Derive the formula for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line of a bar
magnet.
4.10 Define Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials with examples.
5 know the concept of Electricity and measuring instruments
5.1 State Ohm’s law – Define ohmic and non ohmic conductors with examples
5.2 Explain temperature dependence of resistance – types of temperature coefficients with
examples
5.3 Define specific resistance. Write its units.
5.4 Define conductance.
5.5 Write the formulae for effective resistance in series and parallel combination of resistors with
diagram.
5.6 Explain moving coil galvanometer.
5.7 Conversion of a galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter. Explain with diagram.
5.8 State and explain Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity.
5.9 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
5.10 Explain briefly Meter Bridge with neat diagram.
5.11 Define superconductivity.
5.12 Define superconductor. Give examples.
5.13 List the applications of superconductors.
182
6 know the concepts of Electronics and applications
6.1 Define solid.

6.2 Define valence band, conduction band and forbidden band in solids.
6.3 Explain conductors, insulators and semiconductors on the basis of energy band diagram.
6.4 Explain the concept of Fermi level.
6.5 Define intrinsic semiconductors.
6.6 List the examples for intrinsic semiconductors.
6.7 Explain the concept of hole in semiconductors.
6.8 Define doping.
6.9 Define extrinsic semiconductors.
6.10 Explain P-type and N-type semiconductors.
6.11 Explain PN Junction Diode (formation only).
6.12 Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode (biasing and flow of majority and minority
carriers with diagram only)
6.13 List the applications of PN Diode.
6.14 Explain the principle of diode as a rectifier.
6.15 Explain working principle of Light Emitting Diode (LED)
6.16 Explain the working principle of solar cell.
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
183
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

C-18 M-203F

MIDSEM – I
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first
attempted question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

5. Write the Sabine’s formula.

6. Define longitudinal wave.
7. Define Second’s pendulum.
8. Define SHM.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)
184
5 (a). Write any three applications of Beats.

(OR)
(b). Write any three effects of noise pollution.
6 (a). Write the conditions for SHM.

(OR)
(b). The displacement of a particle executing SHM is given by
Y=8Sin( πt + π /4 ) m. Find i) Amplitude ii) Angular velocity
and iii) Time period
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Derive relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.

(OR)
(b). State five conditions of a good auditorium.
8 (a). Derive the expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

(OR)
(b). Derive the expressions for velocity and acceleration of a particle in SHM.
*** ** ***
C-18 M-203F
MIDSEM – II
APPLIED PHYSICS
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Define photoelectric effect.

2. Define total internal reflection.
3. Define magnetic field.
4. Write the formula for magnetic moment of a bar magnet.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)
185
5 (a). State three laws of photo electric effect.

(OR)
(b). Distinguish between spontaneous and stimulated emission.
6 (a). Write three properties of magnetic lines of force.

(OR)
(b). Explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Explain the principle of LASER.

(OR)
(b). Explain working principle of optical fiber.
8 (a). Derive the formula for moment of couple acting on a bar magnet placed in uniform
magnetic field.
(OR)
(b). Derive the expression for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
of a bar magnet.
** *** **
.C18 – M 203F

MODEL PAPER
M – II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks:

40
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=08

1. Define an echo.
2. Write any two uses of optical fiber.
3. State Ohm’s law.
4. Write any two laws of Reflection.
186
5. Write SI unit of specific resistance
6. Define non ohmic conductors and give one example.
7. Define Fermi level.
8. Write any two advantages of LED’s.
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

9(a). Derive V= nλ.

(or)
9(b). Explain the temperature dependence of resistance on conductor.
10(a). Explain photo cell with neat diagram.

(or)
10(b). Define magnetic induction field strength, write its formula and SI unit.
11(a). State and explain Kirchhoff’s voltage law.

(or)
11(b). Write any three applications of Superconductors.
12(a). Explain principle of diode as a rectifier.

(or)
12(b). Write any three applications of p-n diode.
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

13(a). Derive the relation between time of an echo and distance obstacle
(or)
13(b). Derive the expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge.
14(a). Explain working principle of optical fiber with neat diagram.

(or)
14(b). Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode.
15(a). Explain briefly with neat diagram .

(or)
15(b). Explain moving coil galvanometer.
16(a). Explain the working principle of LED with neat diagram.

(or)
16(b). Explain the working principle of solar cell.
187
*** ** ***
Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies

Course Title Engineering Chemistry Course Code 18M-204F
and Environmental
Studies
Semester II Course Group Foundation
Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Prerequisite:
Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.
Course Objectives: After studying this course the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome:
On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain below Course
Outcomes (CO):
188
CO Course outcome CL Linked Teaching
PO periods
CO1 Understand and explain the different metallurgical R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10

processes, alloys and applications of alloys
CO2 Understand and explain corrosion and preventive methods R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10
of corrosion
CO3 List out the different methods of preparation and industrial R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7, 12
uses of plastics, rubber and fibers. vulcanization of rubber 10
and its applications
CO4 Classify the fuels and explain basic terms of fuel, outline R/U/A 1,2,10 8
the composition and industrial use of gaseous fuels
CO5 Understand and Explain Galvanic cell, emf of cell -electro R/U/A 1,2,5 12
chemical series-Applications of Galvanic cells, batteries
and cells and distinguish the Galvanic and electrolytic cell
CO6 Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of air R/U/A 1,2,5,7 8
and water pollutions.
Total Periods 60
Legends: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT - I: Metallurgy: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Characteristics of Metals - distinguish between Metals and Non Metals- Ore, Gangue, Flux, Slag -
Concentration of Ore -Froth floatation - Methods of Extraction of crude Metal - Roasting, Calcination,
Smelting – Alloys-purpose of making alloys - Composition of Brass, German silver, Nichrome,
Stainless steel and Duralumin
UNIT – II: Corrosion: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Introduction - factors influencing the rate of corrosion - electrochemical theory of corrosion -

composition, stress and concentration cells- rusting of iron and its mechanism - prevention of
corrosion - coating methods, Paints-constituents and characteristics of paints-cathodic protection.
UNIT – III: Polymers: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)
Introduction - polymerization - types of polymerization - addition, condensation with examples -

plastics - types of plastics - advantages of plastics over traditional materials - Disadvantages of using
plastics - preparation and uses of the following plastics: 1. Polythene 2. PVC 3.Teflon 4.
189
Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite - Rubber - Elastomers –Preparartionof Butyl rubber,
Buna-s, Neoprene rubber and their uses-Fibres-Preparation and uses of fibres-Nylon 6,6-Polyester.
UNIT – IV: Fuels: 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0)

Definition and classification of fuels- characteristics of good fuel - Calorific value-HCV and LCV-
Calculation of oxygen required for combustion of methane and ethane - composition and uses of
gaseous fuels- a) water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas
and f) acetylene.
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)
Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential –electro chemical series -emf of cell-Batteries-Types of
batteries-Fuel cells.
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II : 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0)
Introduction- classification of air pollutants based on origin and states of matter-Air pollution -
causes-Effects - control methods - Water pollution - causes - effects - control measures.
Reference Books:
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – DhanpatRai Publishing Company.
2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
UNIT – I: METALLURGY
1.1. List the Characteristics of Metals.
1.2. Distinguish between Metals and Non Metals
1.3. Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux and 5.Slag
1.4. Describe Froth Floatation method of concentration of ore.
1.5. Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
1.6. Define an Alloy
1.7. Explain the purpose of making of alloys
1.8. Write the Composition of the following alloys:1.Brass, 2.German silver, 3.Nichrome
4. Stainless steel, 5. Duralumin
1.9. List the uses of following Alloys: Brass, German silver, Nichrome, Stainless steel,
Duralumin
UNIT – II: CORROSION

2.1. Define the term corrosion
2.2. Explain the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
2.3. Explain the concept of electrochemical theory of corrosion
2.4. Describe the formation of a) composition cell, b) stress cell c) concentration cell
2.5. Define rust and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical reactions.
2.6. Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion:
190
a) Protective Coatings i) Metallic coatings (Anodic and cathodic coatings) ii) Inorganic
coatings iii) Organic coatings, paint,constituent of paint and characteristics of good paint.
b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed - voltage process).
UNIT – III: POLYMERS

3.1. Explain the concept of polymerization
3.2. Describe the methods of polymerization a) addition polymerization
b) condensation polymerization with examples.
3.3. Define the term plastic
3.4. List the Characteristics of plastics.
3.5. State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials
3.6. State the disadvantages of using plastics.
3.7. Types of plastics with examples.
3.8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics
3.9. Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4.Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite
(only flow chart for Bakelite i.e. without chemical equations).
3.10. Define the term natural rubber
3.11. Explain preparation of natural rubber
3.12. State the structural formula of Natural rubber
3.13. List the Characteristics of natural rubber
3.14. Explain the process of Vulcanization
3.15. List the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber
3.16. Define the term Elastomer
3.17. Describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic rubbers a) Butyl rubber,
b) Buna-s and c) Neoprene rubber.
3.18. Define fibre.
3.19. Explain the preparation and uses of fibres –Nylon 6,6 and Polyester
UNIT – IV: FUELS
4.1. Define the term fuel
4.2. Classify the fuels based on physical state - solid, liquid and gaseous fuels with examples.
4.3. Classify the fuels based on occurrence- primary and secondary fuels with examples.
4.4. List the characteristics of a good fuel
4.5. Advantages of gaseous fuels
4.6. Define Calorific value- HCV and LCV.
4.7. Calculate the oxygen required for the combustion of Methane and Ethane fuel gases.
4.8. State the composition and uses of the following gaseous fuels:
a) water gas, b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas and f) acetylene
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force

5.1. Define Galvanic cell
5.2. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell
5.3. Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.4. Explain standard electrode potential
5.5. Explain standard hydrogen electrode
5.6. Define electrochemical series and explain its significance.
5.7. Define and explain emf of a cell.
5.8. Solve the numerical problems on emf of cell
5.9. Explain Batteries (Cells) and types of batteries with examples –working and applications of
Dry cell (Leclanche cell), Lead storage battery, Ni-Cd cell
5.10. Explain working and advantages of Fuel cell (Hydrogen - Oxygen Fuel Cell)
191
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II
6.1. Define air pollution
6.2. Classify the air pollutants- based on origin and states of matter
6.3. Explain the causes of air pollution
6.4. Explain the effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals
6.5. Explain the green house effect - ozone layer depletion and acid rain
6.6. Explain the methods of control of air pollution
6.7. Define water pollution
6.8. Explain the causes of water pollution
6.9. Explain the effects of water pollution on living and non living things
6.10. Explain the methods of control of water pollution.
Suggested Student Activities for Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
E learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
192
193
Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
194
18M-204F
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks:

20
PART – A
marks
9. Define the terms mineral and ore.

10. Define an alloy.
11. Define corrosion.
12. What is paint?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
13. a. List any six characteristics of metals.

or
b. Explain the process of roasting of ore with an example.
14. a. List any six factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
or
b. Explain the formation of stress cell with an example.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
15. a. Explain the froth floatation process of concentration of ore .

or
b. Write the composition and uses of Brass, German silver .
16. a. Explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical equations.
or
b. Explain sacrificial anode method of prevention of corrosion with a neat diagram.
195
18M-204F
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM –II
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks :

20
PART – A
marks
1. What is the chemical name of natural rubber?

2. Define polymerization.
3. What are fuels?
4. Mention any two characteristics of good fuel.
PART – B
5. a. Write any three advantages of plastics over traditional materials.

or
b. Write a method of preparation and uses of Nylon-6,6 .
6. a. Define colorific value and differentiate lower and higher calorific values.
or
b. Classify the fuels based on their physical state.
PART – C
7. a. What is vulcanization of rubber and explain with chemical equations.

or
b. Distinguish thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics.
8. a. Write the composition and uses of water gas and producer gas.
or
b. Calculate the mass and volume of the oxygen required for the complete combustion of 8
grams of CH4.
196
C-18M-204F
II SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks :

40
PART – A
marks
1. Define gangue.
2. What are the different types of plastics?
3. Define Galvanic cell.
4. What is the chemical formula of rust?
5. What is electrochemical series?
6. What are the different types of batteries?
7. Define air pollution.
8. Define water pollution.
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 4 x 3 =12
Marks
9. a. Write any three differences between metals and non-metals.

or
b. Write any three significances of electrochemical series.
10. a. Write a method of preparation and two uses of polystyrene.
or
b. Classify the pollutants based on origin and give examples.
11. a. Write any three differences between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
or
b. Write the electrode reaction of lead storage battery during discharging.
197
12. a. Write a short note on Green house effect.
or
b. Write a note on Ozone layer depletion.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 4 x 5 =20
Marks
13. a. Explain the formation of composition cell and stress cell.

or
b. Describe the construction and working principle of Leclanche cell.
14. a. Calculate the mass and volume of oxygen required for the complete combustion of 15 gm
of
ethane( C2H6).
or
b. Explain the causes of water pollution.
15. a. Explain the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell.
or
b. Explain working principle of H2-O2 fuel cell.
16. a. Explain the control methods of water pollution.
Or
b. Explain the causes of air pollution.
198
199
ADVANCED WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY
Course Title : Advanced Work shop Course Code 18M-205C

Technology
Semester II Course Group :Core
Teaching Scheme in 45:15:0 Credits :3
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Periods : : 60 Periods
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Mathematics at Secondary school level
Course outcomes
At the end of course student should be able to

CO1 : Identify and select drilling machines for different drilling operations
CO2 : Select foundry tools, patterns for casting processes

CO3 : Describe special casting methods
CO4 : explain mechanical working of metals and describe hot working and cold working processes
CO5 : Compare hot working and cold working
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-1 Duration: Periods 10 (L: 07 – T:03)
1.0 Drilling Machines

Introduction, Working principle of drilling, Type of drilling machines: sensitive & radial and their
constructional detail and specifications.
2.0 Drills and Drilling operations

Drill bits: Types, Terminology - geometry of twist drill - functions of drill elements, Operations:
Drilling, reaming, boring, counter boring, counter sinking, tapping, spot facing and trepanning.
3.0 Foundry
200
Introduction: Development of foundry as a manufacturing process, advantages and
limitations of casting over other manufacturing processes. Foundry equipment: Hand moulding
tools: shovel, riddle, rammers, trowels, slicks, lifter, strike - off bar, sprue pin bellow, swab, gate
cutter, mallet, vent rod, draw spike, rapping plate or lifting plate, pouring weight, gagger, clamps,
spirit level, moulding boxes, snap box & flash box., Sands: Properties of moulding sand - porosity,
flowability, collapsibility, adhesiveness, cohesiveness and refractoriness. Types of moulding sand :
green sand, dry sand, loam sand, facing sand, backing sand, parting sand, core sand, system sand-
their ingredients and uses.
4.0 Pattern - Making

Materials for pattern such as wood, cast Iron, aluminium, brass, plastics their uses and relative
advantages, classification of patterns such as solid (one piece), two piece and three pieces, split
patterns, gate patterns and shell patterns, sequence in pattern making, pattern allowances and colour
codes. Cores: Need of cores, types of cores.
UNIT-5 Duration: Periods 06 (L: 4.2 –

T:1.8)
5.0 Casting methods

Casting: green sand and dry sand moulding, cement bonded moulding, Shell moulding, ceramic
moulding, defects in casting and their remedies
Special casting processes: (Principles and applications only) die casting- hot chamber and cold
Chamber , centrifugal casting, CO2 process, Investment casting
UNIT-6 Duration: Periods 14 (L: 9.8 –

T:4.2)
6.0 Mechanical working of metals

Introduction: Hot working and cold working, Hot working processes: rolling - types
of rolling, two high mill, three high mills, four high mills, piercing or seamless tubing,
drawing or cupping, spinning, extrusion - direct or forward extrusion, indirect or backward
extrusion, tube extrusion, Impact extrusion. Effects of hot working of metals, advantages &
limitations of hot working of metals. Cold working process: Rolling, drawing - wire drawing,
tube drawing, bending, roll forming, angle bending, spinning, extrusion, squeezing, cold
heading, thread rolling, peening. Effects of cold working of metals, advantages & limitations
of cold working.
Suggested learning outcomes
201
1.1 Understand the concept of drilling
1.1 State the working principle of drilling.
1.2 List out different types of drilling machines.
1.3 Draw the line diagrams of the sensitive and radial drilling
machines.
1.4 Identify the parts of these machines.
1.5 Describe the functions of each part.
1.6 Write the Specifications of drilling machines.
2.1. Understand drill bits and drilling operations
2.2. Types of drill bits and materials
2.3. Write nomenclature of drill bit
2.4. Write the geometry of twist drill.
2.5. List the functions of twist drill elements.

2.6. List and explain the different operations on drilling machine.
3.0 Understand the concept of Foundry

3.1. Acquaint with foundry as a manufacturing process.
3.2. State the advantages of casting over other process.
3.3. State the limitations of the process.
3.4. List the various hand moulding tools.
3.5. State the properties of good moulding sand.
3.6. State the types of moulding sands.
3.7. List the ingredients in foundry sand.
4.1. Pattern - making

4.2. List the various types of patterns.
4.3. State the sequence of pattern making operations.
4.4. Identify the colour codes.
4.5. List the various moulding processes.
4.6. State the need and types of cores.
202
5.1. Casting methods
5.2. Explain green sand moulding
5.3. Explain dry sand moulding
5.4. Explain shell moulding
5.5. Explain cement bonded moulding
5.6. Explain ceramic moulding
5.7. Explain defects in casting and their remedies
5.8. Expalin principles and applications of
a) Co2 casting
b) Investment casting
c) Die casting
d) Centrifugal casting
6.1. Mechanical working of metals
6.2. Define mechanical working of metals.
6.3. Differentiate cold working with hot working.

6.4. Illustrate the working principle of hot rolling, piercing,
spinning, extrusion and drawing.
6.5. State advantages and limitations of hot working.
6.6. Identify various cold working processes such as rolling,

bending and squeezing.
6.7. State advantages and limitations of cold working.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Production Technology by Jain & Gupta (Khanna Publishers)

2. Elementary Workshop Technology by Hazra Chowdary & Bhattacharya
(Media Promotors)
3. Manufacturing Technology (Vol I ) by P N Rao (Mc Graw Hill)
3. Workshop Technology Vol I & II by Raghuvamshi
Linked Teaching
Course Outcome CL periods
PO
CO1 Identify and select drilling machines for different
R/U 1,2,9,10 20
drilling operations
CO2 Select foundry tools, patterns for casting processes 1,2,9,10 20
R/U
CO3 Describe special casting methods R/U 1,2,9 6
Explain mechanical working of metals and describe
CO4 R/U 1,2,5,7 12
hot working and cold working processes
CO5 Compare hot working and cold working R/U/A 1,2,5 2
Total 60
203
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
204
18M-205C
State Board Of Technical Education And Training, Telangana, Hyderabad
Advanced Workshop Technology
Mid Sem-1
Time: 1 hours Total marks:20
PART-A
4x1=4Marks
Note: Answer ALL the Questions. Each question carries One mark.
1. List out the various types of drilling machines?
2. Write the difference between Drilling & Reaming
3. What is the function of Clamps & T-Bolts?
4. Draw a sketch of strike off bar.
PART-B
Note: Answer any Two Questions.Each question carries Six marks 2x3=6
Marks
5. A) Explain different types of drills

or
B) Define the following operations a) Sport Facing
b) Counter Boring
c) Trepanning
6. A) Draw a neat sketch of “Twist Drill” Show various parts.
or
B). Write the specifications of a drilling machine
PART-B
Answer the following, Each question carries five marks 2x5=10 Mark
7. A) Draw a neat linediagram of radial drilling machine and label its parts.
or
B) List the work holding devices used on drilling machine, Explain any four with neat sketch.
205
8.A) Draw a line diagram of sensitive drilling machine ,and label the parts.
or
B) Explain the Tool Holding devices used on drilling machine.
18M-205C
State Board Of Technical Education And Training, Telangana, Hyderabad
Advanced Workshop Technology
Mid Sem-I1
Time: 1 hour Total marks:20
PART-A 4x1=4Marks
Note: Answer ALL the Questions. Each question carries One mark.
1. What is foundry?
2. What is the use of vent rod in foundry?
3. What is the use of cores in foundry?
4. Name the materials used for manufacturing patterns.
PART-B 2x3=6Marks
Note: Answer any two questions.Each question carries 3 marks.
5. a). What is backing sand and parting sand?
OR
b). Define a flowability and collapsibility.
6. a). Write short note about investment casting.
OR
b). What is the application of shell moulding process?
PART-C
Answer the following, Each question carries marks 2x5=10Marks
7. a) i). Define ii). Adhesiveness iii). Cohesiveness iv). Refractoriness
OR
b) Write short notes on following pattern allowances. i) Shrinkage allowance ii) Machining allowance
206
8. a). Write short note on Loom sand and facing sand?
OR
b). Write short note on gated pattern?
C18-M-205C
Model Paper
DME SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
ADVANCED WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY

___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
08X01=08
Instructions : 1. Answer ALLquestions.

5. List out various types of drilling machines.

6. State the advantages of casting process?
7. Define cold working of metals.
8. What is ment by drilling .
9. What is moulding ?
10. Write any two safety precautions in foundry shop
11. State two advantages of hot working
12. State two limitations of cold working
PART-B
04X03=12
Instructions : 1. Answer anyFOUR questions.

9.(a)What are the different work holding devices used on drilling machine
(or)
9. (b)What are the common defects of casting?
10. (a)List out the different tools and equipment’s used in foundry shop
(or)
10. (b)Write the difference between hot working and cold working process
207
11. (a)State the advantages of loam sand
(or)
11. (b)Write the difference between dry sand mould and green sand mould
12. (a)List out the methods of cold working

(or)
12. (b)List different types of Hot working process
PART-C
04X5=20

13. (a)Explain sensitive drilling machine with neat sketch

(or)
13. (b)Explain the investment casting.
14. (a)List the different types of cores and explain any two with neat sketch
(or)
14. (b)Explain HOT rolling process with neat sketch
15. (a)Explain shell moulding with a neat sketch

(or)
15. (b)Explain Die casting method with a neat sketch
16. (a)Explain tube drawing process with neat sketch.

(or)
16. (b)Explain direct and indirect extrusion processes with neat sketches
*****
208
Advanced Engineering Drawing
Advanced Engineering
Drawing
Semester II Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme
in Periods 15:0:30 Credits 1.5
(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + practice 45 Periods
Periods :
***This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Level Offered by State Board of
Technical Education – Telangana State
Prerequisites: Knowledge of Basic Engineering Drawing and Clear visualization and sound pictorial
intelligence to learn this course.
This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these skills in
preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.

R U A
Unit
Name of the Unit
No Periods PART-B (6
PART-A (2 Marks
Marks
Questions)
Questions)
1 Projection of Solids 10 Q1 Q9(a)
2 Sectional Views 08 Q2 Q9(b)
3 Auxiliary views 08 Q3 Q10(a)
4 Pictorial drawing 08 Q4 Q10(b)

Q11(a),
5 Development of surfaces 11 Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8 Q11(b),
Q12(a), Q12(b)
Total Periods / Total Questions 45 8 4
[ R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Application – 6 Marks

Questions]
Note: Question Paper consists PART – A and PART-B, Total Marks: 40, Time: 2 Hours
PART – A consists 8 (Eight questions) and student have to answer ALL questions, each
question carries 2 marks. (8*2 = 16)
209
PART – B consists 4 questions (either or / (a) or (b)), student have to attempt FOUR
questions, each question carries 6 marks (4*6=24)
Course Outcomes (CO)

Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcome
CO1 Apply the principles of Projection of solids also draw the projections of solids.
Appreciate the need of Sectional views also draw the sectional views and true
CO2
sections of the engineering components.
Escalate the need of auxiliary views and draw the auxiliary views of the given
CO3
engineering components.
Gain the knowledge of Isometric views of engineering components also draw the
CO4
isometric views of given components.
Grasp the knowledge and draw the development of surfaces of different engineering
CO5
components
Course Contents
1.0 Projection of solids (10 Hours)

Projection of regular solids
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
2.0 Sectional views (08 Hours)
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Location of cutting plane –
Purpose of cutting plane line – Selection of cutting plane to give maximum information
(vertical and offset planes) - Hatching – Section of regular solids inclined to one plane and
parallel to other plane
3.0 Auxiliary views (08 Hours)
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of drawing an auxiliary
views - explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane -Partial auxiliary view.
4.0 Pictorial Drawings (08 Hours)
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and
perspective and their use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle between them, meaning of
visual distortion in dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference between Isometric
scale and ordinary scale difference between Isometric view and Isometric projection -
Isometric and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common features like rectangles,
circular shapes, non-isometric lines - Use of box and offset methods.
5.0 Development of Surfaces (11 Hours)
Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work -Concept of
true length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel
to the plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to the other -Development
210
of simple solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid (sketches only) -Types of
development: Parallel line and radial line development -Procedure of drawing development,
drawings of trays, funnels, elbow pipes and rectangular ducts.
Reference Books
Engineering Drawing by Kapil dev – (Asian Publisher)

Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata Reddy

1.0 Apply Principles of Projection of solids
1.1. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solids parallel to one plane.
1.2. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solid inclined to other plane.
2.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views

2.1 Explain the need to draw sectional views.
2.2 Select the section plane for a given component to reveal maximum information.
2.3 Explain the positions of section plane with reference planes
2.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
2.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids discussed in 6.0
2.6 Apply principles of hatching.
3.0 Understand the need of auxiliary views
3.1 State the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
3.2 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
3.3 Differentiate between auxiliary view and apparent view
4.0 Prepare pictorial drawings
4.1 State the need of pictorial drawings.
4.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
4.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
5.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
5.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
5.2 Prepare development of simple engineering objects (cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones,
pyramid) using parallel line and radial line method.
5.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like trays,funnel, 90 0
elbow & rectangular duct.
211
Program Outcomes (PO)

Course Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Advanced
Engineering 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3
Drawing
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed
CIE Question Paper Pattern and Syllabus

Unit R U A
Unit Name
No
6 Marks
2 Marks Questions
Questions
Mid Semester - I Examination
1 Projection Solids Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
2 Sectional Views Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)

Total 4 2
Mid Semester - II Examination
3 Auxiliary views Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
4 Pictorial drawing Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)
Total 4 2
[R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Applying – 6 Marks

Questions]
CIE Question Paper Pattern: Total Marks : 20, Time: 1 Hour

Maximum Marks: 20, Time: 1 Hour
Part A: Consists 4 Short questions, students have to attempt 4 questions and each question carries
2 Marks.(4 X 2 = 08 Marks)
Part B: Consists 2 (Either or type) Essay type questions, students have to attempt 2 questions and each question ca
12 Marks)
212
MODEL PAPER MID SEMESTER – I
C18-M-206P
DME – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - I EXAMINATION
ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08
2. Each question carries TWO mark.
1. Draw the projections of a cube 0f 35mm side, resting on one of its faces (bases) on H.P such
that one of its face is parallel to and 15 mm in front of V.P.
2. Draw the projections of the cylinder base resting on HP with diameter 30mm and height
60mm.
3. A cone of base 50 mm diameter and axis 70 mm long lies on its base on H.P. A sectional
plane parallel to H.P passes through the axis at a 40 mm from the base. Draw the top view of
the reaming Cone.
4. Draw the top view of the pyramid base resting on HP with side 20mm and height 60mm, the
same pyramid was cut by a section plane horizontally at 30mm from the HP.
PART-B
02X06=12
5. (a) A hexagonal prism with side of base 30 mm and axis 70 mm long, is lying one of its
rectangular faces on H.P. Draw the projections of the prism, when its axis is parallel to both
H.P and V.P
or
5. (b) A cylinder with base 40 mm diameter and 60 mm long rests on a point of its base on H.P
such that the axis makes an angle of 30 degrees with H.P. Draw the projections of the
cylinder.
6. (a) A cylinder of diameter 50 mm and axis 70 long rests with its base on H.P. It is cut by a
section plane parallel to V.P and passing through the solid at a distance 10 mm from the axis.
Draw the projections.
or
6. (b) A cube of edge 40 mm rests on H.P one of its edges and a face is parallel to V.P. One of
the face containing the resting edge is inclined at 30 degrees to H.P. It is cut by horizontal
section plane at 10 mm away from the axis. Draw the projections of the cube.
213
C18-M-206P
DME – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - II EXAMINATION
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08
2. Each question carries TWO mark.
1. What is the importance of auxiliary view?
2. A cube of side 30mm placed on HP and sectioned diagonally, draw the auxiliary view of
the inclined surface.
3. Draw the isometric view of a circular plane of diameter 60mm whose surface is vertical.
4. Draw the isometric view of a pentagonal plane of 30mm side when one of its sides is
parallel to H.P, when it is horizontal.
PART-B
02X06=12
5. (a) Draw the isometric drawing of a cone of base diameter 30mm and axis 50mmlong.
or
5. (b) Draw the auxiliary view of the slopping surface of the cast iron block as shown in the
Figure. 1
Figure. (1) Figure. (2)

6. (a) Draw the auxiliary view of the slopping surface of the cast iron block as shown in the
Figure. 2
or
6. (b) Draw the isometric drawing of a cylinder of base diameter 20mm and axis 35mm
long.
214
C18-M-206P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–18) MARCH/APRIL—2019
II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2hours] [Total Marks:40

question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered.
PART-A
08X02=16
1.Draw the projections of the cylinder with 30mm height and 10mm radius, whose axis is parallel
to VP?
2.A cylinder with base radius 30mm height 60mm and based resting on the ground, a section
plane cuts the cylinder at 30mm from the ground. Draw the sectional top view of the cylinder.
3.Draw the auxiliary view of sloping surface of the object whose isometric view is given in Figure
(1).
4.Draw the isometric view of a block whose orthographic views are shown in Figure (2)
5.Draw the development of a cylinder with diameter 40mm and length 50mm.
6.Draw the development of a pyramid of side 20mm and height 50mm.
7.Draw the development of a cube of side 30 mm.

215
8.Draw the development of cone 25 mm base diameter and 40 mm height.
PART-B
04X06=24

13. a) Draw the projection of a cylinder of a diameter of base 50 mm and height 80 mm when its
axis is making an angle of 300 to the H.P and parallel to the V.P.
or
9. b) A cylinder of 50 mm diameter and 60 mm long is resting on its base on the ground and the
axis 30 mm in front of V.P It is cut by a section plane perpendicular to the V.P the vertical
trace of which cuts the axis at a point 40 mm from the base and makes an angle of 45 0 with
H.P. Draw its front view, sectional top view.
10. a)Draw the auxiliary view of sloping surface of the guide object shown infigure (3).
or
10. b) Draw the isometric view of the block, whose orthographic views are shown in figure (4).
11. a) Draw the development of the truncated cylinder as shown in figure (5).
216
Figure (5) Figure (6) Figure (7)
or
11. b) Draw the development of truncated cone shown in below figure (6)
12. a) A right circular cylinder of 55 mm diameter and 66 mm long is cut by a section plane
perpendicular to VP and inclined at an angle of 60 0 to the HP. It is passing through a point on
the axis at a height of 45 mm from its base. Draw the development of bottom position of the
truncated cylinder.
or
12. b) Draw the development of the right circular cylinder shown in below figure (7).
*****
217
Advanced Computer Aided Drafting
Advanced Computer
Aided Drafting
Teaching Scheme
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
in periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Tutorials + Practice Total Contact periods : 45 Periods
CIE
Pre requisites 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks
This course requires the Basic CAD Skills and concepts of engineering drawing
Course Outcomes
CO1 Significance of Layers. Create and assign properties to layers and modify layers
CO2 Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of standard blocks and user defined blocks
CO3 Need of solid modeling and various methods of solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings
UNIT -1 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10pds)
1.1 Organize the information on layers

Setting a current layer, layers color, line type, line weight, print style locking and unlocking of layers,
Course Contents
the layer visibility and layer printing. Setting of current line type.The loading of additional line types,
creating and naming of line type, editing of line type.
1.2 Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the drawing blocks
The purpose of a block, creating a block, inserting a block, redefining a block, exploding a block
1.3 Attribute
Editing attribute definitions, attaching attribute to blocks. Editing attributes attached to blocks,
Extracting attributes information.
UNIT -2 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10)
218
2.0 Viewing entities in three dimensions
Setting a new viewing direction

Dynamically setting a view direction
2.1 Creation of three-dimensional entities using different methods
Drawing of two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.

Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying
elevation and thickness.
Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving or
extruding.
Creation of three-dimensional faces, rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes, extruded

surface meshes, revolved surface meshes, three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders,
Cones, Spheres, wedges, torus, Regions, extruded solids, revolved solids, composite solids,
intersect solids
Boolean operations like union, subtract and interfere.
2.2 Editing in three dimensions
Rotating in three dimensions, Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar).
Mirroring in three dimensions, aligning in three dimensions.
2.3 Editing of three dimensional solids
Sectioning and Slicing of solids, hiding, shading and rendering.
2.4 Selection of material from library
Enable the material library, editing materials and material library.
UNIT- 3
Application of above three units
Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura

2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium
1.0 Organize the information on layers

1.1 Explain the need and importance of Layers.
1.2 Practice creating new layer, naming the layer and assigning properties like Layer
colour, Line type and line weight and setting the current layer
1.3 Practice the locking and unlocking of layers
1.4 Practice the Freezing and thawing of layers
1.5 Practice the layer visibility and layer printing
1.6 Practice the loading of additional line types
2.0 Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the Drawing
219
2.1 Define a block
2.2 Explain the purpose of a block
2.3 Practice the creating a block
2.4 Practice the inserting a block
2.5 Practice the redefining a block
2.6 Practice the exploding a block
2.7 Define an Attribute
2.8 Practice the editing attribute definitions
2.9 Practice the attaching attribute to blocks
2.10 Edit attributes attached to blocks
2.11 Extract attributes information
2.12 Define external reference
2.13 Practice the Attaching, Removing, and Reloading of external references
2.14 Practice the Binding, Clipping and changing the path of external references
3.0 Understand the concepts of 3D
View entities in three dimensions
3.1.1 To set a new viewing direction
3.1.2 To dynamically set a view direction
3.2 Create three-dimensional entities using different methods
3.2.1 Draw two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.
3.2.2 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying
elevation and thickness.
3.2.3 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving
or extruding.
3.2.4 Create three-dimensional faces.
3.2.5 Create rectangular meshes.
3.2.6 Create ruled surface meshes.
3.2.7 Create extruded surface meshes.
3.2.8 Create revolved surface meshes.
3.2.9 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, wedges,
torus, Regions.
3.2.10 Create extruded solids.
3.2.11 Create revolved solids.
3.2.12 Create composite solids.
3.2.13 Create intersect solids.
3.3 Editing in three dimensions
3.3.1 Rotate in three dimensions
3.3.2 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
3.3.3 Mirror in three dimensions
3.3.4 Align in three dimensions
3.4 Edit three dimensional solids
3.4.1 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
3.4.2 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
4 Practice applications on above units
Exercise Key components
220
 Importance of layers
Layers  Creation of new layers and controlling properties of
layers
 Create, insert and explode a block
Working with blocks  Attach attribute to blocks
 Edit and extract attributes attached to blocks
 Set a new viewing direction
View entities in three dimensions
 Set dynamically view direction
 Create three-dimensional faces
 Create rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes,
Create three-dimensional entities extruded surface meshes, revolved surface meshes
 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes,
Cylinders.
 Rotate in three dimensions
 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
Edit in three dimensions
 Mirror in three dimensions
 Align in three dimensions
 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
Edit three dimensional solids
 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
Practice the selection of material  Enable material library
from library  Edit materials and material library
Course Outcome Cognizant Linked PO Teaching

Level Hours
Significance of Layers. Create and assign

CO1 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
properties to layers and modify layers
Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of

CO2 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 9
standard blocks and user defined blocks
Need of solid modeling and various methods of

CO3 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 6
solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings A 1,2,3,10 15
221
MID SEM-I EXAM
SN Unit name R,U (Q No’s) A (Q No’s) Remarks

1 Unit-1 1,2,3,4 5,6
MID SEM-2 EXAM
SN Unit name R,U (Q No’s) A (Q No’s) Remarks

1 Unit-2 1,2,3,4 5,6
SEE

SN Unit name
R,U (Q No’s) A (Q No’s)
1 Unit-1 1,2
Unit-2 3,4
Unit-3 5,6
18M207P-
222
CAD LAB PRACTISE
TIME: 1hr Marks:
20M
PART-A
8marks
7. Create four layers, name the layers and assign different properties like line color, line type, line
weight to different layers.
8. Write the procedure to create a block.
9. What is meant by attribute..
10. What do you mean by layer and what are the advantages of it.
PART-B
12marks
11. Draw the following using Layers. Use different layers to different line types, text, dimension and
main figure.
223
12. Draw the following using Layers. Use different layers to different line types, text, dimension and
main figure.
224
18M207P
CAD LAB PRACTISE
TIME: 1hr Marks:
20M
PART-A
8marks
7. Draw rectangle of 100x60 and extrude to a depth of 25mm.
8. Draw a cylinder of dia 50mm and height 100mm.
9. List various Boolean operations
10. Draw a cube of 100mm side and make a hole of 25mm.
PART-B
12marks
225
226
18M207P
CAD LAB PRACTISE
MODEL PAPER FOR SEE
TIME: 2hr Marks:
40M
PART-A
16marks.
1. Write the procedure to create and insert a block.
2. Create four layers, name the layers and assign different properties like line color, line type,
line weight to different layers.
3. Draw a 3D cone of base 30mm and height 50mm
4. Draw to 2 boxes of 50x30x20 and 30x50x20 mm and union them
.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 24 =
24marks
5 (a) Draw the following 3D object CAD software. 20+4 marks

227
6 (a) Draw the following 3D object CAD software. 20+4 marks
228
ADVANCED WORKSHOP PRACTICE
Advanced Workshop
Course Title : Practice Course Code 18M-208P

Teaching Scheme
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
in periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Tutorials + Practice Total Contact periods : 45 Periods
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling Domestic tools
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic Mathematics at Secondary school level
Handling/Manipulation/
Unit Precision Marks
Unit name Periods %Weightage
No weightage
1 Fitting shop 11 1
2 Forging shop 11 1
3 Carpentry shop 12 1 80 100
Sheet metal
4 11 1
work
Total 45 4 80 100
Note:

2. To pass in practical exam, the students have to acquire 50% marks in both CIE and
SEE separately and CIE & SEE put together.
3. If the students acquire less than 50% in CIE, accordingly the students have to acquire
more than 50% in SEE to get overall 50 % to pass
CO1 Practice the required operations in Fitting Shop

CO2 Practice the required operations in Forging Shop
CO3 Practice the required operations in Carpentry Shop
CO4 Practice the required operations in Sheet metal Shop
COURSE CONTENT
229
FITTING SHOP
1. Marking, cutting, drilling, Chamfering and tapping on a M.S. Flat 12
mm thick.
2. Assembling of two pieces, Matching by filing (6 mm thick M.S.
Plate)
FORGING SHOP
1. Preparation of chisel from round rod.
2. Preparation of ring and hook from M.S. round.
3. Preparation of a hexagonal bolt and nut.
CARPENTRY SHOP
1. Preparation of Mortise and Tenon joint.
2. Wood turning on a lathe.
3. Preparation of one household article.
SHEET METAL WORK
1. Preparation of pipe elbow
2. Preparation of mug.
3. Preparation of funnel
4. Preparation of utility articles such as dustpan, kerosene hand pump.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manufacturing Technology (Vol I ) by P N Rao (Mc Graw Hill)
2. Principles of Foundry Technology by P L Jain (Mc Graw Hill)
****
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Title of the Job

Competencies
Key Competencies
Fitting shop
1. Tapping and Dieing on a MS flat of 2 mm thick
Check the raw material for size
 Identify appropriate tap and die
 Secure the tap in the wrench
 Tap the hole
 Hold the bar in bench vice
 Fix the die in die stock
 Cut external threads using a Die
 Check the fit for accuracy
 Secure the tap in the
 wrench
 Tap the hole
 Fix the die in die stock
230
 Cut external threads using a Die
2. Assembling of two pieces, matching by filing

 Cut the pieces to size using hack saw
 File surface of flat for trueness
 Mark the surfaces as per dimensions
 Dot punch the marked lines
 Cut with hack saw as per marked lines
 Smoot the surfaces with file
 Assemble the two pieces
 Identify appropriate file
 File the specimen
 Assemble two pieces
Title of the Job

Competencies
Key Competencies
Forging shop
1. Preparation of a Chisel from round rod

 Identify the holding and striking tools
 Heat the specimen to the appropriate temperature
 Remove the specimen and hold it on the anvil

2. Preparation of a ring and hook from M.S round

 Identify the holding and striking tools
 Heat the specimen to the appropriate temperature
 Remove the specimen and hold it on the anvil
 Hammer the specimen to the required shape

3. Preparation of a hexagonal bolt and nut

 Identify the holding and striking tools
 Heat the specimen to the appropriate temperature
231
 Remove the specimen and hold it on the anvil
 Hammer the specimen to the required shape

Carpentry Shop
6..Preparation of Mortise and Tenon joint
- Select the appropriate cutting tools and work holding devices
- Plane the two pieces to the required size using jack plane
- Mark the dimensions to make Tenon using mortise gauge
- Cut tenon with tenon saw along the marked lines
 Use firmer chisel to remove the excess material to set finished tenon
 Mark the dimension to make mortise on the second piece with mortise gauge
 Use mortise chisel to provide recess in the second piece to accommodate tenon
Assemble the two pieces by fitting the tenon into mortise
 Mark the dimensions to make Tenon and mortise on two pieces using mortise gauge
 Cut tenon with tenon saw along the marked lines
 Use mortise chisel to provide recess in the second piece to accommodate tenon
Assemble the two pieces by fitting the tenon into mortise
7.Wood turning on lathe

 Select appropriate tools
 Plane the four corners of the work piece using jack plane
 Mark the centres of the work on either side
 Mount the work between head stock & tailstock centres
 Fix the tool in the tool post & Position it in appropriate height
 Start the lathe to make the work piece to revolve at desired speed
 Feed the bevel gauge against the rotating work to get the required size and shape
 Use outside callipers to check the diameter of the pin
 Use parting off tool to reduce the diameter on either ends of the pin
 Remove the rolling pin between centres and cut off excess material on either sides
 Mark the centres of the work on either side
 Fix the tool in the tool post & Position it in appropriate height
 Start the lathe to make the work piece to revolve at desired speed
 Feed the bevel gauge against the rotating work to get the required size and shape
232
Contd.,,,
8.Preparation of any household article (ex: stool)
 Prepare the drawings of a stool required for a particular drawing table

 State the specifications of the wood stock required
 Identify the type of joints to be made
 Identify the operations to be made and their sequence
 Perform operations to produce pieces of joint
 Assemble all joints as per the drawing
 Prepare the drawings of a stool required for a particular drawing table
 Identify the operations to be made and their sequence
 Perform operations to produce pieces of joint
 Assemble all joints as per the drawing
Title of the Job

Competencies
Key Competency
Sheet metal Work

09. Preparation of pipe elbow
 Draw the development of a cylindrical pipe truncated at an angle of 45 0 on one side
 Scribe the lines on the sheet by placing the pattern on it
 Cutt the sheet over the marked dimensions using curved snips
 Hem the straight side of the sheet and flange the curved side
 Fold the edges of joining sides
 Form the sheet into cylindrical shape using stakes
 Seam the sides using mallet
 Repeat the similar operation for making the second pipe
 Butt the treated portions of the cylindrical pipes at rectangles
 Seam the two pipes
 Solder the joint to make leak proof
 Draw the development of a cylindrical pipe truncated at an angle of 45 0 on one side

 Cutt the sheet over the marked dimensions using curved snips
 Form the sheet into cylindrical shape using stakes
10.Preparation of funnel
 Draw the development of upper conical part
 Place the pattern on the sheet and cut to required size
 Hem the upper side of the sheet
 Flange out the bottom side of the sheet
 Fold the edges of the joining sides
 form the sheet into conical shape using appropriate stake and mallet
233
 Repeat the similar operation for making the bottom part
 Seam the top conical part and bottom conical part to obtain required funnel
 Draw the development of upper and bottom conical parts

 Place the pattern on the sheet and cut to required size
 form the sheet into conical shape using appropriate stake and mallet
 Seam the top conical part and bottom conical part to obtain required funnel
11.Preparation of utility articles such as dust pan, kerosene hand pump
 Draw the development of given dust pan
 Scribe the lines on the sheet and cut to required size
 Hem all the four sides to strengthen the edges
 Form the sheet into designed shape using suitable stakes and mallet
 Solder the corner lap joints to make the required dust pan
 Identify the marking and cutting tools
 Drawing development of objects
 Cut the sheet
 Perform bending along the marked lines and to form the article

periods
CO1 Practice the required operations in Fitting Shop R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10

11
CO2 Practice the required operations in Forging Shop R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10
11
CO3 Practice the required operations in Carpentry Shop R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10
12
CO4 Practice the required operations in Sheet metal Shop. R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10
11
234
18M208P
Model Paper
Mid Sem-I
Advanced Workshop Practice
1. Prepare a mortise and tenon joint

2. Prepare a pipe elbow as per drawing
3. Prepare a mug
4. Cut the MS plate and drill as per given fig
5. Prepare a chisel from given round bar
6. prepare a hook
18M208P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS(C18)
Model Paper
Mid Sem-I

1. Cut the MS plate as shown in fig and assemble
2. Prepare a household article
3. Prepare a hexagonal bolt
4. Cut the MS plate file and chamfer it.
5. Prepare a utility article with GI Sheet
235
18M208P
Model Paper

1. Prepare a mortise and tenon joint

2. Prepare a pipe elbow as per drawing
3. Prepare a mug
4. Cut the MS plate and drill as per given fig
5. Prepare a chisel from given round bar
6. prepare a hook
7. Cut the MS plate as shown in fig and assemble
8. Prepare a household article
9. Prepare a hexagonal bolt
10. Cut the MS plate file and chamfer it.
11. Prepare a utility article with GI Sheet
236
Applied Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab + Chemistry Lab)
Course Title Applied Science Lab Course Code 18M-209P

Practice (Physics Lab +
Chemistry Lab)
Teaching Scheme in 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods 45
Physics Lab – 209P(A)
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.
8. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
10. Follow of Do’s and Don’ts.
11. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
13. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
14. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1: Determine the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using U-V and
graphical method.
2: Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum and verify
with L-T2graph.
237
3: Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature.
4: Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-locating neutral points.
References:
3. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur

4. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester II
1. Convex lens-Determination of Focal length and focal power using U-V and graphical method.
2: Simple Pendulum-Determination of the value of acceleration due to gravity and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Resonance apparatus-Determination of velocity of sound in air at room temperature .
4: Travelling microscope-Determination of refractive index of a solid.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-location of neutral points
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
CL Linked Teaching
Course Outcomes
POs Periods
CO 1 Focal length and Focal power of convex lens U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
238
(Separate & Combination)
CO 2 Acceleration due to gravity using simple U/A 1,2,3,8,9
pendulum L:P::1:2
CO 3 Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance U/A 1,2,3,8,9
method) L:P::1:2
CO 4 Refractive index of solid using traveling U/A 1,2,3,8,9
microscope L:P::1:2
CO 5 Mapping of magnet lines of force-locating U/A 1,2,3,8,9
neutral points L:P::1:2
CO 6 Related the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application
Competencies Key competencies

Name of the Experiment
1. Focal length and Focal power of  Fix the object distance  Calculate the focal length
 Find the Image distance and power of convex
convex lens (Separate & lens
 Calculate the focal length and
Combination) power of convex lens and  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
2. Simple pendulum – acceleration due to  combination
Fix the simpleofpendulum
convex lenses
to  graph
Find the time for number
gravity – length of seconds pendulum the stand of oscillations
 Adjust the length of pendulum  Find the time period
 Find the time for number of  Calculate the acceleration
oscillations due to gravity
 Find the time period  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Calculate the acceleration due
to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
3. Velocity of sound in air  Adjust the reservoir level

 Arrange the resonance
 Find the first and second
–Resonance method apparatus
resonanting lengths
 Adjust the reservoir level for
 Calculate velocity of
booming sound
sound
 Find the first and second
 Calculate velocity of
resonanting lengths
sound at 00 C
 Calculate velocity of sound
239
4. Refractive index of solid using  Find the least count of vernier  Read the scale
on microscope  Calculate the refractive
traveling microscope
 Place the graph paper below index of glass slab
microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive index
of glass slab
5. Mapping of magnet lines of  Draw magnetic meridian

 Place the bar magnet in
Force – neutral points NN(North pole of bar  Draw magnetic lines
magnet pointing North) of
and NS (South pole of bar force
magnet pointing North)
directions  Locate the neutral
 Draw magnetic lines of points
force along equatorial and
 Locate the neutral points
along equatorial and axial axial lines
lines
EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS
S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS

1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II
Scheme of Valuation of SEEEXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
3 S.No SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Particulars EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
240
Chemistry Lab – 209P(B)
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of volumetric analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:

Periods
mohr’s salt in the given
solution
CO2 Determination of acidity , U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
alkalinity and pH of given
water samples/
solutions.
chlorides in the given
solution.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A
oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods..
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.
8. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance

of cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
10. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
11. Maintenance of data in record book.
241
13. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
14. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Estimation of Mohr’s salt by using 0.02M potassium permanganate
solution.
2. Determination of acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
3. Determination of alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H2SO4 solution.
4. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.

1. Estimate Mohr’s salt by using standard potassium permanganate solution.
2. Determine the partial and total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N
NaOH solution.
3. Determine the partial and total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N
H2SO4 solution.
AgNO3 solution.
Reference Books:
4. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

5. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande & others.
6. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE

Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
C-18 M-209P

242
MIDSEM – I
APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
8. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense using U-V method.
9. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense by U-V graph method.
10. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
11. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-
T2 graph.
12. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given 500 ml of solution
by using 0.02M potassium permanganate solution.
13. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
14. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
C-18 M-209P

243
MIDSEM – II
5. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.

6. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
7. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
8. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H2SO4 solution
AgNO3 solution
C18 – M 209P

244
MODEL PAPER
COMMON – II SEMESTER EXAMINATION

(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.
14. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens using U-V method.
15. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens by U-V graph method.
16. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
17. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-T 2
graph.
18. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.
19. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
20. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NN position of earth’s magnetic
field and locate neutral points.
21. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NS position of earth’s magnetic
field and locate neutral points.
22. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given one litre of solution
by using 0.02M KMnO4 solution.
23. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
24. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
25. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
26. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H2SO4 solution
AgNO3 solution
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY Course Code : 18M-210P

LAB PRACTICE
245
Semester : II Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) : 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Type of course : Tutorial + Practical Total Contact Periods : 45 Periods
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Computer basics and DOS
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course
Outcome (CO):
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Practical hrs
CO1 Demonstrate skills using spreadsheet software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO2 Demonstrate skills using presentation software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO3 Demonstrate skills using database software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
Total Sessions 45
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)
Course Content
Spread Sheet
1. Open MS-Excel and identify the components on the screen
2. Create a Worksheet in MS-Excel and save it in .xls or .xlsx format
3. Inserting column and row in Excel
4. Creation of new worksheet in the existing Excel Book file
5. Generate a Chart using the data in Excel-worksheet
6. Automate calculations in a worksheet using formula
7. Sort and filter data in a worksheet
8. Protecting a worksheet, working with multiple sheets
9.
Presentation Software
10. Create a simple Power point presentation for a small topic and saving in .ppt or pptx
format
11. Inserting a new slide in the existing PowerPoint file
12. Inserting chart or image in a PowerPoint slide
13. Exercise with animation and sound features in PowerPoint
14. Exercise with Rehearse Timings feature in PowerPoint
15. Exercise in printing the PowerPoint file in (a) Slides (b) Handouts
246
Database Management System
16. Create a table for given data and save in .mdb or .accdb format
17. Add, Delete and rename fields
18. Use the Primary key field
19. Enter and edit data
20. Use Relationships option
21. Create forms
22. Modify and save forms
23. Create and use queries
24. Sort data
25. Display data
26. Create and print reports
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Composition of Educational Components:

Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:
Sl. Bloom’s Category %

No.
1 Remembrance 20
2 Understanding 20
3 Application 60
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked Linked PO CL Practical
Sessions
247
CO Demonstrate skills using 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
1 spreadsheet software
CO Demonstrate skills using 9,10,11,12,13,14 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15

2 presentation software
CO Demonstrate skills using 15,16,17,18,19,20,21, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15

3 database software
22,23,24,25
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application

Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed.
Course Delivery
The course will be delivered through tutorial of one hour and one & half hours of hands on practice
per week.
Suggested Student Activities:

1. Create a spreadsheet for the class
2. Create power point presentation for a course
3. Create a database for the class
Format for Student Activity Assessment

Internal Assesment
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
Model Question Bank
Course Title: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE Course Code: 18M-210P
1. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet with five columns. Enter ten
records and find the sum of all columns using auto sum feature.
2. You have a monthly income of Rs.10000. Your monthly expenditures are Rent- Rs
248
3000, Food- Rs. 1500, Electricity- Rs.100, Phone- Rs. 150, and Cable TV-Rs. 200.
Prepare a worksheet with the Monthly Income, the Monthly Expenditures listed and
summed, monthly savings amount (what’s left over each month) calculated, and the
amount saved per day (assuming 30 days in a month). Use Spreadsheet Application.
3. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet containing the pay details
(containing Basic pay, DA, HRA ,Other Allowance , Deductions- PF, PT, Insurance,
Gross and Net salary) of the employees using formulas.
4. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Simple Bar Chart to highlight the results of your institute
for three years.
5. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Pie Chart for a sample data and give legends.
6. Using presentation tool, Create a simple Presentation consisting of 4-5 slides about
Input and Output Devices.
7. Create a presentation about a book containing Title, Author, Publisher and Contents.
8. Create an automated (timings & animation) Presentation with five slides about
different Models of Computers. Use Presentation tool
249
Engineering
III Semester
250
Instruction
Continuous internal Semester end examination
periods per Total
Evaluation(CIE) (SEE)
week Periods
Course per
Course Name
Internal
r Mid Mid Max marks Total for passing
L T P Evaluatio
Sem Sem Min marks Marks including
n
1 2 CIE
Applied
1 18M-301F Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Mathematics
2 18M-302C Solid Mechanics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
3 18M-303C Thermodynamics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

Basic
4 18M-304C Manufacturing 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Technology
Engineering
5 18M-305C 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Materials
6 18M-306P Machine Drawing 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Basic
Manufacturing &
7 18M-307P Fabrication 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Engineering Lab
practice
8 18M-308P Fuels Lab practice 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Solid Modeling Lab
9 18M-309P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
practice
Communication and
10 18M-310F Life skills lab 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
0
practice
TOTAL 20 TEACHING
5 17 630 25 200
AND EXAMINATION200 200
SCHEME 400 170 1000 425
Note: Pass criteria: The minimum marks required for passing in any of courses are given below
1. Cumulative 35% of marks (35 marks) in Mid Sem -1 + Mid Sem -2+ Internal Evaluation+
SEE
2. Minimum marks in SEE is 35% (i.e.14marks).
3. If the cumulative of CIE is less than 35% (i.e.21 marks out of 60) then more than 35% of
SEE is required to get overall 35%.
251
APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18COMMON301F

SEMESTER : III Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) ( in Periods ) : 45 :15 : 0 Credits : 3 Credits
Programmes : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Basic Engineering Mathematics and Engineering Mathematics
at Diploma 1st and 2nd Semester level.
CO 1 Integrate different kinds of functions

CO 2 Integrate functions using different methods
CO 3 Find the values of definite integrals.
CO 4 Solve simple problems of Areas, Volumes.
CO 5 Find the Mean and RMS values of various functions and Approximate values of Definite integrals
using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3rd rule
CO 6 Form the Differential Equation and Solve Simple DEs of 1st order and 1stdegree.
Course Content:
Unit-I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Indefinite Integration-I
Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integral of standard functions. Properties
of indefinite integral. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of the form
sinmq. cosnq. where m and n are positive integers. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x
and powers of tan x, sec x by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
252
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a + x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a2 + x2 √a 2−x 2 √ x 2−a2
iii ) √ x 2 +a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
Unit – II Duration: 08 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.0)
Indefinite Integration-II
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational algebraic functions. Integration
by parts, Bernoulli’s rule.
Unit-III Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 –

T:1.5)
Definite Integral and its Properties:
Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,

evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum.
Unit – IV Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Applications of Definite Integrals:
Areas under plane curves – Sign of the Area – Area enclosed between two curves. Solid of
revolution – Volumes of solids of revolution.
Unit – V Duration: 08 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.0)
Mean, RMS values and Numerical Integration:
Mean values and Root Mean Square values of a function on a given interval.
Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a definite integral.
253
Unit – VI Duration: 18 Periods (L: 13.5 – T:4.5)
Differential Equations of First Order:
Definition of a differential equation – order and degree of a differential equation – formation of

differential equations – solution of differential equation of first order, first degree : variables
-separable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
Reference Books:
1. Integral Calculus Vol.I, by M.Pillai and Shanti Narayan
2. Thomas’ Calculus, Pearson Addison –Wesley Publishers
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net
Unit-I
1.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
1.1 Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2 State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals ò (u + v) dx
And ò ku dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.
1.3 Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4 Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i) ò f(ax + b) dx where f(x) dx is in standard form.
ii) ò [f(x)]n f ¢(x) dx
iii) ò f¢(x)/[f(x)] dx
iv) ò f {g(x)} g ¢(x) dx
254
1.5 Find the Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x usingthe above.
1.6 Evaluate the integrals of the form ò SinmqCosnq. dq where m and n are positive integers.
1.7 Evaluate integrals of powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8 Evaluate the Standard Integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) , ,
a2 + x 2 a 2−x 2 x 2 −a2
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a2 + x2 √a 2−x 2 √ x 2−a2
iii ) √ x 2 +a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
1.9 Evaluate the integrals of the type
1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos d and  a cos   b sin   c d .
Unit-II
2.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
2.1 Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
2.2 Evaluate integrals using integration by parts with examples.
2.3 State the Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form ∫ u.vdx .
2.4 Evaluate the integrals of the form ò ex [f(x) + f ¢(x)] dx.
Unit-III
3.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
3.1 State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
3.2 Explain the concept of definite integral.
3.3 Calculate the definite integral over an interval.
3.4 State various properties of definite integrals.
3.5 Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
255
3.6 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
Unit –IV
4.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
4.1 Find the Areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using
integration.
4.2 Obtain the Volumes of solids of revolution.
Unit –V
5.0 Understand Mean, RMS values and Numerical Methods
5.1 Obtain the Mean value and Root Mean Square (RMS) value of the functions in any given
Interval.
5.2 Explain the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rules for approximation of definite integrals
andprovide some examples.
Unit –VI
6.0 Solve Differential Equations in engineering problems.
6.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
6.2 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
6.3 Solve the first order first degree differential equations by the following methods:
i. Variables Separable.
ii. Homogeneous Equations.
iii. Exact Differential Equations
iv. Linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q,
where P and Q are functions of x or constants.
v. Bernoulli’s Equation (Reducible to linear form.)
6.4 Solve simple problems leading to engineering applications by using above methods.
256
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material
2.Quiz
3.Group discussion
4.Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
257
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
258
Legend:
259
: C18M-301F
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER

Marks: 20
PART-A

04
5. Integrate ( ex– sinx + x4 ) with respect to x

dx
6. Find ∫ 5 x+7 dx
7. Write Bernoulli’s rule of integration
8. Find ∫ xlogx dx
PART-B
x5
5 a). Evaluate∫ dx .
1+ x 12
Or
5 b) Evaluate
dx
∫ ¿¿ ¿
6 a) Evaluate ∫ x sinxdx
Or
260
3 x +2
6 b) Evaluate∫ dx .
( x−1 ) (2 x +3)
PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02X 05 = 10
7 a) Evaluate ∫ √ x 2+ 2 x +5dx
Or
7 b) Evaluate: ∫ cosx cos 2 xdx .
8 a) Find ∫ x tan−1 xdx .

Or
8 b) Find ∫ x 4 cos 2 xdx .

@@@
261
C18M-301F
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER

Marks: 20
PART-A

04
1
1. Find ∫ (x ¿¿ 4+1)dx ¿
0
π
2. Evaluate : ∫ sin 3 xdx
0
1
3. Evaluate : ∫ 1+1x 2 dx
0
4. Write the formula to find area bounded by the curve y= f(x) , x-axis, between the limits x=a
and x =b
PART-B

π
2
5 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
π
2
5 b) Evaluate:
∫ sin 2 xdx
0
6 a) Find the area bounded by the line 2x + y =8, x-axis and the lines x = 2 and x = 4.
262
Or
6 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by revolving the part of the Circle x 2+ y 2=36
From x = 0 to x = 4 about x – axis.
PART C

π
2
7 a) Evaluate: √ Sinx dx
∫ √ Sinx+ √Cosx
0
Or
π
2
7 b) Evaluate:
∫ logsin xdx
0
8 a) Find the area enclosed between the Parabolas y=3 x−x 2∧ y =x 2−x .
Or
8 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by the revolution of the area bounded by the
x2 y2
Ellipse + =1 , about x- axis.
25 16
@@@
263
C18M-301F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 hours Total Marks: 40]
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 08 X 01 = 08
1. Find ∫ x 7 – 3/ x dx
1
2
2. Evaluate ∫ ( x +1 )dx
0
3. Write the formula to find mean value of y = f(x), in the interval (a, b)
2
dy dy
4. Find the Order and Degree of the Differential Equation x
dx √
= 1+( )
dx
.
b
5 Write Trapezoidal Rule to find the approximate value of ∫ f ( x ) dx .
a
6. Write the formula to find RMS value of y = f(x) over the range x=a and x = b.
dy
7. Solve =e 2 x+ y
dx
264
8. Write the condition for exactness of the differential equation M(x,y)dx + N(x,y)dy =0
PART-B
π
2
9 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
6
dx
9 b) Find the approximate value of ∫ by taking n = 6 using Trapezoidal rule.
0 1+ x
10 a) Find the area bounded by the Parabola y = x2 – 2x + 1 and x-axis.
Or
10 b) Form the Differential Equation from y= A e x + B e 3 x where A, B are arbitrary constants
11 a) Find the RMS value of √ log x over the range x= 1 and x= e
Or
4
dx
11 b) Calculate approximate value of ∫ by taking n= 4 using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
0 1+ x
dy
12 a) Solve: x +2 y =logx .
dx
Or
12 b) Solve: x ( 1− y 2 ) dx+ y ( 1−x2 ) dy =0
PART C
265
1
13 a) Evaluate: ∫ 2 dx
x + 2 x +2
Or
13 b) Find the RMS value of y = √ 8−4 x 2 between x = 0 and x = 2
x2 y 2
14 a) Find the volume of solid generated by revolving the Ellipse + =1 about Major axis
a2 b 2
Or
dy
14 b) Solve: =sin( x + y )
dx
15 a) A curve is drawn to passing through the points given by the following table:
x 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

y 3 3.4 3.7 3.8 2.7 2.6 2.1
Calculate the approximate area bounded by the curve, x-axis and the lines x= 1 and x= 4
using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
Or
1
15 b) Evaluate: ∫ √( 1−x2 ) dx approximately by taking n = 4 using
0
Simpson’s 1/3 rd Rule.
16 a) Solve: ( y 2−xy ) dx =x2 dy .
Or
dy
16 b) Solve: + yCosx= y 3Sin2x.
dx
@@@
266
Solid Mechanics
Course Title :Solid Mechanics Course Code :18M302C
Semester :III Course Group :Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) : 45:15:0 Credits :3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorials Total Contact Periods:60 Pds
CIE :60 Marks SEE :40 Marks
Prerequisites Basic Knowledge of properties of materials and types of loads
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
Course Outcome
CO1 Understand the concept of forces and Analyze the force system
CO2 Explain and Evaluate Stresses and Strain when a body is loaded
CO3 Calculate the Geometric Properties of Sections
CO4 Draw Shear Force & Bending Moment Diagrams under various loads
CO5 Calculate bending stresses and Deflections in the given beam
CO6 Design a shaft
267
Course content and Blue Print of Marks for SEE
Questions to be set for SEE/Marks

Remarks
Periods R U A
Force Systems 10
PART-A Simple Stresses Q1 9(a) 13(a)
10
& strain
Geometric
Properties of 10
Sections
Q2 10(a) 14(a)
PART-B Shear Force
&Bending 10 Q4
Moment
13(b)
9(b)
Simple Q5 15(a)
10 11(a)
Bending Q6 15(b)
11(b)
PART-C Q3
10(b) 14(b)
Torsion in Q7
10 12(a) 16(a)
Shaft Q8
12(b) 16(b)
TOTAL 60 10 06 06
COURSE CONTENT
1. Force Systems: Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Force –definition, types. Types of force systems, Resolution of force, resultant of coplanar force
system- parallelogram law, triangle law, polygon law, free body diagram, Lamis theorem, conditions
of equilibrium, equilibrium of system of force.
2. Simple Stresses and Strains: Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Types of forces - Stress, Strain and their nature - Mechanical properties of common engineering
materials - stress- strain diagram for M.S. and C.I. Factor of Safety- Relation between elastic
constants - Stress and strain in bodies of uniform section and of composite section under the influence
of normal forces - Related numerical problems on the above topics - Thermal stresses in bodies of
uniform sections.
268
3. Geometric Properties of Sections Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Geometric properties of machine members-Locate the C.G. of a given composite section - moment of
Inertia for Rectangle, Triangle, circular, semicircle-Perpendicular and parallel axis theorem - Moment
of Inertia of T section, I section and L section -Radius of gyration.
4. Shear force and bending moment diagram Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Beam – types, load – types, shear force and bending moment - Draw shear force and bending Moment
diagrams by the analytical method only for the following cases.
a) Cantilever with point loads,
b) Cantilever with uniformly distributed load.
c) Simply supported beam with point loads.
d) Simply supported beam with uniformly distributed loads
e) Over-hanging beam with point loads, at the centre and at free ends
f) Over-hanging beam with uniformly distributed load throughout.
g) Combination of point and UDL for the above and problems there upon.
5. Theory of simple bending &Deflection of Beams Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Bending-Explanation of terms, a) Neutral layer, b) Neutral Axis, c) Modulus of Section, d) Moment

of Resistance, e) Bending stress, f) Radius of curvature.
Assumptions in theory of simple bending. Bending Equation
M / I = σb / Y = E / R without derivation - Problems involving calculation of bending stress modulus

of section and moment of resistance. Calculate of safe loads and safe span and dimensions of cross-
section.
Deflection of beams formulae without proof for cantilever and simply supported beam with point load
and uniformly distributed loads only(Standard cases only).Related numerical problems.
6. Torsion in Shafts Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Definition and function of shaft. Calculation of polar M.I. for solid and hollow shaft. Assumptions in
simple torsion. Torsion equation without derivation T / J = τ/ R = Gθ/ L and explain the terms
269
involved. Problems on design of shaft based on strength and rigidity. Numerical Problems related to
comparison of strength and weight of solid and hollow shafts.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Strength of Materials by B. C. Punmia

2. Strength of Materials by R.S. Khurmi S. Chand Company
3. Strength of Materials by Ramamrutham
Electronic resources
Engineer’s Edge engineering data on strength of materials,
stress, strain, failure and more
http://www.engineersedge.com/mechanics_material_menu.shtml
Free engineering software for calculating stress etc
http://www.freebyte.com/ca
http://online couses.nptel.ac.in/
Suggested student activities
1. Record various forces applied by human beings in their daily activities.
2. Identify the applications where parallelogram law of forces, Lamis theorem and prepares a report.
3. Using internet records various properties of commonly used materials and compare the strengths.
4. How a corrugated roof sheet differs from plain roof sheet? Demonstrate with models.
1. Understand the concept of forces and analyze the force system-

 Define the force and its units
 Types of force systems
 Explain coplanar force system
 State Parallelogram law
 State triangle law
 Polygon law
 Free body diagrams
 State Lamis theorem
 Conditions of equilibrium
 Equilibrium of system of forces and (related problems from all )
2. Understand the concept of Simple Stresses and Strains
270
 Define the term strength,
 Define the Mechanical properties of commonly used engineering materials.
 Explain the nature and effect of tensile, compressive and shear forces.
 Define the terms stress, strain, Poisson’s ratio and elastic moduli.
 Draw the stress – strain diagram for MS and CI under tension indicating salient points.
 State the significance of factor of safety.
 Write down the relation between elastic constants E, N, K, & 1/m.
 Compute stress and strain values in bodies of uniform section and of
 Composite section under the influence of normal forces.
 Compute changes in axial, lateral and volumetric dimensions of bodies of uniform sections
under the action of normal forces.
 Compute thermal stresses in bodies of uniform section (composite sections omitted )
3. Geometric Properties of Sections

 Definition and explanation of centre of gravity of a laminar area. Centre of Gravity of a body.
Centre Gravity of a square, rectangle, triangle, Semi-circle (formulae only without
derivations)
 Centre of gravity of a composite section by analytical method only (I-section, T-Section, L-
Section and channel section).
 Moment of Inertia. Definition and Explanation. Theorems of Moment of Inertia. Parallel axes
theorem. Perpendicular axes theorem. Moment of Inertia for simple Geometrical Sections –
Rectangular, Circular and triangular section only. Radius of Gyration.
 Calculation of Moment of Inertia and Radius of Gyration of I – Section. Channel Section. T –
Section. L– Section (Equal & unequal lengths) (Simple cases only)
4. Understand the concept of Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams

 Understand different types of beams like cantilever, simply supported and overhanging
beams.
 Understand different types of loading point load, uniformly distributed load (UDL) and
uniformly varying load (UVL).
 Explain the terms shear force (SF) and bending moment (BM).
 Understand the relationship between SF and BM. -
 Practice the diagrams of S.F. & B.M for UDL and Point loads for different types of beams.
5. Theory of simple bending &Deflection of Beams

 Calculate bending stresses and Deflections in the given beam
 State the theory of simple bending and explain terminology
 List the assumptions in theory of simple bending.
 State the bending equation M/I=f/y=E/R. Explain the terms involved.
 Calculate Bending stress, modulus of section and Moment of resistance.
 Calculate the safe load, safe span and dimensions of cross section.
 Calculate Deflection of beams for cantilever and simply supported beam with point load and
uniformly distributed loads only.
6. Design a Shaft
 Design of cylindrical shaft
 Explain Polar M.I. of solid and hollow shaft
271
 List the assumptions in theory of Simple Torsion
 State the torque equation T / J = τ/ R = Gθ/ L and explain the terms involved
 Design solid and hollow shafts
 Compare strength and weight of solid and hollow shafts of the same length of the material.
 State the torque equation T / J = τ/ R = Gθ/ L and explain the terms involved
 Design solid and hollow shafts
 Compare strength and weight of solid and hollow shafts of the same length of the material
Linked Teaching
Course Outcome CL
PO Hours
CO1 Understand the concept of forces and Analyze the force R, U, A 1,3,4,9 10
system
CO2 Explain and evaluate Stresses and Strains when a body R, U, A 1,2,3,10 10
is loaded
CO3 Calculate the Geometric Properties of Sections U, A 1,2,3, 10
CO4 Draw Shear force and Bending Moment diagrams under U, A 1,2,3,10 10
various load
CO5 calculate bending stresses and Deflections in the given U, A 1,2,3,10 10
beam
CO6 Design a shaft R, U, A 1,2,3,10 10
Total Sessions 60
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised
taxonomy)
Course Program Outcomes

outcome PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
CO1 3 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 3 1
3
CO3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 10
CO5 3 2 3 10
CO6 3 3 3 10.
272
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b-)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) -8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Sl Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Unit No.
No R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
----10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
273
Legend:
18M302C
Model Paper
Board Diploma Examinations
SOLID MECHANICS (C-18)
Mid Sem - I (CIE)
14. Write triangle law of forces. 04x01=04 M

15. Write conditions of equilibrium.
16. Define the term modulus of elasticity.
17. List out three elastic constants.
PART-B
---02X03=06M
5. (a) Write expression for resultant and direction of resultant from parallelogram law
of force
(or)
18. (b) Forces of 20N, 30N, 40N, 50N are acting along positive X axis, positive Y axis negative X
axis and negative Y axis. Find resultant.
6. (a) .Define Stress and strain

(or)
6. (b) M.S bar carries an axial load of 75 KN. If the allowable tensile stress is
50N/mm2, find the diameter of the rod.
274
PART-C
Instructions : 1. Answer any TWO questions. 05X02=10M
7. (a) Using Lamis’s theorem find the forces P and Q in the given figure
(or)
7. (b) State the conditions of equilibrium and Define Parallelogram law.
8. (a) Draw the stress – strain diagram for MS and CI under tension indicating salient points
(or)
8. (b) State the significance of factor of safety.
275
276
MODEL PAPER
18M302C
SOLID MECHANICS (C-18)
Mid Sem-II (CIE)
1. Write formula for centroid of semi circle. 04x01=04 M
2. Write formula for M.I of triangle about its base.
3. Define contraflexture.
4. Define term bending moment.
PART-B
02X03=06M
5. (a) Find M.I of a rectangle about its base.

(or)
5. (b) Find M.I of triangle passing through its apex and parallel to its base.
6. (a) Draw the SFD and BMD of a cantilever beam of length, L subjected to a point load, W
at the free end.
(or)
6. (b) A simply supported beam of length 5m carries a U.D.L of 2KN/m over entire span.
Draw SF and BM diagrams.
277
PART-C
7. (a) Find centroid of C section formed by using rectangles of 100 mm x 20 mm

(or)
7. (b) Find M.I of L section formed by rectangle 150mmX10mm about axis coincide with
base.
8. (a) Draw the SF and BM diagrams for simply supported beam of length ‘l’ udl of intensity
‘w’ N/m over its entire length.
(or)
8. (b) A cantilever beam of length 10m long is subjected to a point loads of 5KN at an
intermittent distance of 2m from the fixed end. Draw SF and BM diagrams.
.
278
18M302C
SEE-MODEL PAPER
DME– III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
SOLID MECHANICS
Time: 2 Hours] [ Total Marks: 40
__________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
08X01=08
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions.
1. 1. Give an example of compressive force. 04x01=04 M

2. Write the significance of finding centroid of a body.
3. Define Moment of resistantance.
4. Write the formula for centroid of quadrant of a circle.
5. Define Radius of curvature.
6. Write the Bending Equation.
7. What is Polar Moment of Inertia?
8. Write formulae for tensional stiffness.
PART-B
04X03=12
9. (a)Two forces of magnitude 30N and 40N each act on a body. The angle between one
forces is 200. Find their resultant.
(or)
9. (b) Explain the assumptions in simple bending.
10. (a) Two rectangles of dimension 100mmX10mm form a L section. Find its centroid
(or)
10. (b)A solid shaft of 150mm diameter is used to transmit torque. Find the maximum torque
transmitted by the shaft, if the maximum shear stress induced in the shaft is 45N/mm 2.
279
11. (a) A steel plate of width 100mm and 30mm depth. Find the Moment of Inertia.
(or)
11. (b) Write the slop & deflection formulae for cantilever with point load.
12. (a) Design the shaft based on strength.

(or)
12. (b)the shear stress of the solid shaft is not to exceed to 40N/mm 2 when the torque
transmitted is 20000N-m.detrmine the minimum diameter of the shaft.
PART-C
04X5=20
13. (a) A body of weight 200N is held vertical by means of two strings which make 30 0 and
600 with horizontal. Find tension in strings.
(or)
13. (b) A cantilever of length 3m carries a point load of 40 kN at free end. Find the slope and
deflection of the cantilever at free end assume I=8X10 7mm4 and E=2.1X105mm2.
14. (a) A T- section is formed by two rectangles 150mmX20mm.Find centroid moment of

inertia parallel to its base
(or)
14. (b) A cantilever of 3m is loaded with a uniformly distributed load of 20 kN/m run. Find
the slope and deflection at the free end of the beam, if the I = 7550X10 4mm4
E=2.1X105mm2
15. (a) A 5m long simply supported beam at the ends carries a point load W at its centre. If the
slope at the ends of the beam is not to exceed 10, find the deflection at the centre of the beam.
(or)
15. (b) A simply supported beam of span 5m is subjected to u.d.l of 10kN/m over the entire
span . If I=8500X104mm4, E=2.1X105mm2. Find the slope and deflection of the beam
16. (a) A solid shaft of diameter 12mm is subjected to a torque of 20Nm. Find the angle of
twist over a length of 300mm. take G=0.8X105N/mm2.
(or)
16. (b) A solid circular shaft running at 500rpm transmits 300kW power. Calculate the
suitable diameter of the shaft, if the maximum allowable shear stress is 100N/mm 2.
280
THERMODYNAMICS
Course Title : Thermodynamics Course Code : 18M303C
Semester : III Course Group : Core

45:15:0
Methodology : Lecture +Tutorials Total contact periods : 60
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of Physics
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Outline various laws of thermodynamics and interpret the gas laws.
CO 2 Acquire knowledge on various thermodynamic processes and estimate different properties.

CO 3 Classify fuels used, and describe experimental procedure to determine their calorific value
CO 4 Analyze different air standard cycles and compare them.

CO 5 Elaborate principle of working of IC engines.
CO 6 Explain different systems used in IC engines and evaluate the performance of IC engines.
281
COURSE CONTENT AND BLUE PRINT OF MARKS FOR SEE

Unit
Unit Name Periods Remarks
No R U A
Fundamentals of
1 Thermodynamics and 10
perfect gas laws Q No Q No
Q No 1
9(a) 13(a)
Thermodynamic
2 10
processes
3 Fuels and combustion 10

Q No Q No
Q No 2
10 (a) 14 (a)
4 Air Standard Cycles 10
QNo 4 Q Q No QNo
No 9(b), Q 13(b),
IC Engines – 5, No QNo
5 10 15(a),
Working principles Q 11(a),
No Q No QNo
Q 6 11(b) 15(b)
No
3 Q Q No QNo
No 10(b), 14(b),
IC Engines – systems QNo
7, Q No
6 used and performance 10 16(a),
Q 12(a),
of IC engines QNo
No Q No
8 12(b) 16(b)
Legend: R; Remembering, U: Understanding A: Applying
282
COURSE CONTENT
Thermodynamics
Unit – 1 Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Fundamentals of Thermodynamics and perfect gas laws

Introduction – Thermodynamic systems- Properties – Zeroth law, First Law , First law applied to
closed system (NFEE)and Second Law of Thermodynamics -Perfect gas – Boyles’ Law, Charles’s
Law, Avagadro’s law, Regnault’s law, Joule’s law - Ideal Gas equation – Relation between specific
heats.
Unit – 2 Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Thermodynamic processes
Expression for work done and heat supplied (without derivation) for Isochoric, Isobaric, Isothermal,
Isentropic, Polytropic processes – Free expansion and Throttling process – Entropy – Expression for
entropy (without derivation) for the above thermodynamic processes
Unit – 3 Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Fuels and Combustion
Fuel - Types – Calorific values (Heating value) of fuels - Dulong’s formula for calorific value - Bomb
calorimeter - Junker’s Gas calorimeter– Definition of combustion of fuel - Calculation of minimum air
required( on mass basis) for the complete combustion of fuel having a given composition – Products
of combustion-Orsat Apparatus for flue gas analysis.

Air Standard Cycles
Air standard cycle -Reversible and irreversible process –Explanation and analysis of Carnot cycle
,Otto cycle , Diesel cycle– Expression for efficiency of these cycles (without derivation) –
Comparison of performance of Otto cycle and Diesel cycle.
Unit – 5 Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
IC Engines – Working principles
Heat engines – Internal combustion engines and external combustion engines - classification of I.C.
engines - Components of IC engines - Function of each part and materials used - Principle of working
of four stroke petrol engine and four stroke diesel engine - Principle of working of two stroke petrol
engine - Valve timing diagramof four stroke petrol engine and four stroke diesel engine.
283
Unit – 6 Duration:10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
IC Engines – Systems used and performance of IC engines
Fuel systems – Ignition systems – Cooling Systems – Lubrication systems - Evaluation of

performance parameters
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering Thermodynamics by P. K. Nag TMH Publishers

2. Thermal Engineering byR.K Rajput
3. Thermodynamics and Heat Engines Vol 1 and Vol 2 by R Yadav
4. IC Engines by Gill and Smith
Fundamentals of Thermodynamics and perfect gas laws

 Define the various terms associated with the thermodynamic system.Explain with
examples Open system, Closed system and Isolated System.
 Define the various thermodynamic properties, State, Path, Process, Cycle,
Temperature, Heat and Work. Know sign convention of heat and work.
 Define Specific heats, Internal Energy, Enthalpy, Flow work -Solve Problems on
properties of thermodynamic systems.
 Define Thermal equilibrium -Statethe Zeroth Law of TD, First law of TD, First law
applied to closed system and Second law of Thermodynamics.
 Solve problems on First law applied to closed system (NFEE)
 Define Perfect gas - State Boyle’s law, Charle’s Law, Know Characteristic gas
equation (without derivation), Universal gas constant.
 Solve problems on above gas laws.
 Write relation between specific heats (without derivation)–solve problems State
Avogadro’s Law, Regnault’s law and Joule’s law
Thermodynamic processes
 Know expression for work done and heat supplied (without derivation) for Isochoric,
Isobaric and Isothermal processes
 Solve problems on the above processes.
 Know expression for work done and heat supplied (without derivation) for Isentropic,
Polytropic processes. -Know the relation between pressure, volume and temperature
in adiabatic (Isentropic) process.
 Sketch all the above processes during expansion and compression on P-V diagram
284
 Solve problems on above processes.
 Know Throttling process and free expansion process.
 Define Entropy and know expression for change in entropy for various
thermodynamic processes(without derivation)
 Solve problems on change in entropy
Fuels and Combustion

 Define the term fuel- Classification of fuels –Different solid fuels, stages of formation
of coal, advantages and disadvantages of solid fuels.
 Different liquid and gaseous fuels - Their advantages and disadvantages.
 Define higher calorific value (heating value) and lower calorific Value-Estimate
calorific value of fuel from Du long’s formula.
 Explain with line diagram the components of a Bomb calorimeter narrate the
sequence of determination of calorific value and write final formula to find calorific
value. (Problems omitted)
 Explain the working principle of Junker’s gas calorimeter with a line diagram, narrate
the sequence of determination of calorific valueof a gaseous fueland writefinal
formula to find calorific value. (Problems omitted)
 Define combustion of fuel, know the expression for minimum air required (on mass
basis)for complete combustion and solve problems.
 Know the products of combustion (problems omitted)
 Explain with a line diagram the working of Orsat’s apparatus and narrate the
sequential procedure in conducting flue gas analysis by using Orsat’s apparatus.
Air Standard Cycles

 Define the term air standard cycle. Know assumptions for air standard cycle.
 State the assumptions made in Carnot cycle and explain its working with a line
diagram
 Write the formula for the air standard efficiency of a Carnot cycle (without
derivation) and solve simple problems
 State the assumptions made in Otto cycle and explain its working with a line diagram
 Write the formula for the air standard efficiency of Otto cycle (without derivation)
and solve simple problems
 State the assumptions made in Diesel cycle and explain its working with a line
diagram
 Write the formula for the air standard efficiency of a Diesel cycle (without derivation)
and solve simple problems.
 Compare Otto cycle and Diesel cycle.
IC Engines – Working principles

 Define Heat Engine - Compare internal combustion engines and external combustion
engines - Classify Internal Combustion Engines.
 Draw the line diagram of an I.C. engines, name the various parts and briefly explain
their function. Know the various basic terms associated with IC Engine
 Explain with line diagram the working of a four-stroke petrol engine (SI).
285
 Explain theoretical indicator diagram, valve timing diagram of a four stroke petrol
(SI) engine.
 Explain with line diagram the working of a four-stroke diesel(CI) engine.
 Explain theoretical indicator diagram,valve timing diagram of a four stroke diesel
(CI) engine.
 Explain with line diagram the working of a two-stroke petrol engine.Draw the
indicator diagram.
 Compare two stroke engines with four stroke engines and compare diesel engines
with petrol engines.
I C Engines – Systems used and performance of IC engines

 Know the functions of the elementsof the fuel system in a petrol engine.(Fuel tank,
Fuel pump, Fuel filter, Air cleaner and Carburettor)
 Know the functions of various elementsof the fuel systems of diesel engine.( Fuel
Feed pump, Filter, Injection pump and Injector)
 Explain with line diagram the working of a battery ignition system.
 Explain with line diagram working of a magneto ignition system.Compare the battery
ignition system with magneto ignition system
 Know the necessity of cooling of IC engine. Explain with a legible sketch air cooling
system , forced circulation water cooling system, forced circulation liquid coolant
system and compare them
 Know the necessity of lubrication of IC engine and know the parts to be
lubricated.Draw the line diagram of lubricating system and explain briefly the
components of lubricating system (Oil pump, Oil strainer, Pressure relief valve, Oil
gallery, Pressure gauge etc).
 Define the performance parameters of IC Engines like Indicated power, Brake power,
indicated and brake mean effective pressure, Friction power, Specific fuel
consumption, Mechanical Efficiency, Thermal Efficiency and know their formula
 Solve simple problems involving above parameters.
SUGGESTED E RESOURCES/STUDENT ACTIVITIES
1. Make a list of different bikes available in market and know their capacities.
2. Make a list of different cars available in market and know their capacities
3. Visit to a hospital/industry and see how a boiler works.
4. Make a report on the solid, liquid fuels available in market and know their calorific values.
5. Collect data of pressure required in tyres of a two wheeler and four wheeler.
6. Collect data of different engine oils used in automobiles.
7. Collect information of different liquid coolants used in automobile
286
8. Working of bomb calorimeter
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nJOH29SGcCk
9. Study of cut out models of IC engines.
10. Visit to automobile workshop.
11. Working of IC Engine
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=O9tfIfwlmz8
12. Know fuel system
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DCfyUm3I4oI
13. Know battery ignition system
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OMLSNwQiiKg
14. Know cooling system in automobile
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=V7inC4lOpGs
15. Know lubrication system
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mmmcj53TNic
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping Pos
18M303C.1 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1, 2,3
18M303C.2 3 2 2 - - - - 1 - - 1, 2, 3,8
18M303C.3
1 3 - - -- - - - - - 1, 2
18M303C.4 1, 2, 3,8
2 2 1 - - - - 1 - -
18M303C.5 1, 2 8, 10
2 1 - - - - - 2 - 1
18M303C.6 1,2,8, 10
2 1 - - - - - 2 - 1
287
QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT FOR CIE(MID SEM I)
Questions to be set for CIE

Unit
No
Fundamentals of Q No 1
1 Thermodynamics and Q No 5(a) Q No 7(a)
perfect gas laws Q No 2
Q No 5(b) Q No 7(b)
Thermodynamic Q No 3
2 Q No 6(a) Q No 8(a)
processes Q No 4
Q No 6(b) Q No 8(b)
QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT FOR CIE(MID SEM II)

Unit
Unit Name Remarks
No R U A
Q No 1
3 Fuels and combustion Q No 5(a) Q No 7(a)
Q No 2
Q No 5(b) Q No 7(b)
Q No 3
4 Air Standard Cycles Q No 6(a) Q No 8(a)
Q No 4
Q No 6(b) Q No 8(b)
288
C-18M303C
MODEL PAPER
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION
SEMESTER END EXAM (SEE) DME III SEMESTER
THERMODYNAMICS
TIME :2 Hours Max. Marks: 40
PART – A Marks: 8 X 1 M = 8M
NOTE : 1)Answer all questions and each question carries one mark.
2)Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceeding three simple
sentences
1. Write SI units of Energy and Power.

2. Define the term higher calorific value.
3. Define I C engine
4. State Zeroth law of Thermodynamics.
5. What is the function of piston rings in IC engine
6. What is the necessity of cooling an IC engine (any two).
7. A engine has a swept volume of 80 cc and clearance volume of 10 cc. Find its compression
ratio.
8. A IC engine working on Otto cycle has a compression ratio of 8. Find its air standard
efficiency.
PART – B
Answer all questions . Each question carries three marks

4x 3 M = 12M
9(a) A gas undergoes a change of state from pressure of 1 bar, volume 20 m 3 and temperature 300
K to pressure of 2 bar, volume 10 m 3, temperature 300K . Which gas law does it obey? Support your
answer.
OR
9(b) Classify IC engines.
10(a) A gas undergoes a change of state from pressure of 1 bar, volume 20 m 3 and temperature
300 K to pressure of 2 bar, volume 10 m3, temperature 300K . Which gas law does it obey?
OR
10(b) Write three advantages and three disadvantages of liquid fuels over solid fuels
289
11(a) Draw a neat sketch of an IC engine and show its components.
OR
11(b) Draw valve timing diagram of 4 stroke petrol engine.
12(a) Write the function of Fuel pump and carburetor in a SI engine.

OR
12(b) Write the function of fuel feed pump and Fuel Injector in a CI engine..
PART – C
Answer all questions . Each question carries five marks
4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) 0.25 m of air at a pressure of 140 kN/m 2 occupies 0.15 m3 is compressed to 1.4 MN/m2
3
according to pV1.25 = constant. Determine change in internal energy, work done and heat rejected .
OR
13 (b) Explain working of four stroke petrol engine
14 (a) Explain construction and working of Bomb calorimeter..

OR
14 (b) Explain with line diagram the working of battery ignition system.
15 (a) Explain construction and working of Junker’s gas calorimeter..

OR
15 (b) Explain with line diagram the lubrication system used in IC engine.
16 (a) The following data refers to a test on a petrol engine.

Indicated Power = 30 kW, Brake power = 26 kW
Engine speed= 1800 RPM Brake specific fuel consumption = 0.35 kg/kWh
Calorific value of fuel = 44100 kJ/kg.
Calculate Mechanical Efficiency, The indicated thermal efficiency, The brake thermal
efficiency..
OR
16 (b) Explain with line diagram the magneto ignition system used in IC engine.
290
C-18M303C
MODEL PAPER
DME III SEMESTER
MID SEM I EXAMINATION
THERMODYNAMICS
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1M = 4 M
NOTE: 1) Answer all questions and each question carries one mark.
2) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed three simple sentences
1. Define the term thermal equilibrium.
2. Convert a pressure of 10 MPa into bar.
3. What is another name of reversible adiabatic process.
4. What are SI units of entropy.
PART – B Marks : 2 X 3M= 6 M
NOTE: 1) Answer allquestions and each question carries three marks

2) The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.
5. (a)Define specific heat, write it units and write value of specific heat of water.
OR
5. (b) Write sign convention for work done on the system and heat supplied to the system.
6. (a) Which gas law does isothermal process follow.

OR
6 (b)A ideal gas at 200 oC and 12 bar expands adiabatically to 2.4 bar. Calculate its final
temperature.
291
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
NOTE :
1. Answer allquestions and each question carries five marks.
2. The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer
7(a) A system undergoes a cycle composed of four processes and the energy transfers are
tabulated as below
Process Q (kJ/min) W (kJ/min) du (kJ/min)

1-2 550 230 ------
2-3 230 ------ 380
3-4 -500 --------- -----
4-1 0 70 -----
a. Complete the table

b. Determine the rate of work in kW
OR
7 (b) Write Kelvin Planck and Claussius statement of second law of thermodynamics.
8 (a) 0.12 m3 of air at 1.5 MPa and 1500 0C expands adiabatically to 175 KPa . Find (i) The final
temperature and (ii) The work done
OR
8 (b) A gas has an initial pressure, volume and temperature of 95kN/m 2, 14 litres and 100oC
respectively. The gas is compressed according to the law pV 1.3 = C through the volume ratio of
14:1. Determine the change in internal energy.
***
292
C-18M303C
MODEL PAPER
DME III SEMESTER
MID SEM II EXAMINATION
THERMODYNAMICS
Time : 1 hr Total Marks : 20
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1 M = 4 M
NOTE: 1) Answer allquestions and each question carries one marks.
2) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed three simple
sentences
1. State two advantages of solid fuel.

2. Define lower calorific value of a fuel.
3. Why is carnot cycle not practicable?
4. Define cut off ratio in a diesel cycle.
PART – B Marks : 2 X 3 M= 6 M
NOTE: 1) Answer allquestions and each question carries three marks
5 (a) Explain Natural gas which is used as fuel.
OR
5 (b) A fuel has liberated 20000kJ of heat when 2 Kg of fuel is burnt. Find its calorific value.
293
6. (a) Draw P-V and T-S diagram of carnot cycle.
OR
6 (b) List the processes involved in a Carnot cycle.
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 05 M= 10 M
NOTE :
1)Answer allquestions and each question carries five marks
2)The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the content
7. (a) Explain construction and working of Junker’s gas calorimeter.

OR
7 (b) Explain construction and working of Bomb gas calorimeter.
8 (a) In an Otto cycle the air at the beginning of isentropic compression is at 1 bar and
15 oC and is compressed through a ratio of 8. The heat added is 1008 kJ/kg during constant
volume process. Determine Maximum temperature in the cycle, The air standard efficiency,
work done per kg of air and heat rejected per kg of air.
OR
8. (b) Compare performance of Otto cycle and Diesel cycle for same compression ratio and heat
addition
294
BASIC MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
Course Title : Basic Manufacturing Technology Course Code 18M304C
Semester III Course Group :Core
Teaching Scheme in 45:15:0 Credits :3

periods(L:T:P)
Total Contact : 60Periods
Methodology Lecture + Tutorials
PERIODS :
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of Manufacturing Processes
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability :
CO1 Illustrate the Working of a Lathe Machine and Classify Lathe machines to perform operations
in engineering applications.
CO 2 Describe the construction and Working of a Broaching machine and identify components
manufactured by broaching.
CO 3 Identify Parts of Shaper, Slotter and Planer and Explain their working to and assess the
requirement in various fields of engineering
CO 4 Identify the Properties, composition of Cutting Fluids, Coolants & Lubricants to select
depending on the application
CO 5 Classify the welding processes and Explain soldering, brazing and Gas cutting and assess the
requirement in various fields of engineering
CO 6 Classify and Identify Parts of a Milling machine, Methods of Gear making
COURSE CONTENT
295
1.0 Lathe and Lathe Work 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Working Principle of Lathe , Types of Lathes - Engine lathe – construction details–specifications.,

geometry and nomenclature of single point cutting tool, tool signature, functions of tool angles.
General and special operations – (Turning, facing, taper turning thread cutting, knurling, forming,
drilling, boring, reaming, key way cutting.)Methods of taper turning – explanation Lathe accessories
viz., work holding devices and tool holding devices Turret lathe: sketch – operation – advantages.
Capstan lathe: sketch – operation – advantages. Comparison of engine (centre lathe) – turret –
capstan lathe, Semi automatic lathe – features ,Automatic lathe – features, Copying lathe –
applications.
2.0 Broaching Machines 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Introduction to broaching, Types of broaching machines–horizontal type (single ram &
duplex ram) vertical type, pull up, pull down, and push down. Elements of broach tool, broach
teeth
details – nomenclature – types – tool material.
3.0Shaping, Slotting, and Planing 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Introduction to shaper, slotter, planer, Constructional details and specifications of shaper, slotter
and
planer. Operations on these machines. Tools and materials. Driving mechanisms - quick return
arrangement - crank & slotted lever mechanism, whit worth mechanism, hydraulic drive.
4.0 Cutting Fluids, Coolants & Lubricants 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Introduction, Types of cutting fluids. Properties and functions of fluids and coolants. Fluids and
coolants required in turning, drilling, shaping, sawing & Broaching, Selection of cutting fluids,
methods of application of cutting fluid. Classification of lubricants (solid, liquid, gaseous)
Properties and applications of lubricants.
5.0 Welding 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Introduction, Classification of welding processes. Applications, Advantages and limitations of
welding, Principles of arc welding, Arc welding equipment, Choice of electrodes for different
metals, Principle of gas (oxy – acetylene) welding. Equipment of gas welding. Welding
procedures ( arc & gas ),Soldering and Brazing techniques., Types and applications of solders
& fluxes ,Various flame cutting processes. Advantages and limitations of flame cutting, Defects
296
in welding., Testing and inspection. Modern welding methods, (Submerged, CO 2, Atomic –
Hydrogen, ultrasonic welding), Brief description of MIG & TIG Welding.
6.0 The concept of Milling 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
The principle of working of a Milling machine, Classify the milling machines, constructional
details
of milling machine, functions of each part of the milling machine, various milling operations,
different milling cutters, selection of tool and work holding devices, different indexing methods –
direct, simple and compound indexing - specifications of milling machines.
The concept of Gear Making
Different methods of producing gears, Gear shaping, Gear hob and its components. Working of
the
above m/c, sequence of operations in generating gear by gear hobbing m/c., Different methods of
finishing, Specification of gear, Various gear materials.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Welding Technology by Little.

2. Elements of Work Shop Technology vol. I & II by Hazra Choudry
3. Engineering Metrology by Jain
4. Welding Technology by Parmar
5. Manufacturing Technology (volume-1) by P.N.Rao (MGH Pub)
6. Production technology by RK Jain
Suggested Learning outcomes

Up on completion of the course the student shall be able to
Understand the construction details of Lathe & Lathe Work
 State the working principle of lathe.
 Classify lathes.
 Draw the line diagram of engine lathe.
 List the parts of lathe.
 Describe the functions of each part in lathe.
 Indicate the specifications of a lathe.
297
 List the various operations performed on lathe including special operations.
 Explain methods of taper turning with line diagrams.
 Calculate the included angle for taper turning.
 List different work holding devices.
 Explain the Nomenclature of Lathe (single point) tool with the help of legible sketch
 Explain the Significance of various angles.
 List the various types of production lathes.
 Illustrate the working principle of turret lathe, Capstan, Automatic and Semi-automatic
lathes & copying lathes.
 Distinguish between automatic and semi-automatic lathes.
 Explain the need of copying lathes.
 State the advantages and applications of production lathes.
Understand the construction details and working principle of Broaching machine

 Define Broaching.
 Classify broaching machines.
 Illustrate the working principles of broaching machines.
 Illustrate the constructional details of the broaching machines.
 State the advantages & limitations of broaching.
Understand the construction details and working principle of Shaper, Slotter and Planer
 Illustrate the working principles of shaper, slotter, and planer.
 Illustrate the constructional details of the above machines.
 Explain the functions of important parts of the above machines.
 List the operations performed on these machines.
 State the specifications of each machine.
 Explain the principle of quick-return mechanism as applied to shaper/planer.
 Describe the different methods of obtaining quick return motion.
 Explain the principle of hydraulic drive with the help of a line diagram applied to shaper.
Understand the concept of Cutting Fluids, Coolants & Lubricants.

 State the properties of cutting fluids and coolants.
 Mention the types of fluids.
298
 List the relative merits of the cutting fluids and coolants.
 Select the proper cutting fluids and coolants for various machining operations.
 Classify the lubricants.
 List all the properties of lubricants.
Understand the joining process of Welding.

 State the necessity of welding.
 Classify the welding processes.
 State the applications, advantages and limitations of welding.
 Explain the principle of arc welding.
 List the tools and equipment of arc welding.
 Name the proper electrodes for given metals.
 Explain the principle of gas welding.
 List the tools and equipment of oxy-acetylene welding.
 Explain different welding procedures in arc and gas welding.
 Define the terms soldering & brazing.
 Differentiate soldering from brazing.
 Explain the principles of soldering & brazing.
 Explain soldering / brazing techniques.
 List the gas cutting equipment.
 State the principle of flame cutting.
 State the relative advantages of flame cutting over other types of cutting.
 List the various defects in welds.
 List the reasons and remedies for the above.
 Explain non-destructive testing of welds.
 List various (special) modern welding techniques.
 State the principle of at least four modern welding techniques.
 Explain the principle of TIG and MIG welding.
Understand the concept of Milling, Gear making
 Explain the principle of working of a Milling machine.
 Classify the milling machines.
299
 Illustrate the constructional details of milling machine
 Explain the functions of each part of the milling machine.
 Explain the various milling operations.
 List the different milling cutters.
 Explain selection of tool and work holding devices.
 Explain the different indexing methods.
 Explain the specifications of milling machines.
 List the different methods of producing gears.
 Illustrate gear shaping
 Draw the gear hob and label its components
 Describe the working of the above m/c
 List the sequence of operations in generating gear by gear hobbing m/c.
 Explain the different methods of finishing.
 Specify the gear
 List the various gear materials.
1. Student inspects the available equipment in the lab/workshops to identify different machine tools .
2. visit nearby workshop/ industry identify machine tools, operations , safety precautions taken and
prepare a report.
3.Quiz
4.Group discussion
5.Surprise test
6. Seminar
CO-PO Matrix
1 2 3 2 1 1,2,5,9
2 2 3 1 2 1 1,2,3,5,9
3
2 3 2 1 1,2,5,9
4
2 3 2 1 1 1,2,5 6,,9
5 2 3 2 1 1 1,2,5,6,9
300
6 2 3 2 1 1,2,5,9
Linked
Course Outcome CL
PO
Illustrate the Working of a Lathe Machine and Classify
CO1 Lathe machines to perform operations in engineering R/U/A 1,2,5,9
applications.
Describe the construction and Working of a Broaching

CO2 machine 1,2,3,5,9
R/U/A
Identify Parts of Shaper, Slotter and Planer and

CO3 Explain their working to and assess the requirement in R/U/A 1,2,5,9
various fields of engineering
State the Properties, composition of Cutting Fluids,
CO4 Coolants & Lubricants to select depending on the R/U/A 1,2,5 6,,9
application
Classify the welding processes and Explain soldering,

CO5 brazing and Gas cutting and assess the requirement in R/U/A 1,2,5,6,9
various fields of engineering
Classify and Identify Parts of a Milling machine,

CO6 Methods of Gear making R/U/A 1,2,5,9
301
QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT FOR CIE (MID I)
Uni Questions to be set for CIE Remarks

Unit Name
t No
R U A
Q No Q No
Lathe & Lathe Q No 1
1 5(a) 7(a)
Work Q No 2
Q No Q No
5(b) 7(b)
Q No Q No
Q No 3
2 Broaching Machine 6(a) 8(a)
Q No 4
Q No Q No
6(b) 8(b)
QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT FOR CIE (MID II)
Questions to be set for CIE Remarks

Uni
Unit Name
t No
R U A
Q No Q No
Shaper, Slotter, Q No 1
3 5(a) 7(a)
Planner Q No 2
Q No Q No
5(b) 7(b)
Cutting Fluids, Q No Q No
Q No 3
4 Coolants and 6(a) 8(a)
Lubricants Q No 4
Q No Q No
6(b) 8(b)
302
Unit Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Unit Name Periods
No
R U A
Lathe &
1 Lathe 10
Work
Q No Q No
Q No 1
9(a) 13(a)
Broaching
2 10
Machine
Shaper,
3 Slotter, 10
Planner
Q Q No
Q No 2
Cutting No10(a) 14 (a)
Fluids,
4 Coolants 10
and QNo 4
Lubricants
Q No
9(b), QNo
Q No
5, Q No 13(b),
5 Welding 10 QNo
Q No 11(a),
6 15(a),
Q No QNo
Q No 11(b) 15(b)
3
Q No QNo
10(b), 14(b),
Q No
Milling, QNo
7, Q No
6 Gear 10 16(a),
Q No 12(a),
making QNo
8
Q No 16(b)
12(b)
Legend: R: Remembering, U: Understanding A: Applying
303
18M304C
State Board of Technical Education, Telangana State

Model Paper
BASIC MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY (C-18)
Mid Sem-I (CIE)
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1M = 4Marks
NOTE: 1) Answer ALL questions and each question carries one mark.
7. List the various operations performed on a lathe machine.

8. List the parts of a lathe machine.
9. State the applications of broaching.
10. List various types of broaching machines.
PART – B Marks : 2 X 3M= 6 Marks
NOTE: 1) Answer any two questions and each question carries Three marks
5(a) Differentiate between automatic and semiautomatic lathes.

or
5(b) Draw a line diagram of engine lathe and describe functions of main parts.
6(a) Explain the Mechanism of Broaching.

or
6(b) State advantages and limitations of broaching.
PART – C Marks : 2 X 5M = 10
Marks
NOTE :
1) Answer any Two questions and each question carries Five marks.
but not the length of the answer
7(a) List different methods of taper turning and explain taper turning by compound rest method.
or
7(b) Explain the procedure for thread cutting on a lathe machine with a new sketch
8(a) Draw a horizontal broaching machine and explain it.

or
8(b)Draw internal pull broach and show various elements on it. Briefly explain them.
***
304
18M304C
Model Paper
BASIC MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY (C-18)
Mid Sem-II (CIE)
Time : 1Hour Total Marks : 20
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1M = 4 Marks
NOTE: 1) Answer ALL questions and each question carries One mark.
5. Write the specifications of a slotter.

6. List any four work holding devices in a planer.
7. List types of Lubricants.
8. List the applications of cutting fluids.
PART – B Marks : 2 X 3M= 6 Marks
NOTE: 1) Answer any two questions and each question carries Three marks
5(a) State the main differences between a shaper and a planer

or
5(b)Explain the working principle of a slotter.
6(a)Mention any three purpose of Lubricants.

or
6(b) Write short notes on a) soluble oils b) Chemical compounds.
PART – C Marks : 5 X 2M= 10

Marks
NOTE : 1)Answer any Two questions and each question carries Five marks
7(a)Explain the different operations performed by a shaper

or
7(b)Draw the line diagram of a slotter and label its parts
8(a) Draw a neat sketch of standard double housing planer and explain its main parts.
or
8(b) Name four cutting fluids and state the situation in which each fluid must be used.
305
18-M-304C
MODEL PAPER
MECHANICAL BRANCH – III
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION(SEE)
BASIC MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
Time : 2 Hours [ Total Marks: 40]
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
08X01=08

19. What are the different types of Lathe?

20. How are shapers classified?
21. List out various attachments in milling machine.
22. What are the advantages of using cutting fluids.
23. List equipment needed for gas welding.
24. What is need of flux in soldering?
25. Name few important parts of milling machine.
26. List out various methods of gear manufacturing.
PART-B
04X03=12
9. (a)What is the need of a Copying Lathe
(or)
9. (b)Mention advantages of ultrasonic welding.
10. (a)List out the quick return mechanisms used in a Planer

(or)
10. (b)Mention three quick return mechanisms used in a slotter
11. (a)Sketch an oxyacetylene flame and identify the various zones.

(or)
11. (b)State the difference between soldering and brazing.
12. (a)What is indexing and state the principle of direct indexing.

(or)
12. (b)Write short notes on various gear finishing operations.
306
PART-C
04X5=20
13. (a)Draw a line diagram of engine Lathe and describe functions of main parts.
(or)
13. (b)Differentiate between soldering and brazing.
14. (a)Explain the principle of whit-worth quick return mechanism of a shaper.

(or)
14. (b)Explain the methods of applications of cutting fluids.
15. (a)Explain the principle of arc welding with a neat sketch and list out different
equipment’s and accessories used in it.
(or)
15. (b)Explain the principle of atomic hydrogen welding with a neat sketch. State its
advantages, limitations and applications.
16. (a)Draw a line diagram of vertical milling machine and mention function of each part.
(or)
16. (b)Explain the gear hobbing operation with the help of neat sketch and mention its
advantages.
*****
307
ENGINEERING MATERIALS
Course Title : Engineering Materials Course Code : 18M305C
Semester : III Course Group :Core

45:15:0
Methodology : Lectures + Tutorials Total contact periods: 60
CIE : 60 marks SEE : 40 marks
Prerequisites : Basic knowledge of Physics and Chemistry
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to
1 Outline various mechanical properties of engineering materials and test them to know properties.
2 Acquire knowledge on structure of materials.
3 Elaborate the process of producing Iron and steel
4 Explain Iron-Carbon equilibrium diagram and interpret it.
5 Discuss and compare different heat treatment processes of steel.

Explain composition, application of important Ferrous and Nonferrous metals, their alloys and
6 summarize the process followed in powder metallurgy.
308

Unit
No R U A
Mechanical
properties and
1 Testing of 10
engineering Q No Q No
Q No 1
materials 9(a) 13(a)
2 Structure of materials 10
Production of Iron
3 10
and Steel Q No Q No
Q No 2
Iron -Carbon 10 (a) 14 (a)
4 Equilibrium Diagram 10
QNo
Heat treatment of 4 Q Q No QNo
Steel No 9(b), Q 13(b),
5, No QNo
5 10 15(a),
Q 11(a),
No Q No QNo
Q 6 11(b) 15(b)
No
Ferrous, Non 3 Q Q No QNo
FerrousMetals - their No 10(b), 14(b),
alloys and Powder 7, Q No QNo
6 Metallurgy 10 16(a),
Q 12(a),
No Q No QNo
8 12(b) 16(b)
COURSE CONTENT
Engineering materials
Mechanical properties and testing of engineering materials
Engineering Materials – importance and applications, mechanical properties :Tensile strength,

Compressive strength, Ductility, Malleability, Hardness, Toughness, Brittleness, Impact strength,
Fatigue, Creep.
309
Testing of Engineering materials: Destructive tests - Tensile, Compressive and shear strengths ,
stress- strain curve for different materials – Brinell, Rockwell and Vicker’s hardness test –Izod &
Charpy impact test. Non-destructive testing – purpose – Different methods ( without explanation)
Structure of materials
Space lattices, Unit cells – BCC, FCC,HCP structures. Crystallization of metal: dendrite growth,
grain boundary, grain size and its effect on properties–factors affecting grain size - Re
crystallisation
Unit – 3 Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
Production of Iron and Steel
Raw materials used in production of Iron and steel – Production of : Pig Iron by Blast Furnace,
Wrought Iron by Puddling furnace, Cast Iron from Cupola, Steel by Bessemer Process, L.D. Process,
Open Hearth Process, Electric Arc process, Electrical Induction process
Iron-Carbon Equilibrium Diagram
Phase, equilibrium, Gibbs phase rule, alloy, solid solution: Interstitial, substitutional, chemical
compound, mechanical mixture – Cooling curves of pure metals – Allotorpic forms of pure iron and
critical points – Micro constituents of Iron & Carbon alloy – Iron Carbon equilibrium diagram.
Heat Treatment of Steel.
Stages in heat treatment – critical rate of cooling – martensite, bainite, sorbite and troostite-
Isothermal transformation (TTT curves ) - Austenite decomposition on continuous cooling
transformation (CCT) diagram
Heat treatment processes:Annealing – Full Annealing, Sub critical annealing, spheroidise annealing
and isothermal annealing .Normalising, Hardening, Tempering – Austempering and Martempering ,
Surface hardening and Case hardening ( only definition).
Ferrous, Non FerrousMetals - their alloys and Powder Metallurgy

310
Ferrous Metals and alloys–cast iron and types – composition,properties and applications of white
cast iron, gray cast iron, nodular iron and malleable Iron – Plain carbon steels – effect of carbon on
properties. classification of plain carbon steels – Alloy steels : Effect of adding alloying elements
chromium, cobalt, manganese, molybdenum, nickel, tungsten, vanadium – composition, properties
and application of chromium steel, nickel steel, manganese steel , stainless steel and HSS steel.
Non Ferrous metals and alloys - composition, properties and application of duralumin, dow metal,
Brass : catridge brass, admiralty brass, muntz metal, and naval brass. Bronze: gun and bell metal
Nickel: constantan, monel, nichrome and invar. Babbit
Powder metallurgy:Definition and applications – Manufacturing process in powder metallurgy,

metthods to produce metal powders – methods to compact powders ( without explanation) – Pre
sintering and sintering (definition) – Advantages and limitations of powder metallurgy
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Introduction to Physical metallurgy by Avner

2. Physical metallurgy by V. Raghavan
3. Material science and engineering by V. Raghavan
4. Material science and metallurgy by Dr. O.P.KHANNA
5. Powder Metallurgy by TTTI,ECH
Mechanical properties and testing of engineering materials
 Discuss the importance of materials in industry

 Explain different mechanical properties like Tensile strength, Compressive strength, Ductility,
Malleability, Hardness, Toughness, Brittleness, Impact strength, Fatigue, Creep.
 Demonstrate tensile, compressive and shear strength tests.
 Draw stress – strain curves for different materials and interpret them
 Compare Brinell, Rock Well and Vicker’s hardness test.
 Conduct Izod and charpy impact tests.
 List different Non destructive tests used in industry and state their applications.
 Define the termsSpace lattices, Unit cells

 Draw the structure, calculate effective number of atoms of BCC, FCC and HCP structures .
311
 Explain the process of crystallisation of metals and discuss the process of grain formation,
dendritic growth and grain boundaries
 Explain factors effecting grain size.
 Explain the process of recrystallisation
Production of Iron and Steel
 Name the raw materials used in production of Iron and steel

 Explain the production of Pig Iron by Blast Furnace
 Describe the production ofWrought Iron by Puddling furnace
 Discuss the production of Cast Iron from Cupola
 Describe the production of steel by Bessemer Process, L.D. Process, Open Hearth Process,
Electric Arc process, Electrical Induction process
Iron-Carbon Equilibrium Diagram
 StateGibbs phase rule and define the terms involved. - alloy, solid solution: Interstitial,
substitutional, chemical compound, mechanical mixture.
 Sketch Cooling curves of pure metals
 Discuss allotorpic forms of pure iron and identify the critical points
 Explain the following microconstituents of Iron & Carbon alloy: ferrite, austinite, cementite,
leduburite, pearlite, steel, eutectoid steel, hypo eutectoid steel, hyper eutectoid steel and cast
iron.
 Sketch Iron Carbon equilibrium diagram and explain salient points.
Heat Treatment of Steel.
 List the stages in heat treatment

 Define critical rate of cooling, martensite, bainite, sorbite and troostite
 Draw TTT curves (isothermal transformations ) and interpret it.
 Sketch austenite decomposition on continuous cooling transformation (CCT ) diagram .
 Explain Annealing heat treatment process
 Summarize and compare full Annealing, Sub critical annealing, spheroidise annealing and
isothermal annealing
 Differentiate Normalising and Hardening
 Explain Tempering along with Austempering and Martempering
 Define Surface hardening and Case hardening
Ferrous, Non ferrousmetals - their alloys and Powder metallurgy
 Discuss the effect of carbon on cast iron

 Compare the composition and applications of white cast iron, gray cast iron, nodular iron and
malleable Iron
 Classify the plain carbon steels
 Describe the effect of adding alloying elements chromium, cobalt, manganese, molybdenum,
nickel, tungsten, vanadium to steel
 Define ternary, quarternary and complex alloy steel
312
 Explain the composition, properties and application of chromium steel, HSS steel, nickel steel,
manganese steel and stainless steel.
 List composition, properties and application of duralumin, dow metal
 Give composition, properties and application of brass,cartridge brass, admiralty brass, muntz
metal, and naval brass.
 Explain the importance of Bronze, gun and bell metal
 Discuss the composition and application of Nickel alloys: constantan, monel, nichrome and
invar.
 Write composition and application of babbit.
 Define Powder metallurgy
 Describe the manufacturing process in powder metallurgy.
 Write the processes to produce metal powders.
 List the methods to compact powders
 Define Pre sintering and sintering.
 Write advantages and limitations of powder metallurgy
SUGGESTED E-RESOURCES / STUDENT ACTIVITIES
1. Make a list of commonly used materials in daily life like blade, knife, scissors etc and write
the material used.
2. Study microstructure of given specimen.
3. Study micro structure of given specimen after it is welded and notice the difference.
4. Visit to a steel plant
5. Compare hardness of commonly available materials and interpret.
6. Make a list of major parts of a two wheeler and know the material used.
7. Visit a heat treatment plant.
8. Crystal lattice and unit cell
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BjVTdZ_htu8
9. BCC, FCC and HCP crystal structure

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tq7botEnakA
10. Production of pig iron by blast furnace

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=D3ejDgChEhw
11. Production of Wrought Iron by Puddling furnace

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XJ0GyofGchI
12. Production ofCast Iron from Cupola

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Cgbpbw5GRK4
13. Production ofSteel by Bessemer Process

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uh_RAMqRgrk
14. Production ofSteel by Open Hearth Process

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LxH-B1efDnI
15. Production ofSteel by electric arc furnace

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7oSbZgjXlFo
16. Production ofSteel by electrical induction process
313
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5TLBdBXzMsg
CO-PO Matrix
18M305C.
2 3 - - - - - - - - 1, 2
1
18M305C.
3 2 - - - - - - - - 1, 2
2
18M305C.
3 3 3 - 2 - - - 1 - - 1, 2, 4, 8
18M305C. 1, 4, 8
4 2 - - 2 - - - 1 - -
18M305C. 2, 8
- 3 - - - - - 1 - -
5
18M305C. 1,2
2 2 - - - - - - - -
6
QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT FOR CIE (MID SEM I)

Unit
No
Mechanical properties Q No 1
1 Q No 5(a) Q No 7(a)
and Testing
Q No 2
ofengineering Q No 5(b) Q No 7(b)
materials
Q No 3
2 Q No 6(a) Q No 8(a)
Q No 4
Q No 6(b) Q No 8(b)
314
QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT FOR CIE (MID SEM II)

Unit
Unit Name Remarks
No R U A
Q No 1
3 Production of Iron and Q No 5(a) Q No 7(a)
Steel Q No 2
Q No 5(b) Q No 7(b)
Q No 3
4 Iron -Carbon Q No 6(a) Q No 8(a)
Equilibrium Diagram Q No 4
Q No 6(b) Q No 8(b)
C-18M305C
MODEL PAPER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (SEE) DME III SEMESTER
TIME : 2 Hours Max. Marks: 40
2) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceeding three simple
sentences
9. Define the term strength?

10. What is percentage of carbon in steel?.
11. Why is heat treatment essential for engineering materials.
12. Mention any two ductile materials?
13. Define critical rate of cooling.
14. What do you mean by normalising of steel,
15. Give an example of ternary alloy.
16. Give composition of gun metal.
PART – B

4x 3 M = 12M
315
9(a) Explain the difference between: Toughness and Brittleness
OR
9(b) What do you mean by martensite and troostite.
10(a) What is the necessity of using coke and lime stone in production of iron and steel
OR
10(b) Discuss the effect of adding chromium, molybdenum and nickel as alloying elements in steels
11(a) Explain the term surface hardening.

OR
11(b) Explain the term case hardening
12(a) Classify plain carbon steels

OR
12(b) What is the effect of adding manganese to steel.
PART – C
Answer all questions . Each question carries five marks 4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) Explain the process of grain formation and dendritic growth

OR
13 (b) Explain TTT curves
14 (a) Explain production of pig iron by blast furnace.

OR
14 (b) Define powder metallurgy and explain its manufacturing process.
15 (a) Explain continuous cooling transformation curves.

OR
15 (b) Explain annealing heat treatment process
16 (a) Write composition and properties of brass, cartridge brass and admiralty brass
316
OR
16 (b) Write composition and properties of bronze, gun and bell metal.
C-18M305C
MODEL PAPER
DME III SEMESTER
NOTE: 1) Answer all questions and each question carries one marks.
sentences
9. What is brittle material. Give one example.
10. Define fatigue.
11. Define a space lattice.
12. Draw the shape of dendrite.
NOTE: 1) Answer all questions and each question carries three marks
5 (a) List various hardness tests .
OR
5 (b) List different non destructive tests used to test materials.
6 (a) List different non destructive tests used to test materials.

OR
6 (b) Calculate effective number of atoms in FCC structure
317
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 05 M= 10 M
NOTE :
1)Answer all questions and each question carries five marks
7 (a) Draw stress strain curve of a ductile material and show salient points.
OR
7(b) ExplainIzod testing of materials.
8 (a) Explain factors effecting grain size.
OR
8 (b) Explain the process of recrystallisation
318
319
C-18M305C
MODEL PAPER
DME III SEMESTER
sentences
1. What is function of lime stone in production of iron and steel?

2. What is the process of acid steel making?
3. Write Gibbs phase rule?
4. What is a solid solution?
5 (a) Briefly explain open hearth process of production of steel.
OR
5 (b) Briefly explain electrical induction process of production of steel.
6 (a) Define interstitial solid solution and substitutional solid solution.

OR
6 (b) Define cementite and pearlite.
320
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 05 M= 10 M
NOTE :
7 (a) Explain production of cast iron from cupola.

OR
7(b) Explain production of wrought iron by puddling furnace.
8 (a) Sketch cooling curves of pure metals.

OR
8(b) Sketch Iron carbon equilibrium diagram.
321
18M306P, MACHINE DRAWING
Course
title: MACHINE DRAWING Course Code: 18M306P
Course group: Practical
Semester: III Credits: 1.5
Teaching scheme in periods
(L:T:P): 15:0:30 Total contact periods: 45
Methodology: Lecturer + Practice
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Engineering Drawing
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will be able to :
CO1 Understand the difference between engineering and machine drawing.
CO2 Draw the screwed fasteners, welded joints, piping layout and riveted joints as per IS standards.
CO3 Study the part drawings and to draw the assembly drawing
UNIT UNIT NAME PERIODS QUESTION FOR REMARKS

NO SEE
R U A
1 INTRODUCTION, FASTENING 08 1,2
DEVICES
2 PIPING LAYOUTS AND JOINTS, 07 3,4
WELDING FABRICTION
DRAWING SYMBOLS
3 ASSEMBLY-I 1
Assembly drawings of cotter joint, 15
Gib and Cotter joint, Knuckle Joint,
Muff coupling, universal coupling,
Flange couplings, Screw Jack,
Stuffing Box
4 ASSEMBLY –II 1
Assembly Drawings of Bearings (Foot 15
step Bearing, Plummer block), cross
Head, connecting rod, Eccentric, lathe
tail stock
TOTAL 45 4 2
322
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Introduction
Importance of Machine Drawing - Brief revision of 1 st and 3rd angle projections - Understand the
concepts of Orthographic projections and Sectional views.
Fastening Devices
Temporary and Permanent fastenings and their areas of application-thread nomenclature, forms of
screw thread profiles, metric, B.A., Acme, Knuckle, etc.
Bolts and Nuts: Specification of bolts and nuts, Different types of bolted joints (like using through
bolts, studs, screws etc.,) in different applications. Purpose of lock nuts and their Types - Keys
and cotters: Types of keys and cotters: Difference between key and cotter uses.
Rivets and Riveted joints: Types and proportions and specification of rivets: Different types of
riveted joints: Lap, butt-single row, double row etc., chain and zigzag riveting – calculation of
diameter of rivet: Pitch and arrangement of rivets in row – use – of standard proportions.
Exercises:1
1. Thread Nomenclature and forms of screw thread profiles.

2. Exercises in drawing – bolted connections using standard proportions.
3. Drawing of various types of lock nuts & types of keys indicating their proportionate
dimensions.
4. Exercise in drawing riveted joints using standard proportions: Single row, double row
(chain and zigzag) in lap and butt joints (single & double strap).
2.0 Piping layouts

Classification of pipes and tubes- Components of pipes lay-out.-Screw fitting bend, elbow, tee,
lateral Cross-nipple, reducing socket and plug - Unions: Screwed ground and flanged - Valves:
Gate valve: angle valve, check valve - Various conventional symbol used for the above
components.
Exercise: 2
1. Single line diagram of pipe layout one exercises.
2. Double line diagram of pipe layout one exercise.
Welded fabrication drawings

Different types of weld and their basic symbols including sectional representation as per table of
I.S. standards, fillet, square butt, single V-Butt, double V-Butt, single bevel butt, double bevel
butt, stud, bead (edge or seal) spot, seam. - Elements of welding symbol and their standard
location the symbol as per IS standards reference code arrow head, weld symbol supplementary
symbol dimensions of welds, method of welding process, special reference - Significance of arrow
& position of arrow head significance of reference line as per I.S. standards with reference to
fillet, V-Butt an stud welds.- Supplementary symbols and special instructions: surface of reference
323
line; as per I.S. standards with reference to fillet, V-Butt an stud welds.- Dimensions of welds:
length, location and spacing of welds as per I.S., B.I.S., standards with showing dimensions
required on a welding - Need of special reference
Exercise: 3
1. Drawing tables and figs. Referred in the contents above taking form I.S. standards.
2. Dimensioning a given welding drawings as per I.S., SP-46-1988.
3. Preparing working drawing of welding fabrication from given data.
3.0 Assembly Drawings-I
Need and functions of assembly and detailed drawings - Steps in preparing assembly drawings -. -
Exercises in preparing assembly drawings of commonly available engineering components.
Exercise: 4
Draw the views / sectional views of
1. Cotter joint
2. Jib and cotter joint assembly
3. Knuckle joint assembly
4. Assembly of muffs coupling (solid & split) coupling, Flange couplings
5. Screw jack assembly,
6. Stuffing box.
4.0 Assembly Drawings-II
With the knowledge gained by the above exercises the students shall be able to draw exercises on
Bearings, Socket and spigot joint, protective type flanged coupling, piston of petrol engine, cross
head, connecting rod, eccentric, flexible coupling, , sleeve and cotter joint, , lathe tool post, big
end of a connecting rod, foot step bearing, Plummer block, lathe tail stock.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. T.S.M & S.S.M in respect of Technical Drawing by TTTI, Madras

2. Machine Drawing by A.C. Parkinson.
3. Machine Drawing by Jones & Jones.
4. Machine Drawing by N.D. Bhatt.
MID SEM-1 EXAM

S.No. UNIT NAME R U A REMARKS
1 UNIT-I 1,2,3 Answer any
2 UNIT-2 4,5,6 four questions
MID SEM-II
S.NO. UNIT NAME R U A REMARKS
1 UNIT-3 1,2 Answer any
324
one
18M306 P
MODEL PAPER
MID SEM–I MACHINE DRAWING
TIME: 1 HOUR Max.Marks:20
Instructions: Answer any FOUR questions .Each question carries five Marks
4 x 5=20
1. Draw the SQUARE Thread Profiles with proportions.
2. Draw the views of a Square headed bolt.
3. Draw a double riveted chain lap joint connecting two plates of 6mm Thick.
4.Draw the symbols of the following welded joints.
(a) concave fillet Weld
(b) single v-butt weld
(c) Spot weld
(d) Seam Weld
(e) Square Butt Weld
5.Draw the following piping joint symbols(single line)
(a) Tee
(b)Plug
(c) Gate valve
(d)Latera
l(e)Union
6.Draw a Hexagonal headed bolt with nut and washer of 20 mm diameter
325
18M306P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS, (C18)
MID –II MODEL PAPER
18M306 P MACHINE DRAWING

TIME: 1 HOUR Max.Marks:20
Instructions: Answer any ONE questions. Each question carries TWENTY Marks
1. Assemble all the parts of the KNUCKLE JOINT and Draw the Sectional Front View
20 MARKS
326
2. Draw the sectional front view of the gib and cotter joint as given part drawing
327
328
18M306P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS, (C18)

Semester End Examination Model Question paper
DME III semester MACHINE DRAWING Examination
MACHINE DRAWING
Max.Marks:40 Duration:2 hours
PART-A 3 X 4 = 12
MARKS
INSTRUCTIONS: (1) Answer ALL Questions
(2) Each question carries THREE Marks.
(3) Answer should be neat & clear with all the
necessary Dimensions.
(4) All Dimensions are in mm. Choose suitable
Scale.
1. Draw the following Thread Profiles with proportions.
(a) BUTTRESS (b) WHITH WORTH
2. Draw the views of a Square headed bolt.
3. Draw a double riveted chain lap joint connecting two plates of 6mm Thick.
4.Draw the symbols of the following welded joints.
(a) concave fillet Weld (b) single v-butt weld (c) Spot weld
(d) Seam Weld (e) Square Butt Weld
PART –B 28 marks
INSTRUCTIONS: (1) Answer any ONE question.
(2) Each question carries twenty-eight Marks.
(3) All Dimensions are in mm and assume missing
Dimensions if any and choose suitable scale.
5. Assemble all the parts of the KNUCKLE JOINT and Draw the
(a) Sectional Front View 18
(b) Top View 10
329
6. Assemble all the parts of the ECCENTRIC and draw the
(a) Half Sectional Front View 18
(b) Right side View 10
330
331
18M307P, BASIC MANUFACTURING & FABRICATION ENGINEERING LAB
PRACTICE
Course Title : BASIC MANUFACTURING & Course Code 18M307P

FABRICATION ENGINEERING
LAB PRACTICE
Semester III Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in 15:00:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact periods: :45Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge in basic manufacturing technology

Course Outcome
CO1 Leaning the operation and safety precautions of lathe and performing certain lathe
operations
CO2 Basic knowledge in operating welding equipment and performing some welding
operations.
CO3 Basic knowledge in sand preparation for moulds and making the moulds ready for casting
operation.
CO4 Safety precautions in operating the workshop equipment.
Unit Unit name Marks for SEE Marks %Weightage

No Periods weightage
Handli Mani Preci
ng pulati sion
on
1. Hands on practice on 15 10 15 15 40 100
Lathe
2. Hands on practice in 15 10 15 15 40 100
welding
foundry processes
Total 45
COURSE CONTENT
332
1 Foundry
Moulding and casting of
1.1 Solid bearing
1.2 Flange coupling
1.3 Split bearing
1.4 Connecting rod
1.5 V – Pulley
1.6 Gear pulley
1.7 Core making
2 Machine Shop (Turning)
2.1 Plain Turning
2.2 Step Turning
2.3 Taper Turning
2.4 Turning Collars
2.5 Knurling
2.6 Facing
3. Welding
3.1 Layout of Beads
3.2 Butt joints.
3.3 Lap joints.
Course outcomes
Course Outcome Linked PO
CO1 Leaning the operation and safety precautions of lathe and 1,2,3,4,5,6,9,10
performing certain lathe operations
CO2 Basic knowledge in operating welding equipment and 1,2,3,4,5,6,9,10

performing some welding operations.
Basic knowledge in sand preparation for moulds and making

CO3 1,2,3,4,5,6,9,10
the moulds ready for casting operation.
CO4 Safety precautions in operating the workshop equipment. 1,2,3,4,5,6,9,10
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Up on the completion of the course the student shall able to
 Practice the casting principles and operations in foundry

 Write the sand moulding procedures in foundry.
 Prepare a mould sand mix.
 Identify various tools used in foundry shop.
 Prepare mould in two boxes, three boxes.
 Prepare a mould ready for casting with proper provision for runners, risers and gates
333
 Place the cope over the drag without any mismatch
 Prepare the molten metal and calculate the amount of metal to be poured in the mould
 Core making and uses
 Practice the operation of Lathe

 Perform a plain turning operation on a lathe machine.
 Select proper tool to perform the job.
 Centre the job by dial gauge
 Select the suitable speed for different operations
 Use various measuring instruments for taking dimensions.
 Perform step turning operation on lathe.
 Calculate the taper angle.
 Practice different taper turning methods on lathe
 Turn the required tapers by swivelling the compound rest.
 Produce articles of industrial application such as ring gauges, plug gauges, handle etc.
 Tapper turning – Hands on experience in swivelling the compound rest method
 Practice the joining of metals in Arc Welding, Gas welding, brazing

 Prepare the edges for welding
 Select the suitable electrode, voltage and current
 Handle the Electrode Holder for laying welding beads.
 Operate the welding transformer and generator.
 Perform various weld joint operations.
KEY competencies to be achieved by the student.
Title of the experiment Key competency
 Select the suitable sand and mix it for the mould

Moulding and Casting of solid
 Cut gates and runners
bearing
 Pour sufficient quantity of molten metal
 Prepare and place the core
Moulding and Casting of flange
 Cut the gates and runners
coupling
 Pour the sufficient quantity of molten metal
 Prepare and place the core
Moulding and Casting of split
 Cut the gates and runners
bearing
 Pour the sufficient quantity of molten metal
- Check the centering of the work piece using dial gauge
- Fix the cutting tool at proper inclination
Plain turning - Select the suitable speed, feed and depth of cut for rough and
finishing operations
- Check the dimensions
Step turning  Check the centering of the work piece using dial gauge
334
 Fix the cutting tool at proper inclination
 Select the suitable speed, feed and depth of cut for rough and
finishing operations
 Check the dimensions
 Just an introduction of 4 methods. Student is expected to
Taper turning show how they work on machine.
 Hands on exposure to swiveling compound rest method
Title of the experiment Key competency
 Check the centring of the work piece using dial gauge

 Fix the cutting tool at proper inclination to turn the
work piece
Collar turning
 Select the suitable speed, feed and depth of cut for
rough and finishing operations
 Check the centring of the work piece using dial gauge
 Fix the cutting tool at proper inclination to turn the
work piece
 Select the suitable speed, feed and depth of cut for
Knurling
rough and finishing operations
 Fix the knurling tool and selecting the suitable speed
and feed
 Perform Edge preparation
Welding  Hold the electrode at suitable angle and distance with
Layout of beads respect to the work piece to maintain the arc
 Check the bead
 Hold the electrode at suitable angle and distance with
Lap joint
respect to the work piece to maintain the arc
 Check the bead
 Hold the electrode at suitable angle and distance with
Butt joint
respect to the work piece to maintain the arc
 Check the bead
18M307P
Model Paper
-ADVANCED MANUFACTURING & FABRICATION ENGINEERING LAB PRACTICE
335
Mid Sem-I (CEE)
1. Prepare the plain turning as per the given figure.
2. Prepare the step turning as per the given figure.
3. Prepare the taper turning as per the given figure.
4. Prepare Lap joint as per the given figure.
5. Prepare Butt joint as per the given figure.
6. Prepare mould for given pattern solid bearing
7. Prepare mould for given pattern flange coupling
8. Prepare mould for given pattern split bearing
9. Prepare a core for making hallow section.
336
18M307P
Model Paper
-ADVANCED MANUFACTURING & FABRICATION ENGINEERING LAB
Mid Sem-II (CEE)
337
18M307P
Model Paper
-ADVANCED MANUFACTURING & FABRICATION ENGINEERING LAB PRACTICE
(SEE)
338
FUELS LAB
Course Title : FUELS LAB PRACTICE Course Code 18M308P

Semester III Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:00:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + Practical :45Pds
periods :
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Thermodynamics
Course out comes

1. Determine flash and fire points of various fuels and lubricants using Abel’s, Pensky Martin’s,
and Cleveland’s apparatus.
2. Determine Kinematics and Absolute viscosities of the fuel and lubricating Oils using
Redwood & Saybolt viscometers.
3. Determine Calorific values of Solid and liquid fuels using Bomb calorimeter and
Determination of Calorific value of gaseous fuel by using Junker’s calorimeter.
4 Determine Carbon residue using Conradson’s apparatus.
5. Calibrate a pressure gauge using dead weight pressure gauge tester
Marks
Marks for SEE %Weightage
Un weightage
it Unit name Perio Man
No ds Handli Prec
ipula
ng ision
tion
Flash and Fire point test using
1. Cleveland Apparatus(open 3 10 10 20 40 100
cup)
2. Pensky Martins 3 10 10 20 40 100
Apparatus(Closed cup)
3. 3 10 10 20 40 100
Ables Apparatus(Closed cup) )
4. Viscosity Measurement 12 15 15 10 40 100
Calorific value test using 6 15 15 10 40 100

5.
Bomb Calorimeter
339
Calorific value test using 6 15 15 10 40 100
6.
Junkers Gas Calorimeter
7. Carbon Residue Test 6 15 15 10 40 100
8. Calibration of Pressure Gauge 6 10 10 20 40 100
Total 45
Course content:
1.Flash and Fire point test using Cleveland Apparatus(open cup)

2.Flash and Fire point test using Pensky Martins Apparatus(Closed cup)
3.Flash and Fire point test using Ables Apparatus(Closed cup) )
4.Viscosity Measurement
5.Calorific value test using Bomb Calorimeter
6.Calorific value test using Junkers Gas Calorimeter
7.Carbon Residue Test
8.Calibration of Pressure Gauge
CO-PO MATRIX
Course Outcome Linked PO Teaching
Hours
1,2,3,4,5,9,1
CO1 Measure the Flash and Fire points of different fuels. 0 09
Evaluate the Kinematic and Absolute viscosities of the fuel 1,2,3,4,5,9,1

CO2 12
and lubricating oils. 0
Determine the Calorific values of solid and liquid fuels and 1,2,3,4,5,9,1
CO3 12
gaseous fuels. 0
1,2,3,4,5,9,1
CO4 Estimate the percentage carbon residue. 06
0
1,2,3,4,5,9,1
CO5 Measure the gauge pressure and % error. 06
0
340
18M308P
MID SEM - I AND MID SEM – I Model Question paper
FUELS LAB
Duration:1 hours Max.Marks:20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Instructions to the Candidate:
(i) Answer any One of the following Questions.
(ii) Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the
experiment
(iii) Draw the diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the question
1. Determine the Flash and Fire point using Cleveland apparatus.
2. Determine the Flash and Fire point using Abels apparatus
3. Determine the Flash and Fire point using Pensky apparatus
4. Determine the viscosity of a given sample oils.
5. Determine the calorific value of solid fuels using Bomb Calorimeter.
6. Determine the calorific value of Gaseous fuels using Junkers gas Calorimeter.
7. Determine the percentage of carbon residue using conradsons apparatus.
8. Calibrate the given pressure gauge and determine gauge pressure.
341
18M308P
MID SEM - I AND MID SEM – II Model Question paper
FUELS LAB PRACTICE
Duration:1 hour Max.Marks:20
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
(iii) Draw the diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question
342
18M308P

SEMESTER MEND EXAMOINATION
Model Question paper
FUELS LAB PRACTICE
Duration:2 hours Max.Marks:40
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
question
343
SOLID MODELING LAB
Course Title : SOLID MODELING LAB Course Code 18M309P

PRACTICE
Semester III Course Group :

PRACTICA
L

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact

periods : :45Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of manufacturing process and Auto CAD
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability :
CO 1 List the commands of 3D
CO2 Create three-dimensional entities using different methods
CO3 Practice on Primitives with 3d Basics
CO4 Apply edit tools on Primitives

CO5 Apply the selection of material from library
CO6 Create the part drawing with a given geometry using Solid Modeling software
344
COURSE CONTENT
Viewing entities in three dimensions
 setting a new viewing direction

 dynamically setting a view direction
Creation of three-dimensional entities using different methods
 Drawing of two dimensional entities in three dimensional space

 Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by
applying elevation and thickness
 Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by
revolving or extruding.
Creation of three-dimensional faces, rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes, extruded
surface meshes, revolved surface meshes, three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders,
Cones, Spheres, wedges, torus, Regions, extruded solids, revolved solids, composite solids,
intersect solids.
Editing in three dimensions
Rotating in three dimensions, Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
Mirroring in three dimensions, Aligning in three dimensions
Editing of three dimensional solids
Sectioning and Slicing of solids, hiding, shading and rendering
Selection of material from library
Enable the material library, Editing materials and material library
The importance of Solid Modeling software like CREO/ SOLID EDGE/SOLID WORKS /
Use any of the solid modelling packages stated above and generate a solid model of a machine
component for different 3D components
A) Solid mpodeling lab practice
Suggestedlearning outcomes
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to understand the concepts of 3D
 View entities in three dimensions

 To set a new viewing direction
 To dynamically set a view direction
345
Create three-dimensional entities using different methods
 Draw two dimensional entities in three dimensional space

 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by
applying elevation and thickness
 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by
revolving or extruding.
 Create three-dimensional faces
 Create rectangular meshes
 Create ruled surface meshes
 Create extruded surface meshes
 Create revolved surface meshes
 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres,
wedges, torus, Regions,
 Create extruded solids
 Create revolved solids
 Create composite solids
 Create intersect solids
Edit in three dimensions
 Rotate in three dimensions

 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
 Mirror in three dimensions
 Align in three dimensions
Edit three dimensional solids
 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids

 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
Practice the selection of material from library
 Enable material library

 Edit materials and material library
 Use any of the solid modelling packages stated above and generate a solid model of a
machine component for different 3D components
Exercise Key components Periods
A. Set a new viewing direction

1.0 View entities in three dimensions 02
B. Set dynamically view direction
A. Create three-dimensional faces
B. Create rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes,
2.0 Create three-dimensional entities extruded surface meshes, revolved surface meshes 18
C. Create three dimensional entities such as boxes,
Cylinders.
3.0 Edit in three dimensions A. Rotate in three dimensions 06
346
B. Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
C. Mirror in three dimensions
D. Align in three dimensions
A. Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
4.0 Edit three dimensional solids B. Practice hiding, shading and rendering 10
5.0Practice the selection of material A. Enable material library

03
from library B. Edit materials and material library
6.0 Appreciate the importance of A. Use any of the solid modelling packages stated above
Solid Modelling software like PRO- and Generate a solid model of a machine component 06
E / UNIGRAPHICS / CATIA for different 3D components using Solid modelling
packages
Total 45
347
18M309P
SOLD MODELLING LAB PRACTICE
TIME: 1hr Marks: 20M
NOTE: Answer any one of the following
PART-A
13. Create the below 2D drawing and dimension it using any solid modeling software.
14. Create the below 2D drawing and dimension it using any solid modeling software.
348
18M309P
NOTE: Answer any one of the following
1. Draw the following figure by usingsolid modelingsoftware.
Note: All dimensions are in mm
2. Draw the following figure for thickness of 25mm by using solid modeling software.
Note: All dimensions are in mm
349
18M309P
MODEL PAPER FOR SEE
Answer any ONE question. 01×40=40 M
1. Draw the following figure by using solid modeling software.
350
Marks breakup
1. Model creation – 25M
2. Viva – 10M
3. For writing answer – 5M
351
Communication Skills and Life Skills Lab practice
Course Title Communication Skills and Life Skills Course Code 18M-310 P
Lab Practice
Semester III Course Group Practical
Teaching 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Scheme in
Periods- L: T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods
periods (3 Periods per
Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart communication skills and life skills to the students of diploma which
will help them a great deal in personal and professional fronts.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar, and four language learning skills,
viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
Identify the main or the central idea.

Listening Skills Listen for specific details.
Learn the pronunciation.
Learn relevant vocabulary to make introductions.
Communication Skills – I Learn to introduce oneself in formal and informal situations.
Learn vocabulary and expressions useful for describing objects
Describe objects
Learn vocabulary to talk about the past

Describe the incidents that happened in the past
Learn the techniques of organising the matter / content for one-
Communication Skills – II minute speech.
Speak fluently and accurately using appropriate body language.
352
Think positively.
Develop positive attitude.
Life Skills – I Overcome negative attitude.
Know the importance of setting goals.
Set goals using SMART features.
Know the reasons for a problem.

Learn to overcome problems.
Learn the various techniques to solve the problems.
Life Skills – II Learn to make proper decisions on time.
Think ‘out of the box’.
Learn to be creative.
Think innovatively.
Think critically.
Know how to be a leader.

Learn the qualities of a good leader.
Life Skills – III Learn the qualities of a good team.
Learn the advantages and disadvantages of a team.
Manage time effectively.
Learn various time management techniques.
Learn the importance of prioritisation.
CO-PO Matrix

CO 1 Listening for main idea and specific details R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,7,8,
9,10
CO 2 Introduce oneself and Describe Objects R/U/A 1,2,3,8,9,10
CO 3 Talk about the past and speak fluently for one R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8.9,10
minute
CO 4 Develop positive attitude and set short term and R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
long term goals
CO 5 Learn to solve a problem, make decisions and R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
think innovatively
CO6 Learn to become a good team member and leader R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
353
Course Contents:
I. Listening Skills Duration: 9

1. Listening – I
 Digital Camera
 A Dialogue
 Wild Animal / Human conflict
2. Listening – II
 A Recipe
 A Telephone conversation
 An Interview
II. Communication Skills – I Duration:6
3. Introducing Oneself
4. Describing Objects
III. Communication Skills – II Duration:6
5. Talking About the Past
6. Just A Minute
IV. Life Skills – I Duration:6
7. Attitude
8. Goal Setting
V. Life Skills – II Duration:9
9. Problem Solving and Decision-Making Skills
10. Critical Thinking & Creativity
VI. Life Skills – III Duration:9
11. Leadership and Teamwork
12. Time Management
 Listening Comprehension
 Seminars
 Paper Presentations
 Line ups for introducing oneself
 Describing persons / places / things
 Picture description
 Role Plays
 Dumb charades
 What is in the bag? (Identify the objects)
 Games using Online Dictionaries
 Sharing the information using emails, chats and groups
 Just A Minute
 Writing diary events
 Find a solution to the problem
 Making innovative things through recycling
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities on Life Skills
 Watching videos on life skills and making presentations
354
 Case studies
Evaluation Pattern:
I. Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
a. Mid Sem- I 20 marks

Syllabus:
i. Listening Skills
ii. Communication Skills - I
b. Mid Sem – II 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Communication Skills - II
ii. Life Skills - I
c. Internal assessment: 20 marks
i. Seminars: 10 marks
ii. Assignments: 5 marks
iii. Lab record submission: 5 marks
II. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks

a. Listening: 10 Marks
b. JAM or Role plays: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce on any life skills topic : 15 Marks
References:
Flint, Chrisand Jamie FlockhartListening: A2 (Collins English for Life: Skills)Collins. 2013
Brown, Stephen E. English in Everyday Life. McGraw-Hill Education.2008
Mohanraj, Jayashree. Let Us Hear Them Speak: Developing Speaking-Listening Skills in

English.Sage. 2015
Susan Earle – Carlin. Q Skills for Success: Listening and Speaking 5: Student Book with Online
Practice. Oxford University Press. 2013
Kumar, Sanjay and Pushpa Latha. Communication Skills: A Work Book.Oxford University Press. 2018
Carnegie, Dale.The Leader in You. Simon & Schuster: 1995
Carnegie, Dale.The Art of Public Speaking. Prabhat Prakashan. NewDelhi.2013
Kaye, Martin. Goal Setting (Workbook Included): Goals & Motivation: Introduction To A Complete
& Proven Step-By-Step Blueprint For Reaching Your Goals (Goal Setting Master Plan 1). Kindle
Edition. MK Coaching.2016.
West, Steven. Critical Thinking Skills: Practical Strategies for Better Decision making, Problem-
Solving and Goal Setting. Kindle Edition.2018
Tracy, Brain. Goals. Berret-Koehler PublishersInc. San Francisco. 2017
355
Tracy, Brain. Master your Time Master your Life. Penguin Random House Inc. New York. 2017
Sean Covey . The 7 Habits of Highly Effective Teens. Simon and Schuster,2011
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/youmeus/learnit/learnitv39.shtml
https://www.examenglish.com/leveltest/listening_level_test.htm
https://www.oxfordonlineenglish.com/listening?utm_referrer=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.google.co.in
%2F
https://takeielts.britishcouncil.org/prepare-test/free-ielts-practice-tests/listening-practice-test-1
https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/listening
https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/activities-for-learners/?skill=listening
https://www.businessenglishsite.com/business-english-listening.html
356
18M-310P
THIRD SEMESTER
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS LAB PRACTICE
MID SEM - I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listening Comprehension: 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage given below)
Florence Nightingale was an English social reformer and a statistician, and the founder of
modern nursing. She was born in Florence, Italy, on May 12, 1820. Part of a wealthy family,
Nightingale defied the expectations of the time and pursued what she saw as her God-given calling of
nursing during the Crimean War. She and a team of nurses improved the unsanitary conditions at a
British base hospital, greatly reducing the death count. Her writings sparked worldwide health care
reform, and in 1860 she established St. Thomas' Hospital and the Nightingale Training School for
Nurses. A revered hero of her time, she died on August 13, 1910, in London. Nightingale came to
prominence while serving as a manager and trainer of nurses during the Crimean War, in which she
organized care for wounded soldiers. She gave nursing a favourable reputation and became an icon of
Victorian culture, especially in the persona of "The Lady with the Lamp" making rounds of wounded
soldiers at night.
Questions:
1. Who was Florence Nightingale?
2. When and where was she born?
3. What does the passage convey?
4. When did she pass away?
5. Where did she establish nursing school?
PART- B 10 Marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the questions in 150 words.
2. How do you introduce yourself formally in an interview?

3. Describe your polytechnic.
357
18M-310P
THIRD SEMESTER
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS PRACTICE
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
1. Describe how you have spent your summer vacation.
2. What are the features of good JAM presentation? What precautions do you take before speaking for
one minute on the given topic?
Part – B 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
3. What is positive attitude? Give examples of positive attitude from your life.
4. Mention your long term goal with SMART features. How do you achieve it?
358
18M-310P
THIRD SEMESTER
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS LAB PRACTICE
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listen to the following passage and answer the questions give below it. 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage)
Answer the following questions after teacher reads the following paragraph.
Prof. Jayashankar was born to Mahalaxmi and Laxmi Kantha Rao on 6 th August 1934 in
Akkampet village, Warangal District. He was a Doctorate in Economics. He worked as a Vice-
Chancellor of Kakatiya University. He worked in many capacities. He was popularly known as
“Pedda Sir.” He inspired many a people to fight for the cause of Telangana Statehood.
At the age of twelve, Jayashankar refused to sing songs in praise of the Nizam and insisted on
singing Vande Mataram instead. As an intermediate student, in 1952, he protested against State
Reorganization Committee plan to merge with the Andhra Rashtra. He took an active part in the
agitations of “Non – Mulki go back“ and “ Idli Sambar go back.” He took an active part in
Telangana separate statehood agitation in 1969 too. In 1999, Prof. Jayashankar started the
Telangana Development Forum in the USA which helped to propagate the injustice,
discrimination and exploitation meted out to Telangana region and people in the aspects of
employment, funds and water resources. He relentlessly put his efforts to end the struggle of
Telangana people. He passed away on June 21, 2011. He was 76 years old at the time of his death.
Questions:
1. Where was Prof. Jayashankar born?

2. Why didn’t he sing songs in praise of the Nizam?
3. Why did Jayashankar start the Telangana Development Forum in USA?
4. What are the two agitations in which he took an active part?
5. What is the meaning of ‘relentlessly’?
Part – B 15 marks
2. JAM / Role Plays
Part – C 15 marks
3. Viva Voce on Life Skills topics
359
C-18 - Curriculum
Diploma in Mechanical Engineering
State Board of Technical Education & Training

Telangana, Hyderabad
360
IV Semester
361
Instruction Total Continuous internal Semester End Examination
periods per week Periods Evaluation (CIE) (SEE)
Sl. Course per Min
Course Name
No Code semeste Credits Mid Mid Internal Max Min marks for
Total
L T P r Sem Sem Evaluatio marks mark passing
Marks
1 2 n s including
CIE
Advanced
1 18M-401F
Mathematics
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
2 18M-402C Heat Power Engg. 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

Electrical
3 18M-403C 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Technology.
Fluid Mechanics
4 18M-404C and Hydraulic 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Machinery
Advanced
5 18M-405C Manufacturing 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Engineering
Production
6 18M-406P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Drawing
Thermal
7 18M-407P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Engineering. Lab
Electrical
8 18M-408P Technology. Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
practice
A. Material
Testing Lab
B. Fluid 20
9 18M-409P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 40 20 100 50
Mechanics and (10+10)
Hydraulics
Machinery lab
Advanced skills
10 18M-410P 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
and life skills 0
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

4. Cumulative 35% of marks (35 marks) in Mid Sem -1 + Mid Sem -2+ Internal Evaluation
+SEE
362
ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : Advanced Engineering Course Code :18M-401F
Mathematics
Semester : IV Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T :P) : 45 : 15 : 0 Credits : 3
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Engg. Mathematics at Diploma first year level and
Applied Engg. Mathematics at Diploma 3rd Semester level.
Course Outcomes :
CO 1 Solve simple Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations
CO 2 Solve simple Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations
CO 3 Express f(x) as a Fourier series in the given interval
CO 4 Express f(x) as a Fourier Half-Range Cosine series and Sine series
CO 5 Find Laplace transforms of simple functions
CO 6 Find Inverse Laplace transforms of simple functions and solve Linear Differential
Equations using Laplace Transformations.
Blue Print of Marks for SEE
Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A
1 Homogeneous Linear Q4 Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)

Differential equations with 05
constant coefficients
2 Non-Homogeneous Linear 15
Differential equations with
constant coefficients
363
3 Fourier series 10
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Fourier Half-range series 05
5 Laplace Transforms Q5,Q Q9(b), Q13(b),

10
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Inverse Laplace transforms Q7,Q Q10(b), Q14(b),
15
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents:
Unit – I Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.0 – T:2.0)
Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients
Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and
higher with emphasis on second order.
Unit – II Duration: 15 Periods (L:12.0 – T:3.0)
Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients

Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form
f(D)y = X, where X is in the form k(a constant ) ,e ax, sin ax, cos ax, xn, (n= 1,2,3)
Complimentary Function (CF), Particular Integral (PI) and General Solution (GS).
Unit-III Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8.0 – T: 2.0)
Fourier series
Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over

the interval
c , c  2 
, Euler’s formulae, sufficient conditions for existence of Fourier
series for a function. Even, Odd functions and Fourier series over the Interval (0,2 π) and (-
π , π)
Unit – IV Duration: 05 Periods (L: 3.0 – T: 2.0)
Fourier Half-range series
Representation of a function as Fourier Half-range Sine series and Cosine series over the
interval (0, π)
364
Unit – V Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.0 – T:3.0)
Laplace Transformations:
Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of Laplace Transform, Laplace Transform of

elementary functions, linearity property, Change of scale property, First shifting theorem ,
multiplication by tn, division by t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals, unit
step function, Laplace Transform of second shifting theorem
Unit – VI Duration: 15 Periods (L: 12.0 – T: 3.0)
Inverse Laplace transforms:
Inverse Laplace transforms- shifting theorems and change of scale property,

multiplication by sn and division by s –Inverse Laplace Transform using partial fractions
– convolution theorem (no proof) – application of Laplace Transformations to solve
ordinary differential equations of second orde with initial conditions.
Recommended Books:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B.S.Grewal .
2. Laplace Transforms - Murray R. Spigel .
3. Ordinary Differential Equations – R. S. Aggarwal.
4. Fourier Series – A.R. Vasishtha and Gupta.
Suggested E-Learning references:
2. E-books:www.mathebook.net
Unit-I
1.0 Solve Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in

engineering situations
1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c)y = 0 when the roots of the auxiliary
equation are real and different, real and repeated, complex.
1.2 Solve the higher order homogeneous Linear differential equations with constant coefficients.
365
Unit-II
2.0 Solve Non Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in
engineering situations
2.1 Explain the concept of complementary function, particular Integral and general solution
of a differential equation.
2.2 Solve nth order differential equation of the type f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of
second order and X is a function of the form k, eax ,Sinax, Cosax, xn.
2.3 Solve simple problems on the above types of 2.2
Unit-III
3.0 Understand the Fourier series expansion of functions
3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function on the interval (C, C+2 π ¿ and write the Euler’s
formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series for a function.
3.4 Write Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0, 2 π ¿ and (- π , π ¿ .
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval (- π , π ¿
3.6 Solve simple problems on even and odd functions in the interval. (0,2 π ¿∧¿ (- π , π ¿
Unit- I
4.0 Understand the Half – Range Fourier series expansion of functions
4.1 Write Half – Range Cosine series of a function in the range(0 , π) .
4.2 Write Half – Range Sine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .
4.3 Solve simple problems on Half – Range Cosine and Sine series over the interval (0 , π)
Unit-V
5.0 Understand Laplace transforms
5.1 Write the definition of Laplace Transform and Laplace transform of standard functions.
5.2 Explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace Transform.
5.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property,First shifting theorem,
366
Change of Scale property.
5.4 Solve simple problems using the above properties.

t
n f (t ) n
5.5 Write formulae for Laplace transform of t f (t) , , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
t 0
in terms of Laplace transform of .f(t)
5.6 Solve simple problems using the above formulae.
5.7 Define unit step function and write the Laplace Transform of unit step function.
5.8 Write Second shifting theorem.
Unit-VI
6.0 Use Laplace transforms and Inverse Laplace transforms to solve differential
equation in engineering problems
6.1 Define inverse Laplace Transform and write inverse Laplace Transforms of standard
functions.
6.2 Solve simple problems on Inverse Laplace Transforms.
6.2 Write Shifting theorems and Change of scale property of inverse Laplace Transform.
6.3 Solve simple problems on 6.2
6.4 Write inverse Laplace Transforms corresponding to Laplace Transform of the functions
t
n f (t) n
t f (t), , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
t 0
6.5 Solve simple problems on 6.4
6.6 Define convolution of two functions and state convolution theorem.
6.7 Solve simple problems on Convolution theorem.
6.8 Use Laplace and inverse Laplace Transforms to solve simple differential equations of
Second order.
367
2.Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.
CO-PO Mapping Matrix
Engineer and society
Communication
Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Linked PO
practice Experiments and
sustainability Environment &
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 work Individual and Team

PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
368
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks
Total Marks 20 Marks
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit No R U A Remarks
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
369
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page, 1page and 2 pages respectively
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q5,Q Q9(b), Q13(b),

V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Code: 18M-401F
370
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
1. Write the General solution of (aD2+bD+c)y = 0, whose roots of auxiliary equation are real and
distinct.
2. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation ( D 2 +2 D+ 1¿ y=0
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e3 x
4. Find the P.I of ( D 2−16 ) y=sin 4 x
PART-B
5 a) Solve: (D2 + 3D – 54)y = 0
Or
5 b) Solve : (D2 +16)y = 0
6 a) Solve :( D 2 +4 D+ 4) y =e 2 x
Or
6 b) Find P.I of ( D 3 + D) y = sin2x
PART C
7 a) Solve :(D3 – 2D2 – 4D + 8) y = 0
Or
7 b) Solve : (D3 – D2 – D +1)y = 0
8 a) Solve :( D2+36) y =sin2 x
Or
8 b). Solve :( D 2+3 D+2) y = x 2
@@@
371
Code: 18M-401F
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
1. Define periodic function and give one example
2. Define Fourier series of the function f(x) in the interval (0, 2 π )
3. Write Half-range sine series of f(x) in the interval (0, π ¿
4. Find a 0for f(x) =e x in 0¿ x <π
PART-B

5 a). If f(x) = x 2 in (0, 2 π ¿, then find the value of an in Fourier series of f(x)
Or
5 b) If f(x) =|x| in (- π , π ¿, then find the value of a1 in Fourier series of f(x)
6 a).Find the value of an in half-range Cosine series for the function f(x) = ex in (0, π ¿
Or
6 b). Obtain the Fourier Half – Range Sine series for f(x) =( π−x ¿∫ h einterval(0 , π)
PART C

7 a). Obtain the Fourier series for f(x) = x in the interval 0¿ x <2 π
Or
7 b). Find the Fourier series for f(x) =( x−x 2 ¿ in the interval (- π , π ¿. Hence show that
1 1 1 1 π2
- + - + ……….+ =
1 2 22 3 2 4 2 12
8 a) Express f(x) = πx – x2 as a half-range Sine series in (0, π ¿
Or
8 b). Find the half –range cosine series for the function f(x) = x 2 in the interval (0, π ¿
372
18M-401F
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]
PART-A
1. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation ( D 2 + 4 D ) y=0 .
2. Define Fourier Series for the function f(x) in the interval ( c, c+2 π ¿
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e x
4. Find L ( e 2t + cos 3 t )
5. Find L ( t+5 cos h t )
6. State the First Shifting theorem of Laplace Transforms.
7. Find L
−1
( s−31 + s +s 4 )
2
8. Find L
−1
( 2 s+1 5 )
PART-B
9. a) Solve:(D +D + 1) y = 4e3x
2
Or
9 b) Find L ( tCos 3 t )
10 a) Find Half Range Sine Series of f(x) = x in ( 0 , π )

Or
s +1
10 b) Find L
−1
( 2
s +6 s−7 )
20−4 s
11 a) If L{f(t)} = 2 , find L{f(3t)}
s −4 s +20
Or
373
∞
11 b) Find ∫ t . e−2 t sin 3 tdt using Laplace Transform Technique
0
1−cos at
12 a) Show that L−1 ¿ =
a2
s
12 b) Find L
−1
( ( s+ 2)2 +4 )
PART C
13. a) Solve :Solve:(D2 + D -2) y = x + sinx
Or
13 b) Find L[ t et sin 3 t ]
2
as a Fourier series in the interval (−π , π )
14 a) Expand f(x) = x
Or
s
14 b) Find L
−1
(( s +1 ) (s 2 +1)
2
)
15 a) Find L ( sin 3 tt.Cost )
Or
15 b) Evaluate
L
{∫ }
0
sin t
t
dt
16 a) Find L
−1
( ( s +1)1( s+2) ) using Convolution theorem .
Or
374
16 b). Solve the differential equation y’’– 2y’– 8y = Sint , when y (0) = 3, y’ (0) = 6 by
Laplace Transform method.
375
HEAT POWER ENGINEERING
Course Title : Heat Power Engineering Course Code 18M402C

Semester IV Course Group :Core
Teaching Scheme in
45:15:0 Credits :3
periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Periods : :60
Prerequisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic Thermodynamics and Mathematics.
Course outcomes
Comprehend the construction and working of air compressor and gas turbine.
CO1 : Compare the gas turbine with IC engine and steam turbine
Illustrate the application of jet propulsion.
CO2 : Illustrate the generation of steam and its property analysis
To understand the working and application of various elements of steam power plant,
CO3 :
Explain the construction and working of boiler , its mountings and accessories.
CO4 : Identify the need of nozzle , its working and design nozzle to given conditions
CO5 : Illustrate the working of a turbine and interpret blade parameters using velocity triangles
To understand the construction and working of condenser and its necessity in protecting
CO6
environment
Unit Questions to be set for SEE (Q No)

Unit name Remarks
no R U A
Air Compressors, Gas
1
Turbines & Jet Propulsion 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 Properties of Steam
3 Steam Boilers
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 Steam Nozzles
13(b)
9(b)
5 Steam Turbines 4 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b)
15(b)
3
14(b)
10(b)
6 Steam Condensers 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b)
16(b)
Total questions 8 8 8
376
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-1 Duration: Periods 10 (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Air compressors, Gas Turbines & Jet Propulsion
Functions of air compressor – uses of compressed air – types of air compressors - Single
stage reciprocating air compressor its construction and working (with line diagram) using
P.V. diagram. Formulae for work done and power required- simple problems on
calculation of work done and power required.Multi stage compressors – advantages over
single stage compressors. Use of inter cooler – conditions for minimum work in two
stage compressor (without proof) Formulae for work done and power required in two
stage compressors – simple problems.Gas turbines – Classification – open cycle gas
turbines and closed cycle gas turbines – comparison of gas turbine with reciprocating
I.C. engines and steam turbines. Applications, advantages and limitations of gas turbines
- working of Open cycle constant pressure gas turbine – Closed cycle gas turbine –
general lay-out. P.V. and T.S diagram. Principle of jet propulsion.Operation and
applications of Ram – jet engine, turbojet engines and rocket engines – fuels used in jet
propulsion.

Properties of steam
Formation of steam under constant pressure- dryness fraction and degree of superheat -
Determination of enthalpy, entropy and specific volume of wet, dry and superheated
steam at a given pressure using steam tables and Mollier chart.
Vapour processes – isochoric, isobaric, isothermal, adiabatic and polytropic -
simple problems on enthalpy, entropy and specific volume- internal energy, internal
latent heat, of wet, dry and superheated steam using tables.

Steam Boilers
Layout of steam power plant. Function and use of steam boilers – construction -
Classification of steam boiler- Comparison of water tube and fire tube boilers - Cochran
and Babcock Wilcox Boilers - modern high pressure boilers Lamont and Benson boilers
- Boiler mountings - Boiler accessories - Actual evaporation - equivalent evaporation -
factor of evaporation - boiler horse power - boiler efficiency - Formula for the above
terms without proof - Simple direct problems on the above - draught systems

377
Steam Nozzles
Function – types- Flow of steam through nozzle - Velocity of steam at the exit of
nozzle. Discharge of steam through nozzles - Critical pressure ratio - calculation of
cross sectional areas at throat and discharge - Effect of friction in nozzles.
Steam Turbines
Steam turbines - Classification - impulse & reaction turbines - working of a simple

De-lavel turbine - Velocity diagrams of impulse turbines - Expression for work done,
axial thrust, tangential force, blade and diagram efficiency, stage efficiency, nozzle
efficiency –Compounding of turbines- velocity, pressure and combined pressure and
velocity - Simple problems on single stage impulse turbines- analytical and graphical
methods.
Working of Parson’s Reaction turbine -Bleeding, re-heating - regeneration and re-

heating factor(Problems omitted) - Governing of steam turbines and methods.

Steam Condensers
Steam condenser-its functions - Classifications – surface and jet condensers- Low
level - High level Jet condenser and Ejector condenser - Shell and Tube Surface
condenser - down flow - Central flow Surface - Evaporative condenser -Advantages
and Disadvantages - Formulae for calculation cooling water required, Condenser
efficiency - corrected vacuum, Absolute pressure and Vacuum efficiency - Simple
problems on Steam condensers - Air Extraction, Types of Air Extraction systems,
Dry-air Extraction and Wet-air Extraction systems, Air pump and Steam –Jet Air
Ejector
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Thermodynamic by Ballaney
2. Thermal Engineering by Arora& S. Domkundwar
3. Thermal Engineering by Roy &Sarao
4. Thermal Engineering by Vasandani& Kumar
5. Thermal Engineering by R.S.Khurmi
378
Suggested student activity
1. Students are advised to visit a nearby industry involving use of boiler and students
are advised to conduct energy auditing.
2. Analyze the data by using excel and identify the areas of wastage of energy and
suggest suitable methods for improvement of performance.
3. Velocity triangles of turbine may be solved using CAD software.
4. Visit nearest thermal power station and prepare a report consisting of layout –
construction and working of various elements.

Comprehend the construction and working of air compressor
 State the functions of air compressors.

 Enumerate the uses of compressed air.
 Name the different types of compressors.
 Explain with line diagram the working of a single reciprocating air compressor.
 Write the formula for work done and power required by a single stage compressor.
 State the advantages of multi- stage compressors over single stage compressor.
 Explain the use of inter cooler.
 State the conditions for minimum work done in two stage compression.
 Solve simple problems on single acting reciprocating air compressors only.
 Write the formula for work done and power required in two stage compressor.
 Solve simple problems in two stage air compressor.
Understand the working and applications of gas turbines & Jet Propulsion
 Classify gas turbines.

 Compare Gas turbines with Steam turbines.
 Compare gas turbines with reciprocating I.C. engines.
 Mention the applications with limitations of gas turbine.
 Explain with line diagrams the working of an open cycle constant pressure type gas
turbine.
 Explain with line diagram the working of a closed cycle type gas turbine.
 Represent cycle of operation for the above type on P-V and T-s diagrams.
379
 Explain with line diagram the principles of operation of Ramjet engine and turbojet
and rocket engines.
 Identify the fuels used in jet propulsion.
Understand the Properties of Steam
 Define the various properties and types of steam

 Practice the use of steam tables and interpret the data for given pressure
 Compute the enthalpy, specific volume and entropy at given pressure for wet, dry and
superheated steam using steam tables.
 Identify the various thermodynamic vapour processes isochoric, isobaric, isothermal,
adiabatic and polytropic.
 Compute the work done, internal energy, enthalpy, specific volume and entropy in
each of the above processes under wet, dry and superheated steam condition.
 Represent the above process on T-S and H-S diagrams
Understand the Working of Steam Boilers.
 State the function and construction of boiler

 List all the uses of boilers.
 Classify steam boilers
 Distinguish between water tube and fire-tube boilers
 Explain the working of Cochran Boiler with a legible sketch
 Explain the working of Babcock Wilcox Boiler with a legible sketch
 Recognise the need of high-pressure modern boilers
 Explain the working principle of Lamont and Benson Boilers with a legible sketch
 List all the boiler mountings
 Explain the function of all the mountings with a legible sketch such as pressure
gauge, water level indicator, safety valve and fusible plug.
 List all the boiler accessories.
 Illustrate the function of all the accessories with a legible sketch such as economiser,
Super Heater, Steam traps & Separators.
 Explain the terms actual/equivalent evaporation and factor of evaporation.
 Define the boiler Power
380
 Define the boiler efficiency
 Write the formula for the above
 Compute the equivalent and actual evaporation from given data.
 Solve problems on Boiler Power & efficiency
 Explain draught systems ( without problems )
Understand the Working of Steam Nozzles
 Explain the Flow of steam through nozzle

 Derive the expression for Velocity of steam at the exit of nozzle in terms of heat drop.
 Calculate Velocity of steam at the exit of nozzle by using steam tables or Mollier
chart
 Write the expression for Discharge of steam through nozzles
 Write the formula for Critical pressure ratio ( without proof)
 Explain the Effect of friction in nozzles
 Solve problems of nozzles to calculate cross section area and discharge
Understand the Working of Steam Turbines
 Explain the working principle and construction of a turbine

 Classify the Turbines with examples
 Differentiate the impulse turbines from reaction turbine
 Explain the Principle of working of simple De-Laval turbine with a line diagram
 Draw velocity triangles for impulse turbine
 List various blade angles
 Write formula for tangential force, work done, axial thrust, power and efficiencies.
 State the necessity of compounding a turbine
 Describe the methods of reducing rotor speeds by velocity, pressure and pressure-
velocity compounding with the help of pressure, velocity variation chart
 Explain the working principle of Parson’s Reaction Turbine with a line diagram
 Simple problems on Single Stage Impulse turbines (Velocity triangles and problems
on reaction turbine omitted)
 Define the terms bleeding & reheating
 State the necessity of governing a turbine
 Explain the methods of turbine governing
Understand the Working of Steam Condensers
381
 Define the Steam condenser
 State the functions of steam condenser
 Classify the condensers
 Explain the working principle of Low level counter – Flow and Parallel flow jet
Condensers with legible sketch
 Explain the working principle of High level Jet condenser with legible sketch
 List the Advantages and Disadvantages of High- Level Jet condenser
 Explain the working principle of Ejector condenser with legible sketch
 Explain the working principle of Shell and Tube Surface condenser with sketch
 Distinguish between down flow and central flow surface condenser
 Explain the working principle of Evaporative condenser with legible sketch
 List Advantages and Disadvantages of Surface condenser
 Distinguish between Jet Condenser and Surface Condenser
 Write the Formulae for cooling water required, Condenser efficiency, corrected
Vacuum, absolute pressure and Vacuum efficiency
 Solve Simple problems on Steam condensers to Estimate the Cooling water required,
Condenser efficiency and Vacuum efficiency
 Define Air Extraction

 List the types of Air Extraction systems
 Distinguish between Dry-air Extraction and Wet-air Extraction systems
 Explain the working principle of Air pump and Steam –Jet Air Ejector with legible
sketch
CO-PO Matrix
18M402C.1 3 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - 1,2,3,4,5,9
18M402C.2 3 3 3 2 - 1 - - 1 - 1,2,3,4,6,9
18M402C.3 2 3 3 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1,2,3,4,6,9,10
18M402C.4 3 3 2 2 - - - - 1 - 1,2,3,4,9
18M402C.5 1,2,3,4,6,8,9,1
3 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 1 1
0
18M402C.6 3 3 2 3 - 1 - 1 1 - 1,2,3,4,6,8,9
382
Question Paper Blue Print for CIE (MID I)
Questions to be set for MID-I Remark

Unit no Unit name
R U A s
Air Compressors, 5(a) 7(a)

1 Gas Turbines & 1,2
Jet Propulsion 5(b) 7(b)
Properties of 6(a) 8(a)

2 3,4
Steam 6(b) 8(b)

Question Paper Blue Print for CIE (MID II)
Questions to be set for MID-II Remark

Unit no Unit name
R U A s
5(a) 7(a)
3 Steam Boilers 1,2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
4 Steam Nozzles 3,4
6(b) 8(b)

383
Model Paper
18M402C-HEAT POWER ENGINEERING
Mid Sem-I (CIE)
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1M = 4M
sentences
1. Define air compressor.

2. Write the classification of gas turbines.
3. Define dryness fraction of steam.
4. Write the formula to find the enthalpy of wet steam.
NOTE: 1) Answer ALL questions and each question carries Three marks
5.(a) Explain why volumetric efficiency decreases with increase in delivery pressure .
(OR)
5.(b) differentiate between open cycle and closed cycle gas turbines.
6.(a) Calculate enthalpy, entropy of a steam at 2bar and 130 0C temperature.

(OR)
6.(b) represent a constant entropy process on mollier diagram.
PART – C Marks : 2 X 5M = 10 M
NOTE :
1) Answer ALL questions and each question carries Five marks.
7.(a) explain the working of a two stage air compressor with the help of P-V diagram.
(OR)
7.(b) explain the working of Ramjet with the help of a neat sketch.
8.(a) explain in detail the formation of steam under constant pressure.

(OR)
8.(b) calculate the change in enthalpy of one kg of steam at 200 0 C and 3 bar pressure
expanded to 0.3 bar pressure isentropically.
384
Model Paper
Mid Sem-II (CIE)
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1M = 4M
sentences
1. Mention any two boiler mountings.
2. Define equivalent evaporation.
3. Define nozzle.
4. List out different types of nozzles.
NOTE: 1) Answer ALL questions and each question carries Three marks
5. (a) Write any three differences between fire tube and water tube boilers.
(OR)
5. (b) Write any three uses of steam boiler.
6. (a) Compute the critical pressure ratio in a nozzle when the steam is initially dry & saturated.
(OR)
6. (b) Write down the effect of friction in nozzles.

NOTE :
3. Answer ALL questions and each question carries Five marks.
4. The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the content
7. (a) Explain the working of any water tube boiler with a neat sketch.
(OR)
7. (b) Define draught. Explain various methods of producing draught in steam boilers.
8. (a) Derive the equation for exit velocity of steam passing through a nozzle without friction.
(OR)
8 (b) Explain supersaturated flow of steam in nozzle.

385
SEE -Model Paper
PART-A
08X01=08

27. Mention different fuels used in jet propulsion.
28. List out the types of steam nozzles.
29. Define condenser.
30. Define dryness fraction of steam.
31. Write the expression for work done in an impulse turbine.
32. Define stage efficiency.
33. Write the classification of condensers.
34. Define vacuum efficiency w.r.t a condenser.
PART-B
04X03=12
Instructions : 1. Answer ALLquestions.
9. (a) Write down the advantages of multi stage compression over single stage.
(OR)
9. (b) Write the differences between impulse and reaction turbines.

10. (a) List out the classification of steam boilers.
(OR)
10. (b) Differentiate between surface and jet condensers.

11. (a) Define the terms bleeding & reheating
(OR)
11. (b) Explain the working of a simple De-Laval turbine with a neat sketch.
12. (a) Write a short note on shell and tube surface condensers.
(OR)
12. (b) List out the functions of a condenser.
386
PART-C
04X5=20
13. (a) Explain the working of an open cycle constant pressure type gas turbine with the help
of a neat sketch.
(OR)
13. (b) Explain different types of governing of steam turbines.
14. (a) Explain the working of Cochran boiler with a neat sketch.
(OR)
14. (b) Distinguish between dry air extraction and wet air extraction.
15. (a) Explain pressure compounding with the help of a neat sketch.
(OR)
15. (b) Numerical example
16. (a) Numerical example
(OR)
16. (b) Explain the working of steam jet air ejector with the help of a neat sketch.
*****
387
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
Course Title : ELECTRICAL Course Code : 18M403C

TECHNOLOGY
Semester : IV Course Group : Core

Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : : 45 : 15 : 0 Credits : 3
P)
Pre requisites
Enthusiasm to learn the course, the basic knowledge of Electrical Engineering
Course Outcomes
CO 1 Describe the fundamentals of electricity, electrical and magnetic circuits.

CO 2 Describe the construction & working of D.C.Generators
CO 3 Summarize the performance of D.C. Motors.
CO 4 Explain the fundamentals of alternating current
CO 5 Describe the construction & working of A.C. Machines
CO 6 Practice the Electrical Safety & Protection procedures and Electrical
Measuring instruments.
Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A
1 Electrical engineering
12
fundamentals Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 D.C.Generators 08
3 D.C.Motors 10
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 A.C.Fundamentals 10 Q4
5 A.C.Machines Q9(b), Q13(b),
08 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
6 Electrical measuring Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
instruments & Safety 12 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
procedures
Total 60 8 8 8
Blue Print of Marks for SEE
388
Course Contents
UNIT-1 :Electrical engineering fundamentals Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 - T: 3)
Definitions: Ohm’s Law, Laws of resistance work, power, energy with units. Kirchoff’s
Laws, Definitions and units of magnetic field strength, flux, flux density, permeability,
reluctance. Definitions and units electric field, field strength, permittivity,
capacitance.,Faraday’s laws of Electro – magnetic induction. Dynamically and statically
induced e.m.f., Lenz’s Law, Fleming’s right hand rule, Inductance – self and mutual –
coefficient of coupling. Energy stored in a magnetic field.
UNIT-2 :D.C.Generators Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6 - T: 2)
Principle of operation - Parts of generator and materials used - Types of generators and
schematic diagrams - E.M.F equation, voltage and current relations - Nomenclature used for
determining armature, field and inter-pole windings - Power flow diagram - Welding
Generator
UNIT-3: D.C.Motors Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 - T: 2.5)
Principle of operation - Types of motors and schematic diagrams - Back e.m.f and speed
equation - relation between voltages and currents - Starters and their necessity - Connection
diagram of 3 point starter - Speed control methods – Field and Armature control -
Applications of D.C motors- Batteries-types of batteries- AH Capacity-Efficiency .
UNIT-4: A.C.Fundamentals Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 - T: 2.5)
Definition – alternating current, voltage amplitude, time period frequency, instantaneous

value, Average value, r.m.s. value, form factor - Graphical representation of Alternating
quantities - Phase difference - A.C. Circuits - Single phase series circuits – Definition of poly-
phase and 3 Ø circuits - Phase difference in 3 Ø - Star and delta connections, definitions of
phase values and line values.
UNIT-5: A.C.Machines Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 - T: 3)
Alternators – principle of working. Constructional features of alternators. Relation between

Speed and frequency.-Transformers working principle. Single phase transformers - Voltage
ratio, Current ratio, Turns ratio - Welding transformer - 3-Phase Induction Motor - Working
principle, Construction - Squirrel cage and Wound Rotor - Single phase Induction Motors -
Types and applications of single phase induction motors.
389
UNIT-6: Electrical measuring instruments & Safety procedures
Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6- T: 2)
Construction and principle of operation of moving coil permanent magnet type ammeter and
voltmeter and moving iron ammeter and voltmeter - Construction and working principle of
Dynamometer type wattmeter - Single phase induction type Energy meter-Different types of
wiring systems and accessories - Electrical safety Procedures - Effects of shock and burns -
Remedial procedures to be adopted in case of electrical shocks - Plate earthing - Pipe
earthing.
Recommended Books
1. Theraja B.L. - A Text Book of Electrical Engg. and Electronics.
2. Mehtha.V.K - Principles of Electronics
3. Gupta - Fundamentals of Elec. Engg.
4. Uppal - A Text Book of Elec.Engg& Electronics.
Suggested E-learning references

1.www.khanacademy.org
2. www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/electriical-engineering
3. www.nptel.ac.in

After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to
1.1 Define Ohm’s Law.
1.2 State the Laws of Resistance.

1.3 State and compare Work, Power and Energy from electrical and mechanical
aspects and understand their units.
1.4 State and explain Kirchhoff‘s laws.
1.5 Define
a. Magnetic field strength
b. Flux
c. Permeability
d. Reluctance and state their units
1.6 Define
a. Electric field
390
b. Electric field intensity
c. Permittivity and state their units
1.7 State capacitance and its units
1.8 State Faraday’s laws of Electro Magnetic Induction.
1.9 Explain Dynamically and Statically induced E.M.F.
1.10 State Lenz’s Law.
1.11 Explain Fleming’s Right Hand rule.
1.12 Define
a. Self inductance
b. Mutual inductance
c. Co-efficient of coupling and state their units
1.13 Explain energy stored in a magnetic field.
2.1 Explain the working principle of D.C. Generators.
2.2 Describe the constructional features of D.C. Generators and materials used.
2.3 Classify D.C. Generators and draw their schematic diagrams.
2.4 State E.M.F equation of D.C. Generator
2.5 Solve the problems on EMF Equation.
2.6 Write the relation between currents and voltages in various D.C generators.
2.7 State the types of losses in D.C. Generator.
2.8 Label the terminals of D.C. Generators for armature, field and inter pole
windings.
2.9 Draw power flow diagram of a D.C. Generator.
2.10 Sketch the connection of welding generator.
3.1 Explain the principle of operation of D.C. Motors.
3.2 Classify D.C. motors and draw their Schematic diagrams..
391
3.3 Explain the signification of back e.m.f in D.C. motors.
3.4 Write the relation between currents and voltages in various D.C. motors.
3.5 Write formula for speed of D.C. Motor in terms of supply voltage, current and
flux.
3.6 Explain necessity of starters for D.C. motors.
3.7 Write the types of starters for D.C. motors
3.8 Describe with sketch the connection diagram of a D.C. 3 point starter.
3.9 Explain the speed control byArmature control method
3.10 Explain the speed control byField control method
3.11 List the applications of D.C. motors
3.12 Working of Battery.
3.13 Main parts of Battery
3.14 Types of Batteries
3.15 State Capacity of battery
3.16 Define A-H and W-H efficiency
4.1 Define the following terms
i) Alternating current
ii) Amplitude (Peak Value)
iii) Time Period
iv) Frequency
v) Instantaneous value
vi) Average value
vii) R.M.S Value
viii) Form Factor

4.2 Define Phase and phase difference.
392
4.3 Explain the concept of 3-phase system.
4.4 Explain phase difference and Phase sequence in 3 phase system.
4.5 Draw the Star and Delta connections.
4.6 Write the relation between Line and Phase values in Star and Delta connection.
4.7 Solve simple conversion problems on line and phase values of star and delta
connections.
5.1 State the working principle of alternators.
5.2 State the relations between frequency and speed in alternator.
5.3 State the working principle of transformers and their ratings.
5.4 Define Transformation, Turns, Voltage and Current ratios.
5.5 State the relation between Transformation, Turns, Voltage and Current ratios
5.6 Describe the operation of a welding Transformer with sketch.
5.7 Explain working Principle of 3-phase induction motors.
5.8 State the applications of 3-phase induction motors.
5.9 List out types of 1-phase induction Motors.
5.10 Applications of 1-phase induction Motors.
6.1 List the various meters for measure the different electrical quantity.
6.2 Classify the different types of measuring instruments on the bases of working
principle.
6.3. Explain the construction and working principle of Moving Coil instruments.
6.4 Explain the construction and working principle of Moving Iron instruments.
6.5 Explain the construction and working principle of Dynamometer type Wattmeter.
6.6 Explain the construction and working principle of 1-phase induction type energy
meters.
6.7 Name the different types of wiring systems

393
6.8 Write the different Accessories used in House wiring.
6.9 Explain Different types of wiring connections (one lamp controlled by one switch and
Tube light connections)
6.10 State the precautions to be taken to avoid electric shock.
6.11 Explain effect of electrical shock and burn.
6.12 Explain the remedial procedures to be adopted in case of electric shocks.
6.13 State purpose of earthing of electrical equipment and machinery.
6.14 Describe the procedure of Pipe earthing
6.15 Describe the procedure of Plate earthing
Note : Where ever mentioned, simple formula substitution problems only be

solved and no problems in the other specific objectives.

1. Student visits Library to refer to Manual of Electrical Safety.
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify the components
3. Quiz
4. Group discussions
5. Surprise test
394
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Linked PO
sustainabilityEnvironment &
practiceExperiments and
workIndividual and Team

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
CO1 3 3 2 2 3 1,2,8,9,10
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,6,8,9,1
0
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 1,2,8,9,10
CO4 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 1,2,5,6,8,9,1
0
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 1,2,8,9,10
CO6 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 1,2,5,6,8,9,1
0
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS
Sl.N Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total

o Questions each Marks
question
MID SEM-I EXAM

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
395
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not
exceed ¼ of a page,1 page and 2 pages respectively
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM
Sl.N Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total

o Questions each Marks
question
02 Part-B Understanding(U 8 3 4 12 Marks
)

Unit No
R U A
I
1 9(a) 13(a)
II
III
2 10(a) 14(a)
IV 4
9(b), 13(b),
V 5, 6
11(a), 11(b) 15(a), 15(b)
3
10(b), 14(b),
VI 7, 8
12(a), 12(b) 16(a), 16(b)
396
18M403C
DME IV semester Mid Semester-I Examination
Corse Code:18M403C Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Electrical Technology Max.Marks:20
__________________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1= 4
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one marks.
1. Define Ohm’s Law.

2. Define Magnetic field strength
3. Write the EMF equation of D.C. Generator
4. Write the classifications of D.C. Generators
PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
5.(a) State the Laws of Resistance.
OR
5.(b) State Kirchhoff‘s laws
6.(a) State the types of losses in D.C. Generator.
OR
6.(b) Draw the schematic diagram of D.C. Shunt Generator
PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
(2) Each question carries five marks.
7.(a) State Faraday’s laws of Electro Magnetic Induction.
OR
7.(b) Explain energy stored in a magnetic field.
8.(a) Draw power flow diagram of a D.C. Generator
397
OR
8.(b) Sketch the connection of welding generator.
18M403C

DME IV Semester Mid Semester-II Examination
Corse Code:18M403C Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Electrical Technology Max.Marks:20
_______________________________________________________________________________
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1= 4
(2) Each question carries one marks.
1. Write the types of starters for D.C. motors

2. Write the classifications of D.C. motors
3. Define Time Period
4. Define R.M.S Value
PART - B Marks: 2 x 3 = 6

5.(a). Draw the Schematic diagram of D.C. shunt motor.

OR
5.(b). Write the types of speed control of D.C. motors.
6.(a). Define Phase and phase difference

OR
6.(b). Draw the Star and Delta connections.
PART - C Marks: 2 x 5= 10
7.(a). List the applications of D.C. motors
OR
7.(b). Explain the speed control by Armature control method
8.(a). Write the relation between Line and Phase values in Star and Delta connection.
OR
8.(b). Explain phase difference and Phase sequence in 3 phase system.

398
18M403C
DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.
SUB CODE: 18M403C
Electrical Technology
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40
PART – A Marks : 8 X 1= 8
(2) Each question carries one mark.
1. Define Flux
2. Define Form Factor

3. Define Transformation ratio
4. Define Amplitude
5. Define Turns ratio
6. Define Current ratio
7. What is the instrument used to measure Voltage.
8. What is the instrument used to measure Current.
PART - B
Marks: 4 × 3=
12
9.(a). State Faraday’s laws of Electro Magnetic Induction.

OR
9.(b). List out types of 1-phase induction Motors.
OR
10.(b).Write types of earthing systems.
11.(a). State frequency and speed relations in alternators.

OR
11.(b). State the working principle of transformers
12.(a). State the precautions to be taken to avoid electric shock.

OR
399
12.(b). Explain the effects of electrical shock
PART – C
Marks: 4 × 5= 20
13.(a). Draw power flow diagram of a D.C. Generator.

OR
13.(b). Explain working Principle of 3-phase induction motors.
OR
14.(b). Explain the construction and working principle of Moving Coil instruments.
15.(a). Applications of 1-phase induction Motors.

OR
15.(b). State the applications of 3-phase induction motors.
16.(a). Explain the construction and working principle of Moving Iron instruments.
OR
16.(b). Explain the construction and working principle of 1-phase induction type energy
meters.
400
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machinery
Course Title: Fluid Mechanics and HydraulicMachinery Course Code: 18M404C

Semester: IV SEM Course Group: Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : 45:15:0 Credits :3
Methodology: lecture and tutorials Total Contact periods : 60
SEE : 40
CIE : 60 Marks
Marks
Prerequisites:
Basic knowledge of Physics.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Selection of suitable fluid for various applications based on fluid properties.
CO2 Applying concept of Bernoulli’s equation for flow of liquids
CO3 Estimate frictional losses and design the pipe for flow of liquids through pipes
Analyse forces on plates or vanes due to impact of jets
CO4
CO5 Determine power developed by different water Turbines
CO6 Determine the power required to operate hydraulic pumps.

Questions to be set for SEE(Q No)
Unit
Unit Name Periods R U A Remarks
No
1 Properties of Fluids 10
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 Flow of Liquids 10
3 Flow through pipes 10
2 10 (a) 14 (a)
4 Impact of jets 10
9(b), 13(b),
5 Water Turbines 10 4 5,6 11(a), 15(a),
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b), 14(b),
6 Pumps 10 7,8 12(a), 16(a),
12(b) 16(b)
401
COURSE CONTENTS
Properties of fluids
Definition of fluid, ideal and real fluids, compressible and incompressible fluids-Units used in
fluid mechanics. Density, specific weight, specific gravity, viscosity and surface tension,
compressibility and capillarity. Intensity of pressure, gauge and absolute pressures.
Measurement of pressures by peizometer, U-Tube – manometer – simple problems – Bourdon
tube pressure gauge.

Flow of Liquids
Types of Fluid flow- Laminar & Turbulent flow- Concept on Reynolds’s Number –
Continuity equation for compressible and incompressible fluids- Simple problems on
continuity equation- Pressure, potential and kinetic energy of liquids - Total energy,
Bernoulli‘s equation (no derivation) – assumptions made, Simple problems on Bernoulli‘s
equation, Working principle of Venturimeter, Simple Problems on Venturimeter, Pitot tube –
principle –applications.

Flow through pipes
Concept of loss of head in pipes due to friction, Darcy‘s &Chezy‘s formula (without proof),
Simple problems on Darcy‘s and Chezy‘s formulae, Hydraulic gradient line and Total energy
line-illustration, Calculation of discharge, velocity, diameter of pipe etc., for pipes connecting
two reservoirs (considering frictional losses only), Siphon – principle of working (Numerical
problems omitted), Expression for power transmitted through pipes. Expression for
transmission efficiency, condition for maximum efficiency (without proof.), Simple problems
on power transmission

Impact of jets
Derivation of formulae for the force of jet on Fixed vertical flat plate, Fixed inclined flat
plate, Simple problems on the above, Derivation of formulae for the force of jet on moving
vertical flat plate, Derivation of formulae for the force of jet on series of moving plates fixed
on the rim of a wheel, Simple problems on the above, Force of jet striking at the centre of
Fixed curved blade –velocity triangles, Force of jet striking at the top of a moving curved
blade - velocity triangles, Work done, power and efficiency in the above cases, Simple
problems on the above .
402
Water turbines
Introduction to water turbines- Hydro-electric power stations line sketch showing layout of
hydro-electric power plant with head race, dam, sluice gate, pen stock turbine, generator and
tail race, Classification of turbines-impulse and reaction turbines, Brief sub-classification as
axial, radial and tangential flow type, Working principle of Pelton wheel-velocity triangles,
Simple problems, Working principle of Francis turbine - velocity triangles, Simple
problems, Working principle of Kaplan turbine - velocity triangles, Simple, problems,
Differences between Pelton wheel and Francis Turbines, Differences between Francis and
Kaplan turbines, Governing of methods of Water turbines
Pumps
Pump-Function – Classification, Principle of operation of a reciprocating pump,
Constructional details of single acting, double acting pumps. Expression for theoretical power
required to drive the pump(without proof).Simple problems, Working principle of centrifugal
pump, Installation of centrifugal pump, showing its mountings and other accessories,
Priming of centrifugal pump – necessity -,Simple problems on work, power and efficiency of
Centrifugal pumps

1. Visit nearby Hydro electric power station and observe dam, penstock, turbines,
generators etc.
2. Visit nearby pumping station and identify the pumps used.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Surprise test
6. Seminars
On the completion of the study of the subject, the student should be able to
Understand the various properties of fluids
403
 Define a fluid
 Differentiate between ideal and real fluids
 Differentiate between compressible and incompressible fluids
 State the various units used in Hydraulics
 Define various properties of fluids and state their units
 Define intensity of pressure, differentiate between gauge pressure and absolute
pressure.
 Pressure and state their units
 Explain the working principle of manometer
Understand the behavior of liquids in motion
 Distinguish between laminar flow and turbulent flow and concept on Reynold‘s
number.
 State the various type of energies and the total energy.
 Know about the velocity of a flowing liquid
 Understand the equation of continuity.
 State Bernoulli‘s equation and its application in hydraulics
 Solve problems (simple) on law of continuity, Bernoulli‘s equation, Venturimeter and
pitot tube
 Explain the working principle of Venturimeter, pitot tube.
Evaluate frictional losses during flow of liquids through pipes
 Mention the equation for loss of head due to friction in pipes

 State Darcy‘s and chezy‘s formulae
 Explain the hydraulic gradient and total energy line
 Calculate the velocity of flow, discharge and diameter of pipes connecting two
reservoirs
 Explain the function of siphon and give reason for limiting the height of the
pipes
 Explain how the power can be transmitted through pipes carrying liquid under
pressure.
 Express the condition for maximum H.P. through pipes
 Solve simple problems on power transmission through pipes
Analyse forces during the impact of jets
 Derive expression for force of jet on fixed vertical, flat plate, fixed inclined flat
plate, moving flat plate
 Derive expression for the force of jet on a series of plates fixed on the rim of a
wheel
 Draw velocity triangles for fixed and moving curved blades
 Find the expressions for work done, power and efficiency in the above
Understand the working of water Turbines
404
 State the importance of water turbines
 Draw the layout of a hydroelectric power station
 Classify the water turbines and also sub-classify them based on the direction of flow
of water
 Explain the working of Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine
 Describe the governing of water turbines
 Solve simple problems on water turbines
Know the working of pumps
 Explain the function of pump

 Classify the pumps
 Explain the principle of operation of a reciprocating pumps
 Mention the constructional details of single acting and double acting pumps
 Solve simple problems on power required to drive a pump
 Explain the principle of operation of centrifugal pumps
 Mention the constructional details of centrifugal pump
 Compare the centrifugal pump with a reciprocating pump
 Appreciate the importance of priming in centrifugal pump
 Identify the effects of leakages of air, its prevention
 Define the efficiency of a centrifugal pump
 Solve simple problems on centrifugal pumps
 Draw the layout of a centrifugal pump installation
REFERENCE BOOKS
Hydraulic Machines by S.AnanthaSwamy
Hydraulic Machines by R.C. Patel
Hydraulics ByMalhotra&Malhotra
Hydraulics & Hydraulic Machinery by Yeaple
Hydraulics and Pneumatics by Reya and Rao.
Pneumatics by SRIHARI RAO
Pneumatic controls by FESTO
Fluid Power Pneumatics by ALAN H. JOHN
Pneumatics by FLIPPO
Pneumatics by TTI
Fluid Power & Pneumatics by AUDEL
405
CO-PO Matrix
18M404C.1 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 1, 2,3,5
18M404C.2 3 2 2 - - - - 1 - - 1, 2, 3,8
18M404C.3 3 3 3 - -- - - - - - 1, 2,3
18M404C.4 1, 2, 3
3 3 1 - - - - - - -
18M404C.5 1, 2,3,5,6
3 3 3 - 2 1 - - - -
18M404C.6 1,2,3,6
3 3 2 - - 1 - - - -
Questions to be set for CIE(Q No)

Unit
No
1 5(a) 7(a)
1 Properties of Fluids
2
5(b) 7(b)
3 6(a) 8(a)
2 Flow of Liquids
4
6(b) 8(b)
Questions to be set for CIE(Q No)

Unit
Unit Name Remarks
No R U A
1
3 Flow through pipes 5(a) 7(a)
2 5(b) 7(b)
4 Impact of jets 3
6(a) 8(a)
4
406
6(b) 8(b)
C18-Semester End Examination (SEE)
Model Paper- 18M404C
FLUID MECHANICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINERY
2) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceeding three
simple sentences
1. Define ideal fluid.

2. Write the Chezy’s formula.
3. State the pump use.
4. Define vapour pressure
5. State the function of breaking jet in pelton wheel.
6. Define hydraulic efficiency in hydraulic turbine.
7. Define slip for the reciprocating pump.
8. State the purpose of priming.
PART – B

4x 3 M = 12M
9(a) Draw a neat sketch of Bourdon pressure gauge and label its parts.
OR
9(b) Classify Turbines.
10(a) Write short notes on syphon system.

OR
10(b) What are the functions of the casing of a centrifugal pump?
11(a) Compare Francis and Kaplan turbine.

OR
11(b) Define Degree of reaction and Specific speed for a water turbine.
407
12(a) What are the advantages of centrifugal pump over reciprocating pump?
OR
12(b) Why can the suction height of a pump not exceed certain limit?
PART – C

4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) The space between two square flat parallel plates is filled with oil of specific gravity
0.95.Each side of plate is 720mm. The thickness of oil film is 15 mm. The upper plate which
moves at 3 m/sec requires a force of 120 N to maintain the speed. Determine the Dynamic
viscosity and kinematic viscosity if the density of water is 1000 kg/m3.
OR
13 (b) Explain governing of the reaction turbines with line diagram.
14 (a) A pipeline is connecting two reservoirs. Its diameter is reduced by 15% over a length
of time due to the deposition of sediments. For a given head difference in the reservoirs, what
is the percent reduction in discharge? Assume friction factor remains same.
OR
14 (b) Explain the working of double acting reciprocating pump with a sketch.
15 (a) What is the difference between impulse and reaction turbine.

OR
15 (b) Apelton wheel having a semi circular buckets and working under a head of 140m is
running at 600 rpm. The discharge through nozzle is 50 lit/sec and diameter of wheel is
60cm.Findpower available at nozzle and hydraulic efficiency, if Cv=0.98.
16 (a) Compare the centrifugal pumps and reciprocating pumps.

OR
16 (b) Centrifugal pump is to discharge 0.118m3/s at a speed of 1450 rpm against a head of
25m.The impeller diameter is 250mm its width at outlet is 50mm and manometric efficiency
75%. Determine the vane angle at the outer periphery of impeller.
408
Mid -I (CIE)
sentences
1. State the units of viscosity.
2. Write the formula for mass density.
3. Write the Bernoulli’s equation .
4. What is the Reynolds number for laminar flow.
PART – B Marks: 2 X 3M= 6 M
2) The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the
contentbut not the length of the answer.
5. (a)Define capillarity and explain briefly about the surface tension of the fluid .
OR
5. (b)Calculate the Density and specific weight of 1 litre of liquid with specific gravity
of 0.6
6. (a) What is the difference between steady flow and unsteady flow.
OR
6 (b)what is venturimeter? State its use.
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
NOTE :
1. Answer all questions and each question carries five marks.
2. The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer
7 (a) Define Gauge pressure and Absolute pressure. Convert a vacuum of 100mm
mercury into absolute pressure in meters of water.
409
OR
7 (b) Define viscosity and determine the dynamic viscosity of Benzene if its kinematic
viscosity is 7.42×10-3 stokes and mass density is 860 kg/m3.
8 (a) Define continuity equation. A circular pipe of 250 mm diameter carries an oil of
specific gravity of 0.8 at the rate of 120 lit/sec. and under a pressure of 2 KPa.
Calculate the total energy in meters at a point which is 3m above datum line.
OR
8 (b) A horizontal Venturimeter has a main diameter of 300mm and a throat diameter of
200mm. If discharge is 10,000 liters of water/minute when the difference of
pressure heads between the inlet and the throat is 1.5 m of water. Find the
coefficient of discharge (Cd).
410
Mid –II (CIE)

2) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed three
simple sentences
1. Write the Darcy- Weisbach formula.
2. What is a pipe.
3. What is a jet?
4. Write the formula for force exerted by impact of jet on inclined fixed plate.
content but not the length of the answer.
5 (a) Define Hydraulic mean depth and write its expression for a fully flowing pipe.
OR
5 (b)How does the energy loss take place, when the fluid is flowing through pipes.
9. (a) Derive the expression for the normal force due to impact of jet on a fixed flat
vertical plate.
OR
6 (b) A jet of water moving with a velocity of 25 m/sec, strikes normally on a plate. The
jet diameter is 60 mm. Determine the force on the plate, when the plate is moving in
the direction of jet with a velocity of 5 m/sec.
411
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 05 M= 10 M
NOTE :
2)The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is
the content but not the length of the answer.
7.(a) Find the maximum power transmitted through a pipe of 100mm diameter and 2 Km
long. The supply head is 4.9 Kpa. Take f = 0.01.
OR
7 (b) Water flows through a pipe of 200mm diameter and 60 m long with velocity of
2.5m/sec. Find the head lost due to friction by using Chezy’s Formula, C=55.
8 (a) A jet of water 20 mm in diameter, moving with a velocity of 10m/sec. Strikes on a

series of vanes moving with a velocity of 3m/sec. Find
(i) Force exerted by the jet.
(ii) Work done/sec.
(iii) Efficiency of jet.
OR
8.(b) A jet of water 10cm diameter moving with a velocity of 30m/sec strikes a curved
fixed symmetrical plate at centre. Find the force exerted by the jet of water in the
direction of the jet, if the jet is deflected through an angle of 120 0 at the outlet of the
curved plate
412
Advanced Manufacturing 18M405C
Course Title : Course Code
Technology
Semester IV Course Group :Core
Teaching Scheme in
45 : 15 : 0 Credits :3
Periods(L:T:P)
Total Contact periods
Methodology Lecture + Assignments :60Pds
:
Advanced Manufacturing Technology
Prerequisites:
Basic knowledge of Manufacturing Processes & Machines
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to :
CO1 Illustrate the Working of Grinding Process and apply for engineering applications.
CO 2 Understand various super finishing processes and apply for various applications
CO 3 Explain Plastic Processing methods for different applications.
CO 4 Classify Press tools and apply it in various engineering applications
CO 5 Identify Special tools for Work holding and guiding for different machining processes
CO 6 Describe measuring tools and select a proper tool required in engineering applications
Unit Period Questions to be set for SEE(Q No.) Rem

Unit Name
No s R U A arks
1 Grinding 10
Finishing 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 10
processes
Plastic
3 10
processing 2 10 (a) 14 (a)
4 Press Tools 10 4
Jigsand 9(b), 11(a), & 13(b), 15(a),
5 10 5&6
Fixtures 11(b) &15(b)
3
10(b), 12(a),& 14(b), 16(a),&
6 Metrology 10 7& 8
12(b) 16(b)
413
COURSE CONTENT
Unit – 1 Duration: Periods 10 (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Grinding
Introduction – principles of Metal Removal by Grinding - need of grinding – construction of
grinding wheel - types of abrasives, need of bonding materials – types - binding processes:
Vitrified, silicate, shellac, rubber, Bakelite, Factors effecting the selection of grind wheels –
size and shape of wheel – effect of grain size ,grit, grade and strength of bond – structure,
spacing, Standard marking systems.
Grinding machines – classification, Cylindrical, Surface, Tool & Cutter grinding machines-
construction details – relative merits, Principle of centreless grinding, Advantages &
limitations of centreless grinding, Work-holding devices, Wheel maintenance – Balancing of
wheels – Dressing and trimming of grinding wheels, Coolants used.

Surface Finishing processes
Introduction - Finishing by grinding - Honing, Lapping, Super finishing, Electroplating–Basic
principles – applications, Hot dipping: Galvanizing, Tin coating, Parkerising, Anodizing.
Metal spraying: wire process, powder process and applications. Organic coatings: Oil base
Paint, Lacquer base, Enamels, Bituminous paints, rubber base coating.

Plastics Processing
Introduction - Processing of plastics - Injection moulding - Compression moulding - Transfer
moulding – Extruding - Casting – Calendaring, machining and welding - fabrication methods.
Applications of Plastics

Press Tools
Introduction - Types of Presses – hand, power, gap, inclinable, adjustable, horn, straightside,
pillar presses. Constructional details of a power press -Press size. Press Tools – Punch and die
- Die Accessories – Stops, Pilots, strippers, Knockouts, pressure pads. Shear action in die
cutting operation – punch and die clearance and angular clearance, centre of pressure, cutting
forces. Press working operations: blanking, piercing and forming, lancing, cutting-off and
parting, notching, shaving, trimming, embossing, beading and curling, bulging, twisting,
coining, swaging, hole flanging or extruding – line sketches and meaning of terms. Sheet
metal bending: bending methods, spring back, bend allowance, bending pressure – sketches
414
and empirical formulae.Types of dies meaning of inverted, progressive, compound and
combination dies. Material selection for punch and die.

Jigs and Fixtures
Definition of jig - Types of jigs - leaf jig, box and handle jig, template jig,plate jig, Indexing
jig, Universal jig, vice jig. Explanation of constructional details of the above jigs. General
consideration in the design of drill jigs.
Explanation of drill bush - Types of fixtures: vice fixtures, milling fixtures, boring fixtures,
Grinding fixtures - Explain the constructional details of the above fixtures.
Basic principles of location - Explain the locating methods and devices. Explanation of basic
principles of clamping - Types of clamps – strap clamps, cam clamps, screw clamps, toggle
clamps, hydraulic and pneumatic clamps.

Metrology
Linear measurement: Slip gauges and dial indicators. Angle measurements: Bevel Protractor,
Sine Bar, Angle Slip Gauges. Comparators: a) Mechanical b) Electrical c) Optical d)
Pneumatic. Measurement of surface roughness: methods of measurements by comparison,
tracer instruments and by interferometry - Collimators. Measuring Microscope,
Interferometer.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manufacturing Technology - P. N. Rao (MGH Publishers)
2. Production Technology - R. C. Patel
3. Production Technology - Jain & Gupta
4. Gear Technology - Charrathi
5. A Text Book of Production Engg. - Dora
6. Tool Design - Donaldson
415
Understand the concept of Grinding
 Explain the principle of metal removal by grinding.

 List the different abrasives.
 Explain the bonds and binding processes in grinding wheel manufacturing
 Identify the grinding wheel from the standard code (Marking system or
Designation of wheel).
 State the factors for selecting the grinding wheels.
 State the methods of grinding.
 Classify the grinding machines.
 Illustrate the cylindrical, surface, tool and cutter grinders.
 List the different work holding devices.
 State the methods of wheel maintenance.
Understand the concept of Surface Finishing Processes
 State different finishing processes by grinding.( Honing, Lapping, Super

finishing)
 Explain the principle of electro–plating with a legible sketch.
 Explain the principle of hot dipping processes namely galvanising, tin coating,
Parkerizing and anodising.
 List the various organic coatings.
 Describe the processes of various organic coatings
 State the principles of metal spraying.
 State the features of wire process and powder process.
 Select the appropriate process for surface roughness of a given application
Understand the principle of manufacturing plastic products.
 Explain the methods of injection moulding, compression moulding,transfer

moulding with legible sketches
 Explain the principle of extruding, casting and calendaring with legible
sketches
 State the principle of machining and welding plastics
416
 Explain the different fabrication methods – Sheet forming, Blow moulding,
Laminating and Reinforcing
 List Engineering applications of plastics
Understand the concept of Press Tools.
 Explain the Importance of Press Tools.

 Classify presses based on power and design of frame.
 Explain the constructional details of a power press with the help of a legible
sketch.
 State the meaning of Press size.
 Explain Press Tools – Punch and die.
 Explain shear action in die cutting operation – Punch and die clearances,
Angular clearance, centre of pressure, cutting forces.
 Explain various press working operations.
 Explain different types of dies.
 List various die operations.
 List punch and die materials.
Understand the concept of Jigs and Fixtures
 List types of jigs and explain their constructional details with the help of
legible sketches.
 State general considerations in design of drill jigs.
 State the function of drill bush.
 List different types of fixtures and explain their constructional details with the
help of legible sketches.
 Differentiate between jigs and fixtures.
 List the advantages of Jigs and Fixtures.
 Explain basic principle of location.
 Identify different locating methods and devices.
 Explain the basic principle of clamping.
 Identify different types of clamps and their constructional details with the help
of legible sketches.
417
Understand the concept of Metrology
 Identify various linear and angular measuring instruments.

 Explain the principle of working of (at least 4 types) comparators with a
legible sketch.
 List the surface roughness measuring instruments.
 State the use of collimator and microscope.
 State the principle of working of interferometer.
SUGGESTED E – RESOURCES / STUDENT ACTIVITIES
16. Grinding process
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vcfau3bJ8hE
17. Centerless grinding
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LfbNFTyGW_c
18. Truing and dressing of a Grinding wheel
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GOR35qroeew
.Electroplating
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OxhCU_jBiOA
19. Metal spraying
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NAeBpF84Q9M
20. Injection moulding
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b1U9W4iNDiQ
21. Compression moulding
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pOGpXZ-UMfo
22. Transfer moulding
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2DUB9DoIoi8
23. Blow moulding
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8W6P5KU5ONQ
24. Manual press
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nTshp3STG9M
25. Hydraulic press
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JxJUPD-Ajnc
26. Die and types
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qTuPkrfZB00
27. Jigs and fixtures
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CA3GnfImGmw
1. Student to inspect the available equipment in the lab to identify different machines, its
functioning and application.
2.Quiz
3.Group discussion
4.Surprise test
5. Seminar
418
CO-PO Matrix
Mapping
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
Pos
18M405C.
1 2 3 - - 2 - - - 1 - 1,2,5,9
18M405C.
2 2 3 - - 2 - - - 1 - 1,2,5,9
18M405C.
3 2 3 - - 2 - - - 1 - 1,2,5,9
18M405C.
4 2 3 - - 2 - - - 1 - 1,2,5,9
18M405C.
5 2 3 - - 2 - - - 1 - 1,2,5,9
18M405C.
6 2 3 - - 2 - - - 1 - 1,2,5,9
Unit Questions to be set for CIE (Q No)

No
1 Grinding 1& 2 5(a)& 5(b) 7(a)&7(b)
Surface finishing
2 3& 4 6(a)& 6(b) 8(a)& 8(b)
processes
Questions to be set for CIE (Q No)

Unit
Unit Name Remarks
No R U A
3 Plastic processing 1& 2 5(a)& 5(b) 7(a)&7(b)
419
4 Press Tools 3& 4 6(a)& 6(b) 8(a)& 8(b)
18M405C
BOARD DIPLOMA EXANIMATIONS
Model Paper
ADVANCED MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
Mid Sem - I
Time: 1 Hour Total Marks :20 M
sentences
1. List Natural abrasives used for a grinding machine.
2. List the coolants used in grinding operation.
3. Define a) Galvanizing.
4. List different types of organic coatings.
5(a) Write the advantages and limitations of centre less grinding

OR
5(b) Explain briefly truing and dressing of a grinding wheel.
6(a) Explain the basic principle of electroplating.

OR
6(b) Explain the basic principle of hot dipping
PART – C
Marks: 2 X 5 M = 10 M
420
NOTE: 1. Answer all questions and each question carries five marks.
2. The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer
7(a) Explain standard marking system in Grinding.

OR
7(b) Explain briefly surface grinding.
8(a) Explain Powder process surface finishing operation and explain it.
OR
8(b) List and explain various organic coatings.
***
421
18M405C
Model Paper
Mid Sem-II
sentences
1. List various advantages, limitations and applications of plastics.
2. List various methods of molding used for plastic.
3. What is a press and how it is specified
4. List various press tool operations.
5(a) Distinguish Thermo and Thermosetting plastics.

OR
5(b) Explain the process of Plastic bottle making briefly.
6(a) List and explain principle elements of a mechanical press..
OR
6(b) what is the importance of clearance angle in punch and die, briefly explain
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
NOTE : 1. Answer all questions and each question carries five marks.
2. The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer
7(a) Explain Injection molding with simple sketch.

422
OR
7(b) Explain how the water storage tanks are manufactured..
8(a) Explain any five press operations with simple sketch..

OR
8(b) explain progressive die operation with sketch..
423
18M405C
Model Paper-
NOTE: 1 )Answer all questions and each question carries one mark.
simple sentences
1. List various types of abrasives.

2. Write the specification of a press..
3. Define jig and fixture.
4. List various additives of a plastic.
5. Write various elements of a fixture.
6. List different types of clamping elements..
7. List various linear measuring instruments.
8. Classify comparators.
PART – B
Answer all questions . Each question carries three marks 4x 3 M = 12M

9(a) what is meant by grinding wheel balancing and mention the reasons for unbalancing.
OR
9(b) State the factors to be considered for efficient clamping of a work piece..
10(a) Explain briefly the extrusion molding of plastics?

OR
10(b) What is meant by wrapping of slip gauges and mention various steps.
11(a) Briefly explain the principles of location applicable for jigs and fixtures.
OR
11(b) Explain the working of screw clamp with simple sketch.
424
12(a) Explain the procedure to measure angle by using sinbar
OR
12(b) Explain the working of optical comparator.
PART – C

4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) Explain surface finish by honing with a sketch.

OR
13 (b) Explain indexing jig with a sketch.
14 (a) Explain Compound die with a sketch.

OR
14 (b) Explain the construction and working of autocollimator
15 (a) Explain Leaf jig with a sketch.

OR
15 (b) Explain a milling fixture with sketch.
16 (a)Explain the principle of working of interferometer

OR
16 (b) Explain optical comparator with a neat sketch.
425
18M406P -PRODUCTION DRAWING
Course Title Production drawing Course Code 18M406P

Semester IV Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
Periods (L :T:P)
Total Contact in
Methodology Lecture + practice 45
Periods
Prerequisites:
Basic knowledge of Assembly Drawing.
COURSE OUTCOMES
Understand the difference between machine drawing and production drawing.
CO1
Understand the need and calculation of limits and tolerances.
Understand the importance of surface roughness on life of component, indicate surface
CO2
roughness symbols in drawings, understand standard component specification.
Illustrate production drawings of components, draw process sheet and apply suitable
CO3
limits and fits.
Unit
Unit Name Periods Questions for SEE
No
R U A
PART-A
Introduction to production drawing,
1 06 1
Limits, fits and tolerances.
Geometrical Tolerances, Surface finish and
2 standard mechanical component 09 3
specifications. Reprographic Techniques
PART-B
PART DRAWING EXERCISE – I
Gib and Cotter joint, Knuckle joint, Muff
3 couplings, flange coupling universal 15 1
coupling, Eccentric , stuffing box etc..
Process sheet preparation.
PART-C
PART DRAWING EXERCISE - II
Bearings (Foot step Bearing, Plummer
4 block), Cross head, connecting rod, , lathe 15 1
tail stock , Revolving centre , Non-return
valve etc.
Total 45
426
Part B each question carries 28 marks and distributed for
- Component drawing views........... 20 marks
- limits fits and tolerances............... 2 marks
- Geometrical tolerances.................. 1 mark
- Surface finish.................................. 2 marks
- Process sheet .................................. 3 marks
3. Standard components in part-B question need not be drawn.
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Understand the idea of production drawing, Limits, Fit and Tolerances and Process
sheet preparation
1.1 Introduction to production Drawing
Need of preparing a production drawing, requirements for manufacturing a product

like equipment, tools, measuring instruments depending upon processes, accuracy and
finish data available in machine drawing – components of a production drawing, fits
and tolerances, surface finish, specific processes, material of the component.
1.2 Limits, fits and tolerances
Concept of limits, fits and tolerances – need of limits – standard designation of Hole
and Shaft dimensions. Calculation of limits, fits by using tolerance charts. Selecting
dimensions from BIS standards to obtain clearance, transition and interference fits for
a given set of mating parts – computation of fit and tolerance from BIS table.
Exercises in computing tolerance.
1.3 Reprographic Techniques

Brief description. Steps to make Ammonia Prints, Advantages and Limitations of
other reproduction process of drawing.
2.0 Geometrical tolerances to a component, Surface finish and Standard

Mechanical component specification
2.1: Need of geometrical tolerances, Types of geometrical tolerances.
Tolerance of profile: profile of a line, profile of a surface.
427
Tolerance of orientation or attitude: angularity, perpendicularity, parallelism
Tolerance of location: position, concentricity, symmetry,
Composite tolerances: radial run-out, axial run-out
Symbols for geometrical tolerances, indication of geometrical tolerances on

components.
Exercises on representation of geometrical tolerances on the drawings
2.2 Surface finish. Indicate Profile of a surface and important characteristics of a

surface, Identify the surface texture symbols. Identify Lay direction, surface
roughness achievable from different manufacturing processes, Equivalent surface
roughness symbols;Indicate the roughness values or grade number and corresponding
symbol as per BIS.Indicate surface roughness on drawings.
 Exercises on specifying the surface roughness (average values) for functional

surfaces of the following machine tool parts.
 -Shaft rotating in bush bearing,
 -Tailstock sleeve in tailstock body,
 -Keys and keyways
 -Mounting surfaces for antifriction bearings
 -Shaft or bush press fitted into bodies
 -Beds of machine tools, guide-ways
 -Contact surfaces ,example :flanges of pipe fittings
 -Peripheral surfaces of pulleys and grooves for v-belts
 -Surfaces of control elements example: levers ,hand wheels
 -Bases of machines
 -Machine tool tables
2.3 Standard Mechanical component specification.
Standard components (parts) are to be designated as per BIS like - Bolts, Nuts, Locknuts
,Washers, Screws and, Studs – Circlips - Cylindrical and taper pins – Keys – Rivets – Splines
- Oil seals-rings - Antifriction bearings:
2.4Process sheets : sequence of processes of production for a particular product.

Specifications of relevant equipment and tools to obtain the desired accuracy and surface
finish.Selection of measuring instruments to check the accuracy.
3.0 Production drawing exercises-I
428
Prepare the relevant views of the part(s) of a given assembly drawing needed for the purpose
of production.
Dimension the views obtained and indicate on it with relevant notes the specific processes.
Compute/ identify the type fit between mating parts from ISI tables as per the function of the
component and indicate the limits at appropriate place on the drawing prepared.
Indicate the geometrical tolerances on the component drawing
Mark the surface finish symbols with indications added.
Prepare the process sheet indicating sequence of processes and equipment, tools, measuring
instruments required.
Production drawing exercises-I
 Gib and Cotter joint,

 Knuckle joint,
 Muff couplings,
 flange coupling
 universal coupling,
 stuffing box
 Eccentric
4.0 Production drawing exercises-II
Prepare the relevant views of the part(s) of a given assembly drawing needed for the purpose
of production.
Dimension the views obtained and indicate on it with relevant notes the specific processes.
Compute/ identify the type fit between mating parts from ISI tables as per the function of the
component and indicate the limits at appropriate place on the drawing prepared.
Indicate the geometrical tolerances on the component drawing
Mark the surface finish symbols with indications added.
Prepare the process sheet indicating sequence of processes and equipment, tools, measuring
instruments required.
Production drawing exercises-II
 Foot step Bearing
429
 Plummer block
 cross Head,
 connecting rod,
 lathe tail stock ,
 Lathe tool post
 Revolving centre ,
 Non-return valve etc...
Student Activity
Students/staff members advised to visit nearby local industry and collect actual production
drawing, study and practise as exercise.
REFERENCE BOOKS
IS 696 – 1972-Code of Practice for General Engg. Drawing & B.I.S Code – SP . 46. IS 696 –
1988
Machine Design date hand book – Vol I & II – Dr. K. Lingaiah, ( Suma Publishers,
Bangalore).
IS Code on fits and tolerances.
Blur print reading for Mechanical Tradesby B.R.Sachdeva.
Machine drawing by R.B. Gupta.
Machine Drawing by Siddeswar.
Production Drawing by K.Venkat Reddy
Machine Drawing by Nagpal
SUGGESTED STUDENT LEARNING OBJECTIVES.
On the completion of the course the student should be able to
1.0Understand the need of production drawing.
1.1Distinguish the machine drawing from a production drawing.
1.2State the factors that govern the preparation of a production drawing.
1.3Identify the components of a production drawing.
430
1.4List the function of the component.
1.5Prepare the relevant views of the part and dimension the part.
1.6Indicate the details of specific processes like, heat treatment, welding,

counter boring etc.
2.0Interpret dimension to obtain Limits, fit and Tolerance as per BIS

standards.
2.1State the need of Limits, allowance and tolerance
2.2Definition of fit, allowance and tolerance.
2.3Identify tolerance zones and tolerance grades
2.4Classify types of fits, Material conditions, System of limits, specification

tolerances
2.5Selection of suitable fit for a given mating part.
2.6Compute the fit from tables.
2.7Indicate fits on the drawings.
2.8Need of geometrical tolerances, Types of geometrical tolerances
2.9Guidelines for indication of feature controlled by geometrical tolerances
2.10 Guidelines for indication of datum features, datum planes in space, General
principles for applying geometrical tolerances on a component
2.11 Identify the need of reprographic and methods like Xerox print etc.
2.12Indicate Profile of a surface and important characteristics of a surface on

drawings
2.13Identify the surface texture symbols. Identify Lay direction, surface

roughness achievable from different manufacturing processes, Equivalent
surface roughness symbols.
2.14 Indicate the roughness values or grade number and corresponding symbol
as per BIS.
2.15 Identify the need of reprographic and methods like Xerox print etc.
2.16 Indicate the sequence of process of production.
431
3.0 Illustrate the ability to draw the component views in exercise I
4.0 Illustrate the ability to draw the component views in exercise II
432
BOARD DIPLOMA EXANIMATIONS, (C-18)
CIE- MID-1Model Paper

Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART – A 04 X 05 M = 20M
Instructions : 1. Answer anyFOUR questions.
3. Answer should be neat & clear with all thenecessary Dimensions.
4. All Dimensions are in mm. Choose suitable Scale.
5. Use of tolerance tables permitted.

+0.039
1. The dimensions of a shaft and a hole are given Hole: ᶲ40 +0.000 Shaft:ᶲ40
+0.062
+0.041find out
(a)Hole Tolerance
(b)Shaft Tolerance
(c)MinAllowance
(d)Max allowance
(e)Type of fit
2. Draw the symbols of the following geometrical tolerances:
a)Straightness.
b)Circularity
c) Angularity
d)Position.
e)Profile of a Line
3. Write the surface roughness values for the following :
(a)Hot rolling
(b)Cylindrical grinding
(c)Lapping
(d) Boring
433
(e)Extrusion
4. Indicate the roughness values for the following surface roughness grade numbers :
(a)N 10(b)N 8 (c)N 6 (d) N 4 (e)N 1
5.Write the meaning of the following designations of mechanical components :
(a)Square bolt M12 × 70 N
(b)Ball bearing 308
(c)Taper key 12 X 8 X 50
(d) Fe 470 W
(e)Splines 6 X 23 X 26
6.Write about different reprographic techniques.
BOARD DIPLOMA EXANIMATIONS, (C-18)
CIE- MID 2 Model Paper-

Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
Instructions : 1. Answer any ONE questions.
2. Each question carries twenty marks.
3. Answer should be neat & clear with all thenecessary Dimensions.
5. Assume missing data proportionately is any
1. Study the given assembly drawing of the eccentric shown in Figure given below:
(a) Draw the component drawings of all except part 5----14M

(b) Apply suitable geometric tolerances and fits.------2M
(c) Show the surface roughness symbols. -----1M
(d) Draw the process sheet for bolt -----------3M
434
Parts List
Part No. Name Qty.
1 Strap 1
2 Sheave 1
3 Shim 2
4 Strap 1
5 Bolt with nut 2
(c) Draw the component drawings of all except part5----14M

(d) Apply suitable geometric tolerances and fits.------2M
(c) Show the surface roughness symbols.-----1M
(d) Draw the process sheet for bolt -----------3M
435
2. Draw the Component drawings of a Lathe tool post and write the process sheet for
block.
(a) Draw the component drawings of all except part5----14M
(b) Apply suitable geometric tolerances and fits.------2M
(c)Show the surface roughness symbols. -----1M
(d) Draw the process sheet for block -----------3M
436
MECHANICAL BRANCH –IV SEMESTER
END EXAMINATION (SEE)
Time: 2 Hours [ Total Marks: 40]
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer all Questions 4X3=12 Marks
2. Each question carries Three marks.
3.Answer should be neat & clear with all the necessary Dimensions
4. All Dimensions are in mm. Choose suitable Scale
1.The dimensions of a hole and shaft are given below :
+0.039 +0.062
Hole : 50 +0.000 Shaft : 50 +0.041
Find (a) maximum allowance, (b) minimum allowance and (c) type of fit.
2.Write the meaning of the following designations of mechanicalComponents:
(a)Hexagonal Bolt M20 × 60 (b)Bearing 100,10X26X8(c)Taper key 12 X 8 X50v
3. Draw the symbols of the following geometrical tolerances:
a)Straightness.
b)Circularity
c) Angularity
4. Write the surface roughness values for the following :
(a)Hot rolling
(b)Cylindrical grinding
(c)Lapping
PART-B
Instructions:
1X28=28 Marks
1. Answer any one Question

2. Each question carries 28 marks.
3. Answer should be neat & clear with all the necessary Dimensions
437
5.For the assembly drawing of foot step bearing draw the component drawings indicating fits,
roughness values and tolerances, write the process sheet for cover.
6. Draw the Component drawings of Stuffing Box with suitable tolerances and fits and write the
process sheet for Gland.
438
439
THERMAL ENGG.LAB
Course Title : THERMAL ENGG.LAB Course Code 18M407P

Semester IV Course Group : Practical
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact periods: :45Pds
Pre requisites
Course out comes
At the end of the course the student should be able to understand the
1. Importance of economic speed of given IC Engine
2.Importance of cooling curves on IC Engine
3.Importance of Morse Test On Multi-Cylinder IC Engine

4.Importance of Performance Characteristics of given IC Engine
5.Importance of Heat Balance of Given IC engine
6.Investigation of Pressure Vs Temperature relationship of Saturated steam
Marks
Marks for SEE %Weightage
Un weightage
it Unit name Period Mani
No s Handli Preci
pulat
ng sion
ion
1. Economic Speed Test 6 10 10 20 40 100
2. Cooling Curves 6 10 10 20 40 100
3. Morse Test 6 10 10 20 40 100
4. Performance Curves 12 15 15 10 40 100
5. Heat Balance Sheet 9 15 15 10 40 100
6. Marcet Boiler 6 15 15 10 40 100
Total 45
440
Course Contents
1. Economic speed test.
2. Water cooling curves.
3. Morse Test on Multi cylinder IC Engine
4 Performance curves.
5. Heat Balance Sheet.
6. Investigation of pressure VS Temperature relationship of saturated steam
CO-PO MATRIX
Teaching
Hours
1,2,3,4,5,9,1
CO1 Importance of economic speed of given IC Engine 6
0
Importance of drawing water cooling curves on IC 1,2,3,4,5,9,1

CO2 6
Engine 0
Importance of Morse Test On Multi-Cylinder IC 1,2,3,4,5,9,1

CO3 6
Engine 0
Importance of Performance Characteristics of given IC 1,2,3,4,5,9,1

CO4 12
Engine 0
1,2,3,4,5,9,1
CO5 Importance of Heat Balance of Given IC engine 9
0
Investigation of Pressure Vs Temperature relationship 1,2,3,4,5,9,1

CO6 6
of Saturated steam 0
441
BOARD DIPLOMA EXANIMATIONS, (C18)
MID-I ExaminationModel Question paper
DME - IV semester practical Examination
Corse Code: 18M407P Duration:1 hour
Course Name: THERMAL ENGG. LAB Max.Marks:20
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.
(ii)Record the results on a graph sheet if required , and conclude your observation of the
experiment
(iii) Draw the diagram for illustration ,choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question
1.To find economical speed of IC engine.
2.Determine the variation of the fuel consumption, heat carried away by the cooling water and also
find optimum temperature cooling water at the same load.
3.Determine the IHP and mechanical efficiency of IC engine
4.To conduct a test on IC engine at constant speed and draw the performance curves.
5.conduct a test on IC engine and prepare the Heat balance sheet.
6.UsingMarcet boiler draw the relationship between pressure and temperature of saturated steam.

MID-II ExaminationModel Question paper
DMEIV semester practical Examination
Corse Code:18M407P Duration:1 hour
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
question
1.To find economical speed of IC engine.
2. Determine the variation of the fuel consumption, heat carried away by the cooling water and also
4.To conduct a test on IC engine at constant speed and draw the performance curves.
5. Conduct a test on IC engine and prepare the Heat balance sheet.
6. UsingMarcet boiler draw the relationship between pressure and temperature of saturated steam.
442
Semester End ExaminationModel Question paper
Corse Code:18M407P Duration:2 hours
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the
experiment
question
1. Find economical speed of IC engine.
2.Determine the variation of the fuel consumption, heat carried away by the cooling water and also
4. Conduct a test on IC engine at constant speed and draw the performance curves.
5. Conduct a test on IC engine and prepare the Heat balance sheet.
6. Using Marcet boiler draw the relationship between pressure and temperature of saturated steam.
443
Electrical Technology lab Practice
Course Title : Electrical Technology Course Code : 18M408P
Lab Practice Course Group : Practical
Semester : IV - Semester Credits : 1.5
Teaching Scheme in :15: 0 : 30 Total Contact Periods:45 Periods
Periods (L:T:P) SEE : 40 Marks
Methodology : Lecture + Practical (Semester End
CIE : 60 Marks Examination)
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling Domestic tools,this course also requires the
basic knowledge of basic mathematics at secondary school level.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Network Laws & Theorems
CO2 Calibration of meters
CO3 Measurement of Power
CO4 Speed control of D.C.Shunt motors
CO5 Earthinhg& Safety
444
Questions for SEE
Marks
Uni Period Handling/Manipulation %of
Unit name weightag
t No s / Weightage
e
Precision
Network Laws &

1 09 1
Theorems
2 Calibration of
09 1
meters
3 Measurement of 40 100
09 1
Power
4 Speed control of
09 1
D.C.Shunt motors
5 Earthinhg& Safety 09 1
Total 45 5 40 100
Note:
5. To pass in practical Exam student should acquire 50% marks in both CIE and SEE separately
and CIE & SEE put together.
Cognizan Linked Program Teaching

Course Outcome (CO)
t Level Outcomes (PO) periods
CO
Network Laws & Theorems R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,1 5
1
CO
Calibration of meters R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 6
2
CO
Measurement of Power R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 11
3
CO Speed control of D.C.Shunt

R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 12
4 motors
CO
Earthinhg& Safety R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 11
5
R: Remembering, U: Understanding, A: Applying
445
1.0 Verify Network Laws
1. Verify Ohm’s Law
2. Make the connections for one lamp controlled by one switch
3. Make the connections for one lamp controlled by Two switches
4. Make the connections of Tube light
2.0 Calibrate the different meters
2.1. Calibrate Dynamometer type of wattmeter

2.2. Calibrate single phase Energy meter
3.0 Measure Power in DC and AC circuit
3.1. Measure power across a Resistor using voltmeter and ammeter when
connected across a DC supply
3.2. Measure power and Power factor in 1 - Ǿ inductive circuit by using

Wattmeter, Volt meter and Ammeter when connected across an AC supply
4.0 PerformSpeed control of DC Shunt Motor
4.1. Armature / Rheostatic control method
4.2 Field control method
5.0 Demonstrate Earthing and Safety
5.1. a) Demonstrate Pipe Earthing
b) Demonstrate Plate Earthing
5.2. Demonstrate measurement of earth resistance using megger
5.3 Demonstrate the Procedure of first aid on Electric shock
Safety Precautions
General Safety Precautions to be observed by the student for all Electrical laboratory
Practices
446
1. Every student has to bring insulated tool kit and follow the general safety
precautions throughout the lab sessions
2. Whenever handling/using a meter check for ‘zero’ position of the pointer and
adjust for ‘zero’ position if there is any deviation
Competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student
S.No Experiment title Competencies
 Draw the relevant circuit diagram

 Select proper supply and load.
 Select proper meters with proper ranges
 Select proper wires to make connections as
I per circuit diagram
Verification of Network Laws &  Ensure that all the meters are connected with
(1a,b,
Theorems proper polarity
2,3)  Perform the experiment by carefully
following the experimental procedure and
precautions
 Observe the readings without any scope for
errors and tabulate
 Short M & C terminals of wattmeter

II  Connect for proper Current range.
Calibration of meters  Calculate Multiplication factor
(4,5)  Calculate P, Error, %Error
 Draw graph between W and % Error
 Select proper supply and load.

 Select proper meters with proper ranges
 Short M & C Terminals of wattmeters and
III Measure Power in DC and AC connect for proper current coil range
(6,7) circuit  Find out the M.F of Wattmeter
 Reverse wattmeter terminals for negative
readings ( Lead values )
 Calculate P, power factor(cos Ǿ)
447
 Draw the relevant circuit diagram
 Select the proper DC supply voltage
 Choose the proper range of voltmeter,
ammeter and rheostat.
 Make the connections according to circuit
diagram.
IV Perform Speed control of DC  Ensure that all the instruments are connected
Shunt Motor in proper polarity
(8,9)
 Keep the Rheostat connected to armature in
maximum position in Rheostatic control
method
 Keep the Rheostat in field in minimum
position in Field control method
 Observe the speed variation with respect to
speed
 . Draw Earthing diagram with specifications
 Select suitable GI plate, GI wire and funnel
with wire mesh
 Prepare the earth pit of 1.5 m below the surface
of the ground
V
Demonstrate Earthing  Place Earth plate in vertical position
(10)  Draw GI wire to the GI pipe fastened to GI
plate / copper plate with bolts & nuts.
 Pour sand, char coal and salt in alternate layers
of about 15 cm around the earth pipe.
 Test the earth resistance with Megger.
 Verify the earth resistance.
(11) Practice Safety Precautions.  Practice the various first aid techniques.
 Know the safety precautions.

448
MID I
DME IV semester practical Examination
Course Name: Electrical Technology Lab Practice Max.Marks:20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
((iii) Draw the diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question
1. Verify Ohm’s Law for given resistive circuit.
3. Make the connections for one lamp controlled by two switches
4 Calibrate Dynamometer type of wattmeter
5 Calibrate single phase Energy meter
6 Make the connections for Tube light.
449
MID II
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
question
1. Measure power across a Resistor using voltmeter and ammeter when
2. Measure power and Power factor in 1 - Ǿ inductive circuit by using

Wattmeter, Volt meter and Ammeter when connected across an AC supply
3. Control the speed of a DC Motor by using Armature / Rheostatic control

method
4. Control the speed of a DC Motor by using Field control method
450
SEMESTER END EXAM
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
experiment
question
1. Verify Ohm’s Law for a restive circuit.

3. Make the connections for one lamp controlled by two switches
4.Make the tube light connections
5 Calibrate given Dynamometer type of wattmeter
6 Calibrate given single phase Energy meter
7. Measure the power across a Resistor using voltmeter and ammeter when
8. Measure power and Power factor in 1 - Ǿ inductive circuit by using Wattmeter,

Volt meter and Ammeter when connected across an AC supply
9. Control the speed of a DC Motor by using Armature / Rheostatic control method
10. Control the speed of a DC Motor by using Field control method
11. Draw and prepare Pipe Earthing
12. Draw and prepare Plate Earthing
13 Measure the resistance of given electrical installation using megger
14 Write the Procedure of first aid on Electric shock
451
MATERIAL TESTING LAB
Course Title : MATERIAL TESTING LAB Course Code 18M409P (A)
Semester IV Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in 7.5:00:15 Credits :0.75

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact periods: :22.5 Pds
CIE 30Marks SEE 20 Marks
Pre requisites
Marks %Weighta
Marks for SEE
weightage ge
Unit
Unit name Perio
No Manip Prec
ds Handling ulatio isio
n n
1. Introduction 1.5 -- -- -- -- --
2. Tensile test 3 10 10 20 40 100
3. Compression test 3 10 10 20 40 100
4. Impact test 3 10 10 20 40 100
5. Hardness test 3 10 10 20 40 100
6. Torsion test 3 10 10 20 40 100
Study of micro structure of 6 15 15 10 40 100

7
metals and alloys
452
Course outcomes
Course Outcome Linked PO Teaching

Hours
1,2,3,4,5,9,1
CO1 Analyze the various parameters in tensile testing 06
0
CO2 Determine the ultimate strength of wood 1,2,3,4,5,9,1 06

0
CO3 Determine the impact strength 1,2,3,4,5,9,1 06

0
CO4 Calculate the hardness number of the given material 1,2,3,4,5,9,1 06

0
CO5 Conduct torsion test on solid shaft and hollow shaft 1,2,3,4,5,9,1 06
0
CO6 Analyze the micro structure of the metals and alloys 1,2,3,4,5,9,1 15
0
Course Contents
1.Analyze the various parameters in UTM machine.
2. Determine the ultimate crushing strength of wood. When the load applied is perpendicular
to grains and load applied is along the grains of the wooden block.
3. Determine the impact strength or toughness of material by conducting an impact test on
izod testing machine.
4. Calculate the hardness number of the given material on Brinell hardness testing machine.
5. Calculate modulus of rigidity by conducting torsion test on solid shaft and hollow shaft
6. Analyze the micro structure of the metals and alloys
453
MATERIAL TESTING LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title : Material TestingLab Practice
Title of the Competencies Key competency

experiment
A. Fix specimen in the jaws of the machine  Record load,

B. Fit strain gauge to the specimen elongation, diameter
C. Apply load gradually on the specimen without error
D. Record load, elongation, diameter without  Plot graph stress vs
1. Tensile test strain
error
E. Plot graph stress vs strain  Locate points of
F. Locate points of elastic limit, yield stress, elastic limit, yield
ultimate stress on the graph stress, ultimate
stress on the graph
A. Place the specimen in the machine properly  Apply load on the
2. Compression test B. Apply load on the specimen specimen
C. Record load  Record load
A. Prepare specimen by making V notch at the  Release load to hit
required height the specimen
3. Impact test B. Fix specimen on the machine precautious
C. Release load to hit the specimen precautious  Record load
D. Record load
A. Place the specimen on the machine at correct  Make indent on the
location specimen properly
B. Identify suitable indenter for the specimen  Measure diameter of
4. Hardness test
C. Make indent on the specimen properly indentation
D. Measure diameter of indentation
E. Calculate hardness number
 Measure the
A. Measure diameter and length of mild steel diameter of the MS
bar. bar with vernier
5. Torsion test on B. Take down the value of torque from the callipers.
mild steel bar indicating dial for particular value of angle
of twist.
C. Calculate maximum shear stress and shear
modulus
 Handling
A. Prepare specimen
6. Study of micro microscope to
B. Handling microscope to observe micro
structure of observe micro
structure
Metals and alloys structure
C. Plot microstructure
 Plot microstructure
454
MID I
Corse Code:18M409P(A) Duration:1 hour
Course Name: MATERIAL TESTING LAB Max.Marks:10
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
question
1. Determine the tensile strength of the given material using UTM.
2.Determine the ultimate strength of the given material using UTM.
izodtestingmachine.
4. Determine the Brinell hardness number of a given material using BHM.
5. Determine the Rockwell hardness number of a given material.
6.Draw the micro structures of a) Mild Steel b)Pure iron, c) Grey cast iron d)Brass e)Aluminium
455
MID II
Corse Code:18M409P(A) Duration:1 hour
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
question
izod testingmachine.
456
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C18)
Corse Code:18M409P(A) Duration:1.5 hours
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
question
izod testingmachine.
457
FLUID MECHANICS & HYDRAULIC MACHINERY LAB
Course Title: FLUID MECHANICS & Course Code 18M409P(B)

HYDRAULIC MACHINERY LAB
Semester IV Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in 7.5:00:15 Credits : 0.75

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods: :22.5
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge Fluid Mechanics
Course Outcome
CO1 Calibration of Venturi meter
CO2 Calculate the friction factor of a given pipe
CO3 Calculate the brake power and efficiency of Pelton turbine
CO4 Calculate the brake power and efficiency of Kaplan turbine.
CO5 Calculate the brake power and efficiency of Francis turbine
CO6 Calculate the efficiency of Reciprocating Pump
CO7 Calculate the efficiency of Centrifugal Pump
Marks %Weightag
Marks for SEE
Unit Hours/ weightage e
Unit name
No Periods Handlin Manipulat Preci
g ion sion
1. Introduction 1.5 0 0 0 0 0
2. Venturi meter 3 5 7.5 7.5 20 100
458
3. Pipe Friction 3 5 7.5 7.5 20 100
4. Pelton Wheel 3 5 7.5 7.5 20 100
5. Kaplan turbine 3 5 7.5 7.5 20 100
6. Francis turbine 3 5 7.5 7.5 20 100
7. Reciprocating pump 3 5 7.5 7.5 20 100
8 Centrifugal Pump 3 5 7.5 7.5 20 100
Total 22.5
Note: For subject 18M-409P, the student has to appear either A. Material testing or B. Fluid
mechanics and Hydraulics laboratory based on lottery system for Mid Sem – I , II and External
examination.
Course Contents
1. Determination of Coefficient of discharge of Venturimeter.

2. Determination of losses in pipes due to friction.
3. Determination of B.P. and efficiency of Pelton wheel.
4. Determination of B.P. and efficiency of Kaplan turbine.
5. Determination of B.P. and efficiency of Francis turbine.
6. Determination of overall efficiency of a reciprocating pump
7. Determination of overall efficiency of the Centrifugal pump
Up on Completion of the Lab the student shall be able to
1.1 Venturimeter
1.1 State the practical applications of venturimeter.
1.2 Record the manometric head readings from U-tube manometer
1.3 Record the time taken for collecting discharge by varying the discharge
1.4 Calculate the areas of the pipe and throat of the given venturimeter
1.5 Calculate coefficient of discharge of venturimeter.
2.0 Pipe friction
2.1 Measure the length of the given pipe

459
2.2 Record the manometric head readings from U-tube manometer
2.3 Record the time taken for collecting discharge by varying the discharge
2.4 Calculate the loss of head through the pipe
2.5 Calculate the friction factor
3.0 Pelton Wheel
3.1 Identify the components of Pelton wheel

3.1 Start turbine by switching on jet of water slowly
3.2 Apply load steadily 4.0 Kaplan Turbine
3.3 Record load, speed 4.1 Identify the
3.4 Calculate power and efficiency of turbine components of Kaplan
Turbine
5.0 Francis Turbine
4.1 Start turbine by giving input water supply
5.1 Identify the components of
4.2 Apply load steadily
Francis Turbine
4.3 Record load, speed
4.5 Start turbine by switching on jet of
of turbine
water slowly 6.0 Reciprocating Pump
4.4 Calculate power and efficiency
4.6 Apply load steadily 6.1 Identify the components of
4.7 Record load, speed reciprocating pump
4.8 Calculate power and efficiency of turbine 6.2 Record the suction
and delivery pressures from pressure gauges
6.3 Record the time taken for collecting the discharge
6.4 Record the energy meter readings and calculate input power
6.5 Calculate the output power
6.6 Calculate the efficiency
7.1 Centrifugal Pump

7.2 Identify the components of centrifugal pump
7.3 Record the suction and delivery pressures from pressure gauges
7.4 Record the time taken for collecting the discharge
7.5 Record the energy meter readings and calculate input power
7.6 Calculate the output power
7.7 Calculate the efficiency
Key competencies to be acquired by students
Exercise Key competency expected
460
Calculation of A. Maintain constant head
coefficient of B. Record readings of U- tube manometer without parallax error
discharge of C. Record time taken for collection of specific quantity of water
Venturimeter D. Calculate discharge and coefficient of discharge of venturimeter
E. Repeat experiment for different heads (discharge)
Determination of pipe A. Ensure flow through pipe is full to remove air bubbles
friction B. Record time taken for collection of specific quantity of water in
tank
C. Calculate pipe friction using formula
Pelton wheel A. Start turbine by switching on jet of water slowly
B. Apply load steadily
C. Record load, speed
D. Calculate power and efficiency of turbine
E. Plot performance curves
Kaplan Turbine A. Start turbine by switching on water supply
B. Apply load steadily
C. Record load, speed
D. Calculate power and efficiency of turbine
E. Repeat experiment by Varying load/speed; Plot performance
curves
Reciprocating Pump A. Maintain steady flow in suction and delivery pipes
B. Record suction and delivery pressure gauge readings
C. Record time for collection of specific quantity of water,
electrical meter reading (input power)
D. Calculate indicated power and efficiency
E. Vary the head (flow) and repeat experiment
Centrifugal Pump A. Maintain steady flow in suction and delivery pipes
B. Record suction and delivery pressure gauge readings
C. Record time for collection of specific quantity of water,
electrical meter reading
D. Calculate indicated power and efficiency
E. Vary the head (flow) and repeat experiment
CO-PO MATRIX
18M506P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
1
18M506P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
2
18M506P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
3
18M506P. 3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
461
4
18M506P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
5
18M506P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
6
Course Code:18M409P (B) Duration:1.5 hours
Course Name: Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines Lab Max.Marks:20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
question
1.Determine the coefficient of Discharge of Venturimeter.
2. Determine the losses due to fiction in a pipe and find the friction factor.
3. Determine Brake Power and Efficiency of Pelton Turbine
4. Determine Brake Power and Efficiency of Francis Turbine
5. Determine Brake Power and Efficiency of Kaplan Turbine.
6. Calculate the efficiency of Reciprocating Pump.
7. Calculate the efficiency of Centrifugal Pump.

462
Mid Sem I Model Question paper
Course Code:18M409P (B) Duration:1 hour
Course Name: FM & Hydraulic Machines Lab Max.Marks:10
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
(iii) Draw the diagram for illustration, choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question

Mid Sem II Model Question paper(CIE)
Course Code:18M409P (B) Duration:1 hour
Course Name: FM & Hydraulic Machines Lab Max.Marks:10
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
experiment
463
(iii) Draw the diagram for illustration, choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question
NOTE: As experiments are done on rotational basis all experiments will be considered for
evaluation.
464
Advanced Communication Skills and Life Skills
Course Title Advanced Communication Skills and Course Code 18 Common 410 P
Life Skills
Semester IV Course Group Foundation
Teaching 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Scheme in
Periods- L:T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods

Hours (3 Periods per
Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart writing skills and employability skills to the students
of diploma which will help them in obtaining and maintaining the employment.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar and four language
learning skills, viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
Modules At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
Prepare a presentation.
Use presentation aids effectively.
Presentation Skills Develop public speaking skills.
Learn to make PowerPoint Presentations effectively.
Present a Paper using appropriate body language.
Learn kinds of reports.

Learn the format of a report.
Writing Reports Organise ideas.
Develop essential vocabulary useful to write scientific and
technical reports.
Learn the techniques to face an interview.

Learn the etiquette to communicate with employers.
Interview Skills Learn the dos and don’ts of an interview.
Learn the frequently asked questions in interviews.
Use appropriate body language.
Learn to face interviews telephonically.
Gain the confidence to face an interview by attending mock
465
interview.
Learn the dos and don’ts of a Group Discussion.

Participate in a Group Discussion in a healthy manner.
Use effective non-verbal communication.
Group Discussion Use appropriate phrases and expressions useful in a group
discussion.
Learn workplace etiquette.

Identify the knowledge, skills and attributes useful at
workplace.
Workplace Awareness Build strong workplace relationships.
Learn professional ethics.
Understand gender equality at the workplace
Develop a sense of responsibility towards the society.
Learn various writing formats useful at workplace.

Develop an ability to apply technical information in
documentation.
Revise and edit written documents effectively.
Develop corresponding skills - learn the kinds of business
Writing Skills Useful at Workplace letters - the format of a business letter.
Learn effective e-mail writing skills.
Learn Business Memos.
Learn Notes and Narratives.
Learn Forms and Applications.
Prepare templates for different purposes.
Prepare an agenda of a meeting.
Prepare the minutes of a meeting.
Prepare Notices / Circulars for various purposes.
Prepare Press release.
CO-PO Matrix

CO 1 Making effective presentations R/U/A 1, 2, 3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 2 Writing scientific and technical reports R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
466
CO 3 Learn to face oral and telephonic R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 7,9,
interviews
CO 4 Learn to face group discussion R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9
CO 5 Learn to write various formats useful R/U/A 1,2,3,5,7,8,9,10
at workplace
CO6 Learn workplace etiquette and ethics R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
Course Contents:
VII. Presentation Skills Duration: 6

periods
VIII. Writing Reports Duration: 9
periods
IX. Interview Skills Duration: 9 periods
X. Group Discussion Duration: 6 periods
XI. Workplace Awareness Duration: 6 periods
XII. Writing Skills Useful at Workplace Duration: 9
periods
 Paper Presentations
 Seminars
 Mock Interviews
 Telephonic Interviews
 Group Discussions
 Role Plays
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities
 Creating a model of workplace
Evaluation Pattern:
III.Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
467
d. Mid Sem - I 20 marks
Syllabus:
i. Presentation Skills
ii. Writing Reports
e. Mid – II: 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Interview Skills
ii. Group Discussion
f. Internal assessment: 20 marks
iv. Seminars: 10 marks

v. Assignments: 5 marks
vi. Lab record submission: 5 marks
IV. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks
a. Write an essay on a given topic or participate in an activity: 15 Marks

b. Interview or Group Discussion: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce 10 marks
References:
Adair, John. Effective Communication. London: Pan Macmillan Ltd., 2003.
Ajmani, J. C. Good English: Getting it Right. New Delhi: Rupa Publications,
2012.
Amos, Julie-Ann. Handling Tough Job Interviews. Mumbai: Jaico Publishing,
2004.
Collins, Patrick. Speak with Power and Confidence. New York: Sterling, 2009.
Fensterheim, Herbert and Jean Baer. Don't Say Yes When You Want To Say No.
New York: D
Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeeta Sharma. Technical Communication: Principles
and Practice. Second Edition. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2011
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.dailywritingtips.com/
http://www.englishdaily626.com/c-errors.php
http://www.owlnet.rice.edu/~cainproj/
http://www.thehumorsource.com/
http://www.indiabix.com/group-discussion/topics-with-answers/
468
http://networketiquette.net/
https://public.wsu.edu/~brians/errors
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/radio/specials/15

FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.
1. Write the guidelines for preparing a PowerPoint presentation.

2. How do you prepare yourself for presenting a technical paper?
3. Mention a few presentation aids and how do you use them effectively?
Part – B 10 marks
4. Write the format of a report and describe it.

5. Write a report on the accident you have seen recently.
6. Give the outline of a project report and describe it.
469
FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
1. What are the dos and don’ts for a formal interview?

2. What at least ten frequently asked questions in a formal interview?
3. How do you prepare for a telephonic interview?
Part – B 10 marks
4. What are the dos and don’ts of a group discussion?

5. Mention some phrases and expressions commonly used in a group
discussion.
6. Write a short paragraph on the steps you take while participating in a group
discussion.
470
FOURTH SEMESTER 18 COMMON-410P
SEMESTER END EXAM
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Pick any one question from the given lot.

1. Prepare the outline of a project report and describe it.
2. Write the guidelines for preparing the slides of a PowerPoint presentation.
3. Write the minutes of the meeting conducted at the Principal’s chamber to
conduct the annual day celebrations. Prepare the agenda of the annual day
celebrations.
4. Describe the workplace etiquette.
5. Prepare a press note for the ‘Job Mela’ which is going to be conducted at
your institute.
Part – B 15 marks
6. Interview / Group Discussion

Part – C 15 marks
7. Viva Voce
8. Viva Voce
471
472
SKILL UPGRADATION IN
IV SEMESTER
Course Title : Skill Upgradation Course Code :-

Semester :IV Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits : 2.5
0:0:105
Methodology : Practicals Total contact periods : 105
1. Visit a workshop to know the working of air compressor.
2. Survey on different types of Gas Turbines, Jet propulsion systems.
3. Make the electrical connections in a room for a bulb, fan.
4. Visit a nearby power station.
5. Prepare a model of Turbines, Pumps.
6. Make a working model to prove Bernoulli’s Theorem.
7. Make a gear using wood or plastic.
8. Visit to a Workshop related to manufacturing.
9. Make a report on latest alternate fuels -availability and usage.
10. Prepare some models using modern machining processes.
473
Engineering
474
V Semester
475
Instruction
Total Continuous internal Semester end examination
periods per
Periods Evaluation(CIE) (SEE)
week
Course per
Course Name
Mid Mid Internal
r Max marks Total for passing
L T P Sem Sem Evaluatio
Min marks Marks including
1 2 n
CIE
Industrial
1 18M-501C Management and 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Entrepreneurship
DESIGN OF
2 18M-502C MACHINE 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
ELEMENTS
3 18M-503C CAD/CAM 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
A) Industrial
engineering
4 18M-504E 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
B) Estimating and
costing
A) Refrigeration and
Air Conditioning
5 18M-505E 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
B)Fluid power
engineering
6 18M-506P CAM LAB 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Advanced
Manufacturing &
7 18M-507P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Fabrication
Engineering Lab
Refrigeration and Air
8 18M-508P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Conditioning Lab
9 18M-509P C Programming lab 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
0
10 18M-510P Project work 0 0 3 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
TOTAL 19 5 18 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
7. Cumulative 35% of marks (35 marks) in Mid Sem -1 + Mid Sem -2+ Internal Evaluation +SEE
476
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Course Title: Industrial Management and Course Code: 18M501C

Entrepreneurship
Semester: V Course Group: Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P): Credits: 3
45:15:0
Methodology: Lecture +Tutorials Total contact periods: 60
This course is common for DCHE & DPT
Prerequisites: Knowledge of Basic Sciences
COURSE OUTCOMES
Explain the principles and functions of management and Outline Organization
1
structure& organizational behavior
2 Describe the Functions of Production Management
3 Analyse the functions of Materials Management.
4 Estimate Marketing, sales & Feasibility study.
5 Make use of ISO 9000 & T.Q.M

Outline Industrial legislation & safety and role of entrepreneur and entrepreneurial
6
development
477
Questions to be set for SEE (Q No)

Unit
No
Principles and
functions of
management and
1 10
organisation
structure and 1 9(a) 13(a)
behaviour
Production
2 10
management
Materials
3 10
management
2 10 (a) 14 (a)
Marketing, sales &
4 10
feasibility study 4
9(b), 13(b),
Introduction to ISO
5 10 5 ,6 11(a), 15(a),
9000 & T.Q.M
11(b) 15(b)
3
Industrial
10(b), 14(b),
legislation & safety
6 10 7 ,8 12(a), 16(a),
and Entrepreneurial
12(b) 16(b)
development
478
COURSE CONTENT
Industrial Management and entrepreneurship
Principles and functions of management and organisation structure and behaviour

Definitions of Industry, Commerce and Business. Evolution of management theories.
Principles of Scientific Management, functions of management. Differences of
administration and management. Role of industry, Types of ownership – Sole
proprietorship, Partnership, Private limited, public limited company. Industrial
Cooperatives, Philosophy, types of Organizations, Line and Staff and functional
organisations. Advantages and limitations, departments in a large-scale industry. Effective
organization. Motivation, different theories of motivation, leadership, styles.
Production management
Production, planning and control, relation with other departments, need for planning and
its advantages, Routing, scheduling, dispatching, PERT and CPM, simple problems.

Materials management
Materials in industry, inventory control model, ABC Analysis, Safety stock, re-order
level, Economic ordering quantity, Stores layout, stores equipment, Stores records,
purchasing procedures, purchase records, Bin card, Cardex.

Marketing, sales & feasibility study
Sellers and Buyers markets, Marketing, Sales, Market conditions, monopoly, oligopoly,
perfect competition. Cost -Elements of Cost, Contribution, Break even analysis, Market
Survey, Product and production Analysis, Materials input, Manpower, Location,
Economic and Technical Evaluation, preparation of Feasibility study reports.
Introduction to ISO 9000 & T.Q.M

Concept of quality, Definitions of the terms quality policy, quality management, quality
systems, quality control and quality assurance. Elements of quality systems: Management
responsibility, Quality system, contract review, design control, document control,
479
purchasing, purchaser– supplied product, product identification and traceability, process
control, Inspection and testing. Definition and Principles of quality assurance. Know the
necessity of International standards –ISO- Evolution, Meaning, importance. Various
standards under ISO. ISO 9000 series of standards- Features, series, Constituents,
Advantages, Draw backs and beneficiaries (Whom does ISO 9000 help). 5-S principles-
concept of zero defects. TQM-Meaning, Characteristics.
Industrial legislation & safety and Entrepreneurial development

Employer – Employee relations, Trade, Union Settlement of disputes, collective
bargaining, Welfare activities. Total Welfare concept, rights and responsibilities and
Employers and employees. Salient features of Indian Factories Act, Importance of Safety
at work places, Hazards, causes of accidents. Entrepreneur and entrepreneurship
-Concept, definition, role, expectation. Entrepreneurship Vs Management, promotion of
S.S.I. Self –employment schemes. Product selection, site selection, Institutional support
needed, financial assistance programmes.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Industrial engineering and management by O.P Khanna

2. Production management by Buffa
3. Engineering Economics and management science by Banga & Sharma
4. Personnel management by Flippo
5. Entrepreneurship by NITTTR Chennai

Principles and functions of management and organisation structure and behaviour
 Define industry, commerce (Trade) and business.
 Know the need for management.
 Understand the evolution of management
 Explain the principles of scientific management.
 Understand functions of Management.
 Differentiate between management and administration.
 Understand types of ownerships
 Differentiate types of ownerships.
 Understand salient features of joint stock companies.
480
 Understand the philosophy and need of organization structure of an
industry.
 Understand the line, staff and Functional organisations.
 List the advantages and limitations of line, staff and functional
organizations.
 List different departments in a largescale industry.
 Explain the factors of effective organization.
 Understand organizational behaviour.
 Conduct for analysis.
 State motivation theories.
 State Maslow ‘s Hierarchy of needs.
 List out different leadership models.
 Explain the trait theory and behaviour theory of leadership.
Production management
 Differentiate and integrate production, planning and control.
 Relate the production department with other departments.
 State the need for planning and its advantages.
 Explain the stages of Production, planning and control.
 Explain routing methods.
 Explain scheduling methods.
 Explain dispatching.
 Draw PERT/CPM networks.
 Identify the critical path
Materials management
 Explain the role of the materials in Industry.

 Derive expression for inventory control.
 Explain ABC analysis.
 Define safety stock.
 Define reorder level.
 Derive an expression for economic ordering quantity.
 Explain stock layout.
 List out stores records.
 Explain the Bin card.
 Describe Cardex method.
 Explain purchasing procedures.
 List out purchase records.
 Describe the stores equipment
Marketing, sales & feasibility study

 Explain marketing functions.
 Explain Sales function.
 List out market conditions.
 Differentiate Sellers and Buyers ‘market.
481
 Differentiate monopoly, oligarchy, and perfect competition.
 Conduct market and demand surveys.
 Differentiate product and production analysis.
 Identify the input materials, i.e. Bill of materials
 Explain the concept of cost.
 List out the elements of cost.
 Explain break-even analysis.
 Decide the location.
 Evaluate Economic and Technical factors.
 Preparation of feasibility study.
 List out different products currently in demand with market or industry.
Introduction to ISO 9000 & T.Q.M

 Understand the concept of quality.
 Know the quality systems and elements of quality systems.
 Know the principles of quality Assurance.
 Know the evolution of ISO standards.
 Discuss ISO standards and ISO 9000 series of quality systems.
 State the constituents of ISO 9000 series of standards for quality systems.
 State the outstanding features and drawbacks of ISO 9000 series of
standards.
 List the beneficiaries of ISO 9000.
 Understand 5-S principles and ZERO DEFECT
 Know TQM concept and characteristics.
Industrial legislation & safety and Entrepreneurial development
 Describe employer and employee relations.

 Describe the mechanics of Trade Unions.
 Describe mechanics of settlement of in outs.
 Explain the significance of collective bargain.
 List out Welfare activities.
 Explain the total welfare concept.
 List out the rights and responsibilities of employees and employers.
 List out the salient features of Indian Factories Act.
 Explain the importance of safety at Work place.
 List out the important provisions related to safety.
 Explain hazard and accident.
 Explain the causes of accidents.
 Outline the concepts of Entrepreneurship.
 Define the word entrepreneur.
 Determine the role of Entrepreneurship.
 Describe the profile of an entrepreneur.
 Explain the requirements of an entrepreneur.
 Outline the expectations of Entrepreneurship.
 Determine the role of entrepreneurs in promoting Small Scale Industries.
 Describe the details of self-employment schemes.
 Explain the method of product selection.
482
 Explain the method of site selection.
 List the financial assistance programmes.
 List out the organisations that help an entrepreneur.

28. www.learnengineering.com
29. www.nptel.ac.in
30. www.onlinestudies.com
31. www.classcentral.com
32. Prepare an organisational structure of institution
33. A Case study on principles of management.
34. Make a survey on marketing a product.
35. Prepare a list of ISO 9000 series as well as latest quality standards
36. Prepare sign boards representing safety measures.
37. Role play as an entrepreneur
38. Explore six sigma concepts.
CO-PO Matrix
18M501C.1 - - - 2 - 3 3 3 2 - 4,6,7,8,9
18M501C.2 1 2 2 1 - 3 1 1 1 2 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9,10
18M501C.3 1 2 2 1 - 3 1 1 1 2 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9,10
18M501C.4 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9,10
2 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 2
18M501C.5 4,5,6,7,8,9,10
- - - 2 1 3 2 2 3 2
18M501C.6 4,5,6,7,8,9
- - - 2 2 3 2 2 3 -
483

Unit
No
Principles and
functions of
management and 1
1 5(a) 7(a)
organisation structure 2
and behaviour 5(b) 7(b)
Production 3
2 6(a) 8(a)
management 4 6(b) 8(b)

Unit
Unit Name Remarks
No R U A
Materials 1
3 5(a) 7(a)
Management 2
5(b) 7(b)
Marketing, Sales & 3

4 6(a) 8(a)
Feasibility study 4 6(b) 8(b)
484
simple sentences
1. What does CPM stand for?

2. Write the formula to calculate EOQ?
3. Define trade.
4. What is ISO?
5. Define quality
6. What are zero defects?
7. In which year, Indian factories act formed?
8. List any two safety measure to be followed in hospitals.
PART – B

4x 3 M = 12M
9(a) What is Commerce and business?

OR
9(b) Write any three limitations of ISO 9000 series?
10(a) List any three marketing conditions.
OR
10(b)What are the causes of accidents?
11(a) Give any three beneficiaries of ISO.
OR
485
11(b) What does quality assurance means.
12(a) What is Collective bargaining?
OR
12(b) Name any three Indian entrepreneurs in the field of steel manufacturing.
PART – C

4x 5 M = 20 M
13(a) Differentiate between Sole proprietorship and partnership.

OR
13 (b) Elaborate the components of quality system.
14 (a) Explain ABC analysis.

.
OR
14 (b) Compare and contrast Management and entrepreneurship.
15(a) State the constituents of ISO 9000 series.

OR
15(b) Explain 5S principles in detail.
16 (a) What are the qualities of an entrepreneur?

OR
16 (b) Explain Mechanical hazards in detail.
486
Mid -I (CIE)
sentences
1. Define commerce.
2. Write any two qualities of a leader.
3. What do you mean by production?
4. What does PERT stand for?
5(a) What is management?
OR
5(b) List out theories of motivation.
6(a) State the advantages of planning.
OR
6(b) What is dispatching?
PART – C Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
NOTE :
1.Answer all questions and each question carries five marks.
2.The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the content
7(a) What are the functions of management?
OR
7 (b) Draw a neat sketch of line and staff organization.
8 (a) Differentiate between PERT and CPM.
OR
8 (b) A Project has nine activities. The duration of each activity is as follows.
Sno 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Activity 1-2 1- 2-4 3- 4-6 5- 3-5 5- 6-7
3 4 6 7
Duration(days 6 8 7 12 3 5 7 11 10
)
487
Draw the network and find the project duration.
***
Board Diploma Exanimations, (C18)
Mid –II (CIE)
Time: 1 hr Total Marks : 20
sentences
1. What does EOQ stands for?

2. Give the formula to calculate Contribution.
3. Define Market.
4. List any two elements of cost.
5(a) What is Reorder level?

OR
5(b) Draw a neat sketch of ABC analysis graph.
6(a) Mention any three differences between Sellers’s market and Buyer’s market.
OR
6 (b)Write a short notes on Monopoly?
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 05 M= 10 M
NOTE :
2)The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the
7(a) Describe any two stores equipment.
OR
7 (b) Explain purchasing procedure.
8 (a) Differentiate product and product analysis.
488
OR
8(b) How to Prepare a feasibility study report.
Department of Technical education

State Board of Technical education & Training (TS)
DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
Course
DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS Course Code: 18M502C
title:
Course group: Core
Semester: V Credits: 3
Teaching scheme in periods
(L:T:P): 45:15:0 Total contact periods : 60
Methodology: Lecturer+ Assignment:
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of strength of materials
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the student should be able to
Describe the design procedure, Determine the size of screwed fastener for given
CO1
application
CO2 Design shafts, keys and couplings under different loading conditions
CO3 Perform the design of belts , gear drives for a given application
CO4 Design sliding contact bearings and describe rolling contact bearings
CO5 Construct the cam profiles
Unit Course Content and Blue PrintQuestions

of Marks to
forbeSEE
set for SEE (QN o)
Unit Name Periods
No
R U A
A) Introduction to REMEMBERING - R
LEGEND
design UNDERSTANDING-U
1 10 APPLICATION-A
B) Bolts
Nuts,Screws 1 9(a) 13(a)
COURSE CONTENT
Shafts Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
2 10 4
1.A Introduction
Keys,
3 Design philosophy, Factors
Couplings 10 governing the design of machine element
2 in designing a10(a)
Design procedure: General sequence of steps machine element. 14(a)
Need of standard data for design purpose, use of machine design data, hand books and
4 Belts and gear drives 10
other data manuals.
1.B Bolts, Nuts & Screws
5 Bearings 10 3 5,6 9(b),11(a), 11(b) 13(b),15(a), 15(b)
489
10(b),12(a),12(b)
6 Cams 10 7,8 14(b),16(a), 16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Screw nomenclature, specifications.
Types of screw fasteners
Strength of screwed fasteners and failure due to different reasons
Stresses due to initial tightening and external forces
Stress due to combination of forces
Design of a Nut – Hexagonal and square nuts only.
Design and draw an Eye bolt for a given load and using empirical proportions,
Applications of eye-bolt and Numerical problems
2. Shafts Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
Functions, Materials, Types

Standard sizes of shafts as per I.S
Design of diameters for solid and hollow shafts to transmit a given power at given
rpm.,
a) Based on strength
b) Based on rigidity.
Comparison of solid and hollow shafts, Design of axle, Numerical problems.
3. Keys and Couplings Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)

keys
Function of keys, types of keys,
Splines, Specification of splines.
Materials of keys and splines. Key failure
Effect of key way on the shaft strength.
Design of a rectangular sunk key considering its failure against shear and crushing
and using empirical proportions for given diameter of the shaft. Proportions of a
spline for a given application using tables.
Couplings
Function, types of couplings.
Design and draw a muff coupling (solid) and rigid flange coupling for a given torque
using empirical formulae.
3. Belts and Gear Drives Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
Factors to be considered while selecting the type of drive -Belt drive, types of belt
drives; belt materials, belt joints- length of open and crossed belts (without proof).
Slip and Creep-Expression for the ratio of belt tensions (without proof), Concept of
centrifugal tension – Relation between centrifugal tension and the tension on tight side
490
for transmitting maximum power (derivation omitted) - Permissible stress in the belt
per unit width, per unit cross section-Calculation of belt thickness and width for given
permissible stress for open and crossed belts, considering centrifugal tension and
without considering centrifugal tension.
Gear tooth terminology–Involute and Cycloidal profiles- advantages of involute
profile-Gear Material-Simple, compound, reverted & Epi-cyclic gear trains-simple
problems on gear terminology- number of teeth for simple, compound and reverted
gear trains for a given speed ratio.
5. Bearings Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 –

T: 4.0)
Functions, types of bearings, lubrication types, Journal bearing – terminology,

performance - McKee’s Equation, Bearing Modulus, power lost in friction and heat
generated.
Thrust bearing- Power lost in friction, flat pivot and flat collar under conditions of
uniform intensity of pressure and wear.
Rolling contact bearings – advantages and disadvantages-Components of rolling
contact bearing, ball and roller bearings-Rating life of antifriction bearing, Static load
carrying capacity, dynamic load carrying capacity, equivalent radial load - Load-Life
relationship ( without derivations),
Market or commercial specifications of ball and roller bearings as per BIS standards
6. Cams Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
Functions of cam - Classification of cams and followers – uses. Working principle of

plate and cylindrical cams - Nomenclature of cam profile, base-circle, cam angles,
trace point - Motion of follower – Uniform velocity, uniform acceleration and
retardation and simple harmonic motion – Time vs. Displacement diagram only -
Construction of cam profile of a plate cam with knife edged, flat & roller follower for
all three types of motions stated above - Problems on drawing of cam profiles as
stated above for the follower axis passes through the axis of the cam shaft (offset
followers not included)
REFERENCES
1. Machine Design - Shiegley.

2. Machine Design - R.S.Khurmi.
3. Design of Machine Elements - Pandya and Shah.
4. Theory of machines- Thomas Bevan.
5. Design of Machine Elements – V B Bhandari [ Tata Mc Graw Hill]
491
SUGGESTED LEARNING OUT COMES
Understand the concept of mechanical engineering design and thedesign of Bolts and
Nuts
 Explain the basic requirements of design.

 Explain the phases of design process
 List the factors governing the design.
 Use relevant Indian Standard Codes.
 Explain screw thread nomenclature and specifications of screw threads
 List the different threaded fasteners with legible sketches.
 Explain the strength of screwed fasteners
 List the stresses in bolts
 Design the size of bolt for a given load
 Design a Hexagonal and a Square Nut
 Design the size of eye bolt for a given load.
 Draw an eye bolt showing the proportions.
Understand the design of Shafts

 Define the terms shaft and axle
 State the functions of shaft
 List the types of shafts
 List the standard sizes of shafts as per I.S
 Write the formula for power transmitted by the shaft
 Design the shaft subjected to only torsion
 Design the shaft subjected to only bending load (Design of axle)
 Design the shaft subjected to bending and torsion based on Rankine and Guest theories
 Design the shaft against the rigidity.
 Compare the strength and rigidity of solid and hollow shafts
Understand the design of Keys and Couplings
 Explain the types and function of keys and splines.
 Name the recommended materials used for keys and splines.
 Design the keys based on different modes of failure and also based on empirical
relations
 Write all the proportions of a spline for a given application referring tables.
 Write the specifications of parallel, gib-head and taper sunk keys as per B.I.S.
 Explain the function of a coupling
 Classify the couplings
 Design the muff coupling for a shaft of given Torque and using empirical relations.
 Design the cast iron flange-coupling (rigid type) for a given torque
492
 Draw the above couplings according to the standard specifications
Understand the Design of Belts and gear drives
 List the different power drives.
 Compare the flexible drives with the rigid drives
 Classify the belt drives
 List the belt materials
 Define the slip and creep in belts.
 Explain the effect of slip and creep on power transmission
 Write the expression for the length of open and cross belts
 Write the expression for ratio of belt tensions
 Write the expression for centrifugal tension in the belt
 Explain the effect of centrifugal tension on power transmission
 Design the belt cross-sectional dimensions (V-belts are excluded)
 Solve the numerical problems related to the above cases.
 Explain the nomenclature of spur gear tooth.
 Identify various tooth profiles of gear.
 Advantages of involute profile
 Explain the terminology related to gear drive
 List the gear material
 List different types of gear trains
 List all the advantages and disadvantages of gear drives.
 Explain different types of gear trains
 Solve the simple problems related to gear terminology and gear trains.
Understand the design of Bearings

 State the function of bearing.
 Classify the bearings–sliding and rolling contact.
 State the advantages and disadvantages of sliding contact bearings
 List the types of lubrication.
 Explain the construction and working principle of journal bearing
 Explain friction in journal bearing and give McKee’s equation.
 Explain the terms in McKee’s equation.
 Design a simple journal bearing.
 Calculate heat generated and dissipated in journal bearing
 Write the expressions for the load and torque carried by thrust and collar bearings
under uniform pressure and wear conditions (without proof)
 Calculate heat generated and dissipated in collar bearing based on uniform pressure
and uniform wear conditions
 Solve the numerical problems.
 Explain the nomenclature of rolling contact bearing.
493
 Explain the types of ball and roller bearings
 List the Advantages and disadvantages of anti-friction bearings
 List all the differences between sliding contact and roller bearings
 Properties of the bearing material
 Define the terms- Rating life, Basic load rating and equivalent radial load
 Give the load – life relation for rolling contact bearings ( problems omitted )
 Specify a bearing
Understand the Design of Cams

 Explain the function of cam
 Classify the cams.
 Explain the cam profile.
 Define terms related to cam profile.
 Draw angular - displacement diagram for lift motion for:
a) Uniform velocity.
b) S.H.M.
c) Uniform acceleration & retardation.
 Draw simple cam profiles in above three cases for knife edged, flat and roller
followers. (Offset followers are omitted)
Suggested E-resources and student Activities
1.https://acdemicearth.org
3. Student inspects the available equipment in the lab to identify different machines.
4. Identify the purpose of Gear trains used in automobiles, machine tools etc.
5. Draw the Involute and Cycloidal Gear tooth profile.
6.Quiz
7.Group discussion
8.Surprise test
CO-PO Matrix
1 3 3 1 1 1,2,3,9
2 3 3 1 1 1,2,3,9
494
3
3 3 1 1 1,2,3,9
4
3 3 1 1,2,9
5 3 3 1 1 1,2,3,9
6 3 3 1 1 1,2,3,9
Course Content and Blue Print of Marks for MID - I
SL.NO UNIT NAME R U A REMARKS

1 Introduction, Bolts, Nuts, 1,2 5(a) 5(b) 7(a) 7(b)
Screws
2 Shafts 3,4 6(a) 6(b) 8(a) 8(b)
Course Content and Blue Print of Marks for MID - II
SL.NO UNIT NAME R U A REMARKS
1 Keys, Couplings 1,2 5(a) 5(b) 7(a) 7(b)
2 Belts and gear drives 3,4 6(a) 6(b) 8(a) 8(b)
C18-MID 1 Examination
Model Paper-
18M-502C DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
TIME : 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
NOTE:1) AnswerAll questions and each question carries one mark.

2)Answers should be brief and straight to the point
1. List out the governing factors to be considered while designing a machine element.
2. Write the meaning of M20X1.5
3. State the function of an axle.
4. List out the materials used for shafts.
PART – B
Answer all questions 2 x3 M = 6M
5(a).What size of a hole must be drilled in M50 bolt to make it uniform strength.
OR
5(b) Compute the safe tensile load for a bolt of M20 if the safe tensile stress is 80 N/mm2
6(a)A solid shaft is required to transmit a torque is 15 kN-m. Find the diameter of the shaft, if
the tensile stress is 60 N/mm2
(OR)
6(b). A hollow shaft is used to transmit a torque of 10 kN-m, having an inner diameter 20mm
and outer diameter of 40mm, what is the maximum shear stress induced in the shaft
material.
495
PART – C
Answer all questions 2 x 05 = 10M
7(a). An electric machine weighing 25 kN is provided with a steel eye bolt for lifting. If the
Ultimate tensile strength of steel is 480 N/mm2 and the factor of safety is 6. Find the size of
bolt,
(OR)
7(b).A steam engine cylinder of 250 mm effective diameter is subjected to a steam pressure
of 1·2 N/mm2. The cylinder cover is connected by means of 6 bolts. The bolts are
tightened with initial load of 1·5 times that of steam load. A copper gasket of stiffness
factor 0·5 is used to make the joint leak proof. Find the size of the bolts so that the
stress induced in the bolts is not to exceed 100 N/mm2.
8(a) A steel spindle transmits 10kW at 800 rpm. The angular deflection should not exceed
0·25° per meter length of spindle. If the modulus of rigidity for the material of spindle
is 84103 N/mm2, find the diameter of the spindle.
(OR)
8(b) A hollow shaft transmits a power of 50 kW at 150 rpm. The shear stress induced in the shaft
material is 55 MPa. The inside diameter is to be 0.6 of the outside diameter, Find the inside and
outside diameter.
C18-MID Sem-2 Examination
Model Paper-
PART – A Marks: 04 X1 M = 04M
NOTE : 1)Answer All questions and each question carries one mark.
2)Answers should be brief and straight to the point
1. State the functions of key.

2. State the functions of coupling.
3. List the types of belts
4. Define circular pitch.
PART – B
Answer all questions 2 x 3 M = 06M
5(a) Draw the neat sketches of any three keys.

(OR)
5(b) What shear stress is induced in a square key of 12 mm wide and 75 mm long, placed in a
50 mm diameter shaft if 15 kW power transmitted at 200 rpm.
6(a) Draw a neat sketch of open belt drive

(OR)
496
6(b) A wheel has 48 teeth and a circular pitch of 24 mm Find pitch circle diameter.
PART – C
Answer all questions 2 x 5 = 10M
7 (a) Design a cast iron muff coupling using the following data
Mild steel shaft transmits 80 kW at 150 rpm, allowable shear and crushing stresses are
40 N/mm2 and 100 N/mm2, the permissible shear stress in the muff is 15 N/mm2. Assume
maximum torque is 25% greater than mean torque.
(OR)
7(b) Design a shaft and bolts for cast iron flange coupling to connect two shafts in order to transmit 9
kW at 800 rpm. The permissible shear and crushing stress for shaft and bolt material are 35 N/mm 2
and 60 N/mm2.
8 (a) Find the length of an open belt drive for the two pulleys having diameters as 0.4 m and
0.6 m and distance between two pulleys are 4m.
(OR)
8 (b) Explain about simple gear train with neat sketch
C18-end semester Examination

Model Paper-
TIME : 2 Hrs Max. Marks: 40
PART – A Marks: 08 X1 M = 08M
NOTE : 1)Answer All questions and each question carries one marks.
2)Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed three simple
sentences
1.How a screw thread is designated.
2.. Write the advantages of chain drives over belt drive.
3.Define Lift
4.State the function of the shaft.
5.Define bearing
6.write the applications of bearings.
7.Draw a neat sketch of cam mechanism
8.Name the types of followers
497
PART – B
Answer all questions 4 x 3 M = 12M
9(a) List out the six factors which governs the design of machine part.
(OR)
9(b) Write the classification of bearings
10(a) Define circular pitch and module (OR)
10(b)explain about cam mechanism.
11(a) write the advantages of rolling contact bearings over sliding contact bearings (OR)
11(b) The load on a journal bearing is 150 kn due to turbine shaft of 300 mm diameter running at 1800
rpm. Determine length of bearing if the bearing pressure is 1.6 N/mm 2
12(a) Define the following
(i)Dwell, (ii)base circle (iii)cam profile
12(b) Draw any three cam followers.
PART-C 4X5=20
13(a) The cap of a connecting rod end is screwed by toe bolts. If the maximum pull in the connecting
rod
is 60 kN. Find the diameter of the bolts, if the stress is not exceeded is 30 N/mm 2.
(OR)
13(b) A journal bearing whose diameter is 200mm is subjected to a load of 50 kN, and the shaft makes
100 rpm. Find the heat generated by friction, if coefficient of friction is 0.02
14(a) Find the length of an open belt and crossed belt, driving two parallel shaft 4m apart connected
by
two pulleys having diameters 0.4 m and 0.6m.
(OR)
14(b) Explain the construction of displacement diagram for a follower moving with SHM.
15(a) A flat foot step bearing 300 mm diameter supports a load of 25 kN. If the coefficient of friction
is
0.05 and speed 150 rpm ,calculate the power lost at the bearing.
(OR)
498
15(b)An axial thrust on a flat pivot bearing is 30 kN ,the coefficient of friction is 0.05 and the
diameter of the bearing is 250 mm, find the frictional torque, assume uniform pressure.
16(a) Draw the cam profile for a knife edge follower with SHM whose out stroke is with maximum
displacement of 180 mm during 180oof cam rotation, return stroke is for 150o,and dwell during
remaining is 30o,the axis of the follower passes through the cam shaft axis, the minimum radius
of the cam is 25 mm.
(OR)
16 (b) Draw the cam profile for a flat follower with uniform velocity whose out stroke is with
maximum displacement of 180 mm during 180oof cam rotation, return stroke is for 150o,and
dwell during remaining is 30o,the axis of the follower passes through the cam shaft axis, the
minimum radius of the cam is 30 mm.
CAD / CAM
Course Title :CAD/CAM Course Code : 18M503C
Semester : V SEM Course Group :CORE

45:15:0
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorials Total Contact PERIODS : 60 periods
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of Computers.
COURSE OUTCOMES
1 Define computer aided Design (CAD)
2 Define Computer aided Manufacturing systems (CAM)
3 Illustrate Numeric Control Machines
499
4 Illustrate CNC machines and their Components.
5 Apply codes and Prepare CNC part programming.
6 Illustrate CIMS, FMS and Robots, Explain and identify Applications

Questions to be set for SEE(Q No)
Unit
No
Computer Aided
1 10
Design
1 9(a) 13(a)
Computer Aided
2 10
Manufacturing 4
Introduction to
3 Numeric control 10 2 10(a) 14 (a)
Machines
500
CNC Machines
4 & their 10
Components
9(b),
CNC Part 13(b),
5 10 5 ,6 11(a),
Programming 15(a),
11(b) 15(b)
3
CIMS, Flexible 10(b), 14(b),
Manufacturing 16(a),
6 10 7,8 12(a),
Systems & 16(b)
Robotics 12(b)
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
1.COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING
Introduction to CAD- Benefits of CAD-Stages of CAD-CAD input devices- CAD Output

devices- CAD display devices-Types of CAD systems-Types of CAD soft ware-Features of
different CAD software- Computer communications-Types of computer communications
networks
UNIT-II Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
2. COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING
Introduction to CAM- Functions of CAM-Benefits of CAM- CAPP - Integrated

CAD / CAM Organization – concept- Necessity of CAD/CAM integration- Computer
integrated production system – features-Computer integrated production system –
advantages- Concept and advantages of MRP I and MRP-II – Introduction to ERP
and SAP
501
UNIT-III Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
3.INTRODUCTION TO NUMERIC CONTROL MACHINES

Introduction to numerical control-Features of NC system-Advantages of NC system-
Limitations of NC system in comparison to conventional systems-Layout of NC system-
Functions of each component of NC system – Classification of NC – motion control in NC
system - Manufacturing methodology on NC system-Development of CNC and DNC
systems comparative treatment of features for NC, CNC, DNC - Block diagram of CNC
system Functions of each component of a CNC system-Working principle of CNC system –
Specifications of CNC machines - advantages of CNC over NC systems
UNIT-IV Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
4.CNC MACHINES AND THEIR COMPONENTS

Machining centres –Types- Construction features of machining centres – specification of
MC - Automatic tool changer, working of Tool gripper and tool magazine- types of tool
magazines - Automatic pallet changer - Care and maintenance of CNC machines-Spindle
drives – feed drives - Slide ways – types with illustrations- Bearings – linear motion
bearings – recirculatory ball screws- Feedback devices transducers - encoders – linear
transducers.
UNIT-V Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
5. CNC PART PROGRAMMING

Steps involved in CNC part programming-CNC coordinate system- Machine zero – work
zero- interpolation – types - Co-ordinates referencing methods-Preparatory functions (G
codes)- Miscellaneous functions (M codes)- structure of part programming - Manual part
programming –format- APT programming -coding- canned cycles - Macros-subroutines-
Thread cutting cycles-Taper turning cycles-Peck drilling cycles-Programming Practice
problems on Plain turning- Step turning-Taper turning and thread cutting.
UNIT-VI Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)
6. CIMS, FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS & ROBOTICS

Computer integrated manufacturing system – features-Necessity of CIMS, Flexible
manufacturing system – features- Necessity of FMS-Components of FMS –illustration-
Functions of each component-Advantages and limitations of FMS-Automatic guided vehicles
and different types- Automatic storage and retrieval system - Computer aided inspection
Introduction to CNC CMM – features working and Advantages of CNC-CMM-Definition of
robot – classification – features – necessity-Components of robot – illustration – functions of
502
each component- Manipulator – illustration – degrees of freedom-End effectors - types with
illustration – necessity and application-Industrial application of robots – advantages and
limitations
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing, McGraw Hill – Bedworth David. D
Computer Integrated Manufacturing, PHI – Paul G. Ranky
Industrial Robotics, PHI – Gordon. N. Mair
Numerical Control And Computer Aided Manufacturing, TMH – T. K. Kundra, P.N.
Rao
Computer Aided Manufacturing, TMH – T. K. Kundra, P.N. Rao
CNC Machines, New Age – B.S. Pabla and M. Adithan
CAD, CAM, CIM ------- BY Radha Krishnan.

On completion of the course the student should be able to
Computer Aided Design

 Define CAD
 Identify advantages of CAD
 Identify CAD software and hardware
 Illustrate various CAD Input and Output devices
 Appreciate importance of Auto CAD as a CAD software
 Familiarize with Graphic Work Station.
 Familiarise networking of computers
 Stages of CAD
 CAD Display devices
 Types of CAD Systems
Computer Aided Manufacturing
 Define CAM
 Identify the functions of CAM
 Appreciate the advantages of CAM
 Functions of CAM
 Stages of CAM
 Computer aided process planning
 Familiarize with the term computer integrated production system
 Familiarize with the terms material requirement planning (MRP I) and manufacturing
resources planning (MRP II) and advantages
503
 Draw block diagram of MRPI
 Introduction to ERP and SAP
 Need of CAD/CAM Integration
Introduction to Numeric Control machines
 Define numerical control

 Identify the components of NC & CNC system
 Classification of NC ,Open and closed system NC
 Motion control system of NC Point to point, continuous and contouring.
 Differentiate between NC, CNC & DNC systems
 Manufacturing Methodology of NC system
 Illustrate the working principle of CNC system
 Illustrate the working principle and advantages of DNC system
 Specifications of NC/CNC
CNC Machines and their Components
 Familiarize with the term Machining Centre.

 Identify the maintenance aspects of CNC machines
 Appreciate the role of CNC in computer integrated manufacturing environment
 Identify the various spindle drives
 Appreciate the accuracy of Stepper and Servo motor
 Illustrate slide ways
 Familiarize with linear motion bearings, recirculatory ball screws
 Appreciate the importance of automatic tool changer and its components.
 Illustrate tool gripper and tool magazine
 Identify the various feedback devices.
 Specification of Machining centre
 Constructional features of Machining centres
 Features of Automatic pallet changer
 Working of linear and rotary transducer
CNC PART PROGRAMMING

 Familiarize with structure of NC part program
 Differentiate between manual and computer aided programming methods
 Familiarize with G & M codes
 Know the method of programming tool information, feed, speed data
 Interpolation and types linear, circular and parabolic.
 Write a part program in G & M codes.
 Write part program for Facing, plain turning, taper turning and step turning
 Identify the various programming cycles like simple turning cycle, peck drilling cycle,
Grooving cycle, Boring cycle and thread cutting cycle.
504
 Appreciate the importance of macros, sub routines, canned cycles.
 Familiarize with APT programming
 CNC Coordinate system
CIMS,FMS&ROBOTICS
 Define CIMS
 Appreciate the necessity of CIMS
 Appreciate the advantages of CIMS
 Identify FMS as a sub set of CIMS
 Identify the components of FMS AGV’s and ASRS
 Illustrate the working of FMS
 Identify the benefits of FMS
 Appreciate the importance of coordinate measuring machine.
 Illustrate the main features of CNC-CMM
 Advantages of CNC-CMM
 Define a robot
 Classify robots
 Identify the various elements of a robot
 Illustrate the working of a manipulator
 Illustrate the types of end effectors
 Identify the applications of robots
 Appreciate the role of robots in CIMS
 Advantages and Limitations of Robotics

 A Visit to a nearest Industry working on CNC Machines.
 Identify various machine tools including CNC and write the report differentiating an
ordinary machine tool with CNC machine tool
 Write a part program for producing work pieces like round rods, stepper rods and
screwed fasteners etc.
 www.nptel.ac.in
 www.coursera.com
CO-PO Matrix
1 1 3 - - 3 1 2 2 2 - 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
2 1 3 - - 3 1 2 2 2 - 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
3 3 3 - - 3 3 3 2 3 2 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
4 1 3 2 1 - 3 3 3 2 2 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
10
1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
6 2 2 1 - 3 2 2 1 2 2
10
505
Questions to be set for CIE (Q No )

Uni
t No
Computer Aided 1
1 5(a) 7(a)
Design 2 5(b) 7(b)
Computer Aided 3
2 6(a) 8(a)
Manufacturing 4 6(b) 8(b)

Uni
Unit Name Remarks
t No R U A
Introduction to 1
3 Numeric Control 5(a) 7(a)
machines 2 5(b) 7(b)
CNC machines & 3

4 6(a) 8(a)
Their Components 4 6(b) 8(b)
506
18M503C
Model Paper
CAD CAM
Mid Sem-I (CIE)
NOTE: Answer all questions and each question carries one mark.
1.Define CAD
2.List out few Cursor Control Devices.
3.State any two functions of CAM
4. Define MRP.

NOTE: Answer all questions and each question carries Three marks
5(a) Write about the Various Output Devices.
Or
5(b) Write about Various types of LAN Networks.
6(a) Explain about the features of Computer Integrated production Systems.

Or
6(b) Explain about the features of material requirement planning (MRP-I).
PART – C Marks : 2X 5M = 10 M
NOTE: Answer all questions and each question carries Five marks.
7(a) Explain in detail various stages involved in design in CAD with a neat sketch.
Or
7(b) Classify CAD software’s and explains the merits and demerits of different CAD software’s
available in market.
8(a)Explain about Integration of CAD/CAM with a neat sketch

Or
8(b)Explain in detail about MRP-I &MRP-II.
507
18M503C
Board Diploma Exanimations, (C18)

Model Paper
CAD CAM
Mid Sem-II (CIE)
NOTE: Answer all questions and each question carries one mark.
1. List the advantages of NC system over conventional systems
2. Define numerical control.
3. What is machining centre? What are its types
4. What is an Automatic tool changer

NOTE: Answer all questions and each question carries Three marks
5(a) Compare between NC and CNC systems.

Or
5(b) Draw the layout of DNC system and write short notes on it.
6(a) Write Short notes on Automatic Tool changer and Tool magazines.
Or
6(b) Write about the maintenance of CNC Machines.
NOTE: Answer all questions and each question carries Five marks.
7(a) Describe various types of spindle drives with neat sketches.

Or
7(b) Define numerical control and explain about the basic components of NC system
8(a) Explain about the re-circulating ball screw mechanism and state its advantages.
Or
8(b) Explain about various feedback devices.
508
18M503C
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION(SEE)
CAD/CAM
Time : 2 Hours [ Total Marks: 40]
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
08X01=08

1. Mention any three advantages of CAD.

2. Define numerical control. What are the basic components of NC system?
3. What is miscellaneous function? Give any two examples.
4. Write ant three functions of CAM.
5. List few preparatory functions
6. What is tool nose radius compensation?
7. What is a robot?
8. What is FMS?
PART-B
04X03=12

9. (a) Explain various stages involved in design of a component using CAD.
(or)
9. (b) Write short notes on Canned cycles and Subroutines
10. (a) Describe various types of spindle drives.

(or)
10. (b) Explain the function of each component of a robot.
509
11. (a) Explain briefly about linear interpolation and circular interpolation.
(or)
11. (b)Write short notes on macros and mirror image.
12. (a) Explain about types of end effectors

(or)
12. (b)write short notes on CIMS
PART-C
04X5=20

13. (a) What is MRP-II? Explain in detail various functions of MRP-II.

(or)
13. (b) List various types of statements used in APT programming? Explain them in detail.
14. (a) Explain in detail the procedure involved in computer aided part programming.
(or)
14. (b) Describe the working of CMM with the help of a legible sketch.
15. (a)Differentiate between manual and computer aided part programming.

(or)
15. (b)Write a program on manual facing to reduce into 25mm dia 70 mm length rod into
25mm dia 68mm length.
16. (a)Explain about various types of FMS and their components

(or)
16. (b) Write the advantages, limitations and applications of robots.
*****
510
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
Course Title : Industrial
Course Code : 18M504E (A)
Engineering
Semester :V Course Group : Elective
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) :
Credits :3
45:15:0
Prerequisites: Knowledge of Basic Sciences and Industrial Management
COURSE OUTCOMES
1 Improve productivity using work-study and method study procedures.
2 Analyse work content and calculate standard time in a given situation.
3 Learn the procedures of job evaluation and compare various merit-rating methods.
4 Interpret different methods of wages and incentives payments.
5 Compare various inspection methods used in the industries.

6 Apply statistical control tools in a given situation.
Unit Questions to be set for SEE(Q No)

No R U A
Work study-
1 10
Method study
1 9(a) 13(a)
Work study-Work
2 10
measurement
4
Job evaluation and
3 10
Merit rating
2 10 (a) 14 (a)
Wage and incentive
4 10
systems
511
9(b), 13(b),
5 Inspection 10 5, 6 11(a), 15(a),
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b), 14(b),
Statistical quality
6 10 7, 8 12(a), 16(a),
control
12(b) 16(b)
COURSE CONTENT
Industrial Engineering
Work study-Method Study

Meaning and purpose- Components of Work study – Method study & Time study - Method
study- purpose -procedure - Process chart symbols-types - Outline process chart -illustration
-Flow process chart - illustration - Flow diagrams-illustration - String diagram -illustration -
Two handed process chart-illustration - Micro motion study- concept - Principles of Motion
economy - Therbligs - SIMO Chart - Cycle graph -Chronocyclegraph

Work study-Work measurement
Time study –Purpose-Stop watch study - Procedure - Performance rating –concept - Rating
scales - Time allowances - Determination of Normal Time & standard time.- simple problems
on Normal and standard times - PMTS-necessity - advantages - Work sampling-concept –
advantages - Simple problems on Work sampling –Ergonomics.

Job Evaluation & Merit rating
Job evaluation – Definition-Objectives-Procedure –Job Analysis-Job description-Job

specification-Methods of Job evaluation-Merit rating-Definition-Objectives-Methods-
Advantages-disadvantages.
512
Wage and Incentive systems
Wages-Definition-types-wage differentials-Wage payments methods-Standard wage plans-

types-simple problems on wage plans-Incentives-meaning-Types.
Inspection
Quality-quality of design-quality conformance-quality assurance - Quality & cost
relationship- Inspection – objectives of inspection- Methods of inspection.
Statistical Quality Control

Quality control-necessity - variation in manufacture-assignable causes - chance causes -
Quality characteristics-variables-attributes -Normal curve-properties of normal curve-Control
charts – necessity - types – X bar(average mean) and R charts – concept -Method of
constructing X bar (average mean)-R chart-simple problems. Control chart for attributes –
advantages - Method of constructing – fraction defective and no. of defectives charts -simple
problems - Terminology of sampling inspection -OC curve – illustration-importance -Single
sampling plan – illustration - Double sampling plan - illustration - A B C standard plan – use
of tables - Acceptance criteria for single and double sampling plans using tables.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introduction to Work-study by ILO
2. Work study by Ralph & Barnes
3. Industrial Engineering & Management Science by TR Banga
4. SQC by Juran
5. SQC by Grant & Levenworth

Work study-Method Study
 Understand the work study techniques of industrial engineering

 Apply method study to a given situation.
 State the steps involved in method study.
513
 Identify the types of charts like outline process chart, flowchart, two-hand process
chart, string diagram, flow diagram used in recording method study.
 Assemble the elements with symbols to form the required chart.
 State the question in their order to analyse the operational sequence.
 Analyse the question to form best sequence.
 Conclude the best sequence.
 Draw modified chart.
 Draw cycle graph and Chrono cycle graph.
 Define Micromotion study.
 Define Therbligs and list out all therbligs.
 Choose therblig symbols to represent micro motion study.
 Interpret the SIMO chart.
 Define Ergonomics
Work study-Work measurement

 State the purpose of work measurement.
 Describe the time study equipment.
 Describe the sequence of making Time study.
 State the rules for elemental breakdown.
 State the procedure of time recording.
 Explain the need for rating factor.
 Explain the importance of allowances.
 Compute the normal time and standard time for an operation using observed time.
 State the procedure, advantages and disadvantages of PMTS (Pre determined
Motion Time Standards).
 State the procedure, advantages, disadvantages and applications of work sampling.
Job Evaluation & Merit rating
 Define job evaluation.
 State the purpose and procedure of job evaluation.
 Explain the job analysis, job description and jobs specification.
 Explain the methods of job evaluation a) Ranking Method b) Classification Method c)
Factor comparison method d) Point rating method
 State the advantages and disadvantages of the above methods.
 Define the merit rating
 State the purpose of merit rating.
 Explain the methods of merit rating a) Rating scale method b) Check list method c)
Employee comparison method.
 State the advantages and disadvantages of merit rating.
Wage and Incentive systems
 State the types of wages.
514
 Define the term base wage.
 Outline the standard wage plans such as Halsey, Rowan, Emerson, Taylor’s
differential piece rate system.
 Solve problems on above wage plans for calculating earnings.
 Define incentive.
 State types of incentives.
 Explain the incentives for supervisor and executives.
Inspection
 Define quality, quality assurance and quality of conformance.
 Distinguish between the terms quality of design and quality of manufacturing.
 Discuss quality-cost relationship.
 Discuss quality variation parameters.
 Explain inspection procedures.
 State the different inspection methods.
 Identify differences between various methods of inspection.
 State the advantages and limitations of the above methods.
Statistical Quality control
 Define quality control and statistical quality control.
 State the types of causes of variations –Assignable and Chance causes.
 State the characteristics of normal distribution.
 Outline control charts and use of the charts.
 Construct control charts for variables and attributes charts in a given
situation.
 Apply the principles of random acceptance sampling.
 Illustrate single sampling plan and double sampling plan.
 State ABC standard plan
 Compute the probability of acceptance for a given product.
 Draw O.C operating characteristic curves.
40. www.nptel.ac.in
43. A Case study on work-study measurement.
44. Prepare job specifications and job description for a specific job.
45. Compare various job evaluation methods for a real example.
515
46. Calculate earnings of workers using various wage differentials
CO-PO Matrix
P
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 Mapping
CO O
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Pos
1
18M504E(A).1 - 2 3 2 - - - - - - 2,3,4
18M504E(A).2 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - 1,2,3,4
18M504E(A).3 - - 3 1 - - - - - - 3,4
18M504E(A).4 3 - 1 1 2 - - - - - 1,3,4,5
1,2,3,5,6,8,
18M504E(A).5 2 2 3 - 3 2 - 1 1 -
9
18M504E(A).6 3 1 3 2 - - - - - - 1,2,3,4
Unit Questions to be set for CIE (Q. No)

Unit Name
No R U A Remarks
Work study-Method 1 5(a) 7(a)
1
study 2 5(b) 7(b)
Work study- Work 3 6(a) 8(a)
2
measurement 4 6(b) 8(b)
Unit Questions to be set for CIE (Q. No)

Unit Name Remarks
No R U A
Job evaluation and 1 5(a) 7(a)

3
Merit rating 2 5(b) 7(b)
Wage and Incentive 3 6(a) 8(a)

4
systems 4 6(b) 8(b)
516
Model Paper- 18M504E (A)
TIME: 2 Hours Max. Marks: 40
simple sentences
1.Draw the process chart symbol for delay.
2.What is job description?
3.List two objectives of inspection.
4.What does LTPD stands for?
5.What is Sample inspection?
6.Define quality.
7.Write the formula to calculate upper control limit for p charts.
8.What are control charts?
PART – B

4x 3 M = 12M
9(a) Give any three advantages of time study.
OR
9(b) Draw the graph to show quality cost relationship.
10(a) Write about any one merit rating method.

OR
10(b) What are the advantages of control charts?
11(a) What are the various methods of inspection?
OR
11(b) What is quality conformance?
12(a) What are the functions of Statistical quality control?
OR
12(b) Illustrate single sampling plan schematically.
517
PART – C

4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) Prepare a material type flow process chart for a suitable example.
OR
13 (b) Explain in detail about centralized inspection.
14 (a) A management sets the target of completing 72 jobs for each worker. The hourly wage
rate is Rs. 2/- and standard time set for each job is 8 hours, but worker could complete the job
in 6 hours only. Compute the daily earnings 50-50 Halsey plan.
OR
14 (b) Draw and Explain main characteristics of an OC (operating characteristic) curve.
15 (a) Differentiate between inspection and quality control.

OR
15 (b) What are the functions of inspection department?
16 (a) The daily production in machine shop is 1000 items. These items are inspected by GO
and NO GO gauges. A sample of 100 each is inspected daily for 10 days. The samples are
taken at random. Compute the control limits for p-chart
Date 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rejection 2 10 6 20 18 14 15 12 8 6
OR
16 (b) Explain the terms AOQ and AOQL of acceptance sampling plans.
518
Model Paper
18M504E (A)
Mid -I (CIE)
sentences
1 Define Method study.

2 What is productivity?
3 List any two techniques of work measurement.
4 What is the process symbol for transport?
5(a) Draw a neat sketch of a string diagram.

OR
5(b) Write a short note on SIMO chart.
6(a) Give any three advantages of PMTS.

OR
6(b) The observed time for an activity is 0.85 minutes. The rating factor is 90%. All
allowances put together are 25% of normal time. Calculate Standard time?
519
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
NOTE :
1) Answer all questions and each question carries five marks.
2) The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the content but not the
length of the answer
7(a) Prepare left hand and right hand chart for driving a nail in to the wall.
OR
7(b) List any ten-therblig symbols.
8(a) Describe the procedure to be followed for time study by stop-watch method.
OR
8(b) What are the various advantages and disadvantages of work sampling?
***
520
Model Paper
18M504E (A)
Mid –II (CIE)
sentences
1What is job?
2Define Merit rating.
3Define the term base wage.
4 Write the formula to calculate the earnings of a worker using Rowans plan.
PART – B Marks: 2 X 3 M= 6 M
5 (a) Enumerate the objectives of job evaluation.
OR
5 (b) Write a short note on incentive schemes for supervisory staff?
6(a) What are the various types of wages?

OR
6 (b) What are financial and non financial incentives?
521
PART – C
Marks: 2 X 05 M= 10 M
NOTE :
1) Answer all questions and each question carries five marks
7(a) Explain the classification method of job evaluation.
OR
7(b) Give disadvantages of merit rating.
8(a) Explain Halsey premium wage plan.
OR
8(b) If the standard time for a job is 21 hours and the rate per hour is Rs.1.00, Calculate the
wages to be paid for a worker who finishes that job in 17 hours under Rowan’s plan.
522
ESTIMATING & COSTING
Course Code :
Course Title : Estimating & Costing
18M504E(B)
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : 45:15:0 Credits :3
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of Geometry
COURSE OUTCOMES
1 Understand the fundamentals of estimation.
2 Identify and estimate elements of cost in various processes and interpret
3
Evaluate life of machine using various methods of depreciation.
4 Estimate the weights of material required for a component.
5 Determine the machining times for various machining operations.
6
Estimate fabrication costs, forging and foundry costs to suggest cost reduction.
Unit Questions to be set for SEE (Q No)

No R U A
Fundamentals of
1 10
Estimation
4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 Elements of costing 10
523
3 Depreciation 10
2 10 (a) 14 (a)
Estimation of
4 10
weights
9(b),
Estimation of 13(b),
5 10 5, 6 11(a),
machine times 15(a),
11(b)
15(b)
3
Estimation of
10(b),
fabrication costs, 14(b),
6 10 7, 8 12(a),
forging costs and 16(a),
12(b)
foundry costs 16(b)
COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Estimating
Explanation of the term, objectives and functions of estimating –qualities of estimator-
principal constituents of the estimating of the cost of component - design time, drafting,
planning and production time, design and procurement or manufacture of special tools and
equipment, estimate work, labour, materials, overheads, miscellaneous expenses - estimating
procedure-estimating and costing differences.

Elements of costing
Explanation of term costing - objectives of cost accounting - elements of cost viz., material, labour
and expenses - Determine the items that go into prime cost. On cost, calculate the cost of a product
taking into consideration all items. Calculate the selling price of a product.

Depreciation
524
Introduction- Causes of depreciation-Methods for calculating depreciation- straight line
method -diminishing balance method-sinking fund method-Formulae advantages and
disadvantages -simple problems on all the above methods of depreciation.
Estimation of weights of materials

Principles of dividing the component drawing into simple and smaller geometrical
configurations.-Calculation of volume and the weight of the material- Estimating the cost of
material- Exercises on calculation of weights of material and cost.

Estimation of machining times
Basic formulas for the calculation of machining times for the operations such as turning,
drilling, shaping, boring, screw cutting and grinding- Use of standard table feeds, cutting
speed etc- Exercises on calculation of machining time for the above mentioned operations.
Estimation of fabrication, forging and foundry costs
Explain the term fabrication – types- estimate the cost of fabrication by gas welding and arc
welding - estimate the cost of gas cutting - exercises for the calculation of fabrication cost-
forging-types-operations-losses-Components of forging cost-estimation of stock length, net
weight, gross weight- losses in forging- estimation of stock size-Process for finding the
foundry cost, cost of metal, cost of metal melting, moulding cost, core cost, cleaning cost,
grinding and tooling cost.-Methods of estimating the above. Simple problems on estimation
of forging and foundry cost.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introduction to Work study by ILO

2. Work study by Ralph & Barnes
3. Industrial Engineering & Management Science by TR Banga
4. SQC by Juran
5. SQC by Grant & Levenworth
6. Estimating & Costing by Agarwal
7. Estimating & Costing by Narang & Acharya
8. Estimating & Costing by TR Banga & Sharma
525
Fundamentals of estimating
 Meaning of Estimation- necessity
 State the objectives of estimation.
 State the functions of estimation.
 Identify qualities of estimator.
 Explain the principal constituents of estimating the cost of a component.
 Elaborate the estimating procedure.
 Differentiate between estimating and costing.
Elements of costing
 Discuss various elements of cost-material,
 State the objectives of costing.
 Explain the classification of cost-direct material, direct labour and overheads .
 Classify overheads.
 Define Prime cost, factory cost, production cost, total cost and selling price.
 Discuss the relation between elements of cost and components of cost.
 Calculate selling price of a product-simple exercises.
Depreciation
 Define depreciation
 Discuss the causes of depreciation.
 List the methods of calculating depreciation
 Elaborate the straight line method of depreciation.
 Explain diminishing balance method of depreciation.
 Explain sinking fund method of depreciation
 Solve the simple exercises on the above methods of calculating depreciation.
Estimation of weights of materials

 Review of mensuration formulae for regular 2D figures including fillets,
segments of circles.
 Review of mensuration formulae for regular 3D solids including solids of
revolutions and segments.
 State Guldinus rule.
 Principles of dividing the component drawing into simple and smaller
geometrical configurations.
 Show the table showing the specific weights of important engineering materials.
 Practice Simple problems on estimation of weights of various machine components.
526
Estimation of machining times
 Meaning of cutting speed – feed–depth of cut- machining time-purpose of
calculating machining time
 Formulae for all basic turning times
 Simple problems on estimation of turning times
 Formulae for Drilling – screw cutting times
 Simple problems on estimation of drilling time
 Formulae for shaping and grinding -cutting times
 Simple problems on estimation of shaping and grinding time
Estimation of fabrication, forging cost and foundry cost

 Elaborate Welding and Types of welding.
 State the Oxy-acetylene gas welding principle – rightward and leftward
techniques.
 Estimate gas welding time using tables
 Solve Simple problems on estimation of gas welding time
 Estimate arc welding cost considering various components
 Solve Simple problems on estimation of arc welding cost
 Explain Estimation of gas cutting cost and solve the problems
 Discuss Forging types, forging losses and forging operations
 Mention the various components considered while calculating forging
cost( no problems)
 Discuss the Pattern allowances used in Foundry, net weight and gross weight
 Specify various components that go into foundry cost

48. www.nptel.ac.in
51. www.lynda.com
52. Prepare a cost statement using Excel sheet for real time problem.
53. Prepare an Excel sheet for fabrication data tables
54. Estimate weights of some components.
55. Estimate the cost of fabrication in the work shop.
527
CO-PO Matrix
P
P PO PO PO PO PO PO PO Mappi
CO O PO10
O1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ng Pos
2
18M504E(B).1 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1,2,3
1,2,3,4
18M504E(B).2 3 2 2 1 2 - - 1 - -
,5,8
18M504E(B).3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1,2,3
1,2,3
18M504E(B).4 3 2 1 - - - - - - -
1,2,3,4
18M504E(B).5 3 2 2 1 - - - 2 - - ,8
1,2,3,4
18M504E(B).6 3 3 2 1 - 1 - - - - ,6
Unit Questions to be set for CIE(Q No)

Unit Name
No R U A Remarks
Fundamentals of 1
1 5(a) 7(a)
Estimation 2 5(b) 7(b)
3
2 Elements of Costing 6(a) 8(a)
4 6(b) 8(b)
Unit Questions to be set for CIE (Q No)

Unit Name
No R U A Remarks
1
3 Depreciation 5(a) 7(a)
2 5(b) 7(b)
3
4 Estimation of weights 6(a) 8(a)
4 6(b) 8(b)
Model Paper- 18M504E (B)
528
18M504E (B)
Mid Sem -I
sentences
1What is estimation?
2List any two allowances.
3Give two examples of office overheads?
4 What is the prime cost?
5(a) Give any three qualities of an estimator.

OR
5(b) Write a short note on Overheads?
6(a) What are the elements of cost?

OR
6(b) Draw a block diagram for calculation of selling price.
PART – C
529
Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
NOTE :
1)Answer all questions and each question carries five marks.
2)The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the content but not
the length of the answer
7(a) What are the objectives of estimating?

OR
7(b) Explain the time allowances in detail.
8(a) Give any five examples of selling expenses.

OR
8(b) What are the various objectives of costing?
***

530
18M504E (B)
Mid Sem–II (CIE)
Time: 1 hr Total Marks: 20
sentences
1What is depreciation?
2Write the formula for calculating depreciation using straight-line method.
3State the guildnus rule.
4Draw a segment of sphere.
5 (a) Write a short note on depreciation due to obscolescence.
OR
5 (b) What is diminishing balance method for calculating depreciation?
6(a) What are the steps followed to calculate the material cost of a product?
OR
6 (b) Write a formula to calculate volume of frustum of cone and cylinder?
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 05 M= 10 M
531
NOTE :
2)The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation is the
7(a) Define the terms book value, Scrap value, appreciation , depreciation and
depreciation fund .
OR
7(b) A machine was purchased for Rs. 50,000/-. After 4 years, the value of the machine
Was estimated at Rs. 10,000. Find the depreciation using Straight line method.
8(a) Give the formulae to calculate area of rectangle, square, circle, parallelogram and
triangle.
OR
8(b) The density of material for the part shown in figure is 8.5 gm/cc. Calculate
the weight of the work piece and also the cost, if rate of material is Rs 30/kg.
532
18M504E (B)
simple sentences
1. Define estimating.
2. Write the formula to find the volume of cylinder?
3. Define cutting speed.
4. Write two limitations of welding.
5. What is machining time?
6. Write is drilling?
7. List types of forging.
8. What is pattern allowance?
PART – B

4x 3 M = 12M
9(a) What are the main objectives of costing.
OR
9(b) A hollow spindle is bored to enlarge its hole diameter from 2.5 to 3 cm up to 12 cm
depth in single cut. Estimate the boring time, if cutting speed is 30m/min and feed is
0.02 cm/rev.
10(a) What are the causes of depreciation? OR
10(b) Write a short notes on shrinkage or contraction allowance?
11(a) What is turning and write the formula to calculate time to turn L meter of length?
OR
11(b) List any six machining operations on a lathe.
12(a) Draw any three types of welded joints.
OR
12(b) Write about any three types of forging operations?
533
PART – C
Answer all questions . Each question carries five marks 4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) A small firm is producing 100 pens per day. The direct material cost is
Rs.160, direct labour cost is Rs. 200 and factory overheads are Rs 250. If selling
overheads are 40% of factory cost, what is the selling price of each pen to realize a
profit of 14.6% of the selling price.
. OR
13 (b) Find the time required to turn 3.5 cm diameter bar to the dimensions shown in
figure. Cutting speed is 15.4 m/min and feed is 1 mm/rev. All cuts are mm deep. All
dimensions are in mm.
14 (a) A machine was purchased for Rs. 30,000/-. After 4 years, the value of the machine was
estimated at Rs. 10,000. Find the depreciation using sinking fund method. The rate of
interest being 5%. OR
14 (b) Explain in detail the various forging losses.
15 (a) Estimate the time required for cutting threads of 3mm pitch on a mild steel bar of 32 mm
diameter and 85 mm long. Assume cutting speed for threads as 15 m/min.
OR
15 (b) What is the purpose of calculating machine time?
16 (a) Two 1m long M.S plates of 10mm thick are to be welded by a lap joint
with the help of 6mm electrode. Assume the following data. Calculate the cost of
welding.
a) Current used = 250 amperes

b) Voltage = 30V
c) Welding speed = 10m/hr
d) Electrode used = 0.5 Kg/m of welding
e) Labour charges = Rs 15/hr
f) Power charges = Rs 1per Kwh
g) Cost of electrodes = Rs 15/ Kg
h) Machine efficiency = 60%
OR
16 (b) Explain various forging losses.
534
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
Course Title :Refrigeration and Air Course Code :18M505E(A)

Conditioning
45:15:0
Methodology: Lectures + Tutorials Total contact periods: 60
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of Thermodynamics
COURSE OUTCOMES
On Successful completion of the course, the student will be able to
CO1 Outline various methods of refrigeration and analyze air refrigeration system.
CO2 Analyze & Understand vapour compression, vapour absorption refrigeration systems.
CO3 Acquire knowledge on refrigerants, various equipments used in refrigeration systems.
CO4 Develop knowledge on Air conditioning and understand psychrometry.
CO5 Learn about working of various air conditioning equipments.

Explain different applications of Refrigeration, Air conditioning systems and able to
CO6
solve simple troubles in R&AC equipment.

535
Questions to be set for SEE (Q No)
Unit
No R U A
Fundamentals of
1 refrigeration and air 10
refrigeration cycles
1 9(a) 13(a)
Vapour
compression and
2 10
Vapour absorption
refrigeration system
Refrigerants and
3 refrigeration 10
4
equipment
2 10 (a) 14 (a)
Fundamentals of
4 A.C. and 10
psychrometry
Air distribution 9(b), 13(b),

5 and air conditioning 10 3 5, 6 11(a), 15(a),
equipment 11(b) 15(b)
Applications of 10(b), 14(b),

6 refrigeration and air 10 7, 8 12(a), 16(a),
conditioning 12(b) 16(b)
COURSE CONTENT
536
Refrigeration and Air conditioning
Fundamentals of Refrigeration and Air Refrigeration cycles:

Introduction - Definition of refrigeration - methods of refrigeration – Basic terms involved in
Refrigeration – Thermodynamic analysis of air refrigeration cycles: Reversed Carnot Cycle –
PV and TS diagram - Bell Coleman cycle – PV and TS diagram - derivation of equation for
COP - Open air and closed air systems of refrigeration –problems on calculation of COP.
Vapour compression Refrigeration Systems (VCRS) and Vapour

Absorption Refrigeration Systems (VARS)
VCRS:-Principles –Thermodynamic analysis of VCRS – TS and PH diagram –COP - Factors

effecting performance of VCRS - Wet and Dry compression –Receiver, Accumulator,
Strainer, Drier and Flash chamber – Problems on COP on various states of refrigerant.
VARS:-Principles – Refrigerant & Absorbent pairs-Two Fluid VARS:- Working of

Ammonia water vapour absorption refrigeration system – Working of Lithium Bromide-
Water vapour absorption refrigeration system-Three Fluid VARS :- Electrolux refrigeration
system.
Refrigerants and refrigeration equipment
Refrigerants: - Definition - Primary and Secondary Refrigerants -– Properties of good

refrigerants – Commonly used refrigerants – Ozone Depletion, phase out of Chlorofluro
carbon refrigerants – Montreal and Kyoto protocols.
Refrigeration Equipments: - Compressors – Types of compressors, Condensers – types of

condensers, Evaporators – types of evaporators, Expansion Devices – types of expansion
Devices – Drier cum filter - strainer

Fundamentals of A/c and Psychrometry
Fundamentals of A/C:- Definition of Air-conditioning - Classification of air conditioning

systems - Human comfort conditions – Effective Temperature – Factors governing effective
temperature – comfort chart.
537
Psychrometry:-Definition– Psychrometric terms – Carrier Equation - Psychrometric chart –
Psychrometric processes – mixing of airstreams – simple problem on load calculation
Air Distribution and Air-conditioning Equipment
Modes of Heat Transfer: – Heating & Cooling loads. Air Distribution:- General Air
distribution (Air flow diagram for an Ac system). Air Distribution System in a Room :-
Ejection system, Downward system and Upward system. Ducts: - Definition, Types,
materials used, Duct system. Fans and Blowers – Supply air outlets – Filters and Dust
Collectors – Heating and Cooling coils, AHU (Air Handling Units), Chillers.
Applications of Refrigeration and Air-conditioning
Applications of Refrigeration :- Domestic refrigerator – Ice plant – Water cooler –

Production of Dry Ice. Applications of air conditioning:-Window air conditioner, Desert/air
cooler (Evaporative cooling), Summer air conditioning system – Winter air conditioning
system – Year Round Air condition system – Central air conditioning system– Food
preservation.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – by C. P Arora

2. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – by Domakundwar
3. Basic Refrigeration and Air conditioning - by P N Ananthanarayana
4. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – by Dosatt
5. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – by Stoecker
6. Trouble shooting of Refrigeration -by Ananthanarayana
Fundamentals of Refrigeration and Air refrigeration Cycles
 Define refrigeration and know natural method and mechanical methods of refrigeration.
 Explain different methods of refrigeration such as ice, dryice, liquid nitrogen
refrigeration.
 Define Refrigeration effect, Work of compression, COP, unit of refrigeration (Ton of
refrigeration- TR), Evaluate the power required per Ton of Refrigeration.
 Analyze Reverse Carnot Cycle –draw PV and TS diagram - Know its limitations.
 Derive expression for COP of Reverse Carnot refrigeration cycle and solve problems
on it.
538
 Analyze Bell-Coleman Cycle for Air Refrigeration with PV and TS diagram
 Deriver expression for COP of Bell-Coleman air refrigeration cycle and Solve
problems on it.
 Differentiate open air system and closed air system.
Vapour compression and Vapour absorption refrigeration systems
 Explain working principle and working of vapour compression refrigeration system with the
help of Schematic diagram, T-S and P-H diagrams. Write the expression for Coefficient of
Performance (COP).
 Solve problems on Vapour compression refrigeration system.
 Distinguish between wet and dry compression. State the use of receiver, accumulator,
strainer, drier and flash chamber.
 Summarize the effects of evaporator pressure, condenser pressure, under cooling and super
heating on COP.
 Explain principle of simple vapour absorption systems. State the desirable properties of
refrigerants -absorbers and list the commonly used refrigerant – absorber pairs.
 Know two fluid systems of Vapour Absorption Refrigeration System (VARS) – Explain the
construction and working of Ammonia-Water VARS.
 Explain the construction and working of Water-Lithium Bromide VARS.
 Know three fluid systems of VARS – Explain the construction and working of Electrolux VARS.
Refrigerants and refrigeration equipment
 Distinguish between primary and secondary refrigerants; List the desirable properties of
refrigerants and Classification of refrigerants.
 Write chemical formula, name and application of the following refrigerants – R 12, R 22, R
134 a, R 290a, R 600a, R 401a, Cyclopentane, R 717, R 718, R 729, R 744
 Know the reasons of Ozone depletion – Need to phase out of Chlorofluoro carbons and
hydro Chlorofluoro carbons – Understand Montreal protocol and Kyoto protocol.
(Statements of protocol).
 Know the function of compressor, Classification of compressors.
 Explain construction and working of hermetic reciprocating compressor.
 State the function of condenser and explain the working of natural draught air cooled
condensers type (tube and fin condenser) –and forced draught air cooled condensers
 Explain the working of Shell & Tube water cooled condensers with the help of a legible
sketch.
 Explain the working of evaporative condenser
 Explain the functions of various types of expansion devices such as capillary tube,
thermostatic expansion valves with the help of a legible sketch.
 State the function of evaporator, explain construction and working principle of flooded type
evaporator and dry expansion evaporator
539
Fundamentals of A/C and psychrometry
 Define air conditioning and classify air conditioning systems.

 Explain air conditioning as applied to human comfort, effective temperature, factors
governing effective temperature and comfort chart.
 Define the terms Psychrometry, dry air and moist air, DBT, WBT, DPT and adiabatic
saturation temperature, humidity, absolute humidity, relative humidity, specific humidity
and degree of saturation.
 Know Carrier’s equation and solve problems involving psychrometry.
 Know different Psychrometers - Laboratory, continuous recording, sling and aspirating
Psychrometers.
 Explain the features of psychrometric chart, plot all psychometric processes on the
chart.
 Know the concept of mixing of air streams and solve problems.
Air distribution and Air-conditioning Equipment.
 Know the different modes of heat transfer – conduction, convection and radiation
 Draw the general air flow diagram for AC system and explain the air flow, explain different
air distribution systems in a room like ejection system, downward system and upward
system.
 Explain the need of a duct- Know duct materials, shapes, classify the ducts and explain the
duct system based on arrangement of supply ducts like loop perimeter system, radial
perimeter system and extended plenum system.
 Explain duct system based upon number of ducts used like: single duct system, dual duct
system and dual duct with induction system.
 Differentiate between fan and blower, classify fans according to direction of air flow and
know the factors governing selection of fans.
 Explain construction and working of different axial flow fans like propeller fan, tube axial fan
and vane axial fan
 Know constructional features of forward curved, backward curved and radial fan blades
 Classify supply air outlets and know about grill outlets, slot diffusers, ceiling diffusers,
perforated ceiling panels and their applications.
 Know different types of filters and dust collectors -Explain heating and cooling coils.
 Know the functioning of Air Handling Units (AHU) and chiller units.
Applications of refrigeration and air conditioning
 Applications of refrigeration - explain construction and working of domestic refrigerator.

 Explain the layout of ice plant and process of production of ice
 Explain construction and working of storage type water cooler.
 Explain the process of production of dry ice
 Applications of air conditioning – Explain working of window air conditioner.
 Know the difference between unitary air conditioner, split air conditioner- Explain the
working of desert type air cooler.
540
 Explain summer air conditioning system for hot & humid and hot & dry out-door conditions .
 Explain winter air conditioning system for cold & dry out-door conditions - Explain year
round air conditioning system.
 Explain central air conditioning system
SUGGESTED E RESOURCES / STUDENT ACTIVITIES.
1. Visit nearest outlet and list out Domestic Refrigerators manufacturers and know the capacity
of the refrigerator and the refrigerant used in it.
2. Know the colour coding of refrigerant cylinders.
3. Make a report of Montreal and Kyoto protocols.
4. Assemble and dissemble the air cooler and know all the parts.
5. Clean an air cooler, replace the pads of an air cooler.
6. Visit a RAC workshop and watch the method of vaccumisation and charging of refrigerant.
7. Visit a duct manufacturing unit and study how fabrication is done and submit a report.
8. Visit a site where ducting is being carried out.
9. Collect data sheet to find heating and cooling loads for an air conditioning system and study
its contents.
10. Visit a site where split air conditioner is being installed.
11. Visit a central air conditioning plant.
12. Working of domestic refrigerator
: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h5wQoA15OnQ&vl=en
13. Working of window air conditioner:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0PkOEHMNOLk
14. Working of Air handling unit (AHU)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uWwVsFqNFp4
15. Working of chiller
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0rzQhSXVq60
16. Working of ductable air conditioning system
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ye_r_JY5Vyg
17. Working of tube axial fan
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OvVcZrIWcF8
18. Working of vapour compression system
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-Wj_MO4BqtA
19. Working of Ammonia Water VARS
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xDDmlT-HK1Y
20. Working of Water lithium bromide VARS
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L_wISd7bAWE
21. Working of Electrolux VARS
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uHtOtgxAdRs
22. Working of Receiver, Drier and Accumulator
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7raEl5-5PEs
541
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping POs
18M505E(A).1 1 3 - - - - - - - 1, 2
18M505E(A).2 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 1, 2, 9, 10
18M505E(A).3 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8,
1 3 2 - 3 2 - 3 - 2
10
18M505E(A).4 1, 2, 3, 9
1 1 1 - - - - - -
18M505E(A).5 1, 2, 3, 8
2 2 1 - - - - 1 - -
18M505E(A).6 1 2 1 - - - - 2 - 1 1, 2, 3, 8, 10

Unit
No
Fundamentals of 1
1 5(a) 7(a)
Refrigeration and Air
2
conditioning 5(b) 7(b)
Vapour Compression
and Vapour 3
2 6(a) 8(a)
Absorption 4
Refrigeration system 6(b) 8(b)

Unit
Unit Name Remarks
No R U A
Refrigerants and
1 5(a) 7(a)
3 Refrigeration
2
equipment 5(b) 7(b)
Fundamentals of A/C 3 6(a) 8(a)

4
and Psychrometry 4
6(b) 8(b)
542
C-18M505E(A)
DME V SEMESTER
sentences
1. Define the term Refrigeration. Write its units.
2. Find COP of a refrigerating machine working on Reverse Carnot cycle operating between -10°
C and 40° C.
3. Why dry compression is preferred in VCRS.
4. Why Ammonia-Water is most prominently used as Refrigerant-Absorbent in VARS.
PART – B
Marks: 2 X 3M= 6 M
5. (a). Explain about dry ice refrigeration

OR
5. (b). Differentiate open and closed cycle refrigeration system.
6. (a). Draw the layout of water-lithium bromide VARS..

OR
6 (b). Draw layout of Electrolux refrigeration system.
543
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
NOTE :
7(a) Explain Bell Coleman refrigeration cycle with a layout.

OR
7(b) A refrigeration plant works between – 15°C and 30°C. The refrigerant is dry and
saturated at the end of compression. Calculate Refrigerating effect, Carnot COP and
COP of VARS, if enthalpy values before and after compression are 1280 kJ/kg and
1470 kJ/kg, fluid enthalpy at 30°C is 320 kJ/kg.
8 (a) Explain with help of Pressure-Enthalpy (P-H) diagram the effect of increase in
condenser pressure on refrigeration system performance.
OR
8 (b) Differentiate between wet compression and dry compression refrigeration system.
544
C-18M505E(A)
DME V SEMESTER

sentences
1. What is a primary refrigerant. Give an example.
2. What is chemical formula of R-22.
3. How does an air conditioning differs from refrigeration.
4. Define the term specific humidity.
PART – B
Marks : 2 X 3M= 6 M
5. (a)Write short notes on Montreal protocol

OR
5. (b) Differentiate between natural draught and forced draught condensers.
6. (a) What are the factors governing effective temperature

OR
6 (b) Explain working of aspirating psychrometer.
545
PART – C
Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
NOTE :
7(a) Explain working of evaporative condenser.

OR
7(b) Explain working of thermostatic expansion valve.
8 (a) Draw sensible heating, sensible cooling, humidification and dehumidification process
on psychrometric chart.
OR
8 (b) Explain the concept of mixing of air streams in air conditioning.
546
C-18M505E(A)
MODEL PAPER (SEE)
DME V SEMESTER
NOTE : 1)Answer allquestions and each question carries one marks.

2)Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceeding
threesimple sentences
1. Define the term Ton of Refrigeration.

2. What is the function of accumulator in VCRS.
3. Write any two duct materials.
4. Write carriers equation.
5. Write two materials used for ducts in air distribution.
6. What is relative humidity of Hyderabad.
7. What are main components in indoor unit of split air conditioner.
8. What does AHU stands for?
PART – B

4x 3 M = 12M
9(a) Write an expression for COP of refrigerator and heat pump of reverse Carnot cycle
OR
9(b) Explain working of electronic filters.

10(a) What are secondary refrigerants give two examples.
OR
10 (b) Explain working of an air cooler
11 (a) Differentiate slot diffuser and ceiling diffuser.

OR
11(b) Differentiate conduction and convection heat transfer
547
12(a) Draw the layout for production of dry ice.
OR
12(b) Draw the layout for storage type water cooler.
PART – C
Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks

4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) Explain Bell Coleman refrigeration cycle .

OR
13 (b) Explain radial perimeter duct system with a neat sketch.
14 (a) Explain working of hermetic reciprocating compressor.

OR
14 (b) Explain working of storage type water cooler.
15 (a) Explain ejector type air distribution system.

OR
15 (b) Explain loop perimeter duct system.
16 (a) Explain summer air conditioning system for hot and humid outdoor conditions
OR
16 (b) Explain working of a window air conditioner.
548
CourseTitle : Fluid Power Engineering Course Code : 18M505E(B)
Teaching Scheme in Hrs (L:T:P) : 45:15:0 Credits :3
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorials Total Contact Periods : 60
Pre requisites
Basic Knowledge of hydraulics, pneumatics and control systems
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):
Course Outcome
CO1 Explain and Evaluate Hydraulic and Pneumatic Pump
CO2 Explain and differentiate Hydraulics motors
CO3 Describe the construction of various directional, Pressure and Flow control valves.
CO4 Hydraulic circuit design and Analysis.
CO5 Understand and explain Actuators
CO6 Design the single Actuator Circuits
Course content and Blue Print of Marks for SEE
Questions to be set for SEE Marks

549
 Remar
ks
perio
Unit Name R U A
ds
Introduction to
hydraulics and 10
pumps
PART-A Q1 9(a) 13(a)
Hydraulic Motors
10
and Actuators
Directional
Q
pressure and flow 10
4
control valves
Q2 10(a) 14(a)
PART-B
Hydraulic circuit
design and 10
analysis
13(b)
Introduction to 9(b)
Q5 15(a)
PART-C pneumatics and 10 Q3 11(a)
Q6 15(b)
actuators 11(b)
10(b) 14(b)
Single Actuator Q7
10 12(a) 16(a)
circuits Q8
12(b) 16(b)
TOTAL 60 10 06 06
8
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I
Introduction to Hydraulics and Hydraulic pumps Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:4.0)
Definition and scope of fluid power, Advantages and drawbacks of fluid power, Applications
of fluid power, Components of Fluid power system - Hydraulic & Pneumatic systems
Comparison between Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems, Comparison of Different Power
Systems -mechanical, electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic power systems, Future of Fluid
power industry - in general and related to India. Classification of pumps based on
Displacement, Delivery and Motion, Positive and Non-positive displacement pumps,
550
Advantages and disadvantages of Non-positive displacement pumps Differences between
Positive and Non positive displacement pumps, Classification of positive displacement pumps
Pumping Theory, Gear pumps - External and internal gear pumps, Lobe and Screw pumps,
Advantages, Disadvantages and applications of the above pumps, Vane pumps -Unbalanced
and Balanced vane pumps, Advantages, Disadvantages and applications of vane pumps,
Piston Pumps - Axial and Radial Piston Pumps Bent - Axis type and Swash - P Advantages,
Disadvantages and applications of vane pumps, plate type piston pumps, Advantages,
Disadvantages and applications of piston pumps, Volumetric and Mechanical efficiencies of
pumps.
UNIT-2 Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:4.0)
Hydraulic Motors and Actuators
Introduction- Differences between hydraulic pump and motor, Applications of hydraulic

motors, Comparison between hydraulic and electric motors, Classification of hydraulic
motors, Gear motors, Vane motors, Piston motors, Theoretical torque, power and flow rate,
Volumetric, Mechanical and Overall efficiencies of hydraulic motor. Introduction-
Classification of actuators, Types of hydraulic cylinders – Single acting - Gravity return and
spring return single acting cylinders, Double-acting - Piston rod on one side and both the
sides, Telescope and Tandem cylinders, Cylinder force, velocity and power, First, Second and
Third Class lever systems used in cylinders, Cylinder cushions and its importance.
Directional, pressure and Flow control valves
Introduction to valves used in fluid power, Functions of direction control valves,

Classification of direction control valves on different criteria, Classification of DCVs based
on Fluid Path, Design Characteristics, Control Method, Construction of Internal Moving
Parts, Symbols of various direction control valves, Different types of actuators - Manually
operated, mechanically operated, Solenoid operated and Pilot operated actuators, Check valve
– construction and operation details of Ball type, Poppet, Pilot operated and Solenoid actuated
check valves, Two way and Three way control valves and their applications. Necessity and
551
functions of pressure control valves, Classification of pressure control valves, Pressure relief
valves - construction and working of simple and compound (pilot operated) pressure relief
valves, Pressure reducing valves, Unloading valves - Direct Acting and Pilot operated
unloading valves - construction and operation, Counter balance valves, Pressure sequence
valves, Cartridge valves - Balanced and unbalanced poppet controlled cartridge valves,
Applications of pressure control valves. Functions of flow control valves, Classification of
flow control valves, Construction and operation of Non - pressure compensated and Pressure
compensated flow control valves.
Hydraulic circuit design and Analysis
Describing the operation of complete hydraulic circuits drawn using graphic symbols for all
components, Control of single - acting hydraulic cylinder, Control of double - acting
hydraulic cylinder, Regenerative cylinder circuit – expression for the cylinder extending
speed, Load carrying capacity during extension, Pump unloading circuit, Double - pump
hydraulic circuit, Counter balance valve application, Hydraulic cylinder sequencing circuit,
Cylinder synchronizing circuits - cylinders connected in parallel and series, Fail - safe
circuits, fail - safe system with overload protection, Two - handed safety system.
Introduction to Pneumatics and Actuators
Introduction to Pneumatics, Choice working medium and system, Advantages and

disadvantages of compressed air, Applications of pneumatics, Basic components of
pneumatic systems, Advantages and disadvantages of
pneumatic systems, Comparison of Mechanical / Electrical, Hydraulic and Pneumatic

transmission systems Introduction to pneumatic actuators, Types of pneumatic actuators –
Linear actuators (pneumatic cylinders), Rotary actuators (Air motors) and Limited angle
actuators, Classification of Linear actuators based on, Application for which cylinders are
used, cylinder's action, cylinder's movement and cylinder's design, Materials of construction
552
for light, medium and heavy duty cylinders, Single acting cylinders - construction of
Diaphragm cylinder, Rolling diaphragm cylinders, Gravity return and Spring return single
acting cylinders, Construction of double - acting cylinders with piston rod on one side and
both the sides, Telescopic cylinder, Tandem cylinder, Rodless cylinder, Cable cylinder,
Sealing band Cylinder with slotted cylinder barrel, Cylinder with Magnetically Coupled
Slide, Impact cylinders and Duplex cylinders, Graphic symbols of cylinders, Cylinder Seals -
characteristics and classification, Static and Dynamic seals, Different types of cylinders used
in cylinders, Working and applications of Air Motor.
Single Actuator circuits.
Functions of the pneumatic circuits, Direct and indirect control of single acting cylinders,
Control of single acting cylinder with OR, AND, NOT valves, Direct and indirect control of
double acting cylinders, Control of double acting cylinders with Supply air - throttling,
Exhaust air throttling, Time dependent controls - Time delay valve NC-type, Time delay
valve NO-type.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fluid power with applications by Anthony Esposito - Printice Hall of India
2. Fluid power control - NPTEL Web course
3. Pneumatics by SRIHARI RAO
4. Pneumatic controls by FESTO
5. Fluid Power Pneumatics by ALAN H. JOHN
6. Pneumatics by FLIPPO
7. Pneumatics By TTI
8. Hydraulics & Pneumatics by RAY & RAOd
9. Fluid Power & Pneumatics by AUDEL Series
553
E resources/ suggested student activities
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YlmRa-9zDF8 basics
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8xd7cWvMrvE nptel
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p7kaKmwc09g practical examples
1. visit nearby JCB cranes, tippers and identify pneumatic devices and circuits and prepare a
report about their working and their location.
Suggested learning outcomes.
On successful completion of the course the student shall be able to
1. Explain and Evaluate Hydraulics, Pneumatics and Pump
 Explain the meaning of fluid power.

 List the various applications of fluid power.
 Differentiate between fluid power and transport systems.
 List the advantages and disadvantages of fluid power.
 Explain the industrial applications of fluid power.
 List the basic components of the fluid power.
 Explain the meaning of Pneumatics.
 Differentiate between electrical, pneumatic and fluid power systems.
 Appreciate the future of fluid power in India.
 Classify the hydraulic pumps used in the industry.
 Differentiate between positive displacement and non-positive displacement pumps.
 Explain the working and construction of gear, vane and piston pumps.
 Define mechanical, volumetric and overall efficiency of pumps.
 Differentiate between internal and external gear pumps.
2 Explain and differentiate Hydraulics motors and actuators
 Differentiate between a hydraulic motor and a hydraulic pump.

 List various applications of hydraulic motor in fluid power.
 Discuss various classifications of hydraulic motor.
 Explain the construction and working of gear, vane and piston motors.
 Explain various types of efficiency terms used in hydraulic motors.
 Determine the torque and power delivered by hydraulic motors
 Explain the classification of hydraulic actuators.
 Explain various types of hydraulic cylinders.
554
 Describe the construction and working of double-acting cylinders.
 Derive an expression for force, velocity and power for hydraulic cylinders.
 Analyze various lever systems using hydraulic cylinders.
 Explain the importance of cylinder cushioning.
3 Describe and constructions of various directional, Pressure and Flow control
valves.
 List different types of valves used in fluid power.

 Explain various classifications of directional control valves.
 Describe the working and construction of various direction control valves.
 Identify the graphic symbols for various types of direction control valves.
 Explain the different applications of direction control valves.
 Explain the working principle of solenoid-actuated valves.
 Define valve overlap.
 Evaluate the performance of hydraulic systems using direction control valves.
 Explain various functions of pressure-control valves.
 Explain various classifications of pressure-control valves.
 Describe the working construction of various pressure-control valves.
 Differentiate between a pressure relief valve, a pressure-reducing valve, a sequence valve
and unloading valve.
 Identify the graphic symbols for various types of pressure-control valves.
 Explain different applications of pressure-control valves.
 Explain various functions of flow-control valves.
 Explain various classifications of flow-control valves.
 Describe the working and construction of various non-compensated flow control valves.
 Differentiate between compensated and non-compensated flow-control valves.
 Identify the graphic symbols for various types of flow-control valves.
 Explain different applications of flow-control valves.
4. Hydraulic circuit design and Analysis.
 Identify the graphic symbols for various types of hydraulic components.

 Explain various hydraulic circuits to control single-acting and double acting cylinders.
 Explain a regenerative circuit and determine the load-carrying capacities.
 Describe the working of a double-pump circuit along with its advantages.
 Explain the working of a sequencing circuit and a counterbalancing circuit.
 Differentiate between series and parallel synchronization circuits.
5. Understand and explain Actuators.
 Explain the meaning of Pneumatics

 Describe the various properties desired of a air medium in pneumatic system
 Explain the advantages and disadvantages of compressed air
 Identify and appreciate the application of pneumatic systems in various Industries
 List the basic components required for a pneumatic systems
 Describe the various power transmission systems
 Compare hydraulic, pneumatic and mechanical systems.
 Explain the meaning of Pneumatic Actuator
555
 Classify the various types of Pneumatic actuators
 Explain the working of various pneumatic actuators
 Study the seals used in the Pneumatic actuators
 Explain the working and application of air motors
6. Design the single Actuator Circuits.
 Differentiate between pneumatic circuit and pneumatic circuit diagram

 State basic rules used in design of pneumatic circuits
 Explain the memory, delay, OR, AND and NOT functions
 Explain the direct and indirect control of single acting cylinder
 Explain the direct and indirect control of double acting cylinder
 Differentiate supply and exhaust air throttling
 Design pressure and time dependent circuits
Course Outcome CL Linked PO

CO1 Explain And Evaluate Hydraulic andR, U, A 1,2,3,
Pneumatic Pump
CO2 Explain and differentiate Hydraulics motors R, U, A 1,2,3,10
CO3 Describe the construction of various U, A 1,2,3,

directional, Pressure and Flow control valves.
CO4 Hydraulic circuit design and Analysis. U, A 1,2,3,10
CO5 Understand and explain Actuators U, A 1,2,3,10
CO6 Design the single Actuator Circuits R, U, A 1,2,3,10
Total Sessions
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised
taxonomy)
Course Program Outcomes
556
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
CO1 3 3 3 1
CO2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 1
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.N
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.N
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Sl Unit No. Questions to be set for SEE Remarks
557
No R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
13(b)
4 9(b)
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

558
18M505E(B)
MID SEM I
MODEL PAPER
Fluid Power Engineering
Time : 1 Hour ] [ Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________
1Explain the meaning of fluid power. 04x01=04 M
2List the advantages.
3State the various types of hydraulic cylinders.
4Analyze various level systems using hydraulic cylinders.
PART-B 02X03=06M

5. (a) Classify the hydraulic pumps used in industry.
(or)
5. (b) Explain the meaning of pneumatics.
6. (a) Explain hydraulic motors.

(or)
6. (b) Explain hydraulic pumps.
PART-C
7. (a) List the basic components of the fluid power.
(or)
7. (b) Write short notes of internal gear pumps.
8. (a) State the importance of cylinder cushioning.
(or)
8. (b) Write the formula for theoretical power and flow rate of hydraulic motor.
559
18M505E(B)
MID SEM II
MODEL PAPER
Time : 1 Hour ] [ Total Marks: 20

___________________________________________________________________________
1. State different types of valves used in fluid power. 04x01=04 M
2. Define valve overlap.
3. Draw synchronization circuit.
4. Draw counter balance circuit.
PART-B 02X03=06M
5. (a) Distinguish between pressure relief valve and pressure reducing valve.
(or)
5. (b) identify the applications of flow control valves.
6. (a) Compare the cylinders connected in parallel with series.

(or)
6. (b) List the hydraulic components.
PART-C

7. (a) Explain the working principle of solenoid actuated valves..
(or)
7. (b) State the applications of directional control valves.
8. (a) State the applications of counter balance valve.

(or)
560
8. (b) Construct the Pressure compensated flow control valves.
18M505E(B)
SEE-MODEL PAPER
DME– III SEMESTER EXAMINATION

___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
08X01=08
1.List the various applications of fluid power system.
2.What is the purpose of directional control valve?
3.State the types of pneumatic timers.
4.Write the classification of hydraulic motors.
5State Boyle’s law.

6List various types of pneumatic actuators.
7State the basic rules used in design of pneumatics.
8State the function of pneumatic circuits.
PART-B
04X03=12

9. (a)State the components of fluid power system
(or)
9. (b)State the advantages of compressed air.
10. (a)State the functions of pneumatic control valves.

561
(or)
10. (b)What is time dependent controls?
11. (a)Explain air motors.
(or)
11. (b)Explain the construction of diaphragm cylinder
12. (a)Explain Exhaust air throttling.
(or)
12. (b)State AND and NOT valves.
PART-C
04X5=20
13. (a)Draw the graphic symbols for fixed and variable displacement pumps.
(or)
13. (b)State the applications of counter balance valve
14. (a)what is the purpose of a sequence valve.

(or)
14. (b)State the types of speed control of double acting cylinder.
15. (a)State the applications of pneumatic systems.

(or)
15. (b)Explain protection against overload.
16. (a)Explain indirect control of double acting cylinder. (or)
16. (b) illustrate the difference between supply and exhaust air throttling.
*****
562
CAM LAB
Course Title : CAM LAB Course Code 18M506P
Semester V Course Group :Practical

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact

Periods : :45

Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of manufacturing process and Auto CAD
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability:
CO1
Identify the parts and functions of CNC lathe
CO2 Apply incremental system and absolute system on dimensioning understand different
types of interpolation.
CO3 Understand simulation screen different operations
CO4 Prepare simple part program using G-Codes and M-Codes for various operations.
CO5
Execute a part program using CNC lathe machine simulation package.
CO6 Prepare part program as per the drawing and produce parts as per drawing
using cycles
OBJECTIVES

1. Identify the parts and functions of CNC lathe
2. Use incremental system and absolute system on dimensioning.
3. Understand the meaning and usage of G & M codes
4. Write simple part program using G-Codes and M-Codes as per the drawing .
5. Edit and execute a part program using CNC lathe machine simulation package.
563
6. Know the fixing of tools and operation of tool turret.
7. Know the tool offsetting
8. Produce part as per the drawing using CNC lathe machine.
COURSE CONTENT
1. CNC Introduction
2. Study of CNC lathe.
3. G – codes and M- codes/ Structure of program
4. Simulation software practice.
5. Simple CNC operations
6. Simple facing and turning.
7. Turning exercise – step turning using canned cycle.
8. Turning exercise – circular interpolation CW, CCW.
9. Turning Exercise - Taper turning and Peck drilling cycles.
10. Turning exercise – Thread cutting and grooving cycles.
Note: The simulation software available in the market:

FANUC, SIEMENS, HI NUMERIC, GSK etc.,
564
Key competencies to be achieved by the student
SN Exercise Key competencies expected
Hands on practice on G. Identify the various parts and switches

1 CNC machine H. Identification of CNC machine axis.
I. Operate the various parts and knobs of the machine - Switch on /
off
J. Move the tool turret in Z & X axis direction.
K. Index the tool turret
L. Spindle off/on coolant on/off
Practice turning D. Use incremental system and absolute system of co-ordinate
2 Operation on CNC system
machine E. Use appropriate tools for turning
F. Select the speeds and feeds used for turning
G. Select the depth of cut to be employed
Use G-Codes and M- A. Identify the preparatory and miscellaneous functions of CNC
3 Codes to write part B. Understand the meanings of various G-Codes and M-Codes
program by C. Understand interpolation
D. Understand the block numbers
understanding its
E. Understand various steps in the program
structure
Practice with Simulation A. Understand the concept of simulation

4 software B. Practice the setting of software in simulation mode
C. Open an existing part program
D. Practice simulation for the program
6 Simple facing and turning A. Write a part program to produce a part for Simple Facing
operations operation.
B. Write a part program to produce a part for Simple Turning
operation.
C. Write a part program to produce a part for Simple Taper turning
operation.
D. Write a part program to produce a part for Simple step turning
operation.
565
Practice step A. Understand the canned cycle
7 turning canned cycle B. Write a part program to produce the part as per the given
( Turning exercise) drawing
C. Enter the program in the software
D. Fix the job and set the tool
E. Select proper cutting speed, depth of cut and feed for the
given job
F. Simulate the program and edit if necessary
G. Execute the part program
Practice Turning exercise A. Select proper values of cutting speeds and feeds for
9 – taper turning and peck drilling
Taper turning and A. Select proper values of cutting speeds and feeds for
Thread cutting and grooving
Peck drilling
B. Write part program for Thread cutting and grooving
Thread cutting and cycles as per the given drawing
grooving B.
566
18M506P
Model Paper- CAM LAB
Mid Sem-I (CIE)
NOTE: Answer any Four questions and each question Five marks.
1.Compare manual and computer aided part programming.
2.Define interpolation and types of interpolation
3.Write short notes on (a)Macros (b)Canned Cycles (c)APT.
4.Explain about coordinate systems and reference points in CNC Machines.
5.What are the types of statements used in APT programming and explain them.
6.What are preparatory and miscellaneous functions give examples each?
567
18M506P
CAM LAB
Mid Sem-II (CIE)
NOTE: Answer any two questions and each question 10 marks.
1.Write a Program to reduce a billet of size 50X30mm by turning to a size of 40X28mm. maximum
depth of cut allowed 2mm.
2. Write a program on manual facing to reduce into 25mm dia 70 mm length rod into 25mm dia 65mm
length. maximum depth of cut allowed 1.5mm.
3.Write a program using G codes and M codes to reduce a billet of dia 60mm to dia 20mm in a step
of 20mm
4.Write a program using G codes and M codes with dimensions given below
568
18M506P
Model Paper - (SEE)
CAM LAB
PART – A Marks: 2 X
20M = 40 M
NOTE: Answer any two questions and each question 10 marks.
1. Write a Program to reduce a billet of size 50X30mm by turning to a size of 42X25mm. maximum
depth of cut allowed 2mm.
2. Write a program and execute on a CNC machine on manual facing to reduce into 25mm dia 70 mm
length
rod into 25mm dia 68mm length and write the precautions taken.
3.Write a program using G codes and M codes and execute on a CNC machine to reduce a billet of dia
60mm
to dia 20mm in a step of 20mm and write the precautions taken.
4.Write a program using G codes and M codes and execute on a CNC machine with dimensions given
below and write the precautions taken.
569
18M507P, ADVANCED MANUFACTURING & FABRICATION ENGINEERING
LAB
Course Title : ADVANCED MFE LAB Course Code 18M507P
Semester V Course Group : Practical

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods: :45
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge in basic manufacturing technology
Uni Unit name Hours/ Marks for SEE Marks %Weightage

t Periods weightage
No Handl Mani Preci
ing pulati sion
on
1. Practice on Lathe machine 09 10 15 15 40 100
2 Practice on milling 09 10 15 15 40 100
machine
3 Practice on 06 10 15 15 40 100
shaping/planing
4 Practice on slotting 03 10 15 15 40 100
machine
5. Practice on Radial drilling 06 10 15 15 40 100
machine
welding
7. Servicing and Maintenance 06 10 15 15 40 100
Total 45 10 15 15 40 100
Course outcomes
570
Course Outcome
CO1 Skill in operating a lathe machine and performing lathe operations

CO2 Skill in operating milling machine
CO3 Skill on operating slotting, shaping machine
CO4 Skill on operating drilling machine
CO5 Skill in doing welding operations
CO6 Knowing the importance of servicing and maintenance and importance of
maintenance schedules
COURSE CONTENT
I. Machine shop
1. Turning
a. Thread cutting
b. Eccentric turning.
c. Male and female fit assembly
2. Milling / Shaping / Slotting / Planning

a. Gear Cutting on Milling Machine
b. T-slot cutting on milling machine
c. Produce V-Block on shaping machine
d. Key way cutting Slotting Machines
e. Practice on Planning machines
3. Drilling
a. Drilling
b. Counter boring and counter sinking
c. Internal threading
II. Welding
a. T. Joint
b. H – Joints
c. Angular joints.
d. Fabrication of any house hold item like stool, shoe rack etc.,
III. Servicing and Maintenance

a. Servicing of Lathe tail stock
b. Servicing of Chuck
571
c. Servicing of a machine like drilling or grinding etc.
SPECIFIC LEARNING OUTCOMES

Up on the completion of the course the student shall able to Practice the operations on
the Lathe.
o Calculate the gear ratio for thread cutting.
o Cut threads on a lathe machine.
o Produce articles of industrial application such as snap gauges, plug gauges,
handle etc.
o Perform the combination of operations to produce jobs.
o Perform special turning operations to produce threaded objects, eccentric
turning, and male and female fit assembly
Understand various operations in machine shop
o Perform Cutting operation of V-block on shaping machine.
o Practice the cutting operation on slotter
o Practice the cutting operation on planer
o Practice the principle of indexing on milling machine.
o Perform gear Cutting and key way cutting operation on milling machine
Practice the joining operations in Welding.

o Perform edge preparation and Weld the pieces to prepare T, H, and angular
joints.
o Produce utility articles such as shoe rack, garden chair, wash basins, stools etc
Understand various operations of Drilling machine
o Perform various operation of Drilling machine like Drilling, Boring, counter
bore, Counter sink and Tapping.
Understand various activities in servicing and maintenance
o Use the testing and inspection methods of machine tools.
o Dismantle and assemble the tailstock and chuck of lathe machine
o Recondition the parts.
o Service and overhaul machine of general nature.
o Prepare maintenance schedules and estimates.
572
Key Competencies to be acquired by Students
S.No Exercise Key competency

Machine shop
Turning
a. Center the job with dial gauge
b. Fix the cutting tool in suitable angle
1 Thread cutting c. Turn the component with suitable speed and feed
d. Cut the threads with back gear arrangements
a. Fix the job in a chuck with correct eccentricity

2 Eccentric turning b. Fix the cutting tool in correct position
c. Cut the metal with suitable speed and feed
a. Center the job with dial gauge
b. Fix the cutting tool in suitable angle
c. Turn the component with suitable speed and feed
Male and female fit
3 d. Locate the center of hole
assembly
e. Select suitable drill bit
f. Drill the hole with suitable speed and feed
g. Enlarge the hole to suitable diameter by using boring tool
Milling/slotting/planning
V-block on shaping a. Fix the job on shaping machine table
1. machine. b. Set the tool and give the table feed
c. Set the stroke of the ram
Key way cutting by d. Fix the job on slotting machine table
2. slotting machine e. Set the tool and give the table feed
f. Set the stroke of the ram
Indexing on slotting / a. Identify of suitable indexing method
3. milling machine b. Calculate revolutions of indexing crank
c. Select index plate
d. Select of hole circle
T-slot cutting on milling a. Identify T-slot cutter
4. machine b. Exact setting of work-tool location
Spur gear cutting on a. Calculate no. of teeth on meshing gears for compound
milling machine indexing
5.
b. Identify suitable HOB
c. Select suitable holder for bevel gear blank
Drilling
1 Drilling , Boring, a. Fix the job on table with help of Vice/ T-Bolts
Counter bore, Counter b. Estimate the RPM and Feed
573
sink and Internal c. Perform various operations
Threading d. To remove the drill bit from spindle with help of drift
Welding
a. Perform edge preparation
b. Hold the electrode at suitable angle
T-Joints, H- Joints, c. Identify the suitable Method of welding technique.
1 d. Maintain proper distance between work piece and electrode
Angular Joints
tip produce arc.
e. Check the weld bead
Servicing and Maintenance
f. Select the suitable tools with specification for dismantling.

g. Dismantle the tail stock/ chuck
h. Understand the operation of each part
1 Tail stock and Chuck i. Know the cleaning and lubrication of parts
j. Reassemble the tail stock/ chuck
CO-PO MATRIX
18M507P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
1
18M507P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
2
18M507P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
3
18M507P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
4
18M507P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
5
18M507P.
3 3 3 3 1 -- -- - 1 1,2,3,4,5,10
6
574
18M507P
Model Paper
Mid Sem-I
ADVANCED MANUFACTURING & FABRICATION ENGINEERING LAB
1. Cut a V thread on the given MS bar with given pitch
2. Prepare a male female assembly as per the given figure.
3. Prepare a eccentric turning as per the given figure.
4. Prepare a T- joint as per the given figure.
5. Prepare a H- joint as per the given figure.
6. Prepare V Block on shaper
7. Prepare Spur gear on milling machine of given pitch.
8. Dismantle the tail stock and reassemble after proper servicing
9. Dismantle the chuck and reassemble after proper servicing
10. Prepare a angular joint as per the given figure
Note: Marks are to be awarded only for conduct of experiment only
575
18M507P
Model Paper
Mid Sem-II
1. Cut a V thread on the given MS bar with given pitch
4. Prepare a T- joint with proper edge preparation as per the given figure.
5. Prepare a H- joint with proper edge preparation as per the given figure.
8. Prepare a angular joint as per the given figure
Note: Marks are to be awarded only for conduct of experiment only
576
18M507P
Model Paper
Semester End Examination (SEE)
1. Cut a LH V thread on the given MS bar with given pitch
4. Prepare a pot stand as per the given figure.
5. Prepare a shoe rack as per the given figure.
10. Prepare a stool as per the given figure.
Note: marks are to be awarded for conduct of Experiment, writing of procedure and viva
voce
577
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING LAB
Course Title : Refrigeration and Air Course Code : 18M508P

Conditioning Lab
Semester :V Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits : 1.5
15:0:30
Methodology : Tutorial + Practical Total contact periods : 45
CIE : 60 marks SEE : 40 marks
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of Thermodynamics and Refrigeration & Air conditioning
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Familiarize with R&AC tools and basic operations on soft copper tube
CO2 Identify and acquire knowledge on working of different parts of Refrigeration and Air
conditioning systems.
CO3
Develop knowledge on refrigerants.
CO4 Calculate COP of R&AC system with given data and use P-H chart.
CO5 Experimentally determine COP of R&AC systems.
CO6 Acquire knowledge on working of air cooler, water cooler, domestic refrigerator, split
air conditioner and window air conditioner.
578
Unit name Hours/ Marks for SEE Marks %Weightage

Period weightage
s Hand Mani Prec
ling pulat ision
ion
1. R&AC Tools, Basic 6 10 15 15 40 100
Operations on soft Copper
tube
2. Vapour Compression cycle 6 10 15 15 40 100
test rig
3. water cooler 6 10 15 15 40 100
4 air conditioning test rig 6 10 15 15 40 100
5 domestic refrigerator 6 10 15 15 40 100
6 window air conditioner 6 10 15 15 40 100
7 split air conditioner 6 10 15 15 40 100
8 air cooler 3 10 15 15 40 100
TOTAL 45
579
COURSE CONTENT
S. No
Refrigeration and air conditioning lab practice Number of
Periods
1 Familiarisation with R&AC Tools, Basic Operations on soft Copper tube 06
2 Experimental determination of COP of Vapour Compression cycle test rig 06

3 Experimentally determine COP of water cooler 06
4 Experimentally determine COP of air conditioning test rig 06
5 Experimentally determine COP of domestic refrigerator 06

6 Study of a window air conditioner 06
7 Study of a split air conditioner 06
8 Study of air cooler 03

Total 45
S.No Exercise Key competency
1 Familiarisation with R&AC Tools a. Identify basic tools used in R&AC

Basic Operations on soft Copper b. Use the tools to perform flaring, swaging, bending
tube and brazing operations
a. Identify the components of vapour compression

cycle test rig and draw line diagram
b. Know the refrigerant used, its chemical formula and
capacity of the plant
c. Record the values of pressure and temperature
2 Experimental determination of C O P when the pressure gauges are stabilized
of Vapour Compression cycle test rig d. Record the energy meter reading
e. Read the values from Pressure Vs Enthalpy diagram
of the given refrigerant
f. Evaluate COP
580
a. Identify the components of water cooler and draw
line diagram
b. Know the refrigerant used, its chemical formula and
Study of water cooler and determine capacity of the plant
3 c. Record the mass and initial and final temperature of
COP
water
d. Record the energy meter reading
e. Evaluate COP (N/W)
a. Identify the components of given vapour

compression air-conditioning test rig.
b. Insert thermometers in suction line and discharge
line
c. Run the given V.C. A.C. system for some time
Experimentally determine COP of d. Record the pressure and temperature readings when
4
air conditioning test rig the pressure gauges are stabilized.
e. Record the energy meter reading
f. Read the enthalpy values from Pressure Vs
Enthalpy diagram of the given refrigerant
g. Evaluate COP
a. Identify the components of domestic refrigerator

and draw line diagram
Study of domestic refrigerator and b. Record the mass and initial and final temperature of
5
determine COP water
c. Record the energy meter reading
d. Evaluate COP (N/W)
a. Identify the components of window air conditioner

6 Study of a window air conditioner b. Know the refrigerant used, its chemical formula and
capacity of the window air conditioner
a. Identify the indoor unit and out door unit.

b. Identify the components of split air conditioner
7 Study of a split air conditioner
c. Know the refrigerant used, its chemical formula and
capacity of the window air conditioner
581
a. Identify the components of air cooler and draw
line diagram
8. Study of air cooler
b. Record the values of temperature of the room
before and after switching on air cooler.
CO-PO Matrix
18M508P.
- 3 3 - - - - - - - PO2, PO3
1
18M508P.
- 3 3 - - - - - - - PO2, PO3
2
18M508P.
- 3 3 - - - - - - - PO2, PO3
3
18M508P. PO2,
- 3 3 - 2 3 2 - - -
4 PO3,PO5,PO6,PO7
18M508P.
3 3 3 - - - - - - - PO1,PO2, PO3
5
18M508P.
3 3 3 - - - - - - - PO1,PO2, PO3
6
SEE Question paper has to be prepared combined by Internal and External Examiners.
582
C-18M508P
Model Paper MID SEM - I
DME V SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Answer any one question
1. List all basic tools used in R&AC and identify them and perform flaring and swaging operation
on copper tube.
2. List all basic tools used in R&AC and identify them and perform brazing operation on given
copper tube.
3. Determine COP of Vapour compression refrigeration cycle from given data numerically
4. Determine COP of Vapour compression refrigeration cycle from given data using p-h chart.
5. Identify all parts of water cooler and explain their function.
6. Determine COP of air conditioning test rig from given data numerically
7. Identify all parts of Domestic refrigerator and explain their function.
8. Identify all parts of split air conditioner and explain their function.
583
C-18M508P
Model Paper MID SEM - II
1. List all basic tools used in R&AC and identify them and perform flaring and swaging operation
on copper tube.
2. List all basic tools used in R&AC and identify them and perform brazing operation on given
copper tube.
3. Determine COP of Vapour compression refrigeration cycle from given data numerically
4. Determine COP of Vapour compression refrigeration cycle from given data using p-h chart.
5. Identify all parts of water cooler and explain their function.
6. Determine COP of air conditioning test rig from given data numerically
7. Identify all parts of Domestic refrigerator and explain their function.
8. Identify all parts of split air conditioner and explain their function.
584
C-18M508P
Model Paper (SEE)
1. List out all basic tools use in RAC. Identify the tools and perform flaring and swaging
operation on copper tube
2. List out all basic tools use in RAC. Identify the tools and perform brazing and swaging
operation on copper tube
3. Determine COP of Vapour compression cycle from given data numerically

4. Determine COP of Vapour compression cycle from given data using p-h chart.
5. Determine COP of Vapour compression cycle from experimental data
6. Determine COP of water cooler from experimental data.
7. Determine COP of domestic refrigerator from experimental data.
8. Determine COP of air conditioning test rig from experimental data.
9. Identify all major parts of window air conditioner and explain their function.
10. Identify all major parts of split air conditioner and explain their function.
11. Identify all major parts of window air conditioner and explain their function, record the
change in temperature of room for every 5 minutes.
585
PROGRAMMING IN C LAB PRACTICE
Course Title: Programming in C lab practice Course Code 18M509P

Semester V Course Group practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:00:30 Credits 1.5
Periods(L: T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact periods: 45Pds
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge of Computer Operation.
Course outcomes
Course Outcome
CO1 Write programs using input/output statements, variables and operators
CO2 Work on Constants, Variables, Data Types, Operators and Expressions in C
CO3 Construct programs on Decision making and Looping statements.
CO4 Develop programs using arrays and structures
Course Content
1. Programming Methodology and Introduction to C Language Duration: 5 Periods

Program - Define High level language and low level language-history of C language -
importance of C language – Define & Differentiate Compiler, Assembler - structure of C
language - programming style of C language - steps involved in executing the C program
2. Understand Constants, Variables and Data Types in C and Understand Operators and
Expressions in C Duration: 15 Periods
Character set - C Tokens - Keywords and Identifiers- Constants and Variables - data types and
classification - declaration of a variable - Assigning values to variables - Define an operator -
Define an expression -Classify operators - List and explain various arithmetic operators with
examples -Illustrate the concept of relational operators - List logical operators - various
assignment operators - Increment and decrement operators - Conditional operator - List
bitwise operators -List various special operators- Arithmetic expressions- precedence and
associativity of operators- Evaluation of expressions - formatted input and output.
586
3. Decision making and Looping statements Duration: 10 Periods
Simple if statement with sample program – if else statement – else if statement – switch
statement -Classification of various loop statements- while statement – do-while statement -
for loop statement - break and continue statements.
4. Arrays and Structures Duration: 15 Periods

Arrays -declaration and initialization of One Dimensional -Accessing elements in the Array -
Declaration and initialization of two Dimensional Arrays - sample programs on matrix
addition and matrix multiplication–Declaration of a Structure – Structure members – Array of
structures.
Teaching
Course Outcome CL Linked PO
Hours
Write programs using input/output statements, variables

CO1 R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
and operators
Work on Constants, Variables, Data Types,Operators and

CO2 R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
Expressions in C
Construct programs on Decision making and Looping

CO3 R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10
statements.
CO4 Develop programs using arrays and structures U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

Total Sessions 45
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Let Us C -- YeshwanthKanetkar BPB Publications

2. Programming in ANSI C -- E. Balaguruswamy Tata McGrawHill
3. Programming with C -- Gottfried Schaum’outline
4. C The complete Reference -- Schildt Tata McGraw Hill
List of Experiments
1. Exercise on structure of C program

2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
587
6. Exercise on special operators
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
9. Exercise on simple if statement
10. Exercise on ifelse statement
11. Exercise on elseif ladder statement
12. Exercise on switch statement
13. Exercise on conditional operator
14. Exercise on while statement
15. Exercise on for statement
16. Exercise on do...while statement
17. Exercise on one dimensional arrays
18. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
19. Exercise on structure
20. Exercise on array of structures
588
Department of Technical education
State Board of Technical education & Training (TS)
Project Work
Course
title: Project work Course Code: 18M510P
Course group: practical
Semester: V Credits: 1.5
Teaching scheme in periods 15:00:3
(L:T:P): 0 Total contact periods : 45
Methodology: Lecturer+ Assignment:
Course out comes:

The student should be able to
1. Apply principles of Mechanical engineering and Knowledge to solve problems of component with
mechanical bias.
2. Demonstrate the knowledge to assess safety, legal issues and consequent responsibilities
3. To function effectively as an individual and as a member in a team
4. To communicate effectively
5. To engage in lifelong learning in the context of technological changes
V SEMESTER
Sl. Max Marks
Subject Items
No
CIE
1. Mid - I: Abstract submission –
(Marks awarded by the Guide) 20
2. Mid – II: Content development/
literature survey, data 20
Project work collection/prototype etc. - (Marks
1 awarded by the Guide)
3.Internal evaluation - (Marks 20
awarded by the Guide)
SEE
4.a) Final report Submission 20
b) Seminar /Viva Voce 20
(Marks awarded by the External
Examiner, Head of Section (i.e.
Internal Examiner) and Guide).
100
Total
Note: The Project work carries 100 marks and pass marks are 50% and minimum
of 50% in SEE. Internal assessment is done by guide and external assessment is conducted
by guide, head of section and external examiner.
589
A candidate failing to secure the minimum marks has to reappear for the project.
COURSE CONTENT
 Identification and selection of a product with an aim to setup a small-scale industry.
 Conduct of detailed market survey.
 Preparation of production drawings.
 List of the raw materials, equipment and tools needed for manufacturing a specified
quantity.
 Development of a prototype model of the product in workshop (if possible) with the
available facilities in the Polytechnics.
 Exploration of the various financial arrangements to start the manufacturing of the

product under technocrat scheme in small scale industrial sector.
 Detailed survey of requirements of the department of industry, municipal, health

inspectorate of factories, electrical inspectorate, banks, other financial agencies etc.,
for starting an industry.
 Planning for type of organisation.
 Selection of site.
 Preparation of techno feasibility report consisting of production drawings, plant

layout, building requirements, equipment requirement, list of raw materials and their
availability, tools and other items, labour force requirement for production, ministerial
staff requirement, material flow sheet, cash flow sheet, financial analysis etc.
 Working models, repairs, up gradation and maintenance of equipment.
 Product selection may be done by the Polytechnic in consultation with the local
industries and other agencies.
 The student should submit techno feasibility report or model on a product selected
with an aim to set up an industry in small scale sector.

 Prepare technical project report
 Identify component with mechanical bias.

590
 Design and draw the production drawings.
 Prepare a project report with details of materials, processes etc.
 Develop a proto type/model of the product with the facilities available in polytechnic.
 Conduct survey to establish a small scale unit
 Identify and select a product with an aim to set up a small scale industry.
 Conduct a detailed market survey.
 List the raw materials, equipment and tools needed for the manufacture of a specified
quantity.
 Explore the various financial arrangements to start the manufacture of a product under
technocrat scheme in small scale industrial sector.
 Make a survey of requirements of the department of industries, municipal, health,

inspectorate of factories for starting an industry.
 Plan for a type of organisation.
 Select a site.
 Prepare a techno feasibility report consisting of drawings, plant layouts, building

requirements, machinery and equipment requirements, raw material, labour,
production and administrative staff requirements, working capital, material flow sheet,
cash flow sheet, financial analysis etc.
 Develop working models to show scientific and engineering principles studied in the
curriculum and repair, up gradation and maintenance of equipment which are exist.
CO-PO Matrix
591
1 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 3 2 2 all
2 3 3 1 3 3 1 1,2,3,5,6,9
3 3 3 1 3 1 1,2,3,8,9
4 3 3 3 2 1,2,9,10
5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10
RUBRICS 1: Mid Sem - I
GOOD AVERAGE ACCEPTABLE UNACCEPTABL

E
Identification of Good average Moderate Minimal

problem explanation of explanation of explanation of explanation of the
the purpose and the purpose and the purpose and purpose and need
need of the need of the need of the of the project
project project project
Study the Collects a great Collects some Limited Incomplete

existing systems deal of basic information information information
information and
good study of the
existing systems
Objectives and Good Incomplete Only some Objectives of the

methodology justification to justification to objectives of the proposed work are
the objectives the objectives proposed either not
identified or not
well
1. Identification of problem and explanation of the purpose and need of the project
2. Detailed study of the existing systems and feasibility of project proposal
3. Methodology and Abstract submission
RUBRICS2: Mid Sem II
592
GOOD AVERAGE ACCEPTABLE UNACCEPTABLE
Incorporation of Changes are All changes Few changes are Suggestions are not
suggestions made as per are made as per made incorporated
modification modification
Project All defined All modules are Some of the Defined objectives
demonstration objectives are achieved defined are not achieved
achieved objectives are
achieved
Demonstration Objectives Objectives Objectives No

and presentation achieved as per achieved as per achieved as per
time frame time frame time frame Objectives
achieved as per
time frame
1. Changes are made as per modifications suggested and new innovations added
2. Complete explanation of the key concepts strong description of the technical requirements
of the project
3. Objectives achieved as per time frame
593
SKILL UPGRADATION IN
V SEMESTER
Course Title :Skill Upgradation Course Code :-

Semester :V Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :2.5
0:70:35
Methodology :Practicals Total contact periods :105
1. Prepare an organisational structure of institution

2. A Case study on principles of management.
3. Make a survey on marketing a product.
4. Prepare a list of ISO 9000 series as well as latest quality standards
5. Prepare sign boards representing safety measures.
6. Role play as an entrepreneur
7. A Case study on work study measurement.
8. Prepare job specifications and job description for a specific job.
9. Compare various job evaluation methods for a real example.
10. Calculate earnings of workers using various wage differentials
11. Prepare a cost statement using Excel sheet for real time problem.
12. Prepare an Excel sheet for fabrication data tables.
13. Study movement of cam and draw cam profile.
14. Design a open belt drive for a simple application.
15. List out common bearings and the material used ,
16. Visit nearest outlet and list out Domestic Refrigerators manufacturers and know the capacity
of the refrigerator and the refrigerant used in it.
17. Know the colour coding of refrigerant cylinders.
18. Make a report of Montreal and Kyoto protocols.
19. Assemble and dissemble the air cooler and know all the parts.
20. Clean an air cooler, replace pads of air cooler.
21. Visit a RAC workshop and watch the method of vaccumisation and charging of refrigerant.
22. Visit a duct manufacturing unit and study how fabrication is done and submit a report.
23. Visit a site where ducting is being carried out.
24. Collect data sheet to find heating and cooling loads for an air conditioning system and study
its contents.
25. Visit a site where split air conditioner is being installed.
26. Visit a central air conditioning plant.
594
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Course Title : Industrial Training Course Code : :18M60IP

Semester : VI Course Group :P
Teaching Scheme/Week (L: T :P) : 0:0:48 Credits : 25
Methodology : Training Total Contact Period : 6 months
CIE : 300 : 100
: 600 SEE
Industrial Evaluation
Rationale: Industrial training is introduced in the VI semester for the students as a part of the
program to make the passed out students shall be industry ready thus saving the time for training and
apprenticeship needs in the industry and also help in capacity building of the Telangana state and the
country.
Course Objective:
To enable the students to
1. Acquaint with Industry environment and culture.

2. Acquires latest technology available in the Industry
3. Develop professional skills
4. Enhance the usage skills of modern tools
5. Develop Communication and leadership skills.
6. Encourage entrepreneurship
Course Outcomes:
CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping
CO Appreciate the organizational setup and hierarchy 2,8
1
CO Practice the use of Resource optimization techniques 1,2,3,4,10
2
CO Develop core engineering skills 2,4,5
3
CO Develop an understanding of solutions for Environmental issues 6
4 in the industry
CO Get acquainted to industry culture and professionalism 5,8,10
5
CO Trained in entrepreneur skills 5,7
6
CO Acquire the knowledge in latest Technology 4,10
7
CO Team leadership 8
8
Evaluation:
595
1. The student should submit a report describing the profile of the company, Nature of the job
assigned to him /her and other details in a standard format duly attested and approved by
the head of the industry after two weeks and before Four weeks from the date of joining
through e mail. Hard copy of the report may be submitted in person or by post.
2. A candidate shall be assessed twice in the spell of industrial training i.e. at the end of Second
month and fourth month in the Industry and Final Exam will be conducted at Institution.
3. The assessment shall be carried out by a committee comprising of a representative of the
Industry where the candidate is undergoing training and a faculty member from the
respective program from the Polytechnic. (01) faculty member is allotted for (10) students
and that faculty has to visit the industry minimum (03) times i.e. first visit at the time of
allotment, second visit at the time of first assessment and third visit for second assessment
For Institution level evaluation of industrial training, a committee consisting
following faculty members (1) Head of Dept. concerned. (2) Faculty member who assessed
the student in the industry (3) External examiner from the Industry.
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in the
following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90%
attendance of Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
Assessment parameters at Industry

Assessment I Assessment
Sl No (First II (Second
Learning Parameter
Quarter) Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20
2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
3 Engineering skills 50 50
4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50
5 Comprehension and observation 10 10
6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
8 Communication skills 20 20
596
9 Supervisory skills 50 50
10 General conduct during the period 40 40
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme
Sl Criteria Marks Time

No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300

Total
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e.
Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be averaged
Learning Outcomes
1.0 Observe Safety Precautions and rules of the industry
1.1. Know the importance of safety in industries

597
1.2. Understand the safety about personnel protection, equipment protection
1.3. Know the usage of various safety devices
1.4. Precautionary measures to be taken.
2.0 Appreciate organizational set up from top executive to workmen level
2.1. Acquaint with the function of each department/section

2.2. Comprehend the inter relationship among various department/sections.
3.0. Observe the end product and variousComponents/ materials used in the production and
Identify their source.
3.1. Identify the various stages involved in the assembly and production of end product.
3.2. List the final products, their composition and its commercial importance, uses and Applications.
4.0. Develop an Understanding the various stages involved in processing, sequential

arrangement of different equipment.
4.1. Represent the whole process and each sub processes with a flow diagram, detail
Flow diagram
4.2. Observe and appreciate the resource optimization of space (the arrangement of various
equipment and machinery in systematic manner in a less possible area of site), Electricity,
Men machinery, money and Time.
5.0 Explain various analytical methods used in the quality control department
5.1. Practice the Testing methods for quality assurance and bench mark standards
5.2. Practice use of various tools, instruments used for quality checking.
6.0. Observe trouble shooting /servicing /maintenance techniques used during the production
6.1. Observe preventive precautions and maintenance of each equipment in the unit
6.2. Follow Staring andshutting down procedures for the equipment in the unit.
7.0 Identify the various pollutants emitted from the plant/Industry.

7.1 State effects of pollutants.
7.2 Explain handling methods of E waste and pollutants disposal
598
sustainabilityEnvironment &
workIndividual and Team

practiceExperiments and
Communication
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Linked PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
CO1 3 1 3 3 3 1 1 2 1 3 2,8
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 2 3 1,2,3,4,10
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 3 2,4,5
CO4 - - - - - 3 2 - - - 6
CO5 - - - 2 3 - 2 3 3 - 5,8,10
CO6 2 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 5,7
CO7 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 3 4,10
CO8 - - 2 - 3 - 2 3 3 - 8
599

Diploma in Mechanical Engineering C18 Curriculum: Sankethika Vidya Bhavan, Masab Tank, Telangana, Hyderabad

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Diploma in Mechanical Engineering C18 Curriculum: Sankethika Vidya Bhavan, Masab Tank, Telangana, Hyderabad

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Diploma in Mechanical Engineering C18 Curriculum: Sankethika Vidya Bhavan, Masab Tank, Telangana, Hyderabad

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:

1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

admission to the 31st March of the succeeding year.

c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.

a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:

THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in

2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

 The Regular Examinations and Backlog Examinations shall be conducted separately.

1. Marks : In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is

a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Industrial Training (VI Semester)

Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks

Semester End Examination : 100 marks

Assessment parameters at Industry

2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30

Application of knowledge & Problem solving 50

5 Comprehension and observation 10 10

7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10

10 General conduct during the period 40 40

Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of

to time before commencement of 3rd semester.

(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6 th (Industrial Training) semester

i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)

4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:

1 18M-101F Basic English 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

2 18M-102F Basic Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Activities: Student Performance is to be assessed through Rubrics

Course Title : Basic English Course Code : 18M-101F

Semester : I Course Group : Foundation

Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3

Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods

UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

7. How to use a Dictionary

UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods

9. The Mighty Mountain and Little Lads of Telangana

UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 12 Periods

16. Paragraph Writing - I

Suggested Learning Outcomes:

On completion of the course the students will be able to

Test Units Marks Pattern

Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions